Grand Caravan
OWNER’S MANUAL
Fourth Edition
Printed in the U.S.A.
18RT-126-AD
©2017 FCA US LLC. All Rights Reserved.
Dodge is a registered trademark of FCA US LLC.
2018
Grand Caravan
2018
DID_3635964_18d_Dodge_Grand_Caravan_EN_070318.indd 1 7/3/2018 10:02:07 AM
VEHICLES SOLD IN CANADA
With respect to any Vehicles Sold in Canada, the name
FCA US LLC shall be deemed to be deleted and the name
FCA Canada Inc. used in substitution therefore.
DRIVING AND ALCOHOL
Drunken driving is one of the most frequent causes of
accidents.
Your driving ability can be seriously impaired with blood
alcohol levels far below the legal minimum. If you are
drinking, don’t drive. Ride with a designated non-
drinking driver, call a cab, a friend, or use public trans-
portation.
WARNING!
Driving after drinking can lead to an accident.
Your perceptions are less sharp, your reflexes are
slower, and your judgment is impaired when you
have been drinking. Never drink and then drive.
This manual illustrates and describes the operation of
features and equipment that are either standard or op-
tional on this vehicle. This manual may also include a
description of features and equipment that are no longer
available or were not ordered on this vehicle. Please
disregard any features and equipment described in this
manual that are not on this vehicle.
FCA US LLC reserves the right to make changes in design
and specifications, and/or make additions to or improve-
ments to its products without imposing any obligation
upon itself to install them on products previously manu-
factured.
Copyright © 2018 FCA US LLC
INSTALLATION OF RADIO TRANSMITTING
EQUIPMENT
Special design considerations are incorporated into this
vehicle’s electronic system to provide immunity to radio
frequency signals. Mobile two-way radios and telephone
equipment must be installed properly by trained person-
nel. The following must be observed during installation.
The positive power connection should be made directly
to the battery and fused as close to the battery as possible.
The negative power connection should be made to body
sheet metal adjacent to the negative battery connection.
This connection should not be fused.
Antennas for two-way radios should be mounted on the
roof or the rear area of the vehicle. Care should be used
in mounting antennas with magnet bases. Magnets may
affect the accuracy or operation of the compass on
vehicles so equipped.
The antenna cable should be as short as practical and
routed away from the vehicle wiring when possible. Use
only fully shielded coaxial cable.
Carefully match the antenna and cable to the radio to
ensure a low Standing Wave Ratio (SWR).
Mobile radio equipment with output power greater than
normal may require special precautions.
All installations should be checked for possible interfer-
ence between the communications equipment and the
vehicle’s electronic systems.
WARNING:
Operating, servicing and maintaining a
passenger vehicle or off-road highway
motor vehicle can expose you to chemicals
including engine exhaust, carbon monoxide,
phthalates, and lead, which are known to
the State of California to cause cancer and
birth defects or other reproductive harm.
To minimize exposure, avoid breathing
exhaust, do not idle the engine except as
necessary, service your vehicle in a
well-ventilated area and wear gloves or
wash your hands frequently when servicing
your vehicle. For more information go to
www.P65Warnings.ca.gov/passenger-vehicle.
DID_3635964_18d_Dodge_Grand_Caravan_EN_070318.indd 2 7/3/2018 10:02:07 AM
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTION PAGE
1
INTRODUCTION ...................................................................3
2
GRAPHICAL TABLE OF CONTENTS ......................................................7
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE ...................................................13
4
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL .........................................127
5
SAFETY ........................................................................155
6
STARTINGANDOPERATING.........................................................235
7
INCASEOFEMERGENCY ...........................................................281
8
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE .....................................................327
9
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS ........................................................379
10
MULTIMEDIA ....................................................................391
11
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE ............................................................475
12
INDEX..........................................................................481
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
INTRODUCTION
Dear Customer,
Congratulations on selecting your new vehicle. Be assured
that it represents precision workmanship, distinctive styl-
ing, and high quality. This Owner’s Manual has been
prepared with the assistance of service and engineering
specialists to acquaint you with the operation and mainte-
nance of your vehicle. It is supplemented by Warranty
Information, and customer oriented documents. In the
attached Warranty Booklet, you will find a description of
the services that FCA offers to its customers, the Warranty
Certificate and the details of the terms and conditions for
maintaining its validity. Please take the time to read all of
these publications carefully before driving your vehicle for
the first time. Following the instructions, recommenda-
tions, tips, and important warnings in this manual will
help assure safe and enjoyable operation of your vehicle.
Be sure you are familiar with all vehicle controls, particu-
larly those used for braking, steering, transmission, and
transfer case shifting (if equipped). Learn how your vehicle
handles on different road surfaces. Your driving skills will
improve with experience.
This Owner’s Manual describes all versions of this vehicle.
Options and equipment dedicated to specific markets or
versions are not expressly indicated in the text. Therefore,
you should only consider the information which is related
to the trim level, engine, and version that you have
purchased. Any content introduced throughout the Own-
er’s Information, that may or may not be applicable to your
vehicle, will be identified with the wording “If Equipped”.
All data contained in this publication are intended to help
you use your vehicle in the best possible way. FCA aims at
a constant improvement of the vehicles produced. For this
reason, it reserves the right to make changes to the model
described for technical and/or commercial reasons. For
further information, contact an authorized dealer.
NOTE: After reviewing the Owner’s Information, it should
be stored in the vehicle for convenient referencing, and
remain with the vehicle when sold.
When it comes to service, remember that an authorized
dealer knows your vehicle best, has factory-trained techni-
cians and genuine MOPAR® parts, and cares about your
satisfaction.
4 INTRODUCTION
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL
Essential Information
Consult the Table of Contents to determine which section
contains the information you desire.
Since the specification of your vehicle depends on the items
of equipment ordered, certain descriptions and illustra-
tions may differ from your vehicle’s equipment.
The detailed index at the back of this Owner’s Manual
contains a complete listing of all subjects.
Symbols
Some vehicle components have colored labels whose sym-
bols indicate precautions to be observed when using this
component. Refer to “Warning Lights and Messages” in
“Getting To Know Your Instrument Panel” for further
information on the symbols used in your vehicle.
WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS
This Owner’s Manual contains WARNINGS against oper-
ating procedures that could result in a collision, bodily
injury and/or death. It also contains CAUTIONS against
procedures that could result in damage to your vehicle. If
you do not read this entire Owner’s Manual, you may miss
important information. Observe all Warnings and Cau-
tions.
VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS
WARNING!
Any modifications or alterations to this vehicle could
seriously affect its roadworthiness and safety and may
lead to a collision resulting in serious injury or death.
1
INTRODUCTION 5
FRONT VIEW
Front View
1 — Doors 3 — Wheels/Tires 5 — Windshield
2 — Exterior Mirrors 4 — Headlights 6 — Hood/Engine Compartment
8 GRAPHICAL TABLE OF CONTENTS
REAR VIEW
Rear View
1 — Taillights 2 — Rear Windshield Wiper 3 — Liftgate
2
GRAPHICAL TABLE OF CONTENTS 9
INSTRUMENT PANEL
Instrument Panel
1 — Headlight Switch 7 — Gear Selector
2 — Instrument Cluster Display Controls 8 — Uconnect System
3 — Multifunction Lever (Behind Steering Wheel) 9 — Climate Controls
4 — Instrument Cluster 10 — Switch Panel
5 — Speed Controls 11 — Upper Glove Compartment
6 — Ignition 12 — Lower Glove Compartment
10 GRAPHICAL TABLE OF CONTENTS
INTERIOR
Interior Features
1 — Door Handles 4 — Parking Brake
2 — Door Locks 5 — Seats
3 — Window Switches 6 — Power Outlets
2
GRAPHICAL TABLE OF CONTENTS 11
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
CONTENTS
䡵 KEYS .................................17
▫ Key Fobs .............................17
䡵 IGNITION SWITCH .......................20
▫ Wireless Ignition Node (WIN) — If Equipped....20
䡵 REMOTE START — IF EQUIPPED .............21
▫ How To Use Remote Start..................21
▫ Remote Start Abort Messages ...............22
▫ To Enter Remote Start Mode ................22
▫ To Exit Remote Start Mode Without Driving The
Vehicle ...............................22
▫ To Exit Remote Start Mode And Drive The
Vehicle ...............................23
▫ General Information .....................23
䡵 SENTRY KEY ...........................23
▫ Customer Key Programming ...............24
▫ Replacement Keys .......................24
▫ General Information .....................24
䡵 VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM — IF EQUIPPED . . .25
▫ Rearming Of The System ..................25
▫ To Arm The System .....................25
▫ To Disarm The System ...................25
▫ Tamper Alert ...........................26
䡵 DOORS ...............................26
▫ Manual Door Locks ......................26
▫ Power Door Locks — If Equipped ...........28
▫ Power Sliding Side Door — If Equipped .......29
▫ Child Locks............................31
䡵 SEATS ................................32
▫ Manual Adjustment (Front Seats) — If Equipped .32
3
▫ Power Seats — If Equipped ................34
▫ Heated Seats — If Equipped ...............36
▫ Stow ’n Go Seating ......................39
▫ Second Row Bench Seat — If Equipped ........44
▫ Manually Folding Third Row Seats — If
Equipped .............................46
▫ Plastic Grocery Bag Retainer Hooks...........49
䡵 HEAD RESTRAINTS ......................49
▫ Supplemental Active Head Restraints — Front
Seats.................................49
▫ Head Restraints — Second Row Quad Seats .....52
▫ Head Restraints — Second Row Bench.........52
▫ Head Restraints — Third Row ..............53
䡵 STEERING WHEEL .......................54
▫ Tilt/Telescoping Steering Column ............54
▫ Heated Steering Wheel — If Equipped ........55
䡵 MIRRORS ..............................56
▫ Automatic Dimming Mirror — If Equipped .....56
▫ Automatic Dimming Mirror With Rear View
Camera Display — If Equipped .............56
▫ Outside Mirrors ........................57
▫ Interior Observation Mirror ................57
▫ Power Mirrors — If Equipped ..............58
▫ Outside Mirrors Folding Feature ............59
▫ Heated Mirrors — If Equipped .............59
▫ Illuminated Vanity Mirrors — If Equipped .....59
䡵 EXTERIOR LIGHTS .......................60
▫ Headlight Switch ........................60
▫ Multifunction Lever .....................60
▫ Daytime Running Lights (DRL) — If Equipped . .61
▫ High/Low Beam Switch ..................61
▫ Flash-To-Pass ..........................61
▫ Automatic Headlights ....................61
▫ Headlights On With Wipers — If Equipped .....61
▫ Headlight Delay — If Equipped .............62
14 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
▫ Lights-On Reminder .....................62
▫ Front Fog Lights — If Equipped .............62
▫ Turn Signals ...........................62
▫ Lane Change Assist ......................63
▫ Battery Protection .......................63
䡵 INTERIOR LIGHTS .......................63
▫ Courtesy/Interior Lighting ................63
䡵 WINDSHIELD WIPER AND WASHERS ........66
▫ Windshield Wiper Operation................67
▫ Rear Wiper And Washer ...................68
䡵 CLIMATE CONTROLS .....................68
▫ Manual Climate Control Overview ...........68
▫ Automatic Climate Control Overview .........75
▫ Climate Control Functions .................84
▫ Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) — If
Equipped .............................84
▫ Operating Tips .........................85
䡵 WINDOWS .............................87
▫ Power Vent Windows — If Equipped .........87
▫ Power Windows ........................88
䡵 HOOD ................................91
▫ Opening The Hood ......................91
▫ Closing The Hood .......................92
䡵 LIFTGATE .............................92
▫ Opening .............................92
▫ Closing ..............................93
▫ Power Liftgate — If Equipped...............94
▫ Cargo Area Features .....................95
䡵 LOAD LEVELING SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED ....96
䡵 GARAGE DOOR OPENER — IF EQUIPPED .....96
▫ Before You Begin Programming HomeLink .....97
▫ Programming A Rolling Code ...............98
▫ Programming A Non-Rolling Code ..........100
▫ Canadian/Gate Operator Programming .......101
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 15
▫ Using HomeLink .......................101
▫ Security..............................102
▫ Troubleshooting Tips ....................102
▫ General Information .....................103
䡵 INTERNAL EQUIPMENT ..................103
▫ Storage ..............................103
▫ Cupholders ...........................112
▫ Sun Screens — If Equipped ................114
▫ Electrical Power Outlets — If Equipped .......114
▫ Power Inverter — If Equipped .............118
▫ Smoker’s Package Kit — If Equipped ........119
▫ Sunglass Storage Bin — If Equipped .........119
䡵 ROOF LUGGAGE RACK — IF EQUIPPED ......121
▫ Deploying The Crossbars .................122
▫ Stowing The Crossbars ...................125
16 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
KEYS
Key Fobs
Your vehicle uses a keyless ignition system. This system
consists of a Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) key fob and a
Wireless Ignition Node (WIN) with integral ignition. You
can insert the key fob into the ignition switch with either
side up. It also contains an emergency key, which stores in
the rear of the key fob.
NOTE: The key fob may not be found if it is located next to
a mobile phone, laptop or other electronic device; these
devices may block the key fob’s wireless signal.
The emergency key allows for entry into the vehicle should
the battery in the vehicle or the key fob go dead. You can
keep the emergency key with you when valet parking.
To remove the emergency key, slide the mechanical latch at
the top of the key fob sideways with your thumb and then
pull the key out with your other hand.
NOTE: When using the emergency key to gain access to
your vehicle, be aware that the security alarm may be
triggered. Insert the key into the ignition and place the
ignition in the ON/RUN mode to disarm the security
system.
Key Fob
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 17
To Unlock The Doors And Liftgate
Push and release the unlock button on the key fob once to
unlock the doors. Push and release the unlock button a
second time within 5 seconds to unlock the liftgate. The
turn signal lights will flash to acknowledge the unlock
signal.
To Lock The Doors And Liftgate
Push and release the lock button on the key fob once to lock
the doors. The turn signal lights will flash to acknowledge
the lock signal.
Replacing The Battery In The Key Fob With Remote
Control
The replacement battery is one CR2032 battery.
NOTE:
• Perchlorate Material — special handling may apply. See
www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate
• Do not replace coin battery unless the cluster display
indicates a message “Key Fob Low Battery”
• Do not touch the battery terminals that are on the back
housing or the printed circuit board.
1. Remove the emergency key by sliding the mechanical
latch on the back of the key fob sideways with your
thumb and then pull the key out with your other hand.
Emergency Key Removal
18 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
2. Gently pry the two halves of the key fob apart. Make
sure not to damage the seal during removal.
3. Remove the battery by turning the back cover over
(battery facing downward) and tapping it lightly on a
solid surface such as a table or similar, then replace the
battery. When replacing the battery, match the + sign on
the battery to the + sign on the inside of the battery clip,
located on the back cover. Avoid touching the new
battery with your fingers. Skin oils may cause battery
deterioration. If you touch a battery, clean it with
rubbing alcohol.
4. To assemble the key fob case, line up the two case
halves, and snap them together.
Emergency WIN Key Removal Separating WIN Key Fob Case
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 19
Programming Additional Key Fobs
Programming the key fob may be performed by an autho-
rized dealer.
NOTE: Once a key fob is programmed to a vehicle, it
cannot be repurposed and reprogrammed to another ve-
hicle.
General Information
The following regulatory statement applies to all radio
frequency (RF) devices equipped in this vehicle:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and
with Industry Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s).
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference received, in-
cluding interference that may cause undesired opera-
tion.
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved
by the party responsible for compliance could void the
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
IGNITION SWITCH
Wireless Ignition Node (WIN) — If Equipped
The Wireless Ignition Node (WIN) operates similar to an
ignition switch. It has four operating positions, three with
detents and one that is spring-loaded. The detent positions
are OFF, ACC, and ON/RUN. The START position is a
spring-loaded momentary contact position. When released
from the START position, the switch automatically returns
to the ON/RUN position.
20 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
REMOTE START — IF EQUIPPED
How To Use Remote Start
All of the following conditions must be met before the
engine will remote start:
• Gear selector in PARK
• Doors closed
• Hood closed
• Liftgate closed
• HAZARD switch off
• BRAKE switch inactive (brake pedal not pushed)
• Battery at an acceptable charge level
• System not disabled from previous remote start event
• Vehicle security alarm not active
• Ignition in OFF position
WARNING!
• Do not start or run an engine in a closed garage or
confined area. Exhaust gas contains Carbon Monox-
ide (CO) which is odorless and colorless. Carbon
Monoxide is poisonous and can cause serious injury
or death when inhaled.
• Keep key fobs away from children. Operation of the
Remote Start System, windows, door locks or other
controls could cause serious injury or death.
Wireless Ignition Switch
1 — OFF
2 — ACC (Accessory)
3 — ON/RUN
4 — START
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 21
Remote Start Abort Messages
The following messages will display in the instrument
cluster display if the vehicle fails to remote start or exits
remote start prematurely:
• Remote Start Aborted — Door Ajar
• Remote Start Aborted — Hood Ajar
• Remote Start Aborted — Fuel Low
• Remote Start Aborted — L/Gate Ajar
• Remote Start Disabled — Start Vehicle To Reset
The instrument cluster display message stays active until
the ignition is turned to the ON/RUN position.
To Enter Remote Start Mode
Push and release the Remote Start button on the key fob
twice within five seconds. The vehicle doors will lock, the
turn signals will flash twice, and the horn will chirp twice.
Then the engine will start, and the vehicle will remain in
the Remote Start mode for a 15-minute cycle.
NOTE:
• If an engine fault is present or fuel level is low, the
vehicle will start and then shut down in 10 seconds.
• The park lamps will turn on and remain on during
Remote Start mode.
• For security, power window operation is disabled when
the vehicle is in the Remote Start mode.
• The engine can be started two consecutive times (two
15-minute cycles) with the key fob. However, the igni-
tion must be placed in the ON/RUN position before you
can repeat the start sequence for a third cycle.
To Exit Remote Start Mode Without Driving The
Vehicle
Push and release the Remote Start button one time or allow
the remote start cycle to complete the entire 15-minute
cycle.
NOTE: To avoid unintentional shutdowns, the system will
disable the one time push of the Remote Start button for
two seconds after receiving a valid Remote Start request.
22 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
To Exit Remote Start Mode And Drive The Vehicle
Before the end of the 15-minute cycle, push and release the
unlock button on the key fob to unlock the doors and
disarm the vehicle security alarm (if equipped). Then,
insert the key into the ignition and place the ignition in the
ON/RUN position.
NOTE:
• The ignition must be placed in the ON/RUN position in
order to drive the vehicle.
• The message “Remote Start Active — Key To Run” will
display in the instrument cluster display until you insert
and turn the key to ON/RUN position.
General Information
The following regulatory statement applies to all radio
frequency (RF) devices equipped in this vehicle:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and
with Industry Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s).
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference received, in-
cluding interference that may cause undesired opera-
tion.
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved
by the party responsible for compliance could void the
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
SENTRY KEY
The Sentry Key Immobilizer system prevents unauthorized
vehicle operation by disabling the engine. The system does
not need to be armed or activated. Operation is automatic,
regardless of whether the vehicle is locked or unlocked.
The system uses a key fob, keyless push button ignition and a
RF receiver to prevent unauthorized vehicle operation. There-
fore, only key fobs that are programmed to the vehicle can be
used to start and operate the vehicle. The system cannot
reprogram a key fob obtained from another vehicle.
After turning the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position,
the vehicle security light will turn on for three seconds for
a bulb check. If the light remains on after the bulb check, it
indicates that there is a problem with the electronics. In
addition, if the light begins to flash after the bulb check, it
indicates that someone attempted to start the engine with
an invalid key fob. In the event that a valid key fob is used
to start the engine but there is an issue with the vehicle
electronics, the engine will start and shut off after two
seconds.
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 23
If the vehicle security light turns on during normal vehicle
operation (vehicle running for longer than ten seconds), it
indicates that there is a fault in the electronics. Should this
occur, have the vehicle serviced as soon as possible by an
authorized dealer.
CAUTION!
The Sentry Key Immobilizer system is not compatible
with some aftermarket remote starting systems. Use of
these systems may result in vehicle starting problems
and loss of security protection.
All of the key fobs provided with your new vehicle have
been programmed to the vehicle electronics.
Customer Key Programming
Programming key fobs may be performed at your autho-
rized dealer.
Replacement Keys
NOTE: Only key fobs that are programmed to the vehicle
electronics can be used to start and operate the vehicle.
Once a key fob is programmed to a vehicle, it cannot be
programmed to any other vehicle.
CAUTION!
Always remove the key fobs from the vehicle and lock
all doors when leaving the vehicle unattended.
NOTE: Duplication of key fobs may be performed at an
authorized dealer. This procedure consists of programming
a blank key fob to the vehicle electronics. A blank key fob
is one that has never been programmed.
When having the Sentry Key Immobilizer System serviced,
bring all vehicle keys with you to an authorized dealer.
General Information
The following regulatory statement applies to all radio
frequency (RF) devices equipped in this vehicle:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and
with Industry Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s).
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference received, in-
cluding interference that may cause undesired opera-
tion.
24 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved
by the party responsible for compliance could void the
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM — IF EQUIPPED
The vehicle security alarm monitors the vehicle doors for
unauthorized entry and the ignition switch for unauthor-
ized operation. When the alarm is activated, the interior
switches for door locks, power sliding doors and power
liftgate are disabled. The vehicle security alarm provides
both audible and visible signals. If something triggers the
alarm, the vehicle security alarm will provide the following
audible and visible signals: the horn will pulse, the park
lamps and/or turn signals will flash, and the vehicle
security light in the instrument cluster will flash.
Rearming Of The System
The vehicle security alarm will rearm itself after the 15
additional minutes of the park lamps and vehicle security
light flashing, if the system has not been disabled. If the
condition which initiated the alarm is still present, the
system will ignore that condition and monitor the remain-
ing doors and ignition.
To Arm The System
Follow these steps to arm the vehicle security alarm:
1. Make sure the vehicle’s ignition is cycled to the “OFF”
position (refer to ⬙Starting The Engine⬙ in ⬙Starting And
Operating⬙ for further information).
2. Perform one of the following methods to lock the
vehicle:
• Push lock on the interior power door lock switch with
the driver and/or passenger door open.
• Push the lock button on the key fob.
3. If any doors are open, close them.
To Disarm The System
The vehicle security alarm can be disarmed using any of
the following methods:
• Push the unlock button on the key fob.
• Cycle the vehicle ignition system out of the OFF posi-
tion. Insert a valid key into the ignition switch and turn
the key to the ON position.
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 25
NOTE:
• The driver’s door key cylinder and the liftgate button on
the key fob cannot arm or disarm the vehicle security
alarm.
• The vehicle security alarm remains armed during power
liftgate entry. Pushing the liftgate button will not disarm
the vehicle security alarm. If someone enters the vehicle
through the liftgate and opens any door, the alarm will
sound.
• When the vehicle security alarm is armed, the interior
power door lock switches will not unlock the doors.
The vehicle security alarm is designed to protect your
vehicle. However, you can create conditions where the
system will give you a false alarm. If one of the previously
described arming sequences has occurred, the vehicle
security alarm will arm regardless of whether you are in
the vehicle or not. If you remain in the vehicle and open a
door, the alarm will sound. If this occurs, disarm the
vehicle security alarm.
If the vehicle security alarm is armed and the battery
becomes disconnected, the vehicle security alarm will
remain armed when the battery is reconnected; the exterior
lights will flash, and the horn will sound. If this occurs,
disarm the vehicle security alarm.
Tamper Alert
If something has triggered the vehicle security alarm in
your absence, the horn will sound three times and the
exterior lights will blink three times when you disarm the
vehicle security alarm. Check the vehicle for tampering.
DOORS
Manual Door Locks
Lock the front doors by pushing down on the lock knobs
on each door trim panel.
If the lock knob is down when you shut either front door,
the door will lock. Make sure the keys are not inside the
vehicle before closing the door.
26 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Manual Door Lock
If the lock knob is rearward when you shut either side
sliding door, the door will lock. Make sure the keys are not
inside the vehicle before closing the door.
WARNING!
• Do not leave children or animals inside parked
vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build-up may
cause serious injury or death.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• For personal security and safety in the event of an
collision, lock the vehicle doors as you drive as well
as when you park and leave the vehicle.
• Before exiting a vehicle, always shift the automatic
transmission into PARK or the manual transmission
into FIRST gear or REVERSE, apply the parking
brake, turn the vehicle OFF, remove the key fobs
from vehicle, and lock all doors. and lock your
vehicle.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Leaving children in a
vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of
reasons. A child or others could be seriously or
fatally injured. Children should be warned not to
touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the gear
selector.
• Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is
dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or others
could be seriously or fatally injured. Children
should be warned not to touch the parking brake,
brake pedal or the gear selector.
(Continued)
Door Lock Knob
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 27
WARNING! (Continued)
• Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle, or in
a location accessible to children. A child could oper-
ate power windows, other controls, or move the
vehicle.
Power Door Locks — If Equipped
Power door lock switches are located on each front door
trim panel. Use these switches to lock or unlock the doors.
If you push the power door lock switch while the key fob
is in the ignition, and any front door is open, the power
locks will not operate. This prevents you from accidentally
locking your keys in the vehicle. Removing the key fob or
closing the door will allow the locks to operate. A chime
will sound if the key fob is in the ignition switch and a door
is open, as a reminder to remove the key fob.
NOTE: If you push the power door lock switch while the
sliding door is open, the sliding door will lock.
Automatic Door Locks — If Equipped
The auto door lock feature default condition is enabled.
When enabled, the door locks will lock automatically when
the vehicle’s speed exceeds 15 mph (24 km/h). The auto
door lock feature can be enabled or disabled by your
authorized dealer per written request of the customer.
Please see your authorized dealer for service.
Unlock Doors Automatically On Exit — If Equipped
The Unlock Doors Automatically On Exit feature unlocks
all of the vehicle doors when any door is opened. This will
occur only after the gear selector has been placed into the
PARK position, after the vehicle has been driven (the gear
selector has been placed out of the PARK position and all
doors closed).
Driver Power Door Lock Switches
28 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
The Unlock Doors Automatically On Exit feature will not
operate if there is any manual operation of the power door
locks (lock or unlock).
On vehicles equipped with the optional instrument cluster
display, refer to “Instrument Cluster Display” in “Getting
To Know Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
NOTE: Use the Automatic Door Locks at 15 mph
(24 km/h) and Unlock Doors Automatically On Exit fea-
tures in accordance with local laws.
Power Sliding Side Door — If Equipped
Push the button on the key fob twice within five
seconds to open, close, or reverse a power sliding
door.
The power sliding door may be power opened or closed in
several ways:
• Key fob
• Inside or outside handles
• Buttons located:
– In the overhead console
– Just inside the sliding door
– On the outside handle
Push the button on the key fob twice within five seconds to
open a power sliding door. When the door is fully open,
pushing the button twice within five seconds a second time
will close the door.
There are power sliding side door switches located on the
B-pillar trim panel, just in front of the power sliding door
for the rear seat passengers and in the overhead console for
the driver and passengers. Pushing the switch once will
open the power sliding door. If the switch is pushed while
the door is under a power cycle, the door will reverse
direction.
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 29
NOTE: The power sliding side door must be unlocked
before the power sliding door switches will operate.
If the inside or outside door handles are used while the
power sliding side door is activated, the power sliding
door feature will be canceled and will go into manual
mode.
To avoid unintentional operation of the power sliding
doors from the rear seats, push the power sliding door
master lock button, located in the overhead console, to
disable the switches and handles for the rear seat passen-
gers.
NOTE:
• The power sliding side door switches will not open the
power sliding door if the gear selector is in gear or the
vehicle speed is above 0 mph (0 km/h). To close the
power sliding door with the gear selector in gear and
vehicle speed at 0 mph (0 km/h), the brake must be
pushed.
• If anything obstructs the power sliding side door while
it is closing or opening, the door will automatically
reverse to the closed or open position, provided it meets
sufficient resistance.
• If the power sliding side door is not in the full open or
close position, it will fully open when a power sliding
door switch is pushed. To close the door, wait until it is
fully open and then push the switch again.
• If the power sliding door encounters multiple obstruc-
tions within the same cycle, the system will automati-
cally stop, the power sliding door motor will make a
clicking sound until the door has no further movement.
This clicking sound can be stopped by pulling the inside
or outside handle. If this condition occurs, no damage is
done to the power sliding door motor. The power sliding
door must be opened or closed manually.
Power Sliding Door Switch
30 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
You, or others, could be injured if caught in the path of
the sliding door. Make sure the door path is clear
before closing the door.
Child Locks
To provide a safer environment for small children riding in
the rear seats, the sliding doors are equipped with a Child
Protection Door Lock system.
NOTE: When the Child Protection Door Lock System is
engaged, the door can only be opened by using the outside
door handle even though the inside lock is in the unlocked
position.
Overhead Console Control Buttons
1 — Left Sliding Door
2 — Liftgate
3 — Right Sliding Door
4 — Sliding Door Power Off
Child Protection Door Locks
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 31
SEATS
Seats are a part of the Occupant Restraint System of the
vehicle.
WARNING!
• It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or
outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in
these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or
killed.
• Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts.
In a collision, people riding in these areas are more
likely to be seriously injured or killed.
• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.
Manual Adjustment (Front Seats) — If Equipped
WARNING!
• Adjusting a seat while the vehicle is moving is
dangerous. The sudden movement of the seat could
cause you to lose control. The seat belt might not be
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
adjusted properly and you could be injured. Adjust
the seat only while the vehicle is parked.
• Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the
shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest.
In a collision you could slide under the seat belt and
be seriously or even fatally injured. Use the recliner
only when the vehicle is parked.
Manual Front/Second Row Seat Adjuster
Both front seats are adjustable forward or rearward. The
manual seat adjustment handle is located under the seat
cushion at the front edge of each seat.
32 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
While sitting in the seat, pull up on the handle and slide the
seat forward or rearward. Release the bar once you have
reached the desired position. Then, using body pressure,
move forward and rearward on the seat to be sure that the
seat adjusters have latched.
WARNING!
•
Adjusting a seat while driving may be dangerous. Mov-
ing a seat while driving could result in loss of control
which could cause a collision and serious injury or death.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• Seats should be adjusted before fastening the seat
belts and while the vehicle is parked. Serious injury
or death could result from a poorly adjusted seat belt.
Manual Reclining Seats — If Equipped
For models equipped with manual reclining seats, the
recline lever is located on the outboard side of the seat.
Manual Seat Adjuster
Manual Recline Lever
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 33
To recline, lean forward slightly, lift the lever, then push
back to the desired position and release the lever. Lean
forward and lift the lever to return the seatback to its
normal position. Using body pressure, lean forward and
rearward on the seat to be sure the seatback has latched.
WARNING!
Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the
shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest. In
a collision you could slide under the seat belt, which
could result in serious injury or death.
Power Seats — If Equipped
Some models may be equipped with eight-way power
seats for the driver and front passenger. The power seat
switches are located on the outboard side of the seat. The
switches control the movement of the seat cushion and the
seatback.
WARNING!
• Adjusting a seat while driving may be dangerous.
Moving a seat while driving could result in loss of
control which could cause a collision and serious
injury or death.
(Continued)
Driver Power Seat Switch
1 — Seat Switch
2 — Seatback Switch
34 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
• Seats should be adjusted before fastening the seat
belts and while the vehicle is parked. Serious injury
or death could result from a poorly adjusted seat belt.
• Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the
shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest.
In a collision you could slide under the seat belt,
which could result in serious injury or death.
CAUTION!
Do not place any article under a power seat or impede
its ability to move as it may cause damage to the seat
controls. Seat travel may become limited if movement
is stopped by an obstruction in the seat’s path.
Adjusting The Seat Forward Or Rearward
The seat can be adjusted both forward and rearward. Push
the seat switch forward or rearward. The seat will move in
the direction of the switch. Release the switch when the
desired position has been reached.
Adjusting The Seat Up Or Down
The height of the seats can be adjusted up or down. Pull
upward or push downward on the rear of seat switch, the
seat will move in the direction of the switch. Release the
switch when the desired position has been reached.
Tilting The Seat Up Or Down
The angle of the seat cushion can be adjusted in two
directions. Pull upward or push downward on the front of
the seat switch, the front of the seat cushion will move in
the direction of the switch. Release the switch when the
desired position has been reached.
Reclining The Seatback
The angle of the seatback can be adjusted forward or
rearward. Push the seatback switch forward or rearward,
the seat will move in the direction of the switch. Release the
switch when the desired position is reached.
WARNING!
•
Adjusting a seat while driving may be dangerous. Mov-
ing a seat while driving could result in loss of control
which could cause a collision and serious injury or death.
(Continued)
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 35
WARNING! (Continued)
• Seats should be adjusted before fastening the seat
belts and while the vehicle is parked. Serious injury
or death could result from a poorly adjusted seat belt.
• Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the
shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest.
In a collision you could slide under the seat belt,
which could result in serious injury or death.
CAUTION!
Do not place any article under a power seat or impede
its ability to move as it may cause damage to the seat
controls. Seat travel may become limited if movement
is stopped by an obstruction in the seat’s path.
Power Lumbar — If Equipped
Vehicles equipped with power driver or passenger seats
may also be equipped with power lumbar. The power
lumbar switch is located on the outboard side of the power
seat. Push the switch forward to increase the lumbar
support. Push the switch rearward to decrease the lumbar
support.
Heated Seats — If Equipped
On some models, the front and rear seats may be equipped
with heaters located in the seat cushions and seat backs.
WARNING!
• Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin
because of advanced age, chronic illness, diabetes,
spinal cord injury, medication, alcohol use, exhaus-
tion or other physical condition must exercise care
(Continued)
Power Lumbar Switch
36 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
when using the seat heater. It may cause burns even
at low temperatures, especially if used for long
periods of time.
• Do not place anything on the seat or seatback that
insulates against heat, such as a blanket or cushion.
This may cause the seat heater to overheat. Sitting in
a seat that has been overheated could cause serious
burns due to the increased surface temperature of the
seat.
Front Heated Seats
There are two heated seat switches that allow the driver
and passenger to operate the seats independently. The
controls for each heater are located on the switch bank
below the climate controls.
You can choose from HI, LO or OFF heat settings. Amber
indicator lights in each switch indicate the level of heat in
use. Two indicator lights will illuminate for HI, one for LO
and none for OFF.
• Push the heated seat button
once to turn the HI
setting on.
• Push the heated seat button
a second time to turn
the LO setting on.
• Push the heated seat button
a third time to turn the
heating elements off.
NOTE: Once a heat setting is selected, heat will be felt
within two to five minutes.
If the HI-level setting is selected, the system will automati-
cally switch to LO-level after approximately 60 minutes of
continuous operation. At that time, the display will change
from HI to LO, indicating the change. The LO-level setting
will turn off automatically after approximately 45 minutes.
Vehicles Equipped With Remote Start
On models that are equipped with remote start, the heated
seats can be programmed to come on during a remote start.
This feature can be programmed through the instrument
cluster display. Refer to “Instrument Cluster Display” in
“Getting To Know Your Instrument Panel” for further
information.
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 37
WARNING!
• Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin
because of advanced age, chronic illness, diabetes,
spinal cord injury, medication, alcohol use, exhaus-
tion or other physical condition must exercise care
when using the seat heater. It may cause burns even
at low temperatures, especially if used for long
periods of time.
• Do not place anything on the seat or seatback that
insulates against heat, such as a blanket or cushion.
This may cause the seat heater to overheat. Sitting in
a seat that has been overheated could cause serious
burns due to the increased surface temperature of the
seat.
Rear Heated Seats
On some models, the second row seats are equipped with
heaters. There are two heated seat switches that allow the
second row passengers to operate the seats independently.
The heated seat switches are located on the sliding side
door handle trim panels.
You can choose from HI, LO or OFF heat settings. Amber
indicator lights in each switch indicate the level of heat in
use. Two indicator lights will illuminate for HI, one for LO
and none for OFF.
Push the switch once to select HI-level heating.
Push the switch a second time to select LO-level
heating. Push the switch a third time to shut the
heating elements off.
NOTE: Once a heat setting is selected, heat will be felt
within two to five minutes.
Second Row Heated Seat Switch
38 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
When the HI-level setting is selected, the heater will
provide a boosted heat level during the initial stages of
operation. Then, the heat output will drop to the normal
HI-level. If the HI-level setting is selected, the system will
automatically switch to LO-level after approximately 60
minutes of continuous operation. At that time, the display
will change from HI to LO, indicating the change. The
LO-level setting will turn off automatically after approxi-
mately 45 minutes.
Stow ’n Go Seating
On vehicles equipped with Stow ’n Go seating, the second
and third row seats can be folded into the floor for
convenient storage.
Second Row Stow ’n Go
On vehicles equipped with Stow ’n Go seats, the seats will
fold and tumble in one motion.
1. Move the front seat fully forward.
2. Recline the front seatback fully forward.
3. Raise the armrests on the second row seat.
NOTE: Seat will not stow in the storage bin unless the
armrests are raised.
4. Slide the storage bin locking mechanism to the “lock”
position and then pull up on the storage bin latch to
open the cover.
Storage Bin Cover Lock Release
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 39
5. Pull upward on the seatback recliner lever located on
the outboard side of the seat.
The non-adjustable head restraint and seatback will fold
automatically during the seat tumble. No additional actua-
tion is necessary.
Seatback Recliner Lever, Seat Tumble, And Head Restraint
Fold Lever
Non-Adjustable Head Restraint
40 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
The seat will automatically tumble into position for easy
storage.
NOTE: You may experience deformation in the seat cush-
ion from the seat belt buckles if the seats are left folded for
an extended period of time. This is normal and by simply
opening the seats to the open position, over time the seat
cushion will return to its normal shape.
Automatic Folding Seatback Tumbled Second Row Seat
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 41
6. Push the seat into the storage bin.
7. Close the storage bin cover.
WARNING!
In a collision, serious injury could result if the seat
storage bin covers are not properly latched:
• Do not drive the vehicle with the storage bin covers
open.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• Keep the storage bin covers closed and latched while
the vehicle is in motion.
• Do not use a storage bin latch as a tie down.
CAUTION!
• The storage bin cover must be locked and flat to
avoid damage from contact with the front seat tracks,
which have minimal clearance to the cover.
• Do not sit on the second row seat when it is in the
stowed position with the seatback upright otherwise
damage to the seat may occur.
To Unstow Second Row Seats
1. Pull up on the storage bin latch to open the cover.
2. Pull up on the strap to lift the seat out of the storage bin
and push the seat rearward to latch the seat anchors.
3. Lift the seatback to the full upright position.
4. Return the head restraint to its upright position, close
the storage bin cover and slide the storage bin locking
mechanism to the “unlocked” position.
Seat In Storage Bin
42 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
• In a collision, you or others in your vehicle could be
injured if seats are not properly latched to their floor
attachments. Always be sure the seats are fully
latched.
• Sitting in a seat with the head restraint in its lowered
position could result in serious injury or death in a
collision. Always make sure the head restraints are in
their upright positions when the seat is to be occu-
pied.
Stow ’n Go Seat — Folded And Latched Position
To tumble or stow the seat from the folded and latched
position: return the seatback and head restraint to the
upright position. Then pull up on the seatback recliner
lever on the outboard side of the seat to fold head rest,
seatback, and tumble the seat forward.
1. Return the seatback to the upright position.
Raising The Seatback
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 43
2. Return the head restraint to the upright position.
3. Pull up on the seatback recliner lever on the outboard
side of the seat to fold head rest, seatback, and tumble
the seat forward.
Easy Entry Second Row
The second row Stow ’n Go seats allow easy entry to the
third row seat or rear cargo area.
Pull up on the seatback recliner lever on the outboard side
of the seat.
The seat will automatically fold into position for easy entry
into the third row.
WARNING!
In the event of a collision you could be injured if the
seat is not fully latched.
Second Row Bench Seat — If Equipped
While the bench seat does not stow in the floor, it is
removable for added cargo space.
Raising The Head Restraint
Seatback Recliner Lever
44 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Release levers are located on the rear leg assemblies, near
the floor. To remove the seat, squeeze each release handle
and rotate downwards to deploy the wheels. A lock
indicator button pops up when the seat is unlocked. The
seat assembly can now be removed from the vehicle and
moved on its Easy Out Rollers.
To reinstall the seat, align the seat into the detent positions
on the floor. Squeeze the release handle and rotate upward
until the lock indicator button returns into the handle.
WARNING!
If not properly latched, the seat could become loose.
Personal injuries could result. After reinstalling these
seats, be sure the red indicator button on the release
handles return into the handles.
Second Row Bench Seat Release Handles
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 45
Manually Folding Third Row Seats — If Equipped
1. Lower the center head restraint down to the seatback by
pushing the button on the guide and pushing the head
restraint down.
2. Lower the outboard head restraints by pulling on the
release strap marked “1” located on the outboard side of
the head restraint.
3. Pull release strap marked “2” located on the rear of the
seat to lower the seatback.
Head Restraint Release Strap “1”
Release Strap “2”
46 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
4. Pull release strap marked “3” to release the anchors. 5. Pull release strap marked “4” and tumble the seat
rearward into the storage bin.
Release Strap “3”
Release Strap “4”
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 47
NOTE: You may experience deformation in the seat cush-
ion from the seat belt buckles if the seats are left folded for
an extended period of time. This is normal and by simply
opening the seats to the open position, over time the seat
cushion will return to its normal shape.
To Unfold Third Row Seats
1. Pull up on the assist strap to lift the seat out of the
storage bin and push the seat forward until the anchors
latch.
2. Pull release strap marked “2” to unlock the recliner.
3. Pulling strap “4” releases the seatback to return to its
full upright position.
4. Raise the head restraint to its upright position.
WARNING!
• In a collision, you or others in your vehicle could be
injured if seats are not properly latched to their floor
attachments. Always be sure the seats are fully
latched.
• Sitting in a seat with the head restraint in its lowered
position could result in serious injury or death in a
collision. Always make sure the head restraints are in
their upright positions when the seat is to be occu-
pied.
Tailgate Mode
1. Pull release strap “3”, then pull release strap “4” to
rotate the entire seat rearward.
2. To restore the seat to its upright position, lift up on the
seatback and push forward until the anchors latch.
Stowed Third Row Seat
48 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
To avoid serious injury or death, never operate the
vehicle with occupants in the third row seat while in
the tailgate mode.
Plastic Grocery Bag Retainer Hooks
Retainer hooks which will hold plastic grocery bag handles are
built into the seatbacks of all rear seats and some front seats.
The floor supports the partial weight of the bagged goods.
HEAD RESTRAINTS
Head restraints are designed to reduce the risk of injury by
restricting head movement in the event of a rear impact.
Head restraints should be adjusted so that the top of the
head restraint is located above the top of your ear.
WARNING!
• All occupants, including the driver, should not oper-
ate a vehicle or sit in a vehicle’s seat until the head
restraints are placed in their proper positions in
order to minimize the risk of neck injury in the event
of a crash.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• Head restraints should never be adjusted while the
vehicle is in motion. Driving a vehicle with the head
restraints improperly adjusted or removed could
cause serious injury or death in the event of a
collision.
Supplemental Active Head Restraints — Front
Seats
Active Head Restraints are passive, deployable compo-
nents, and vehicles with this equipment cannot be readily
identified by any markings, only through visual inspection
of the head restraint. The Active Head Restraints (AHR)
will be split in two halves, with the front half being soft
foam and trim, the back half being decorative plastic.
When AHRs deploy during a rear impact, the front half of
the head restraint extends forward to reduce the gap
between the back of the occupant’s head and the AHR. This
system is design to reduce the risk of injury to the driver or
front passenger in certain types of rear impacts. Refer to
“Occupant Restraints” in “Safety” for further information.
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 49
To raise the head restraint, pull upward on the head
restraint. To lower the head restraint, push the adjustment
button, located at the base of the head restraint, and push
downward on the head restraint.
For comfort, the Active Head Restraints can be tilted
forward and rearward. To tilt the head restraint closer to
the back of your head, pull forward on the bottom of the
head restraint. Push rearward on the bottom of the head
restraint to move the head restraint away from your head.
Adjustment Button
Active Head Restraint (Normal Position)
50 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
• The head restraints should only be removed by qualified
technicians, for service purposes only. If either of the
head restraints require removal, see an authorized
dealer.
• In the event of deployment of an Active Head Restraint,
refer to “Occupant Restraints/Resetting Active Head
Restraints (AHR)” in “Safety” for further information.
WARNING!
• ALL the head restraints MUST be reinstalled in the
vehicle to properly protect the occupants.
• All occupants, including the driver, should not oper-
ate a vehicle or sit in a vehicle’s seat until the head
restraints are placed in their proper positions in
order to minimize the risk of neck injury in the event
of a collision.
• Do not place items over the top of the Active Head
Restraint, such as coats, seat covers or portable DVD
players. These items may interfere with the opera-
tion of the Active Head Restraint in the event of a
collision and could result in serious injury or death.
• Active Head Restraints may be deployed if they are
struck by an object such as a hand, foot or loose
cargo. To avoid accidental deployment of the Active
Head Restraint ensure that all cargo is secured, as
loose cargo could contact the Active Head Restraint
during sudden stops. Failure to follow this warning
could cause personal injury if the Active Head Re-
straint is deployed.
Active Head Restraint (Tilted)
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 51
Head Restraints — Second Row Quad Seats
The head restraints on the second row quad seats are
non-adjustable and non-removable. The head restraint will
automatically fold forward when the seat release lever is
pulled during the Stow n’ Go procedure. Refer to “Seats” in
this section for further information.
Head Restraints — Second Row Bench
The second row bench seat is equipped with adjustable
head restraints.
To raise the head restraint, pull upward on the head
restraint. To lower the head restraint, push the adjustment
button, located at the base of the head restraint, and push
downward.
To remove the head restraint, raise it as far as it can go.
Then, push the release button and the adjustment button at
the base of each post while pulling the head restraint up.
Seatback angle may need to be adjusted to fully remove the
head restraint. To reinstall the head restraint, put the head
restraint posts into the holes and push downward. Then,
adjust the head restraint to the appropriate height.
Adjustment Button
1 — Release Button
2 — Adjustment Button
52 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
• A loose head restraint thrown forward in a collision
or hard stop could cause serious injury or death to
occupants of the vehicle. Always securely stow re-
moved head restraints in a location outside the
occupant compartment.
• ALL the head restraints MUST be reinstalled in the
vehicle to properly protect the occupants. Follow the
re-installation instructions above prior to operating
the vehicle or occupying a seat.
NOTE: For child restraint tethering, refer to “Occupant
Restraint Systems” in “Safety” for further information.
Head Restraints — Third Row
The outboard head restraints can be manually folded
forward for improved rearward visibility. They are non-
removable. Pull the release strap to fold them forward.
NOTE:
• The head restraints must be raised manually when
occupying the third row.
• Do not fold if there are passengers seated in the third
row seats.
The head restraint in the center position can be raised and
lowered for tether routing or height adjustment. Refer to
“Occupant Restraint Systems” in “Safety” for further infor-
mation.
Head Restraint Release Strap “1”
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 53
NOTE: To remove the center head restraint, raise it as far as
it can go. Then, push both the release button and the
adjustment button at the base of each post while pulling
the head restraint up. To reinstall the head restraint, put the
head restraint posts into the holes and push downward.
Then, using the adjustment button, adjust the head re-
straint to the appropriate height.
Refer to “Occupant Restraints” in “Safety” for further
information.
STEERING WHEEL
Tilt/Telescoping Steering Column
This feature allows you to tilt the steering column upward
or downward. It also allows you to lengthen or shorten the
steering column. The tilt/telescoping lever is located below
the steering wheel at the end of the steering column.
To unlock the steering column, push the lever downward
(toward the floor). To tilt the steering column, move the
steering wheel upward or downward as desired. To
lengthen or shorten the steering column, pull the steering
wheel outward or push it inward as desired. To lock the
Adjustment Button
Tilt/Telescoping Lever
54 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
steering column in position, push the lever upward until
fully engaged.
WARNING!
Do not adjust the steering column while driving.
Adjusting the steering column while driving or driv-
ing with the steering column unlocked, could cause the
driver to lose control of the vehicle. Failure to follow
this warning may result in serious injury or death.
Heated Steering Wheel — If Equipped
The steering wheel contains a heating element that helps
warm your hands in cold weather. The heated steering
wheel has only one temperature setting. Once the heated
steering wheel has been turned on it can operate for an
average of 80 minutes before automatically shutting off.
This time may vary depending on the temperature of the
environment. The heated steering wheel can shut off early
or may not turn on when the steering wheel is already
warm.
The heated steering wheel control button is located on the
center of the instrument panel below the climate controls.
• Push the heated steering wheel button
once to turn
the heating element on.
• Push the heated steering wheel button
a second time
to turn the heating element off.
NOTE: The engine must be running for the heated steering
wheel to operate.
Vehicles Equipped With Remote Start
On models that are equipped with remote start, the heated
steering wheel can be programed to come on during a
remote start. Refer to “Instrument Cluster Display” in
“Getting To Know Your Instrument Panel” for further
information.
WARNING!
• Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin
because of advanced age, chronic illness, diabetes,
spinal cord injury, medication, alcohol use, exhaus-
tion, or other physical conditions must exercise care
when using the steering wheel heater. It may cause
burns even at low temperatures, especially if used
for long periods.
• Do not place anything on the steering wheel that
insulates against heat, such as a blanket or steering
wheel covers of any type and material. This may
cause the steering wheel heater to overheat.
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 55
MIRRORS
Automatic Dimming Mirror — If Equipped
This mirror automatically adjusts for headlight glare from
vehicles behind you. You can turn the feature on or off by
pushing the button at the base of the mirror. The on/off
symbol on the button will illuminate when the auto-
dimming feature is enabled.
NOTE: This feature is disabled when the vehicle is moving
in REVERSE.
CAUTION!
To avoid damage to the mirror during cleaning, never
spray any cleaning solution directly onto the mirror.
Apply the solution onto a clean cloth and wipe the
mirror clean.
Automatic Dimming Mirror With Rear View Camera
Display — If Equipped
A single ball joint mirror is provided in the vehicle. It is a
twist on mirror that has a fixed position at the windshield.
The mirror installs on the windshield button with a coun-
terclockwise rotation and requires no tools for mounting.
The mirror head can be adjusted up, down, left, and right
for various drivers. The mirror should be adjusted to center
on the view through the rear window.
This mirror automatically adjusts for headlight glare from
vehicles behind you.
When the vehicle is placed into reverse gear, a video
display illuminates to display the image generated by the
rear view camera located on the tailgate handle. The auto
dimming feature is also disabled to improve rear view
viewing.
Automatic Dimming Mirror
56 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Outside Mirrors
To receive maximum benefit, adjust the outside mirror(s) to
center on the adjacent lane of traffic with a slight overlap of
the view obtained on the inside mirror.
WARNING!
Vehicles and other objects seen in an outside convex
mirror will look smaller and farther away than they
really are. Relying too much on side convex mirrors
could cause you to collide with another vehicle or other
object. Use your inside mirror when judging the size or
distance of a vehicle seen in a side convex mirror.
Interior Observation Mirror
The convex interior observation mirror provides the driver
and front seat passenger a wide field of view to conve-
niently view passengers sitting in the rear passenger seats.
To use the interior observation mirror, push on the raised
bars on the compartment door and release (the door will
swing downward), then raise the door until it is almost
closed and release. The door will latch in position to use the
interior observation mirror.
NOTE: From the “observation mirror” position, the door
can only be closed.
Automatic Dimming Mirror With Rear View Camera
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 57
To return to the full open position, the door must first be
closed and then opened by pushing the latch again to
release.
Power Mirrors — If Equipped
The power mirror controls are located on the driver-side
door trim panel.
The power mirror controls consist of mirror select buttons
and a four-way mirror control switch. To adjust a mirror,
push either the L (left) or R (right) to select the mirror that
you want to adjust.
NOTE: A light in the selected button will illuminate
indicating the mirror is activated and can be adjusted.
Using the mirror control switch, push on any of the four
arrows for the direction that you want the mirror to move.
Observation Mirror
Power Mirror Controls
58 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Outside Mirrors Folding Feature
All outside mirrors are hinged and may be moved either
forward or rearward to resist damage. The hinges have
three detent positions:
• Full forward position
• Full rearward position
• Normal position
Heated Mirrors — If Equipped
These mirrors are heated to melt frost or ice. This
feature will be activated whenever you turn on the
rear window defroster (if equipped). Refer to “Climate
Controls” in “Getting To Know Your Vehicle” for further
information.
Illuminated Vanity Mirrors — If Equipped
An illuminated vanity mirror is located on the sun visor. To
use the mirror, rotate the sun visor down and swing the
mirror cover upward. The lights turn on automatically.
Closing the mirror cover turns off the lights.
Lift Mirror Cover
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 59
EXTERIOR LIGHTS
Headlight Switch
The headlight switch is located on the left side of the
instrument panel. The switch controls the operation of the
headlights, parking lights, instrument panel lights, interior
lights and the fog lights.
Rotate the headlight switch clockwise to the first detent for
parking light and instrument panel light operation. Rotate
the headlight switch to the second detent for headlight,
parking light and instrument panel operation.
Multifunction Lever
The multifunction lever is located on the left side of the
steering column.
The multifunction lever controls the:
• Turn Signals
• Headlight Beams Low/High
• Flash-To-Pass
• Front and Rear Wipers/Washer Functions
Headlight Switch
Multifunction Lever
60 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Daytime Running Lights (DRL) — If Equipped
The headlights on your vehicle will illuminate when the
engine is started and the transmission is in any gear except
PARK. This provides a constant ⬙lights on⬙ condition until
the ignition is turned OFF. The lights illuminate at less than
half of normal intensity. If the parking brake is applied, the
Daytime Running Lights (DRL) will turn off. Also, if a turn
signal is activated, the DRL lamp on the same side of the
vehicle may turn off for the duration of the turn signal
activation. Once the turn signal is no longer active, the DRL
lamp will illuminate.
High/Low Beam Switch
Push the multifunction lever toward the instrument panel
to switch the headlights to high beams. Pulling the multi-
function lever back toward the steering wheel will return
the lights to low beams.
Flash-To-Pass
You can signal another vehicle with your headlights by
lightly pulling the multifunction lever toward you. This
will cause the high beam headlights to turn on, and remain
on, until the lever is released.
Automatic Headlights
This system automatically turns the headlights on or off
according to ambient light levels. To turn the system on,
rotate the headlight switch counterclockwise to the AUTO
position. When the system is on, the headlight time delay
feature is also on. This means the headlights will stay on
for up to 90 seconds after you place the ignition into the
OFF position. The headlight time delay can be pro-
grammed 0/30/60/90 seconds. Refer to “Headlight Delay”
in this section for further information.
To turn the automatic system off, move the headlight
switch out of the AUTO position.
NOTE: The engine must be running before the headlights
will come on in the automatic mode.
Headlights On With Wipers — If Equipped
When your headlights are in the AUTO mode and the
engine is running, the headlights will automatically turn
on when the wiper system is also turned on. Headlights on
when windshield wipers are on may be found on vehicles
equipped with an automatic headlight system.
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 61
NOTE: The Headlights with Wipers feature can be turned
on or off through the instrument cluster display — if
equipped. Refer to “Instrument Cluster Display” in “Get-
ting To Know Your Instrument Panel” for further informa-
tion.
Headlight Delay — If Equipped
This feature provides the safety of headlight illumination
for up to 90 seconds after exiting your vehicle.
To activate the delay feature, turn OFF the ignition switch
while the headlights are still on. Then turn off the head-
lights within 45 seconds. The 90 second delay interval
begins when the headlight switch is turned off. If the
headlights or parking lights are turned back on or the
ignition switch is turned ON, the delay will be cancelled.
When exiting the vehicle the driver can choose to have the
headlights remain on for 30, 60 or 90 seconds or not remain
on. To change the timer setting, see an authorized dealer.
The headlight delay time is programmable on vehicles
equipped with an instrument cluster display. Refer to
“Instrument Cluster Display” in “Getting To Know Your
Instrument Panel” for further information.
If the headlights are turned off before the ignition, they will
turn off in the normal manner.
NOTE: The headlights must be turned off within 45 sec-
onds of turning the ignition OFF to activate this feature.
Lights-On Reminder
If the headlights or the parking lights are left on, or if the
dimmer control is in the extreme top position after the
ignition switch is turned OFF, a chime will sound when the
driver’s door is opened.
Front Fog Lights — If Equipped
To activate the front fog lights, turn on the
parking lights or the low beam headlights and
push in the headlight switch control knob. Push-
ing the headlight switch control knob in a second time will
turn the front fog lights off.
Turn Signals
Move the multifunction lever up or down and the arrows
on each side of the instrument cluster display will flash to
show proper operation of the front and rear turn signal
lights.
62 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: If either light remains on and does not flash, or
there is a very fast flash rate, check for a defective outside
light bulb. If an indicator fails to light when the lever is
moved, it would suggest that the indicator bulb is defec-
tive.
Turn Signal Warning
If the vehicle electronics sense that the vehicle has traveled
at over 18 mph (29 km/h) for about 1 mile (1.6 km) with the
turn signals on, a chime will sound to alert the driver.
Lane Change Assist
Tap the lever up or down once, without moving beyond
the detent, and the turn signal (right or left) will flash three
times then automatically turn off.
Battery Protection
This feature provides battery protection to avoid wearing
down the battery if the headlights or parking lights are left
on for extended periods of time when the ignition is in the
OFF position. After eight minutes of the ignition being in
the OFF position and the headlight switch in any position
other than OFF or AUTO, the lights will turn off automati-
cally until the next cycle of the ignition or headlight switch.
The battery protection feature will be disabled if the
ignition is placed in any position other than OFF during the
eight minute delay.
INTERIOR LIGHTS
Courtesy/Interior Lighting
At the forward end of the overhead console are two
courtesy lights (standard dome light has two buttons).
These interior lights are turned on when a door or the
liftgate is opened, the remote keyless entry key fob is
activated, or when the dimmer control is moved to the
extreme top.
The interior lights will automatically turn off in approxi-
mately 10 minutes for the first activation and 90 seconds
every activation thereafter until the engine is started, if one
of the following occur:
• A door, sliding door or the liftgate is left open.
• Any overhead reading light is left on.
NOTE: The ignition must be cycled to the OFF position for
this feature to operate.
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 63
The courtesy lights also function as reading lights. Push in
on each lens to turn these lights on while inside the vehicle.
Push a second time to turn each light off. You may adjust
the direction of these lights by pushing the outside ring,
which is identified with four directional arrows (LED
lamps only).
Rear Courtesy/Reading Lights — If Equipped
The overhead console has two sets of courtesy lights. The
lights turn on when a front door, a sliding door or the
liftgate is opened. If your vehicle is equipped with Remote
Keyless Entry, the lights will also turn on when the unlock
button on the key fob is pushed.
The courtesy lights also function as reading lights. Push in
on each lens to turn these lights on while inside the vehicle.
Push the lens a second time to turn each light off. You may
adjust the direction of these lights by pushing the outside
ring, which is identified with four directional arrows.
Rear Console Halo Lighting
Halo lights are strategically placed soft lighting that help to
illuminate specific areas to aid the occupants in locating
specific features while driving at night.
Reading Lights
64 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
The rear overhead console has recessed halo lighting
around the perimeter of the console base. This feature
provides additional lighting options while traveling and is
controlled by ambient light dimmer control of the head-
light switch.
Dimmer Controls
The dimmer switch is located next to the headlight switch.
Ambient Light Dimmer Control
Instrument Panel Dimmer Control
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 65
With the parking lights or headlights on, rotating the left
dimmer control upward will increase the brightness of the
instrument panel lights.
Rotating the left dimmer control completely upward to the
second detent (extreme top position) will turn on the
interior lights. The interior lights will remain on when the
dimmer control is in this position.
Rotating the left dimmer control to the off position (ex-
treme bottom) will turn the interior lights off, and will
remain off when the doors or liftgate are opened.
Parade Mode (Daytime Brightness Feature)
Rotate the dimmer control upward to the first detent. This
feature brightens all text displays such as the odometer,
instrument cluster display, and radio when the parking
lights or headlights are on.
WINDSHIELD WIPER AND WASHERS
The wipers and washers are operated by a switch within
the multifunction lever. Rotate the end of the multifunction
lever to select the desired wiper speed.
NOTE: Always remove any buildup of snow that prevents
the windshield wiper blades from returning to the off
position. If the windshield wiper switch is turned off and
the blades cannot return to the off position, damage to the
wiper motor may occur.
Washer And Wiper Controls
66 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
Sudden loss of visibility through the windshield could
lead to a collision. You might not see other vehicles or
other obstacles. To avoid sudden icing of the wind-
shield during freezing weather, warm the windshield
with the defroster before and during windshield
washer use.
Windshield Wiper Operation
Rotate the end of the lever upward, to the first detent past
the intermittent settings for low-speed wiper operation.
Rotate the end of the lever upward to the second detent
past the intermittent settings for high-speed wiper opera-
tion.
Intermittent Wiper System
Use the intermittent wiper when weather conditions make
a single wiping cycle with a variable pause between cycles
desirable. Rotate the end of the multifunction lever to the
first detent position, and then turn the end of the lever to
select the desired delay interval. There are five delay
settings, which allow you to regulate the wipe interval
from a minimum of one cycle every second to a maximum
of approximately 36 seconds between cycles. The delay
intervals will double in duration when the vehicle speed is
10 mph (16 km/h) or less.
Windshield Washers
To use the windshield washer, push on the end of the lever
to the second detent and hold while spray is desired. If the
lever is pushed while on the intermittent setting, the
wipers will turn on and operate for several wipe cycles
after the lever is released, and then resume the intermittent
interval previously selected. If the lever is pushed while
the wipers are in the off position, the wipers will operate
several wipe cycles, then turn off.
Mist Feature
Push the end of the multifunction lever inward (toward the
steering column) to the first detent and release for a single
wiping cycle.
NOTE: The mist feature does not activate the washer
pump; therefore, no washer fluid will be sprayed on the
windshield. The wash function must be used in order to
spray the windshield with washer fluid.
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 67
Rear Wiper And Washer
Rotating the center ring of the wiper lever to the first detent
activates the rear intermittent wipers. To activate the
washers, rotate the center ring fully forward and the
washers will spray until the ring is released, and then
resume the intermittent interval.
NOTE: Rear window wipers function in the intermittent
wiper speed only.
CLIMATE CONTROLS
Manual Climate Control Overview
The air conditioning and heating system is designed to
make you comfortable in all types of weather.
Manual Temperature Controls
68 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Manual Climate Control Descriptions
Icon Description
A/C Button
Push the A/C button to engage the Air Conditioning (A/C). An LED will illuminate when the
A/C system is engaged.
Recirculation Button
Press and release this button to change the system between recirculation mode and outside air
mode. Recirculation can be used when outside conditions such as smoke, odors, dust, or high
humidity are present. Recirculation can be used in all modes except for Defrost. Recirculation
may be unavailable if conditions exist that could create fogging on the inside of the windshield.
The A/C can be deselected manually without disturbing the mode control selection. Continuous
use of the Recirculation may make the inside air stuffy and window fogging may occur. Ex-
tended use of this mode is not recommended.
Front Defrost Mode Button
The Front Defrost button changes the current airflow setting to Defrost mode. The indicator illu-
minates when this feature is on. Air comes from the windshield and side window demist out-
lets. When the defrost mode is selected, the blower level will increase. Use Defrost mode with
maximum temperature settings for best windshield and side window defrosting and defogging.
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 69
Icon Description
Rear Defrost Button
Push and release the Rear Defrost Control button to turn on the rear window defroster and the
heated outside mirrors (if equipped). An indicator will illuminate when the rear window de-
froster is on. The rear window defroster automatically turns off after ten minutes.
Left Front Temperature Control
Provides left front seat occupant with independent temperature control. Turn left for cooler or
right for warmer temperature settings.
Front Blower Control
There are seven blower speeds. Use this control to regulate the amount of air forced through the
system in any mode you select. The blower speed increases as you move the control clockwise
from the off position.
Right Front Temperature Control
Provides right front seat occupant with independent temperature control. Turn left for cooler or
right for warmer temperature settings.
Panel Mode
Panel Mode Button
Push button to select Panel Mode. The indicator illuminates when this mode is on. Air comes
from the outlets in the instrument panel. Each of these outlets can be individually adjusted to
direct the flow of air. The air vanes of the center outlets and outboard outlets can be moved up
and down or side to side to regulate airflow direction.
70 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Icon Description
Bi-Level Mode
Bi-Level Mode Button
Push button to select Bi–Level Mode. The indicator illuminates when this mode is on. Air comes
from the instrument panel outlets and floor outlets. A slight amount of air is directed through
the defrost and side window demister outlets.
NOTE: Bi-Level mode is designed under comfort conditions to provide cooler air out of the
panel outlets and warmer air from the floor outlets.
Floor Mode
Floor Mode Button
Push button to select Floor Mode. The indicator illuminates when this mode is on. Air comes
from the floor outlets. A slight amount of air is directed through the defrost and side window
demister outlets.
Mix Mode
Mix Mode Button
Push button to select Mix Mode. The indicator illuminates when this mode is on. Air is directed
through the floor, defrost, and side window demister outlets. This setting works best in cold or
snowy conditions that require extra heat to the windshield. This setting is good for maintaining
comfort while reducing moisture on the windshield.
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 71
Controlling The Rear Climate Controls From The
Front Panel Controls
The rear MTC system has floor air outlets at the rear right
side of the 3rd Row seats and overhead outlets at each
outboard rear seating position. The system provides heated
air through the floor outlets or cool, dehumidified air
through the headliner outlets.
The rear system temperature control buttons on the face-
plate are located below the radio system, located on the
instrument panel.
Icon Description
Rear Blower Control — If Equipped
Use this control to regulate the amount of air forced through the rear system in any mode you
select. The rear blower speed increases as you move the control to the right from the “O” (Off)
position. There are seven blower speeds. To allow the rear overhead control, turn the knob fully
to the left, past the “O” off position into the “REAR” control position.
Rear Manual Climate Controls
72 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Icon Description
Rear Temperature Control — If Equipped
Provides temperature control for the rear cabin. Turn left for cooler or right for warmer tem-
perature settings in the rear cabin.
Rear Manual Temperature Control
The Three-Zone climate control system allows for adjust-
ment of the rear climate controls from the front ATC panel.
Icon Description
Panel Mode
Rear Panel Mode
To change Rear Mode to Panel Mode, turn the Rear Mode Knob to Rear Panel Mode position. Air
comes from the outlets in the headliner. Each of these outlets can be individually adjusted to direct
the flow of air. Moving the air vanes of the outlets to one side will shut off the airflow.
Rear MTC Control Knobs
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 73
Icon Description
Bi-Level Mode
Rear Bi-Level Mode
Air comes from both the headliner outlets and the floor outlets.
NOTE: To change Rear Mode to Bi-Level Mode, turn the Rear Mode Knob to Rear Bi-Level Mode
position. In many temperature positions, the Bi-Level mode is designed to provide cooler air out
of the headliner outlets and warmer air from the floor outlets.
Floor Mode
Rear Floor Mode
To change Rear Mode to Floor Mode, turn the Rear Mode Knob to Rear Floor Mode position. Air
comes from the floor outlets.
Rear Temperature Control Knob
To change the temperature in the rear of the vehicle, turn the Temperature Control Knob. Turn it
to the right to raise the temperature, or turn it to the left to lower the temperature. The rear tem-
perature settings are displayed in control head. When rear controls are locked by the front system,
the Rear Temperature Lock symbol on the control head is illuminated and any rear overhead ad-
justments are ignored.
Rear Blower Control Knob
The rear blower control can be manually set to off, or any fixed blower speed by rotating the
Blower Control Knob in the rear of the vehicle. This allows the rear seat occupants to control the
volume of air circulated in the rear of the vehicle.
74 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Automatic Climate Control Overview
Automatic Climate Control Descriptions
Icon Description
A/C Button
Push the A/C button to engage the Air Conditioning (A/C). An LED will illuminate when the
A/C system is engaged.
Automatic Temperature Controls
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 75
Icon Description
Automatic Operation
Automatically controls the interior cabin temperature by adjusting airflow distribution and
amount. Toggling this function will cause the system to switch between manual mode and auto-
matic modes. Refer to “Automatic Operation” within this section for more information.
Recirculation Button
Press and release this button to change the system between recirculation mode and outside air
mode. Recirculation can be used when outside conditions such as smoke, odors, or high humid-
ity are present. Recirculation can be used in all modes except for Defrost. Recirculation may be
unavailable (button on the touchscreen greyed out) if conditions exist that could create fogging
on the inside of the windshield. The A/C can be deselected manually without disturbing the
mode control selection. Continuous use of the Recirculation mode may make the inside air
stuffy and window fogging may occur. Extended use of this mode is not recommended.
Rear Climate Control Button
Push Rear Climate Control Button to control rear compartment climate from the Front ATC
Panel. The rear climate modes will be displayed on the Front ATC Panel Rear Control Display.
Rear Defrost Button
Push and release the Rear Defrost Control button to turn on the rear window defroster and the
heated outside mirrors (if equipped). An indicator will illuminate when the rear window de-
froster is on. The rear window defroster automatically turns off after ten minutes.
76 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Icon Description
Driver and Passenger Temperature Up And Down Buttons
Provides the driver and passenger with independent temperature control. Push the up arrow
button for warmer temperature settings. Push the blue arrow button for cooler temperature set-
tings.
Blower Control
There are seven blower speeds. Use this control to regulate the amount of air forced through the
system in any mode you select. The blower speed increases as you move the control clockwise
from the off position.
NOTE: Depending on the configuration, your vehicle may be equipped with four blower
speeds.
Modes Control Button
Toggle the Modes Control Button to adjust airflow distribution. The airflow distribution mode
can be adjusted so air comes from the instrument panel outlets, floor outlets, defrost outlets and
demist outlets. The Mode settings are as follows:
Panel Mode
Panel Mode
Toggle the Modes Control Button until you see Panel Mode Icon on the display. Air comes from
the outlets in the instrument panel. Each of these outlets can be individually adjusted to direct
the flow of air. The air vanes of the center outlets and outboard outlets can be moved up and
down or side to side to regulate airflow direction.
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 77
Icon Description
Bi-Level Mode
Bi-Level Mode
Toggle the Modes Control Button until you see Bi-Level Mode Icon on the display. Air comes
from the instrument panel outlets and floor outlets. A slight amount of air is directed through
the defrost and side window demister outlets.
NOTE: Bi-Level mode is designed under comfort conditions to provide cooler air out of the
panel outlets and warmer air from the floor outlets.
Floor Mode
Floor Mode
Toggle the Modes Control Button until you see Floor Mode Icon on the display. Air comes from
the floor outlets. A slight amount of air is directed through the defrost and side window demis-
ter outlets.
Mix Mode
Mix Mode
Toggle the Modes Control Button until you see Mix Mode Icon on the display. Air is directed
through the floor, defrost, and side window demister outlets. This setting works best in cold or
snowy conditions that require extra heat to the windshield. This setting is good for maintaining
comfort while reducing moisture on the windshield.
Front Defrost
Mode
Front Defrost Mode Button
Push the button to select Front Defrost Mode. The indicator illuminates when this mode is on.
Air comes from the windshield and side window demist outlets. When the defrost mode is se-
lected, the blower level will increase. Use Defrost mode with maximum temperature settings for
best windshield and side window defrosting and defogging.
78 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Controlling The Rear Climate Controls From The
Front ATC Panel
The rear ATC system has floor air outlets at the rear right
side of the 3rd Row seats and overhead outlets at each
outboard rear seating position. The system provides heated
air through the floor outlets or cool, dehumidified air
through the headliner outlets. The rear system temperature
control buttons are located in the Uconnect system, located
on the instrument panel.
Icon Description
Rear Lock Button
Press to lock out the rear manual temperature controls from adjusting the rear temperature and
blower settings.
Rear Passenger Temperature Up and Down Buttons
Provides the rear passengers with independent temperature control. Push the up arrow button
to increase the temperature. Push the down arrow button to decrease the temperature. When the
SYNC feature is active, the rear temperature, the passenger’s temperature will move up and
down with the driver’s temperature.
Front ATC Panel Rear Control Display
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 79
Icon Description
SYNC Button — If Equipped
Press the SYNC button to toggle the Sync feature on/off. The SYNC indicator is illuminated
when this feature is enabled. SYNC is used to synchronize the front and rear passenger tem-
perature settings with the driver temperature setting. Changing the front or rear passenger tem-
perature setting while in SYNC will automatically exit this feature.
Rear Blower Control
Turn off Blower Control Knob clockwise or counter clockwise to adjust blower speed. There are
seven blower speeds. Use this control to regulate the amount of air forced through the system in
any mode you select in Rear Compartment. The blower speed increases as you move the control
clockwise from the off position.
Panel Mode
Rear Panel Mode
Toggle the Modes Control Button until Rear Panel Mode appears on the display. Air comes from
the outlets in the headliner. Each of these outlets can be individually adjusted to direct the flow
of air. Moving the air vanes of the outlets to one side will shut off the airflow.
Bi-Level Mode
Rear Bi-Level Mode
Toggle the Modes Control Button until the Rear Bi-Level Mode appears on the display. Air
comes from both the headliner outlets and the floor outlets.
NOTE: In many temperature positions, the Bi-Level mode is designed to provide cooler air out
of the headliner outlets and warmer air from the floor outlets.
80 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Icon Description
Floor Mode
Rear Floor Mode
Toggle the Modes Control Button until the Rear Floor Mode appears on the display. Air comes
from the floor vents.
Rear Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) — If
Equipped
The Three-Zone ATC system allows for adjustment of the
rear climate controls from the front ATC panel. To change
the rear system settings:
• Press the ⬙REAR⬙ button to change control to rear control
mode, Rear display (below) will appear. Control func-
tions now operate rear system.
• To return to Front screen, press the ⬙REAR⬙ button again,
or it will revert to the Front screen after six seconds.
Rear ATC Control Features
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 81
1. Adjust the Rear Blower, Rear Temperature and the Rear
Modes to suit your comfort needs.
2. ATC is selected by pushing the AUTO button.
Once the desired temperature is displayed, the ATC System
will automatically achieve and maintain that comfort level.
When the system is set up for your comfort level, it is not
necessary to change the settings. You will experience the
greatest efficiency by simply allowing the system to func-
tion automatically.
NOTE:
• It is not necessary to move the temperature settings. The
system automatically adjusts the temperature, mode and
fan speed to provide comfort as quickly as possible.
Icon Description
Rear Mode Control Knob
Rotate knob to change the air distribution mode for the rear passengers to one of the following:
Panel Mode
Rear Panel Mode
Air comes from the outlets in the headliner. Each of these outlets can be individually adjusted to
direct the flow of air. Moving the air vanes of the outlets to one side will shut off the airflow.
Bi-Level Mode
Rear Bi-Level Mode
Air comes from both the headliner outlets and the floor outlets.
NOTE: In many temperature positions, the Bi-Level mode is designed to provide cooler air out of
the headliner outlets and warmer air from the floor outlets.
82 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Icon Description
Floor Mode
Rear Floor Mode
Air comes from the floor outlets.
Rear Temperature Control Knob
To change the temperature in the rear of the vehicle, turn the Temperature Control Knob. Turn it
to the right to raise the temperature, or turn it to the left to lower the temperature. The rear tem-
perature settings are displayed in control head. When rear controls are locked by the front system,
the Rear Temperature Lock symbol on the control head is illuminated and any rear overhead ad-
justments are ignored.
Push the Rear Temperature Lock button on the front ATC panel. This turns off the Rear Tempera-
ture Lock icon in the rear temperature knob.
Rear Blower Control Knob
The rear blower control can be manually set to off, or any fixed blower speed by rotating the
Blower Control Knob in the rear of the vehicle. This allows the rear seat occupants to control the
volume of air circulated in the rear of the vehicle.
Rear AUTO Mode
Rear AUTO is selected by adjusting the rear blower knob counterclockwise to AUTO. The ATC
system will automatically achieve and maintain that comfort level. When the system is set up for
your comfort level, it is not necessary to change the settings. You will experience the greatest effi-
ciency by simply allowing the system to function automatically.
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 83
Climate Control Functions
Air Conditioning (A/C)
The Air Conditioning (A/C) button allows the operator to
manually activate or deactivate the A/C system. When in
A/C mode with the ATC set to a cool temperature,
dehumidified air flows through the air outlets. If Economy
mode is desired, push the A/C button to turn off the A/C
mode in the ATC display and deactivate the A/C system.
NOTE:
• If the system is in Mix or Defrost Mode, the A/C can be
turned off, but the A/C system shall remain active to
prevent fogging of the windows.
• If not operating in AUTO mode, the system will not
automatically sense the presence of fog, mist or ice on
the windshield. Defrost Mode must be manually se-
lected to clear the windshield and side glass.
• If fog or mist appears on the windshield or side glass,
select Defrost Mode and adjust blower speed if needed.
MAX A/C
MAX A/C sets the control for maximum cooling perfor-
mance. Press and release to toggle between MAX A/C and
the prior settings. The button illuminates when MAX A/C
is on. In MAX A/C, the blower level and mode position can
be adjusted to desired user settings. Pressing other settings
will cause the MAX A/C operation to switch to the selected
setting and MAX A/C to exit.
Recirculation
In cold weather, use of recirculation mode may lead to
excessive window fogging. The Recirculation feature may
be unavailable (button on the touchscreen greyed out) if
conditions exist that could create fogging on the inside of
the windshield.
On systems with Manual Climate Controls, the Recircula-
tion mode is not allowed in Defrost mode to improve
window clearing operation. Recirculation will be disabled
automatically if this mode is selected. Attempting to use
Recirculation while in this mode will cause the LED in the
control button to blink and then turn off.
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) — If
Equipped
Automatic Operation
1. Push the AUTO button on the faceplate, or the AUTO
button on the touchscreen on the Automatic Tempera-
ture Control (ATC) Panel.
84 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
2. Next, adjust the temperature you would like the system
to maintain by adjusting the driver and passenger
temperature control buttons. Once the desired tempera-
ture is displayed, the system will achieve and automati-
cally maintain that comfort level.
3. When the system is set up for your comfort level, it is
not necessary to change the settings. You will experience
the greatest efficiency by simply allowing the system to
function automatically.
NOTE:
• It is not necessary to move the temperature settings for
cold or hot vehicles. The system automatically adjusts
the temperature, mode, and blower speed to provide
comfort as quickly as possible.
• The temperature can be displayed in U.S. or Metric units
by selecting the US/Metric customer programmable
feature. To provide you with maximum comfort in the
Automatic mode during cold start-ups, the blower fan
will remain on low until the engine warms up. The
blower will increase in speed and transition into Auto
mode.
Manual Operation Override
This system offers a full complement of manual override
features. The AUTO symbol in the front ATC display will
be turned off when the system is being used in the manual
mode.
Operating Tips
NOTE: Refer to the chart at the end of this section for
suggested control settings for various weather conditions.
Summer Operation
The engine cooling system must be protected with a
high-quality antifreeze coolant to provide proper corrosion
protection and to protect against engine overheating. OAT
coolant (conforming to MS.90032) is recommended. Refer
to “Fluids And Lubricants” in “Technical Specifications”
for proper coolant selection.
Winter Operation
To ensure the best possible heater and defroster perfor-
mance, make sure the engine cooling system is functioning
properly and the proper amount, type, and concentration
of coolant is used. Refer to “Fluids And Lubricants” in
“Technical Specifications” for proper coolant selection. Use
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 85
of the air Recirculation mode during Winter months is not
recommended, because it may cause window fogging.
Vacation/Storage
Before you store your vehicle, or keep it out of service (i.e.,
vacation) for two weeks or more, run the air conditioning
system at idle for about five minutes, in fresh air with the
blower setting on high. This will ensure adequate system
lubrication to minimize the possibility of compressor dam-
age when the system is started again.
Window Fogging
Vehicle windows tend to fog on the inside in mild, rainy,
and/or humid weather. To clear the windows, select De-
frost or Mix mode and increase the front blower speed. Do
not use the Recirculation mode without A/C for long
periods, as fogging may occur.
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these cautions can cause damage to
the heating elements:
• Use care when washing the inside of the rear win-
dow. Do not use abrasive window cleaners on the
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
interior surface of the window. Use a soft cloth and a
mild washing solution, wiping parallel to the heat-
ing elements. Labels can be peeled off after soaking
with warm water.
• Do not use scrapers, sharp instruments, or abrasive
window cleaners on the interior surface of the win-
dow.
• Keep all objects a safe distance from the window.
Outside Air Intake
Make sure the air intake, located directly in front of the
windshield, is free of obstructions such as leaves. Leaves
collected in the air intake may reduce airflow, and if they
enter the plenum, they could plug the water drains. In
winter months, make sure the air intake is clear of ice,
slush, and snow.
A/C Air Filter
The climate control system filters out dust and pollen from
the air. Refer to an authorized dealer for filter replacement
instructions.
86 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Operating Tips Chart WINDOWS
Power Vent Windows — If Equipped
The power vent window switch located on the driver’s
door trim panel allows the driver to operate the two vent
windows from the driver’s seat.
Power Vent Window Switch Open/Close
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 87
Power Windows
You can control either the front or rear windows using
controls located on the driver’s door trim panel.
The driver may lock out the rear power windows by
pushing the bar control just below the power window
controls.
The controls will operate only when the ignition switch is
in the ON/RUN or ACC position and during power
accessory delay.
NOTE: Power Window controls will also remain active for
up to 10 minutes after the ignition switch has been turned
to OFF, depending upon the accessory delay setting. Open-
ing a front door will cancel this feature.
There is a single control on the front passenger’s door trim
panel which operates the passenger door window and a set
of controls that lock and unlock all doors. The controls will
operate only when the ignition switch is in the ON/RUN
or ACC position and during power accessory delay.
Power Window Lockout Switch
Driver Power Window Switches
88 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Auto Up Feature With Anti-Pinch Protection — If
Equipped
The front driver and front passenger controls may be
equipped with an Auto Up feature. Lift the window switch
fully upward to the second detent, release, and the window
will go up automatically.
To stop the window from going all the way up during the
Auto Up operation, push down on the control briefly.
To close the window part way, lift the window control to
the first detent and release when you want the window to
stop.
NOTE:
• If the window runs into any obstacle during auto-
closure, it will reverse direction and then go back down.
Remove the obstacle and use the window control again
to close the window.
• Any impact due to rough road conditions may trigger
the auto reverse function unexpectedly during auto-
closure. If this happens, pull the control lightly to the
first detent and hold to close window manually.
WARNING!
There is no anti-pinch protection when the window is
almost closed. To avoid personal injury be sure to clear
your arms, hands, fingers and all objects from the
window path before closing.
Auto Up Reset — If Equipped
To reactivate the Auto Up feature, perform the following
steps after vehicle power is restored:
1. Pull the window control up to close the window com-
pletely and continue to hold the control up for an
additional two seconds after the window is closed.
2. Push the window control down firmly to the second
detent to open the window completely and continue to
hold the control down for an additional two seconds
after the window is fully open.
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 89
Sliding Side Door Power Window Control — If
Equipped
Second row passengers may open and close the sliding
door window by a single control on the door handle
assembly.
The controls will operate only when the ignition switch is
in the ON/RUN or ACC position and during power
accessory delay.
NOTE:
• The controls will not operate if the driver has activated
the Power Window Lockout.
• The sliding door windows do not open fully. They stop
several inches above the window sill.
Wind Buffeting
Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of
pressure on the ears or a helicopter-type sound in the ears.
Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the windows
down, or the sunroof (if equipped) in certain open or
partially open positions. This is a normal occurrence and
can be minimized. If the rear windows are open and
buffeting occurs, open the front and rear windows together
to minimize the buffeting. If the buffeting occurs with the
sunroof open, adjust the sunroof opening to minimize the
buffeting.
Sliding Door Power Window Control
90 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
HOOD
Opening The Hood
To open the hood, two latches must be released.
1. Pull the hood release lever located on the instrument
panel, below the steering column.
2. Move to the front of the vehicle and look inside the
center of the hood opening. Locate, then push the safety
catch downward while raising the hood at the same
time.
Hood Release Lever
Safety Lever Location
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 91
Use the hood prop rod to secure the hood in the open
position.
Closing The Hood
WARNING!
Be sure the hood is fully latched before driving your
vehicle. If the hood is not fully latched, it could open
when the vehicle is in motion and block your vision.
Failure to follow this warning could result in serious
injury or death.
CAUTION!
To prevent possible damage, do not slam the hood to
close it. Lower hood to approximately 12 inches (30 cm)
and drop the hood to close. Make sure hood is fully
closed for both latches. Never drive vehicle unless
hood is fully closed, with both latches engaged.
LIFTGATE
Opening
To Unlock/Enter The Liftgate
The liftgate may be released in several ways:
• Overhead console liftgate button
• Key fob
• Outside handle
Push the liftgate button on the key fob twice within five
seconds to release the liftgate.
Hood Prop Rod
92 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Closing
To Close The Liftgate
Grasp the liftgate closing handle and initiate lowering the
liftgate. Release the handle when the liftgate takes over the
closing effort.
The power liftgate may be closed by pushing the button,
located in the upper left trim in the liftgate opening.
Pushing once will only close the liftgate. This button
cannot be used to open the liftgate.
WARNING!
• Driving with the liftgate open can allow poisonous
exhaust gases into your vehicle. You and your pas-
sengers could be injured by these fumes. Keep the
liftgate closed when you are operating the vehicle.
• If you are required to drive with the liftgate open,
make sure that all windows are closed, and the
climate control blower switch is set at high speed. Do
not use the recirculation mode.
Liftgate Handle Rear Power Liftgate Switch
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 93
Power Liftgate — If Equipped
The power liftgate may be opened or closed in several
ways:
• Overhead console liftgate button
• Key fob
• Outside handle (opens liftgate only)
• Button just inside the liftgate on the upper left trim
(when liftgate is open)
Using the above ways:
• When the liftgate is fully closed, the liftgate will open
• When the liftgate is fully open, the liftgate will close
• When the liftgate is moving, the liftgate will reverse
Push the Power Liftgate button on the Overhead Console
to open or close the liftgate.
Push the liftgate button on the key fob twice within five
seconds to open or close the liftgate.
Overhead Console Power Switches
1 — Left Sliding Door
2 — Liftgate
3 — Right Sliding Door
4 — Sliding Door Power Off
94 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
To Close The Liftgate
The liftgate can also be closed using the Rear Interior
Power Liftgate button (if equipped), located in the upper
left trim in the liftgate opening.
Cargo Area Features
Cargo Area Storage
The liftgate sill plate has a raised line with the statement
“Load To This Line”. This line indicates how far rearward
cargo can be placed without interfering with liftgate clos-
ing.
NOTE: With all rear seats stowed or removed,4x8foot
sheets of building material will fit on the vehicle floor with
the liftgate closed. The front seats must be moved slightly
forward of the rearmost position.
Rear Interior Power Liftgate Switch
Rear Cargo Area Loading Limit
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 95
LOAD LEVELING SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED
The automatic load leveling system will provide a level-
riding vehicle under most passenger and cargo loading
conditions.
A hydraulic pump contained within the shock absorbers
raises the rear of the vehicle to the correct height. It takes
approximately 1 mile (1.6 km) of driving for the leveling to
complete depending on road surface conditions.
If the leveled vehicle is not moved for approximately 15
hours, the leveling system will bleed itself down. The
vehicle must be driven to reset the system.
GARAGE DOOR OPENER — IF EQUIPPED
HomeLink replaces up to three remote controls (hand-held
transmitters) that operate devices such as garage door
openers, motorized gates, lighting or home security sys-
tems. The HomeLink unit operates off your vehicle’s
battery.
The HomeLink buttons, located on either the overhead
console, headliner or sunvisor, designate the three different
HomeLink channels. The HomeLink indicator is located
above the center button.
HomeLink Buttons/Overhead Consoles
96 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: HomeLink is disabled when the Vehicle Security
Alarm is active.
Before You Begin Programming HomeLink
Be sure that your vehicle is parked outside of the garage
before you begin programming.
For more efficient programming and accurate transmission
of the radio-frequency signal, it is recommended that a new
battery be placed in the hand-held transmitter of the device
that is being programmed to the HomeLink system.
To erase the channels, place the ignition in the ON/RUN
position and push and hold the two outside HomeLink
buttons (I and III) for up 20 seconds or until the red
indicator flashes.
NOTE:
• Erasing all channels should only be performed when
programming HomeLink for the first time. Do not erase
channels when programming additional buttons.
• If you have any problems, or require assistance, please
call toll-free 1-800-355-3515 or, on the Internet at
HomeLink.com for information or assistance.
HomeLink Buttons/Sunvisor/Headliner
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 97
Programming A Rolling Code
For programming garage door openers that were manufac-
tured after 1995:
These garage door openers can be identified by the
“LEARN” or “TRAIN” button located where the hanging
antenna is attached to the garage door opener. It is NOT the
button that is normally used to open and close the door.
The name and color of the button may vary by manufac-
turer.
1. Place the ignition in the ON/RUN position.
2. Place the hand-held transmitter 1 to 3 inches (3 to 8 cm)
away from the HomeLink button you wish to program
while keeping the HomeLink indicator light in view.
Training The Garage Door Opener
1 — Door Opener
2 — Training Button
98 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
3. Push and hold the HomeLink button you want to
program while you push and hold the hand-held trans-
mitter button.
4. Continue to hold both buttons and observe the indicator
light. The HomeLink indicator will flash slowly and
then rapidly after HomeLink has received the frequency
signal from the hand-held transmitter. Release both
buttons after the indicator light changes from slow to
rapid.
5. At the garage door opener motor (in the garage), locate
the “LEARN” or “TRAINING” button. This can usually
be found where the hanging antenna wire is attached to
the garage door opener/device motor. Firmly push and
release the “LEARN” or “TRAINING” button. On some
garage door openers/devices there may be a light that
blinks when the garage door opener/device is in the
LEARN/TRAIN mode.
NOTE: You have 30 seconds in which to initiate the next
step after the LEARN button has been pushed.
6. Return to the vehicle and push the programmed
HomeLink button twice (holding the button for two
seconds each time). If the garage door opener/device
activates, programming is complete.
NOTE: If the garage door opener/device does not activate,
push the button a third time (for two seconds) to complete
the training.
To program the remaining two HomeLink buttons, repeat
each step for each remaining button. DO NOT erase the
channels.
Reprogramming A Single HomeLink Button (Rolling
Code)
To reprogram a channel that has been previously trained,
follow these steps:
1. Cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position.
2. Push and hold the desired HomeLink button until the
indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds. Do not
release the button.
3. Without releasing the button, proceed with “Program-
ming A Rolling Code” step two and follow all remaining
steps.
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 99
Programming A Non-Rolling Code
For programming Garage Door Openers manufactured
before 1995:
1. Place the ignition in the ON/RUN position.
NOTE: For vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go,
place the ignition in the RUN position with the engine ON.
Make sure while programming HomeLink with the engine
ON that your vehicle is outside of your garage, or that the
garage door remains open at all times.
2. Place the hand-held transmitter 1 to 3 inches (3 to 8 cm)
away from the HomeLink button you wish to program
while keeping the HomeLink indicator light in view.
3. Push and hold the HomeLink button you want to
program while you push and hold the hand-held trans-
mitter button.
4. Continue to hold both buttons and observe the indicator
light. The HomeLink indicator will flash slowly and
then rapidly after HomeLink has received the frequency
signal from the hand-held transmitter. Release both
buttons after the indicator light changes from slow to
rapid.
5. Push and hold the programmed HomeLink button and
observe the indicator light.
• If the indicator light stays on constantly, programming
is complete and the garage door/device should acti-
vate when the HomeLink button is pushed.
• To program the two remaining HomeLink buttons,
repeat each step for each remaining button. DO NOT
erase the channels.
Reprogramming A Single HomeLink Button
(Non-Rolling Code)
To reprogram a channel that has been previously trained,
follow these steps:
1. Cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position.
2. Push and hold the desired HomeLink button until the
indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds. Do not
release the button.
3. Without releasing the button, proceed with “Program-
ming A Non-Rolling Code” step two and follow all
remaining steps.
100 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Canadian/Gate Operator Programming
For programming transmitters in Canada/United States
that require the transmitter signals to “time-out” after
several seconds of transmission:
Canadian radio frequency laws require transmitter signals
to time-out (or quit) after several seconds of transmission,
which may not be long enough for HomeLink to pick up
the signal during programming. Similar to this Canadian
law, some U.S. gate operators are designed to time-out in
the same manner.
It may be helpful to unplug the device during the cycling
process to prevent possible overheating of the garage door
or gate motor.
1. Cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position.
2. Place the hand-held transmitter 1 to 3 inches (3 to 8 cm)
away from the HomeLink button you wish to program
while keeping the HomeLink indicator light in view.
3. Continue to push and hold the HomeLink button while
you push and release (“cycle”) your hand-held trans-
mitter every two seconds until HomeLink has success-
fully accepted the frequency signal. The indicator light
will flash slowly and then rapidly when fully trained.
4. Watch for the HomeLink indicator to change flash rates.
When it changes, it is programmed. It may take up to 30
seconds or longer in rare cases. The garage door may
open and close while you are programming.
5. Push and hold the programmed HomeLink button and
observe the indicator light.
NOTE:
• If the indicator light stays on constantly, programming
is complete and the garage door/device should acti-
vate when the HomeLink button is pushed.
• To program the two remaining HomeLink buttons,
repeat each step for each remaining button. DO NOT
erase the channels.
If you unplugged the garage door opener/device for
programming, plug it back in at this time.
Using HomeLink
To operate, push and release the programmed HomeLink
button. Activation will now occur for the programmed
device (i.e. garage door opener, gate operator, security
system, entry door lock, home/office lighting, etc.) The
hand-held transmitter of the device may also be used at
any time.
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 101
Security
It is advised to erase all channels before you sell or turn in
your vehicle.
To do this, push and hold the two outside buttons for 20
seconds until the red indicator flashes.
NOTE: All channels will be erased. Individual channels
cannot be erased.
The HomeLink Universal Transceiver is disabled when the
Vehicle Security Alarm is active.
Troubleshooting Tips
If you are having trouble programming HomeLink, here
are some of the most common solutions:
• Replace the battery in the Garage Door Opener hand-
held transmitter.
• Push the LEARN button on the Garage Door Opener to
complete the training for a Rolling Code.
• Did you unplug the device for programming and re-
member to plug it back in?
If you have any problems, or require assistance, please call
toll-free 1-800-355-3515 or, on the Internet at
HomeLink.com for information or assistance.
WARNING!
• Vehicle exhaust contains carbon monoxide, a danger-
ous gas. Do not run your vehicle in the garage while
programming the transceiver. Exhaust gas can cause
serious injury or death.
• Your motorized door or gate will open and close
while you are programming the universal trans-
ceiver. Do not program the transceiver if people, pets
or other objects are in the path of the door or gate.
Only use this transceiver with a garage door opener
that has a “stop and reverse” feature as required by
Federal safety standards. This includes most garage
door opener models manufactured after 1982. Do not
use a garage door opener without these safety fea-
tures. Call toll-free 1-800-355-3515 or, on the Internet
at HomeLink.com for safety information or assis-
tance.
102 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
General Information
The following regulatory statement applies to all Radio
Frequency (RF) devices equipped in this vehicle:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and
with Industry Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s).
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference received, in-
cluding interference that may cause undesired opera-
tion.
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved
by the party responsible for compliance could void the
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
INTERNAL EQUIPMENT
Storage
Glove Compartments
The glove compartment is located on the passenger side of
the instrument panel and features both an upper and lower
storage area.
Upper And Lower Glove Compartments
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 103
To open the upper compartment, push in the release button
located on the left side of the upper door. The door will
automatically open.
To close the compartment door, push downward on the
door’s surface to latch the door closed.
To open the lower compartment, pull the release handle.
NOTE: The lower compartment is equipped with a lock
that is a part of the compartment handle.
Center Console Features
There are two consoles available: Basic and Super.
WARNING!
Do not operate this vehicle with a console compartment
lid in the open position. Driving with the console
compartment lid open may result in injury in a collision.
Upper Compartment Release Button
Lower Compartment Release Handle
104 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Basic Console
The Basic Console consists of the following features:
• The Basic Console profile allows vehicle occupants to
easily pass through the first row to the second.
• Four cupholders accept up to extra large size beverage
cups or 20 oz (0.6 L) plastic bottles. Cupholders are
dishwasher safe for cleaning.
• The cupholders are removable to access a large storage
bin.
• The Basic Console is removable from the vehicle for
additional floor space by removing the anchor cup plug
and clip at the console base, sliding the console base
forward while lifting slightly to clear the rear load floor
hook.
To reinstall the Basic Console:
1. Position the console at a slight angle (front slightly
higher than the rear).
2. Slide the console rearward into the floor bracket/hook.
3. Align the console until the front anchor cup plug hole is
centered on the winch hole.
4. Reinstall the clip first and then while pushing down-
ward on the console with slight pressure, reinstall the
cover plug.
5. Pull up on the console to be sure it is firmly latched.
WARNING!
In an accident, serious injury could result if the remov-
able floor console is not properly installed. Always be
sure the removable floor console is fully latched.
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 105
Super Console — If Equipped
The Super Console contains multiple storage areas, front
lower pass through, top forward bin, top rearward bin and
rear pull out drawer.
The Super Console contains a pass through storage area
accessible for both the driver and front passenger.
The Super Console tambour doors are opened by pushing
down on the finger tabs and sliding the door. The front
tambour door slides forward, the rear tambour door slides
rearward.
Super Console Pass Through
Super Console
1 — Front Sliding Tambour Door
2 — Cupholder Light Ring
3 — Rear Sliding Tambour Door
106 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: The front cupholder light ring and pass through
lighting is controlled by a dimming switch located on the
instrument panel, refer to “Interior Lights” in “Getting To
Know Your Vehicle” for further information.
Located in the back of the Super Console is a storage
drawer and cupholders for the rear passengers.
Front And Rear Overhead Consoles
Front Overhead Console
Two versions of the overhead console are available. The
base front overhead console features fixed incandescent
courtesy/reading lights, flip-down sunglass storage and
conversation mirror. The premium front overhead console
features an LED focused light that illuminates the instru-
ment panel cupholders, two swiveling LED lights, flip-
down sunglass storage, conversation mirror, optional
power sliding door switches, and an optional power lift-
gate switch.
Rear Drawer Storage
Front Overhead Console
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 107
Rear Overhead Console — If Equipped
The rear overhead storage system is available.
An additional LED at the front of the rear console shines
down on the front foot-well area while in courtesy mode,
for added convenience.
Front Door Storage
Both interior front door panels have multiple pockets for
storage.
WARNING!
If containers of hot liquid are placed in the bottle
holder, they can spill when the door is closed, burning
the occupants. Be careful when closing the doors to
avoid injury.
Driver Seatback Storage — If Equipped
The driver’s seatback has a primary storage pocket on all
models and an optional secondary mesh pocket.
Rear Overhead Console Features
1 — LCD Screen 5 — Storage
2 — Rear HVAC 6 — Storage
3 — Interior Lights 7 — Interior Lights
4 — Storage 8 — Halo Lighting
108 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Umbrella Holder
An umbrella holder has been conveniently molded into the
left front door entry scuff molding.
Second Row Seat Storage Bins — If Equipped
The seat storage bins are located on the floor in front of the
second row seats. The area below the covers can be used
for storage when the second row seat is in the upright
position.
Driver’s Seatback Storage
1 — Bag Holder
2 — Standard Pocket
3 — Mesh Pocket
Umbrella Holder
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 109
Pull up on the storage bin latch to open the cover. Slide the
storage bin locking mechanism to the ⬙lock⬙ position to
allow greater access to the storage bin.
WARNING!
In a collision, serious injury could result if the seat
storage bin covers are not properly latched.
• Do not drive the vehicle with the storage bin covers
open.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• Keep the storage bin covers closed and latched while
the vehicle is in motion.
• Do not operate the storage bin covers while the
vehicle is in motion.
• Do not use a storage bin latch as a tie down.
CAUTION!
The storage bin cover must lay flat and be locked to
avoid damage from contact with the front seat tracks,
which have minimal clearance to the cover. If the
storage bin cover is left in the open position, front seat
adjustment may damage the cover.
Storage Bin Safety Warning
Carefully follow these warnings to help prevent personal
injury or damage to your vehicle:
WARNING!
• Always close the storage bin covers when your
vehicle is unattended.
(Continued)
Storage Bin
110 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
• Do not allow children to have access to the second
row seat storage bins. Once in the storage bin, young
children may not be able to escape. If trapped in the
storage bin, children can die from suffocation or heat
stroke.
• In a collision, serious injury could result if the seat
storage bin covers are not properly latched.
• Do not drive the vehicle with the storage bin covers
open. Keep the storage bin covers closed and latched
while the vehicle is in motion.
• Do not operate the storage bin covers while the
vehicle is in motion.
• Do not use a storage bin latch as a tie down.
CAUTION!
The storage bin cover must lay flat and be locked to
avoid damage from contact with the front seat tracks,
which have minimal clearance to the cover. If the
storage bin cover is left in the open position, front seat
adjustment may damage the cover.
Seat Storage Bin Cover Emergency Release Lever
As a security measure, the Seat Storage Bin Cover has an
Emergency Release Lever built into the latching mecha-
nism.
NOTE: In the event of an individual being locked inside
the storage bin, the storage bin cover can be opened from
inside of the bin by pushing on the glow-in-the-dark lever
attached to the storage bin cover latching mechanism.
Storage Bin Cover Emergency Release Lever
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 111
Coat Hooks
Coat hooks are located along the headliner for the second
and third row seating positions. The coat hook load limit is
10 lbs (4.5 kg). Exceeding the recommended load limit can
cause the coat hooks to break or disengage from the
vehicle.
Cupholders
Instrument Panel Cupholders
The instrument panel cupholders are located in a pull-out
drawer just above the lower storage bin.
Pull the drawer out firmly until it stops, and place the
container to be held in either one of the cupholder wells.
The cupholders are designed to accommodate a wide
variety of container types and sizes. Push down on the
container to engage the cupholder retention features.
Super Console — If Equipped
On models equipped with the Super Console, there are two
cupholders located in the center of the console.
Front Cupholders
Super Console Cupholders
112 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
For rear passengers two cupholders are located in the
pull-out drawer, located in the back of the Super Console.
Pull the drawer out to the first position to use the cuphold-
ers.
Interior Bottle Holders
There are four bottle holders located in the interior. One
bottle holder is molded into each front interior door trim
panels, and one bottle holder is molded into each side
sliding interior door trim panel. Each holder accommo-
dates up to a 20 oz (0.6 L) plastic bottle.
WARNING!
If containers of hot liquid are placed in the bottle
holder, they can spill when the door is closed, burning
the occupants. Be careful when closing the doors to
avoid injury.
Two outboard mesh pockets are on intermediate seating.
The mesh pockets are flexible enough to hold juice boxes,
toys, games or MP3 players, etc.
Rear Cupholders
Interior Bottle Holder
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 113
Sun Screens — If Equipped
Sun screens are available for second and third row seating
windows. The screens store in the sill trim panels, and the
tops of the windows are equipped with hooks that the sun
screens attach to when pulled out.
Gently pull up on the tab to raise the sun screen. Continue
pulling the sun screen until the tab is near the top of the
window.
Once the screen is completely to the top of the window,
extend the top bar of the sun screen over the two hooks
attached to the top of the window.
To lower the sun screen, gently lift the tab upward to
disengage the hooks, and feed the screen back into the base
sill.
Electrical Power Outlets — If Equipped
Two 12 Volt (13 Amp) power outlets are located on the
lower instrument panel, below the open storage bin. The
driver-side power outlet is controlled by the ignition
switch and the passenger-side power outlet is connected
directly to the battery. The driver-side power outlet will
also operate a conventional cigar lighter unit (if equipped
with an optional Smoker’s Package).
Sun Screen Retracted
Sun Screen Extended
114 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
• Do not exceed the maximum power of 160 Watts (13
Amps) at 12 Volts. If the 160 Watt (13 Amp) power
rating is exceeded the fuse protecting the system will
need to be replaced.
• Power outlets are designed for accessory plugs only.
Do not insert any other object in the power outlets as
this will damage the outlet and blow the fuse.
Improper use of the power outlet can cause damage
not covered by your New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
One outlet in the removable floor console (if equipped)
shares a fuse with the lower outlet in the instrument panel
and is also connected to the battery. Do not exceed a
maximum power of 160 Watts (13 Amps) shared between
the lower panel outlet and the removable floor console
outlet.
Instrument Panel Power Outlets
Removable Console Power Outlet
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 115
On vehicles equipped with the center stack the power
outlets are located under the retractable cover. To access the
power outlets push down on the cover and slide it toward
the instrument panel.
There is an additional 12 Volt power outlet located on the
left rear trim panel immediately behind the second row left
passenger seat.
The outlet in the rear quarter panel near the liftgate and the
upper outlet in the instrument panel are both controlled by
the ignition switch. Each of these outlets can support 160
Watts (13 Amps). Do not exceed 160 Watts (13 Amps) for
each of these outlets.
The power outlets include tethered caps, labeled with a key
or battery symbol indicating the power source. The power
outlet, located on the lower instrument panel, is powered
directly from the battery. Items plugged into this power
outlet may discharge the battery and/or prevent the engine
from starting.
Center Stack Power Outlets
Rear Panel Power Outlet
116 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
To avoid serious injury or death:
• Only devices designed for use in this type of outlet
should be inserted into any 12 Volt outlet.
• Do not touch with wet hands.
• Close the lid when not in use and while driving the
vehicle.
• If this outlet is mishandled, it may cause an electric
shock and failure.
CAUTION!
• Many accessories that can be plugged in draw power
from the vehicle’s battery, even when not in use (i.e.,
cellular phones, etc.). Eventually, if plugged in long
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
enough, the vehicle’s battery will discharge suffi-
ciently to degrade battery life and/or prevent the
engine from starting.
• Accessories that draw higher power (i.e., coolers,
vacuum cleaners, lights, etc.), will degrade the bat-
tery even more quickly. Only use these intermit-
tently and with greater caution.
• After the use of high power draw accessories, or long
periods of the vehicle not being started (with acces-
sories still plugged in), the vehicle must be driven a
sufficient length of time to allow the alternator to
recharge the vehicle’s battery.
• Power outlets are designed for accessory plugs only.
Do not hang any type of accessory or accessory
bracket from the plug. Improper use of the power
outlet can cause damage.
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 117
Power Inverter — If Equipped
A 115 Volt, 150 Watt inverter outlet converts DC current to
AC current, and is located on the left rear trim panel
immediately behind the second row left passenger seat.
The power inverter switch is located on the instrument
panel below the climate controls.
To turn on the power outlet, push the switch once. Push the
switch a second time to turn the power outlet off.
This outlet can power cellular phones, electronics and
other low power devices requiring power up to 150 Watts.
Certain high-end video game consoles exceed this power
limit, as will most power tools.
The power inverter is designed with built-in overload
protection. If the power rating of 150 Watts is exceeded, the
power inverter shuts down. Once the electrical device has
been removed from the outlet, the inverter should auto-
matically reset. If the power rating exceeds approximately
170 Watts, the power inverter may have to be reset manu-
ally. To reset the inverter manually push the power inverter
button off and on. To avoid overloading the circuit, check
the power ratings on electrical devices prior to using the
inverter.
WARNING!
To avoid serious injury or death:
• Do not insert any objects into the receptacles.
• Do not touch with wet hands.
• Close the lid when not in use.
• If this outlet is mishandled, it may cause an electric
shock and failure.
Power Inverter Outlet
118 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Smoker’s Package Kit — If Equipped
With the optional authorized dealer installed Smoker’s
Package Kit, a removable ash receiver is inserted into one
of the two cupholders in the center front instrument panel.
To install the ash receiver, align the receiver so the thumb
grip on the lid is facing rearward. Push the ash receiver
into either of the cup wells to secure. Pull upward on the
ash receiver to remove for cleaning and/or storage.
The left rear trim panel cupholder is designed to accom-
modate a second ash receiver, if desired.
Sunglass Storage Bin — If Equipped
At the front of the overhead console, a compartment is
provided for the storage of two pairs of sunglasses.
From the closed position, push the door latch to open the
compartment.
Over Door Latch
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 119
The door will slowly rotate to the full open position.
From this position, the door can be fully closed or, by
rotating upward about 3/4 of the way and releasing,
positioned for conversation mirror use.
NOTE: From the “conversation mirror” position, the door
can only be closed.
To return to the full open position, the door must first be
closed and then opened by pushing the latch again to
release.
Full Open Position
Conversation Mirror Position
120 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
ROOF LUGGAGE RACK — IF EQUIPPED
The crossbars on your vehicle are delivered stowed within
the roof rack side rails. If adding cargo, deploy the cross-
bars. Distribute cargo weight evenly on the roof rack
crossbars, to maximum of 150 lbs (68 kg). The roof rack
does not increase the total load carrying capacity of the
vehicle. Be sure the total load of cargo inside the vehicle
plus that on the external rack does not exceed the maxi-
mum vehicle load capacity.
The crossbars and side rails are designed to carry weight
on vehicles equipped with a luggage rack. The load must
not exceed 150 lbs (68 kg), and should be uniformly
distributed over the luggage rack crossbars.
NOTE:
• Crossbars are error-proofed and cannot be deployed or
stowed in the incorrect positions.
• To help control wind noise, stow the crossbars in the side
rails when they are not in use.
Crossbar Stowed In Side Rail
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 121
Deploying The Crossbars
To deploy the crossbars, completely loosen the thumb
screws at both ends of the crossbar and lift the crossbar
from its stowed position in the side rail. Repeat with
crossbar on the opposite side.
CAUTION!
Use care when removing and handling the crossbars to
prevent damage to the vehicle.
Bend the crossbar supports at each end, taking care to keep
hand clear of pivoting joint. Slide the thumb screw down.
Loosening Crossbars
Stowed Position
122 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Then, position the crossbars across the roof.
NOTE: The crossbars are identical and can be placed in
any two of the three deploy positions.
Deployed Position Deploy Positions – Choose Two Of Three
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 123
Make sure the directional arrows on the crossbars align
with the directional arrows on the side rails. Set the
crossbars into the deployed positions.
Once the crossbars are set into position, tighten the thumb
screws completely.
Crossbar To Side Rail Installation
Tightening Crossbar
124 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Stowing The Crossbars
Reverse the procedure to stow the crossbars, again, taking
care to keep hand clear of pivoting joint. Crossbars are
identical and can be stowed in either rail nest. Once the
crossbars are stowed, tighten the thumb screws completely.
NOTE: Load should always be secured to crossbars first,
with rail tie down loops used as additional securing points
if needed. Tie loops are intended as supplementary tie
down points only. Do not use ratcheting mechanisms with
the tie loops.
WARNING!
Cargo must be securely tied down before driving your
vehicle. Improperly secured loads can fly off the ve-
hicle, particularly at high speeds, resulting in personal
injury or property damage. Follow the roof rack cau-
tions when carrying cargo on your roof rack.
CAUTION!
• To prevent damage to the roof of your vehicle, DO
NOT carry any loads on the roof rack without the
crossbars deployed. The load should be secured and
placed on top of the crossbars, not directly on the
roof. If it is necessary to place the load on the roof,
place a blanket or other protective layer between the
load and the roof surface.
• To avoid damage to the roof rack and vehicle, do not
exceed the maximum roof rack load capacity of 150 lb
(68 kg). Always distribute heavy loads as evenly as
possible and secure the load appropriately.
(Continued)
Rail Tie Loops
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 125
CAUTION! (Continued)
• Load should always be secured to cross bars first,
with tie down loops used as additional securing
points if needed. Tie loops are intended as supple-
mentary tie down points only. Do not use ratcheting
mechanisms with the tie loops. Check the straps and
thumb wheels frequently to be sure that the load
remains securely attached.
• Long loads that extend over the windshield, such as
wood panels or surfboards, or loads with large
frontal area should be secured to both the front and
rear of the vehicle.
• Travel at reduced speeds and turn corners carefully
when carrying large or heavy loads on the roof rack.
Wind forces, due to natural causes or nearby truck
traffic, can add sudden upward lift to a load. This is
especially true on large flat loads and may result in
damage to the cargo or your vehicle.
126 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
CONTENTS
䡵 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER ..................128
▫ Instrument Cluster Descriptions ............129
䡵 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DISPLAY ...........131
▫ Instrument Cluster Display Location And
Controls .............................132
▫ Oil Life Reset..........................134
▫ Instrument Cluster Display Menu Items ......134
䡵 TRIP COMPUTER .......................142
䡵 WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES .........143
▫ Red Warning Lights .....................143
▫ Yellow Warning Lights ...................147
▫ White Indicator Lights ...................150
▫ Green Indicator Lights ...................151
▫ Blue Indicator Lights ....................151
䡵 ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM — OBD II . . .151
▫ Onboard Diagnostic System (OBD II)
Cybersecurity .........................152
䡵 EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE
PROGRAMS ...........................153
4
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
Base Instrument Cluster
128 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Instrument Cluster Descriptions
1. Tachometer
Indicates the engine speed in revolutions per minute (RPM
x 1000).
2. Instrument Cluster Display— If Equipped / Odometer
Display / Trip Odometer Display
• Instrument Cluster Display— If Equipped
Premium Instrument Cluster
4
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 129
The instrument cluster display features a driver-
interactive display that is located in the instrument
cluster. Refer to “Instrument Cluster Display” in this
section for further information.
• Odometer Display / Trip Odometer Display
The odometer display shows the total distance the
vehicle has been driven.
This also displays Trip A and Trip B, DTE, MPG or
L/100km, OAT (Outside Air Temperature) information
to Base Cluster, use STEP and RESET button (on
steering wheel) to access or reset the display.
• Message Display Area
When the appropriate conditions exist, the following
odometer messages will display:
door — Door Ajar
gATE — Liftgate Ajar
LoW tirE — Low Tire Pressure
gASCAP — Fuel Cap Fault
noFUSE — Fuse Fault
CHAngE OIL — Oil Change Required
LoCOOL — Low Coolant
3. Speedometer
Indicates vehicle speed.
4. Fuel Gauge
• The gauge shows the level of fuel in the fuel tank when
the ignition switch is in the ON/RUN position.
•
The fuel pump symbol points to the side of the
vehicle where the fuel door is located.
5. Temperature Gauge
• The temperature gauge shows engine coolant tem-
perature. Any reading within the normal range indi-
cates that the engine cooling system is operating
satisfactorily.
• The gauge can indicate a higher temperature when
driving in hot weather or up mountain grades. It
should not be allowed to exceed the upper limits of the
normal operating range.
130 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
WARNING!
Driving with a hot engine cooling system could dam-
age your vehicle. If the temperature gauge reaches “H”
pull over and stop the vehicle. Idle the vehicle with the
air conditioner turned off until the gauge drops back
into the normal range and is no longer red. If the gauge
remains on the “H”, turn the engine off immediately
and call an authorized dealer for service.
WARNING!
A hot engine cooling system is dangerous. You or
others could be badly burned by steam or boiling
coolant. You may want to call an authorized dealer for
service if your vehicle overheats. If you decide to look
under the hood yourself, see “Servicing And Mainte-
nance”.
NOTE: The hard telltales will illuminate for a bulb check
when the ignition is first cycled.
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DISPLAY
Your vehicle is equipped with an instrument cluster dis-
play, which offers useful information to the driver. With the
ignition in the STOP/OFF position (and the key removed,
for vehicles with mechanical key), opening/closing of a
door will activate the display for viewing, and display the
total miles or kilometers in the odometer. Your instrument
cluster display is designed to display important informa-
tion about your vehicle’s systems and features. Using a
driver interactive display located on the instrument panel,
your instrument cluster display can show you how sys-
tems are working and give you warnings when they are
not. The steering wheel mounted controls allow you to
scroll through and enter the main menus and sub-menus.
You can access the specific information you want and make
selections and adjustments.
4
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 131
Instrument Cluster Display Location And Controls
The vehicle’s instrument cluster is equipped with an
instrument cluster display, which offers useful information
to the driver. With the ignition in the STOP/OFF position,
opening/closing of a door will activate the instrument
cluster display for viewing, and display the total miles or
kilometers in the odometer.
The instrument cluster display menu items consists of the
following:
• Fuel Economy
• Vehicle Speed
• Trip Info
• Tire Pressure
• Vehicle Info
• Messages
• Units
• System Setup (Personal Settings)
• Turn Menu Off
Instrument Cluster Display
132 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
The system allows the driver to select information by
pushing the following buttons mounted on the steering
wheel:
• Up Button
Push and release the up button to scroll upward
through the main menu items (Fuel Economy,
Vehicle Info, Tire PSI, Cruise, Messages, Units,
System Setup).
• Down Button
Push and release the down button to scroll
downward through the main menu items.
• Right Button
The right button allows access to information in
instrument cluster display submenus, selects
some feature settings, and resets some instru-
ment cluster display features. The instrument
cluster display prompts the driver when the right button
can be used by displaying the right arrow graphic.
Once the right button has been selected for the desired
submenu list, follow the instrument cluster display
prompts to properly select the desired submenu instru-
ment cluster display features.
• BACK Button
Push and release the BACK button to scroll back
to a previous menu or sub-menu.
Instrument Cluster Display Steering Wheel Buttons
4
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 133
Oil Life Reset
• Your vehicle is equipped with an engine oil change
indicator system. The “Oil Change Required” message
will display for approximately ten seconds after a single
chime has sounded, to indicate the next scheduled oil
change interval. The engine oil change indicator system
is duty cycle based, which means the engine oil change
interval may fluctuate, dependent upon your personal
driving style.
• Unless reset, this message will continue to display each
time the ignition is cycled to the ON/RUN position.
• To reset the oil change indicator after performing the
scheduled maintenance, refer to the following proce-
dure.
1. Turn the ignition to the ON/RUN position (do not start
the engine).
2. Fully press the accelerator pedal, slowly, three times
within 10 seconds.
3. Turn the ignition to the OFF/LOCK position.
NOTE: If the indicator message illuminates when you
start the vehicle, the oil change indicator system did not
reset. If necessary, repeat this procedure.
Instrument Cluster Display Menu Items
NOTE: The instrument cluster display menu items display
in the center of the instrument cluster. Menu items may
vary depending on your vehicle features.
Fuel Economy
Push and release the up or down arrow button until “Fuel
Economy” displays highlighted in the instrument cluster
display and push the right arrow button. The following
Fuel Economy functions display in the instrument cluster
display:
• Average Fuel Economy (MPG or L/100 km)
• Distance To Empty (mi or km)
• Current Fuel Economy (MPG or L/100 km)
Vehicle Speed
Push and release the up or down arrow button until
“Vehicle Speed” displays highlighted in the instrument
cluster display and push the right arrow button. Push and
release the right arrow button to display the current speed
in mph or km/h. Pushing the right arrow button a second
time will toggle the unit of measure between mph
or km/h.
134 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
NOTE: Changing the unit of measure in the Vehicle Speed
menu will not change the unit of measure in the instrument
cluster display.
Trip Info
Push and release the up or down arrow button until “Trip
Info” is highlighted in the instrument cluster display and
push the right button. Push and release the up or down
arrow button to highlight one of the following functions:
• Trip A
• Trip B
• Elapsed Time
• Trip Reset
Tire Pressure
Push and release the up or down arrow button until “Tire
PSI:” displays highlighted in the instrument cluster dis-
play. Push and release the right arrow button to view a
graphic of the vehicle with a tire pressure value at each
corner of the graphic.
Units
Push and release the up or down arrow button until
“Units” displays highlighted in the instrument cluster
display and push the right arrow button. The instrument
cluster display, odometer, and navigation system (if
equipped) can be changed between English and Metric
units of measure. To make your selection, scroll up or
down until the preferred setting is highlighted, then push
and release the right arrow button until a check-mark
appears next to the setting, showing that the setting has
been selected.
Vehicle Info (Customer Information Features)
Push and release the up or down arrow button until “Vehicle
Info” displays in the instrument cluster display and push the
right arrow button. Push the up or down arrow button to scroll
through the available information displays.
• Coolant Temperature
Displays the actual coolant temperature.
• Oil Temperature
Displays the actual oil temperature.
• Oil Pressure — If Equipped
Displays the actual oil pressure.
• Transmission Temperature
Displays the actual transmission temperature.
4
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 135
• Engine Hours
Displays the number of hours of engine operation.
Messages
Push and release the up or down arrow button until
“Messages: XX” displays highlighted in the instrument
cluster display. If there is more than one message, pushing
the right arrow button will display a stored warning
message. Push and release the up or down arrow button if
there is more than one message to cycle through the
remaining stored messages. If there are no messages,
pushing the right arrow button will not change the display.
Compass/Outside Temperature Display
The compass readings indicate the direction the vehicle is
facing. The instrument cluster display will display eight or
fifteen compass readings and the outside temperature.
NOTE: The system will display the last known outside
temperature when starting the vehicle and may need to be
driven several minutes before the updated temperature is
displayed. Engine temperature can also affect the dis-
played temperature; therefore, temperature readings are
not updated when the vehicle is not moving.
Automatic Compass Calibration
This compass is self-calibrating, which eliminates the need
to set the compass manually. When the vehicle is new, the
compass may appear erratic, and the instrument cluster
display will display “CAL” until the compass is calibrated.
You may also calibrate the compass by completing one or
more 360–degree turns (in an area free from large metal or
metallic objects) until the “CAL” message displayed in the
instrument cluster display turns off. The compass will now
function normally.
NOTE: A good calibration requires a level surface and an
environment free from large metallic objects such as build-
ings, bridges, underground cables, railroad tracks, etc.
Manual Compass Calibration
If the compass appears erratic and the CAL indicator does
not appear in the instrument cluster display, you must put
the compass into the Calibration Mode manually, as fol-
lows:
1. Turn ON the ignition switch.
2. Push and release the up or down arrow button until the
System Setup (Customer-Programmable Features) menu
is reached, then push and release the right arrow button.
136 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
3. Push and release the down button until “Calibrate
Compass” is displayed in the instrument cluster display
then push and release the right button.
4. Push and release the right button to start the calibration.
The “CAL” indicator will be displayed in the instrument
cluster display.
5. Complete one or more 360–degree turns (in an area free
from large metal or metallic objects) until the “CAL”
indicator turns off. The compass will now function
normally.
Compass Variance
Compass Variance is the difference between Magnetic
North and Geographic North. To compensate for the
differences the variance should be set for the zone where
the vehicle is driven, per the zone map. Once properly set,
the compass will automatically compensate for the differ-
ences, and provide the most accurate compass heading. For
the most accurate compass performance, the compass must
be set using the following steps.
NOTE: Keep magnetic materials away from the top of the
instrument panel, such as iPod’s, Mobile Phones, Laptops
and Radar Detectors. This is where the compass module is
located, and it can cause interference with the compass
sensor, and it may give false readings.
1. Turn the ignition switch ON.
2. Push and release the up or down arrow button until the
Setup (Customer-Programmable Features) menu is
reached, then push the right arrow button.
Compass Variance Map
4
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 137
3. Push and release the down arrow button until the
“Compass Variance” message is displayed in the instru-
ment cluster display, then press the right arrow button.
The last variance zone number displays in the instru-
ment cluster display.
4. Push and release the right arrow button until the proper
variance zone is selected, according to the map.
5. Push and release the RETURN button to exit.
Turn Menu OFF
Select from Main Menu using the up or down arrow
button. Pushing the right arrow button clears the menu
display. Pushing any one of the four Display control
buttons will bring the menu back.
Customer-Programmable Features (System Setup)
Personal Settings allows you to set and recall features
when the transmission is in PARK. If the transmission is
out of PARK or the vehicle begins moving, a warning
message SYSTEM SETUP NOT AVAILABLE VEHICLE
NOT IN PARK displays when you try to select “System
Setup” from the main menu.
Push and release the up or down arrow button until
⬙System Setup⬙ is highlighted in the main menu of the
instrument cluster display. Then, push and release the
right arrow button to enter the System Setup sub-menu.
Push and release the up or down arrow button to select a
feature form the following choices.
Language
When in this display you may select one of three languages
for all display screens, including the trip functions and the
navigation system (if equipped). Push and release the up or
down arrow button while in this display and scroll through
the language choices. Push and release the right arrow
button to select English, Spanish (Español), or French
(Français). Then, as you continue, the information will
display in the selected language.
Nav–Turn By Turn
When this feature is selected, the navigation system utilizes
voice commands, guiding you through the drive route mile
by mile, turn-by-turn, until the final destination is reached.
To make your selection, push and release the right arrow
button until a check-mark appears next to the feature
showing the system has been activated, or the check-mark
is removed showing the system has been deactivated.
138 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Auto Lock Doors
When selected, all doors will lock automatically when the
vehicle reaches a speed of 15 mph (24 km/h). To make your
selection, push and release the right arrow button until a
check-mark appears.
Auto Unlock Doors
When this feature is selected, all doors will unlock when
the vehicle is stopped and the transmission is in the PARK
or NEUTRAL position and the driver’s door is opened. To
make your selection, push and release the right arrow
button until a check-mark appears next to the feature
showing the system has been activated, or the check-mark
is removed showing the system has been deactivated.
Remote Unlock Sequence
When Unlock Driver Door Only On 1st Press is selected,
only the driver’s side doors will unlock on the first push of
the key fob unlock button. With Unlock Driver Door Only
On 1st Press, you must push the key fob unlock button
twice to unlock the passenger’s doors. When Unlock All
Doors On 1st Press is selected, all of the doors will unlock
on the first push of the key fob unlock button. To make
your selection, push and release the right arrow button
until a check-mark appears next to the feature showing the
system has been activated or the check-mark is removed
showing the system has been deactivated.
Remote Start Comfort Sys.
When this feature is selected and the remote start is
activated, the heated steering wheel and driver heated seat
features will automatically turn on in cold weather. These
features will stay on through the duration of remote start or
until the key is cycled to ON/RUN position. To make your
selection, push and release the right arrow button until a
check-mark appears next to the feature showing the system
has been activated or the check-mark is removed showing
the system has been deactivated.
Horn With Remote Lock
When this feature is selected, a short horn sound will occur
when the key fob lock button is pushed. To make your
selection, push and release the right arrow button until a
check-mark appears next to the feature showing the system
has been activated or the check-mark is removed showing
the system has been deactivated.
Flash Lamps With Lock
When selected, the front and rear turn signals will flash
when the doors are locked with the key fob. To make your
4
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 139
selection, push and release the right arrow button until a
check-mark appears next to the feature showing the system
has been activated or the check-mark is removed showing
the system has been deactivated.
Automatic High Beams — If Equipped
When this feature is selected, the high beam headlights will
deactivate automatically under certain conditions. To make
your selection, push and release the right arrow button
until a check-mark appears next to the feature showing the
system has been activated or the check-mark is removed
showing the system has been deactivated.
Headlamp Off Delay
When this feature is selected, the driver can choose to have
the headlights remain on for 0, 30, 60, or 90 seconds when
exiting the vehicle. To make your selection, scroll up or
down until the preferred setting is highlighted, then push
and release the right arrow button until a check-mark
appears next to the setting, showing that the setting has
been selected.
Headlamps With Wipers (Available With Auto
Headlights Only)
When ON is selected, and the headlight switch is in the
AUTO position, the headlights will turn on approximately
10 seconds after the wipers are turned on. The headlights
will also turn off when the wipers are turned off if they
were turned on by this feature. To make your selection,
push and release the right arrow button until a check-mark
appears next to the setting, showing that the setting has
been selected.
NOTE: Turning the headlights on during the daytime
causes the instrument panel lights to dim. To increase the
brightness, refer to “Interior Lights” in “Getting To Know
Your Vehicle.”
Intermittent Wiper Options — If Equipped
When ON is selected, the system will automatically acti-
vate the windshield wipers if it senses moisture on the
windshield. To make your selection, push and release the
right arrow button until a check-mark appears next to the
feature showing the system has been activated or the
check-mark is removed showing the system has been
deactivated. When the system is deactivated, the system
reverts to the standard intermittent wiper operation.
Key-Off Power Delay
When this feature is selected, the power window switches,
radio, Uconnect phone (if equipped), DVD video system (if
equipped), power sunroof (if equipped), and power outlets
140 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
will remain active for up to 10 minutes after the ignition
switch is turned OFF. Opening either front vehicle door
will cancel this feature. To make your selection, scroll up or
down until the preferred setting is highlighted, then push
and release the right arrow button until a check-mark
appears next to the setting, showing that the setting has
been selected.
Illuminated Approach
When this feature is selected, the headlights will activate
and remain on for up to 90 seconds when the doors are
unlocked with the key fob. To make your selection, scroll
up or down until the preferred setting is highlighted, then
push and release the right arrow button until a check-mark
appears next to the setting, showing that the setting has
been selected.
Hill Start Assist (HSA) — If Equipped
When on is selected, the HSA system is active. Refer to
“Electronic Brake Control System” in “Safety” for system
function and operating information. To make your selec-
tion, push and release the right arrow button until “ON” or
“OFF” appears.
Flashers With Sliding Door
When this feature is selected, the signal lamps activate
when power or manual sliding doors are in operation,
signaling other drivers that someone may be exiting or
entering the vehicle. To make your selection, push and
release the right arrow button until a check-mark appears
next to the feature showing the system has been activated
or the check-mark is removed, showing the system has
been deactivated.
Tilt Mirror In Reverse — If Equipped
When this feature is selected and the vehicle is placed in a
reverse gear, the driver’s side mirror will tilt downward to
allow the driver to see into the previous blind spot and
avoid objects in close proximity to the rear of the vehicle.
To make your selection, push and release the right arrow
button until a check-mark appears next to the feature
showing the system has been activated, or the check-mark
is removed showing the system has been deactivated.
Blind Spot Alert — If Equipped
There are three selections when operating Blind Spot Alert
(“Blind Spot Alert Lights,” “Blind Spot Alert Lights/
CHM,” and “Blind Spot Alert Off”). The Blind Spot Alert
feature can be activated in “Blind Spot Alert Lights” mode.
4
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 141
When this mode is selected, the Blind Spot Monitor (BSM)
system is activated and will only show a visual alert in the
outside mirrors. The Blind Spot Alert feature can be
activated in “Blind Spot Alert Lights/CHM” mode. In this
mode, the Blind Spot Monitor (BSM) will show a visual
alert in the outside mirrors as well as an audible alert when
the turn signal is on. When “Blind Spot Alert Off” is
selected, the Blind Spot Monitor (BSM) system is deacti-
vated.
To make your selection, push and release the right arrow
button until a check-mark appears next to the feature,
showing the system has been activated, or the check-mark
is removed, showing the system has been deactivated.
NOTE: If your vehicle has experienced any damage in the
area where the sensor is located, even if the fascia is not
damaged, the sensor may have become misaligned. Take
your vehicle to an authorized dealer to verify sensor
alignment. Having a sensor that is misaligned will result in
the BSM not operating to specification.
Calibrate Compass
Push the right arrow button to calibrate the compass.
TRIP COMPUTER
Push and release the up or down arrow button until “Trip
Info” is highlighted in the instrument cluster display and
push the right button. Push and release the up or down
arrow button to highlight one of the following functions.
Trip A
• Shows the total distance traveled for Trip A since the last
reset.
• Shows the elapsed time traveled for Trip A since the last
reset.
Trip B
• Shows the total distance traveled for Trip B since the last
reset.
• Shows the elapsed time traveled for Trip B since the last
reset.
Elapsed Time
Shows the total elapsed time of travel since the last reset
when the ignition switch is in the ACC position. Elapsed
time will increment when the ignition switch is in the ON
or START position.
142 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
To Reset A Trip Function
Reset will only occur while a resettable function is selected
(highlighted). Push and hold the right arrow button to
clear the resettable function being displayed.
WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES
The warning/indicator lights will illuminate in the instru-
ment panel together with a dedicated message and/or
acoustic signal when applicable. These indications are
indicative and precautionary and as such must not be
considered as exhaustive and/or alternative to the infor-
mation contained in the Owner’s Manual, which you are
advised to read carefully in all cases. Always refer to the
information in this chapter in the event of a failure indica-
tion. All active telltales will display first if applicable. The
system check menu may appear different based upon
equipment options and current vehicle status. Some tell-
tales are optional and may not appear.
Red Warning Lights
— Air Bag Warning Light
This warning light will illuminate to indicate a fault with
the air bag, and will turn on for four to eight seconds as a
bulb check when the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN or
ACC/ON/RUN position. This light will illuminate with a
single chime when a fault with the air bag has been
detected, it will stay on until the fault is cleared. If the light
is either not on during startup, stays on, or turns on while
driving, have the system inspected at an authorized dealer
as soon as possible.
— Brake Warning Light
This warning light monitors various brake functions, in-
cluding brake fluid level and parking brake application. If
the brake light turns on it may indicate that the parking
brake is applied, that the brake fluid level is low, or that
there is a problem with the anti-lock brake system reser-
voir.
If the light remains on when the parking brake has been
disengaged, and the fluid level is at the full mark on the
master cylinder reservoir, it indicates a possible brake
hydraulic system malfunction or that a problem with the
Brake Booster has been detected by the Anti-Lock Brake
System (ABS) / Electronic Stability Control (ESC) system.
In this case, the light will remain on until the condition has
been corrected. If the problem is related to the brake
booster, the ABS pump will run when applying the brake,
and a brake pedal pulsation may be felt during each stop.
4
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 143
The dual brake system provides a reserve braking capacity
in the event of a failure to a portion of the hydraulic
system. A leak in either half of the dual brake system is
indicated by the Brake Warning Light, which will turn on
when the brake fluid level in the master cylinder has
dropped below a specified level.
The light will remain on until the cause is corrected.
NOTE: The light may flash momentarily during sharp
cornering maneuvers, which change fluid level conditions.
The vehicle should have service performed, and the brake
fluid level checked.
If brake failure is indicated, immediate repair is necessary.
WARNING!
Driving a vehicle with the red brake light on is
dangerous. Part of the brake system may have failed. It
will take longer to stop the vehicle. You could have a
collision. Have the vehicle checked immediately.
Vehicles equipped with the Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS)
are also equipped with Electronic Brake Force Distribution
(EBD). In the event of an EBD failure, the Brake Warning
Light will turn on along with the ABS Light. Immediate
repair to the ABS system is required.
Operation of the Brake Warning Light can be checked by
turning the ignition switch from the OFF position to the
ON/RUN position. The light should illuminate for ap-
proximately two seconds. The light should then turn off
unless the parking brake is applied or a brake fault is
detected. If the light does not illuminate, have the light
inspected by an authorized dealer.
The light also will turn on when the parking brake is
applied with the ignition switch in the ON/RUN position.
NOTE: This light shows only that the parking brake is
applied. It does not show the degree of brake application.
— Battery Charge Warning Light
This warning light will illuminate when the battery is not
charging properly. If it stays on while the engine is run-
ning, there may be a malfunction with the charging system.
Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible.
This indicates a possible problem with the electrical system
or a related component.
144 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
— Door Open Warning Light — If Equipped
This indicator will illuminate when a door is ajar/open and
not fully closed.
NOTE: If the vehicle is moving, there will also be a single
chime.
— Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) Warning
Light
This warning light will illuminate to indicate a problem
with the Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) system. If a
problem is detected while the vehicle is running, the light
will either stay on or flash depending on the nature of the
problem. Cycle the ignition when the vehicle is safely and
completely stopped and the transmission is placed in the
PARK position. The light should turn off. If the light
remains on with the vehicle running, your vehicle will
usually be drivable; however, see an authorized dealer for
service as soon as possible.
NOTE: This light may turn on if the accelerator and brake
pedals are pressed at the same time.
If the light continues to flash when the vehicle is running,
immediate service is required and you may experience
reduced performance, an elevated/rough idle, or engine
stall and your vehicle may require towing. The light will
come on when the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN or
ACC/ON/RUN position and remain on briefly as a bulb
check. If the light does not come on during starting, have
the system checked by an authorized dealer.
— Engine Coolant Temperature Warning Light
This warning light warns of an overheated engine condi-
tion. If the engine coolant temperature is too high, this
indicator will illuminate and a single chime will sound. If
the temperature reaches the upper limit, a continuous
chime will sound for four minutes or until the engine is
able to cool: whichever comes first.
If the light turns on while driving, safely pull over and stop
the vehicle. If the A/C system is on, turn it off. Also, shift
the transmission into NEUTRAL and idle the vehicle. If the
temperature reading does not return to normal, turn the
engine off immediately and call for service.
Refer to “If Your Engine Overheats” in “In Case Of
Emergency” for further information.
— Liftgate Open Warning Light
This indicator will turn when the liftgate is open.
NOTE: If the vehicle is moving, there will also be a single
chime.
4
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 145
— Oil Pressure Warning Light
This warning light will illuminate to indicate low engine
oil pressure. If the light turns on while driving, stop the
vehicle, shut off the engine as soon as possible, and contact
an authorized dealer. A chime will sound when this light
turns on.
Do not operate the vehicle until the cause is corrected. This
light does not indicate how much oil is in the engine. The
engine oil level must be checked under the hood.
— Seat Belt Reminder Warning Light
This warning light indicates when the driver or passenger
seat belt is unbuckled. When the ignition is first placed in
the ON/RUN or ACC/ON/RUN position and if the
driver’s seat belt is unbuckled, a chime will sound and the
light will turn on. When driving, if the driver or front
passenger seat belt remains unbuckled, the Seat Belt Re-
minder Light will flash or remain on continuously and a
chime will sound.
Refer to “Occupant Restraint Systems” in “Safety” for
further information.
— Transmission Temperature Warning Light — If
Equipped
This warning light will illuminate to warn of a high
transmission fluid temperature. This may occur with
strenuous usage such as trailer towing. If this light turns
on, stop the vehicle and run the engine at idle or slightly
faster, with the transmission in PARK or NEUTRAL, until
the light turns off. Once the light turns off, you may
continue to drive normally.
WARNING!
If you continue operating the vehicle when the Trans-
mission Temperature Warning Light is illuminated you
could cause the fluid to boil over, come in contact with
hot engine or exhaust components and cause a fire.
CAUTION!
Continuous driving with the Transmission Tempera-
ture Warning Light illuminated will eventually cause
severe transmission damage or transmission failure.
146 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
— Vehicle Security Warning Light — If Equipped
This light will flash at a fast rate for approximately 15
seconds when the vehicle security alarm is arming, and
then will flash slowly until the vehicle is disarmed.
Yellow Warning Lights
— Anti-Lock Brake (ABS) Warning Light
This warning light monitors the Anti-Lock Brake System
(ABS). The light will turn on when the ignition is placed in
the ON/RUN or ACC/ON/RUN position and may stay on
for as long as four seconds.
If the ABS light remains on or turns on while driving, then
the Anti-Lock portion of the brake system is not function-
ing and service is required as soon as possible. However,
the conventional brake system will continue to operate
normally, assuming the Brake Warning Light is not also on.
If the ABS light does not turn on when the ignition is
placed in the ON/RUN or ACC/ON/RUN position, have
the brake system inspected by an authorized dealer.
— Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Active
Warning Light — If Equipped
This warning light will indicate when the Electronic Sta-
bility Control system is Active. The “ESC Indicator Light”
in the instrument cluster will come on when the ignition is
placed in the ON/RUN or ACC/ON/RUN position, and
when ESC is activated. It should go out with the engine
running. If the “ESC Indicator Light” comes on continu-
ously with the engine running, a malfunction has been
detected in the ESC system. If this warning light remains
on after several ignition cycles, and the vehicle has been
driven several miles (kilometers) at speeds greater than
30 mph (48 km/h), see an authorized dealer as soon as
possible to have the problem diagnosed and corrected.
• The “ESC Off Indicator Light” and the “ESC Indicator
Light” come on momentarily each time the ignition is
placed in the ON/RUN or ACC/ON/RUN position.
• The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking sounds
when it is active. This is normal; the sounds will stop
when ESC becomes inactive.
• This light will come on when the vehicle is in an ESC
event.
— Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Off Warning
Light — If Equipped
This warning light indicates the Electronic Stability Control
(ESC) is off.
4
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 147
Each time the ignition is turned to ON/RUN or ACC/ON/
RUN, the ESC system will be on, even if it was turned off
previously.
— Low Fuel Warning Light
When the fuel level reaches approximately 1.85 gal (7 L)
this warning light will turn on, and remain on until fuel is
added.
A single warning chime will sound with Low Fuel Warn-
ing.
— Low Washer Fluid Warning Light — If
Equipped
This warning light will illuminate when the windshield
washer fluid is low.
— Engine Check/Malfunction Indicator Warning
Light (MIL)
The Engine Check/Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) is a
part of an Onboard Diagnostic System called OBD II that
monitors engine and automatic transmission control sys-
tems. This warning light will illuminate when the ignition
is in the ON/RUN position before engine start. If the bulb
does not come on when turning the ignition switch from
OFF to ON/RUN, have the condition checked promptly.
Certain conditions, such as a loose or missing gas cap, poor
quality fuel, etc., may illuminate the light after engine start.
The vehicle should be serviced if the light stays on through
several typical driving styles. In most situations, the ve-
hicle will drive normally and will not require towing.
When the engine is running, the MIL may flash to alert
serious conditions that could lead to immediate loss of
power or severe catalytic converter damage. The vehicle
should be serviced by an authorized dealer as soon as
possible if this occurs.
WARNING!
A malfunctioning catalytic converter, as referenced
above, can reach higher temperatures than in normal
operating conditions. This can cause a fire if you drive
slowly or park over flammable substances such as dry
plants, wood, cardboard, etc. This could result in death
or serious injury to the driver, occupants or others.
CAUTION!
Prolonged driving with the Malfunction Indicator
Light (MIL) on could cause damage to the vehicle
(Continued)
148 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
CAUTION! (Continued)
control system. It also could affect fuel economy and
driveability. If the MIL is flashing, severe catalytic
converter damage and power loss will soon occur.
Immediate service is required.
— Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
Warning Light
The warning light switches on and a message is displayed
to indicate that the tire pressure is lower than the recom-
mended value and/or that slow pressure loss is occurring.
In these cases, optimal tire duration and fuel consumption
may not be guaranteed.
Should one or more tires be in the condition mentioned
above, the display will show the indications corresponding
to each tire.
CAUTION!
Do not continue driving with one or more flat tires as
handling may be compromised. Stop the vehicle,
avoiding sharp braking and steering. If a tire puncture
occurs, repair immediately using the dedicated tire
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
repair kit and contact your authorized dealer as soon as
possible.
Each tire, including the spare (if provided), should be
checked monthly when cold and inflated to the inflation
pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on the
vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label. (If your
vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated
on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label, you
should determine the proper tire inflation pressure for
those tires.)
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been
equipped with a Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when one or
more of your tires is significantly under-inflated. Accord-
ingly, when the low tire pressure telltale illuminates, you
should stop and check your tires as soon as possible, and
inflate them to the proper pressure. Driving on a signifi-
cantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and
can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also reduces fuel
efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect the vehicle’s
handling and stopping ability.
4
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 149
Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire
maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to main-
tain correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation has not
reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low
tire pressure telltale.
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS malfunc-
tion indicator to indicate when the system is not operating
properly. The TPMS malfunction indicator is combined
with the low tire pressure telltale. When the system detects
a malfunction, the telltale will flash for approximately one
minute and then remain continuously illuminated. This
sequence will continue upon subsequent vehicle start-ups
as long as the malfunction exists. When the malfunction
indicator is illuminated, the system may not be able to
detect or signal low tire pressure as intended. TPMS
malfunctions may occur for a variety of reasons, including
the installation of replacement or alternate tires or wheels
on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS from functioning
properly. Always check the TPMS malfunction telltale after
replacing one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to
ensure that the replacement or alternate tires and wheels
allow the TPMS to continue to function properly.
CAUTION!
The TPMS has been optimized for the original equip-
ment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures and warning
have been established for the tire size equipped on
your vehicle. Undesirable system operation or sensor
damage may result when using replacement equip-
ment that is not of the same size, type, and/or style.
Aftermarket wheels can cause sensor damage. Using
aftermarket tire sealants may cause the Tire Pressure
Monitoring System (TPMS) sensor to become inoper-
able. After using an aftermarket tire sealant it is
recommended that you take your vehicle to your au-
thorized dealer to have your sensor function checked.
White Indicator Lights
— Cruise Control Ready Indicator Light
This light will turn on when the speed control has been
turned on, but not set. Refer to “Speed Control — If
Equipped” in “Starting And Operating” for further infor-
mation.
150 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Green Indicator Lights
— Speed Control SET Indicator Light
This light will turn on when the speed control is set. Refer
to “Speed Control” in “Starting And Operating” for further
information.
— Turn Signal Indicator Lights
When the left or right turn signal is activated, the turn
signal indicator will flash independently and the corre-
sponding exterior turn signal lamps will flash. Turn signals
can be activated when the multifunction lever is moved
down (left) or up (right).
NOTE:
• A continuous chime will sound if the vehicle is driven
more than 1 mile (1.6 km) with either turn signal on.
• Check for an inoperative outside light bulb if either
indicator flashes at a rapid rate.
— Park/Headlight On Indicator Light
This indicator light will illuminate when the park lights or
headlights are turned on.
— Front Fog Indicator Light — If Equipped
This indicator light will illuminate when the front fog
lights are on.
Blue Indicator Lights
— High Beam Indicator Light
This indicator light will illuminate to indicate that the high
beam headlights are on. With the low beams activated,
push the multifunction lever forward (toward the front of
the vehicle) to turn on the high beams. Pull the multifunc-
tion lever rearward (toward the rear of the vehicle) to turn
off the high beams. If the high beams are off, pull the lever
toward you for a temporary high beam on, ⬙flash to pass⬙
scenario.
ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM — OBD II
Your vehicle is equipped with a sophisticated Onboard
Diagnostic system called OBD II. This system monitors the
performance of the emissions, engine, and automatic trans-
mission control systems. When these systems are operating
properly, your vehicle will provide excellent performance
and fuel economy, as well as emissions well within current
government regulations.
4
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 151
If any of these systems require service, the OBD II system
will turn on the Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL). It will
also store diagnostic codes and other information to assist
your service technician in making repairs. Although your
vehicle will usually be drivable and not need towing, see
an authorized dealer for service as soon as possible.
CAUTION!
• Prolonged driving with the MIL on could cause
further damage to the emission control system. It
could also affect fuel economy and driveability. The
vehicle must be serviced before any emissions tests
can be performed.
• If the MIL is flashing while the vehicle is running,
severe catalytic converter damage and power loss
will soon occur. Immediate service is required.
Onboard Diagnostic System (OBD II) Cybersecurity
Your vehicle is required to have an Onboard Diagnostic
system (OBD II) and a connection port to allow access to
information related to the performance of your emissions
controls. Authorized service technicians may need to ac-
cess this information to assist with the diagnosis and
service of your vehicle and emissions system.
WARNING!
• ONLY an authorized service technician should con-
nect equipment to the OBD II connection port in
order to read the VIN, diagnose, or service your
vehicle.
• If unauthorized equipment is connected to the OBD
II connection port, such as a driver-behavior tracking
device, it may:
• Be possible that vehicle systems, including safety
related systems, could be impaired or a loss of
vehicle control could occur that may result in an
accident involving serious injury or death.
• Access, or allow others to access, information
stored in your vehicle systems, including personal
information.
For further information, refer to “Cybersecurity” in “Mul-
timedia”.
152 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE
PROGRAMS
In some localities, it may be a legal requirement to pass an
inspection of your vehicle’s emissions control system.
Failure to pass could prevent vehicle registration.
For states that require an Inspection and Main-
tenance (I/M), this check verifies the “Malfunc-
tion Indicator Light (MIL)” is functioning and is
not on when the engine is running, and that the
OBD II system is ready for testing.
Normally, the OBD II system will be ready. The OBD II
system may not be ready if your vehicle was recently
serviced, recently had a dead battery or a battery replace-
ment. If the OBD II system should be determined not ready
for the I/M test, your vehicle may fail the test.
Your vehicle has a simple ignition actuated test, which you
can use prior to going to the test station. To check if your
vehicle’s OBD II system is ready, you must do the follow-
ing:
1. Cycle the ignition switch to the ON position, but do not
crank or start the engine.
NOTE: If you crank or start the engine, you will have to
start this test over.
2. As soon as you cycle the ignition switch to the ON
position, you will see the “Malfunction Indicator Light
(MIL)” symbol come on as part of a normal bulb check.
3. Approximately 15 seconds later, one of two things will
happen:
• The MIL will flash for about ten seconds and then return
to being fully illuminated until you turn OFF the igni-
tion or start the engine. This means that your vehicle’s
OBD II system is not ready and you should not proceed
to the I/M station.
• The MIL will not flash at all and will remain fully
illuminated until you place the ignition in the off posi-
tion or start the engine. This means that your vehicle’s
OBD II system is ready and you can proceed to the I/M
station.
4
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 153
If your OBD II system is not ready, you should see an
authorized dealer or repair facility. If your vehicle was
recently serviced or had a battery failure or replacement,
you may need to do nothing more than drive your vehicle
as you normally would in order for your OBD II system to
update. A recheck with the above test routine may then
indicate that the system is now ready.
Regardless of whether your vehicle’s OBD II system is
ready or not, if the MIL is illuminated during normal
vehicle operation you should have your vehicle serviced
before going to the I/M station. The I/M station can fail
your vehicle because the MIL is on with the engine
running.
154 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
SAFETY
CONTENTS
䡵 SAFETY FEATURES ......................156
▫ Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) .............156
▫ Electronic Brake Control System ............157
䡵 AUXILIARY DRIVING SYSTEMS .............165
▫ Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) — If Equipped . . .165
▫ Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) ........172
䡵 OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS ..........177
▫ Occupant Restraint Systems Features .........177
▫ Important Safety Precautions ..............177
▫ Seat Belt Systems ......................178
▫ Supplemental Restraint Systems (SRS) ........194
▫ Child Restraints .......................207
▫ Transporting Pets ......................230
䡵 SAFETY TIPS ...........................231
▫ Transporting Passengers ..................231
▫ Exhaust Gas ..........................231
▫ Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The
Vehicle ..............................232
▫ Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make Outside
The Vehicle ...........................234
5
SAFETY FEATURES
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS)
The Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) provides increased
vehicle stability and brake performance under most brak-
ing conditions. The system automatically prevents wheel
lock, and enhances vehicle control during braking.
The ABS performs a self-check cycle to ensure that the ABS
is working properly each time the vehicle is started and
driven. During this self-check, you may hear a slight
clicking sound as well as some related motor noises.
ABS is activated during braking when the system detects
one or more wheels begin to lock. Road conditions such as
ice, snow, gravel, bumps, railroad tracks, loose debris, or
panic stops may increase the likelihood of ABS activa-
tion(s).
You also may experience the following when ABS activates:
• The ABS motor noise (it may continue to run for a short
time after the stop).
• The clicking sound of solenoid valves.
• Brake pedal pulsations.
• A slight drop of the brake pedal at the end of the stop.
These are all normal characteristics of ABS.
WARNING!
• The ABS contains sophisticated electronic equip-
ment that may be susceptible to interference caused
by improperly installed or high output radio trans-
mitting equipment. This interference can cause pos-
sible loss of anti-lock braking capability. Installation
of such equipment should be performed by qualified
professionals.
• Pumping of the Anti-Lock Brakes will diminish their
effectiveness and may lead to a collision. Pumping
makes the stopping distance longer. Just press firmly
on your brake pedal when you need to slow down or
stop.
• The ABS cannot prevent the natural laws of physics
from acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase brak-
ing or steering efficiency beyond that afforded by the
condition of the vehicle brakes and tires or the
traction afforded.
• The ABS cannot prevent collisions, including those
resulting from excessive speed in turns, following
another vehicle too closely, or hydroplaning.
(Continued)
156 SAFETY
WARNING! (Continued)
• The capabilities of an ABS equipped vehicle must
never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner
that could jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety of
others.
ABS is designed to function with the OEM tires. Modifica-
tion may result in degraded ABS performance.
Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light
The yellow “Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light” will turn on
when the ignition is turned to the ON/RUN mode and
may stay on for as long as four seconds.
If the “Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light” remains on or
comes on while driving, it indicates that the anti-lock
portion of the brake system is not functioning and that
service is required. However, the conventional brake sys-
tem will continue to operate normally if the “Anti-Lock
Brake Warning Light” is on.
If the “Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light” is on, the brake
system should be serviced as soon as possible to restore the
benefits of anti-lock brakes. If the “Anti-Lock Brake Warn-
ing Light” does not come on when the ignition is turned to
the ON/RUN mode, have the light repaired as soon as
possible.
Electronic Brake Control System
Your vehicle is equipped with an advanced Electronic
Brake Control system (EBC). This system includes Elec-
tronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD), Anti-Lock Brake
System (ABS), Brake Assist System (BAS), Hill Start Assist
(HSA), Traction Control System (TCS), Electronic Stability
Control (ESC), and Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM). These
systems work together to enhance both vehicle stability
and control in various driving conditions.
Your vehicle may also be equipped with Trailer Sway
Control (TSC).
Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD)
This function manages the distribution of the braking
torque between the front and rear axles by limiting braking
pressure to the rear axle. This is done to prevent overslip of
the rear wheels to avoid vehicle instability, and to prevent
the rear axle from entering ABS before the front axle.
5
SAFETY 157
Brake System Warning Light
The red “Brake System Warning Light” will turn on when
the ignition is turned to the ON/RUN mode and may stay
on for as long as four seconds.
If the “Brake System Warning Light” remains on or comes
on while driving, it indicates that the brake system is not
functioning properly and that immediate service is re-
quired. If the “Brake System Warning Light” does not come
on when the ignition is turned to the ON/RUN mode, have
the light repaired as soon as possible.
Brake Assist System (BAS)
The BAS is designed to optimize the vehicle’s braking
capability during emergency braking maneuvers. The sys-
tem detects an emergency braking situation by sensing the
rate and amount of brake application and then applies
optimum pressure to the brakes. This can help reduce
braking distances. The BAS complements the anti-lock
brake system (ABS). Applying the brakes very quickly
results in the best BAS assistance. To receive the benefit of
the system, you must apply continuous braking pressure
during the stopping sequence, (do not “pump” the brakes).
Do not reduce brake pedal pressure unless braking is no
longer desired. Once the brake pedal is released, the BAS is
deactivated.
WARNING!
The Brake Assist System (BAS) cannot prevent the
natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle, nor
can it increase the traction afforded by prevailing road
conditions. BAS cannot prevent collisions, including
those resulting from excessive speed in turns, driving
on very slippery surfaces, or hydroplaning. The capa-
bilities of a BAS-equipped vehicle must never be
exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner, which
could jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety of
others.
Hill Start Assist (HSA)
The HSA system is designed to mitigate roll back from a
complete stop while on an incline. If the driver releases the
brake while stopped on an incline, HSA will continue to
hold the brake pressure for a short period. If the driver
does not apply the throttle before this time expires, the
system will release brake pressure and the vehicle will roll
down the hill as normal.
158 SAFETY
The following conditions must be met in order for HSA to
activate:
• The feature must be enabled.
• The vehicle must be stopped.
• Park brake must be off.
• Driver door must be closed.
• The vehicle must be on a sufficient grade.
• The gear selection must match vehicle uphill direction
(i.e., vehicle facing uphill is in forward gear; vehicle
backing uphill is in REVERSE gear).
• HSA will work in REVERSE gear and all forward gears.
The system will not activate if the transmission is in
PARK or NEUTRAL. For vehicles equipped with a
manual transmission, if the clutch is pressed, HSA will
remain active.
WARNING!
There may be situations where the Hill Start Assist
(HSA) will not activate and slight rolling may occur,
such as on minor hills or with a loaded vehicle, or
while pulling a trailer. HSA is not a substitute for
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
active driving involvement. It is always the driver’s
responsibility to be attentive to distance to other ve-
hicles, people, and objects, and most importantly brake
operation to ensure safe operation of the vehicle under
all road conditions. Your complete attention is always
required while driving to maintain safe control of your
vehicle. Failure to follow these warnings can result in
a collision or serious personal injury.
Towing With HSA
HSA will also provide assistance to mitigate roll back while
towing a trailer.
WARNING!
• If you use a trailer brake controller with your trailer,
the trailer brakes may be activated and deactivated
with the brake switch. If so, there may not be enough
brake pressure to hold both the vehicle and the
trailer on a hill when the brake pedal is released. In
order to avoid rolling down an incline while resum-
ing acceleration, manually activate the trailer brake
(Continued)
5
SAFETY 159
WARNING! (Continued)
or apply more vehicle brake pressure prior to releas-
ing the brake pedal.
• HSA is not a parking brake. Always apply the
parking brake fully when exiting your vehicle. Also,
be certain to place the transmission in PARK.
• Failure to follow these warnings can result in a
collision or serious personal injury.
Disabling And Enabling HSA
This feature can be turned on or turned off. To change the
current setting, proceed as follows:
• For vehicles equipped with the instrument cluster dis-
play, refer to “Instrument Cluster Display” in “Getting
To Know Your Instrument Panel” for further informa-
tion.
For vehicles not equipped with the instrument cluster
display, perform the following steps:
1. Center the steering wheel (front wheels pointing
straight forward).
2. Shift the transmission into PARK.
3. Apply the parking brake.
4. Start the engine.
5. Rotate the steering wheel slightly more than one-half
turn to the left.
6. Push the “ESC Off” button located in the lower switch
bank below the climate control four times within twenty
seconds. The “ESC Off Indicator Light” should turn on
and turn off two times.
7. Rotate the steering wheel back to center and then an
additional slightly more than one-half turn to the right.
8. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position and then
back to the ON position. If the sequence was completed
properly, the “ESC Off Indicator Light” will blink sev-
eral times to confirm HSA is disabled.
9. Repeat these steps if you want to return this feature to
its previous setting.
Traction Control System (TCS)
This system monitors the amount of wheel spin of each of
the driven wheels. If wheel spin is detected, the TCS may
apply brake pressure to the spinning wheel(s) and/or
reduce vehicle power to provide enhanced acceleration
and stability. A feature of the TCS, Brake Limited Differen-
tial (BLD), functions similar to a limited slip differential
160 SAFETY
and controls the wheel spin across a driven axle. If one
wheel on a driven axle is spinning faster than the other, the
system will apply the brake of the spinning wheel. This
will allow more vehicle torque to be applied to the wheel
that is not spinning. BLD may remain enabled even if TCS
and ESC are in a reduced mode.
Electronic Stability Control (ESC)
This system enhances directional control and stability of
the vehicle under various driving conditions. ESC corrects
for oversteering or understeering of the vehicle by apply-
ing the brake of the appropriate wheel(s) to assist in
counteracting the oversteer or understeer condition. En-
gine power may also be reduced to help the vehicle
maintain the desired path.
ESC uses sensors in the vehicle to determine the vehicle
path intended by the driver and compares it to the actual
path of the vehicle. When the actual path does not match
the intended path, ESC applies the brake of the appropriate
wheel to assist in counteracting the oversteer or understeer
condition.
• Oversteer — when the vehicle is turning more than
appropriate for the steering wheel position.
• Understeer — when the vehicle is turning less than
appropriate for the steering wheel position.
The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” located
in the instrument cluster will start to flash as soon as the
ESC system becomes active. The “ESC Activation/
Malfunction Indicator Light” also flashes when the TCS is
active. If the “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator
Light” begins to flash during acceleration, ease up on the
accelerator and apply as little throttle as possible. Be sure to
adapt your speed and driving to the prevailing road
conditions.
WARNING!
• Electronic Stability Control (ESC) cannot prevent the
natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle,
nor can it increase the traction afforded by prevailing
road conditions. ESC cannot prevent accidents, in-
cluding those resulting from excessive speed in
turns, driving on very slippery surfaces, or hydro-
planing. ESC also cannot prevent accidents resulting
from loss of vehicle control due to inappropriate
driver input for the conditions. Only a safe, attentive,
(Continued)
5
SAFETY 161
WARNING! (Continued)
and skillful driver can prevent accidents. The capa-
bilities of an ESC equipped vehicle must never be
exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner which
could jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety of
others.
• Vehicle modifications, or failure to properly main-
tain your vehicle, may change the handling charac-
teristics of your vehicle, and may negatively affect
the performance of the ESC system. Changes to the
steering system, suspension, braking system, tire
type and size or wheel size may adversely affect ESC
performance. Improperly inflated and unevenly
worn tires may also degrade ESC performance. Any
vehicle modification or poor vehicle maintenance
that reduces the effectiveness of the ESC system can
increase the risk of loss of vehicle control, vehicle
rollover, personal injury and death.
ESC Operating Modes
NOTE: Depending upon model and mode of operation, the
ESC system may have multiple operating modes.
ESC On
This is the normal operating mode for the ESC. Whenever
the vehicle is started, the ESC system will be in this mode.
This mode should be used for most driving conditions.
Alternate ESC modes should only be used for specific
reasons as noted in the following paragraphs.
Partial Off
The “Partial Off” mode is intended for times when a more
spirited driving experience is desired. This mode may
modify TCS and ESC thresholds for activation, which
allows for more wheel spin than normally allowed. This
mode may be useful if the vehicle becomes stuck.
To enter the “Partial Off” mode, momentarily push the
“ESC Off” switch and the “ESC Off Indicator Light” will
illuminate. To turn the ESC on again, momentarily push
the “ESC Off” switch and the “ESC Off Indicator Light”
will turn off.
WARNING!
• When in “Partial Off” mode, the TCS functionality
of ESC, (except for the limited slip feature described
(Continued)
162 SAFETY
WARNING! (Continued)
in the TCS section), has been disabled and the “ESC
Off Indicator Light” will be illuminated. When in
“Partial Off” mode, the engine power reduction
feature of TCS is disabled, and the enhanced vehicle
stability offered by the ESC system is reduced.
• Trailer Sway control (TSC) is disabled when the ESC
system is in the “Partial Off” mode.
NOTE: The Electronic Stability Control (ESC) cannot pre-
vent the natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle,
nor can it increase the traction afforded by prevailing road
conditions. ESC cannot prevent all accidents, including
those resulting from excessive speed in turns, driving on
very slippery surfaces, or hydroplaning. ESC also cannot
prevent collisions.
ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light And
ESC OFF Indicator Light
The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator
Light” in the instrument cluster will come on
when the ignition is turned to the ON mode. It
should go out with the engine running. If the “ESC
Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” comes on con-
tinuously with the engine running, a malfunction has been
detected in the ESC system. If this light remains on after
several ignition cycles, and the vehicle has been driven
several miles (kilometers) at speeds greater than 30 mph
(48 km/h), see an authorized dealer as soon as possible to
have the problem diagnosed and corrected.
The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” (lo-
cated in the instrument cluster) starts to flash as soon as the
tires lose traction and the ESC system becomes active. The
“ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” also flashes
when TCS is active. If the “ESC Activation/Malfunction
Indicator Light” begins to flash during acceleration, ease
up on the accelerator and apply as little throttle as possible.
Be sure to adapt your speed and driving to the prevailing
road conditions.
5
SAFETY 163
NOTE:
• The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” and
the “ESC OFF Indicator Light” come on momentarily
each time the ignition is turned ON.
• Each time the ignition is turned ON, the ESC system will
be on even if it was turned off previously.
• The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking sounds
when it is active. This is normal; the sounds will stop
when ESC becomes inactive following the maneuver
that caused the ESC activation.
The “ESC OFF Indicator Light” indicates the
customer has elected to have the Electronic Sta-
bility Control (ESC) in a reduced mode.
Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM)
This system anticipates the potential for wheel lift by
monitoring the driver’s steering wheel input and the speed
of the vehicle. When ERM determines that the rate of
change of the steering wheel angle and vehicle’s speed are
sufficient to potentially cause wheel lift, it then applies the
appropriate brake and may also reduce engine power to
lessen the chance that wheel lift will occur. ERM can only
reduce the chance of wheel lift occurring during severe or
evasive driving maneuvers; it cannot prevent wheel lift
due to other factors, such as road conditions, leaving the
roadway, or striking objects or other vehicles.
WARNING!
Many factors, such as vehicle loading, road conditions
and driving conditions, influence the chance that
wheel lift or rollover may occur. ERM cannot prevent
all wheel lift or roll overs, especially those that involve
leaving the roadway or striking objects or other ve-
hicles. The capabilities of an ERM-equipped vehicle
must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous
manner which could jeopardize the user’s safety or the
safety of others.
Trailer Sway Control (TSC)
TSC uses sensors in the vehicle to recognize an excessively
swaying trailer and will take the appropriate actions to
attempt to stop the sway. TSC will become active automati-
cally once an excessively swaying trailer is recognized.
Note that TSC cannot stop all trailers from swaying.
Always use caution when towing a trailer and follow the
trailer tongue weight recommendations. Refer to “Trailer
Towing” in “Starting And Operating” for further informa-
tion. When TSC is functioning, the “ESC Activation/
164 SAFETY
Malfunction Indicator Light” will flash, the engine power
may be reduced and you may feel the brakes being applied
to individual wheels to attempt to stop the trailer from
swaying. TSC is disabled when the ESC system is in the
“Partial Off” mode.
WARNING!
If TSC activates while driving, slow the vehicle down,
stop at the nearest safe location, and adjust the trailer
load to eliminate trailer sway.
AUXILIARY DRIVING SYSTEMS
Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) — If Equipped
The Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) system uses two radar
sensors, located inside the rear bumper fascia, to detect
highway licensable vehicles (automobiles, trucks, motor-
cycles, etc.) that enter the blind spot zones from the
rear/front/side of the vehicle.
When the vehicle is started, the BSM warning light will
momentarily illuminate in both outside rear view mirrors
to let the driver know that the system is operational.
Rear Detection Zones
5
SAFETY 165
The BSM system sensors operate when the vehicle is in any
forward gear or REVERSE.
The BSM detection zone covers approximately one lane
width on both sides of the vehicle 12 ft (3.8 m). The zone
length starts at the outside rear view mirror and extends
approximately 10 ft (3 m) beyond the rear bumper of the
vehicle. The BSM system monitors the detection zones on
both sides of the vehicle when the vehicle speed reaches
approximately 6 mph (10 km/h) or higher and will alert
the driver of vehicles in these areas.
NOTE:
• The BSM system does NOT alert the driver about
rapidly approaching vehicles that are outside the detec-
tion zones.
• The BSM system detection zone DOES NOT change if
your vehicle is towing a trailer. Therefore, visually verify
the adjacent lane is clear for both your vehicle and trailer
before making a lane change. If the trailer or other object
(i.e., bicycle, sports equipment) extends beyond the side
of your vehicle, this may result in the BSM warning light
remaining illuminated the entire time the vehicle is in a
forward gear.
• The Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) system may experi-
ence drop outs (blinking on and off) of the side mirror
Warning Indicator lamps when a motorcycle or any
small object remains at the side of the vehicle for
extended periods of time (more than a couple of sec-
onds).
The area on the rear fascia where the radar sensors are
located must remain free of snow, ice, and dirt/road
contamination so that the BSM system can function prop-
erly. Do not block the area of the rear fascia where the radar
sensors are located with foreign objects (bumper stickers,
bicycle racks, etc.).
BSM Warning Light
166 SAFETY
The BSM system notifies the driver of objects in the
detection zones by illuminating the BSM warning light
located in the outside mirrors in addition to sounding an
audible (chime) alert and reducing the radio volume. Refer
to “Modes Of Operation” for further information.
The BSM system monitors the detection zone from three
different entry points (side, rear, front) while driving to see
if an alert is necessary. The BSM system will issue an alert
during these types of zone entries.
Entering From The Side
Vehicles that move into your adjacent lanes from either
side of the vehicle.
Sensor Location
Side Monitoring
5
SAFETY 167
Entering From The Rear
Vehicles that come up from behind your vehicle on either
side and enter the rear detection zone with a relative speed
of less than 31 mph (50 km/h).
Overtaking Traffic
If you pass another vehicle slowly (with a relative speed of
less than 15 mph (24 km/h)) and the vehicle remains in the
blind spot for approximately 1.5 seconds, the warning light
will be illuminated. If the difference in speed between the
two vehicles is greater than 15 mph (24 km/h), the warning
light will not illuminate.
Rear Monitoring
Overtaking/Approaching
168 SAFETY
The BSM system is designed not to issue an alert on
stationary objects such as guardrails, posts, walls, foliage,
berms, etc. However, occasionally the system may alert on
such objects. This is normal operation and your vehicle
does not require service.
The BSM system will not alert you of objects that are
traveling in the opposite direction of the vehicle in adjacent
lanes.
Overtaking/Passing
Stationary Objects
5
SAFETY 169
WARNING!
The Blind Spot Monitoring system is only an aid to
help detect objects in the blind spot zones. The BSM
system is not designed to detect pedestrians, bicyclists,
or animals. Even if your vehicle is equipped with the
BSM system, always check your vehicle’s mirrors,
glance over your shoulder, and use your turn signal
before changing lanes. Failure to do so can result in
serious injury or death.
Rear Cross Path (RCP)
The Rear Cross Path (RCP) feature is intended to aid the
driver when backing out of parking spaces where their
vision of oncoming vehicles may be blocked. Proceed
slowly and cautiously out of the parking space until the
rear end of the vehicle is exposed. The RCP system will
then have a clear view of the cross traffic and if an
oncoming vehicle is detected, alert the driver.
Opposing Traffic
RCP Detection Zones
170 SAFETY
RCP monitors the rear detection zones on both sides of the
vehicle, for objects that are moving toward the side of the
vehicle with a minimum speed of approximately 3 mph
(5 km/h), to objects moving a maximum of approximately
20 mph (32 km/h), such as in parking lot situations.
NOTE: In a parking lot situation, oncoming vehicles can be
obscured by vehicles parked on either side. If the sensors
are blocked by other structures or vehicles, the system will
not be able to alert the driver.
When RCP is on and the vehicle is in REVERSE, the driver
is alerted using both the visual and audible alarms, includ-
ing reducing the radio volume.
WARNING!
Rear Cross Path Detection (RCP) is not a back up aid
system. It is intended to be used to help a driver detect
an oncoming vehicle in a parking lot situation. Drivers
must be careful when backing up, even when using
RCP. Always check carefully behind your vehicle, look
behind you, and be sure to check for pedestrians,
animals, other vehicles, obstructions, and blind spots
before backing up. Failure to do so can result in serious
injury or death.
Modes Of Operation
Modes Of Operation With Instrument Cluster Display
Three selectable modes of operation are available in the
instrument cluster display. Refer to “Instrument Cluster
Display” in “Getting To Know Your Instrument Panel” for
further information.
Blind Spot Alert Lights Only
When operating in Blind Spot Alert mode, the BSM system
will provide a visual alert in the appropriate side view
mirror based on a detected object. However, when the
system is operating in RCP, the system will respond with
both visual and audible alerts when a detected object is
present. Whenever an audible alert is requested, the radio
volume is reduced.
Blind Spot Alert Lights/Chime
When operating in Blind Spot Alert Lights/Chime mode,
the BSM system will provide a visual alert in the appro-
priate side view mirror based on a detected object. If the
turn signal is then activated, and it corresponds to an alert
present on that side of the vehicle, an audible chime will
also be sounded. Whenever a turn signal and detected
object are present on the same side at the same time, both
the visual and audio alerts will be issued. In addition to the
audible alert the radio (if on) volume will be reduced.
5
SAFETY 171
NOTE:
• Whenever an audible alert is requested by the BSM
system, the radio volume is reduced.
• If the hazard flashers are on, the system will request the
appropriate visual alert only.
When the system is in RCP, the system shall respond with
both visual and audible alerts when a detected object is
present. Whenever an audible alert is requested, the radio
volume is reduced. Turn/hazard signal status is ignored;
the RCP state always requests the chime.
Blind Spot Alert Off
When the BSM system is turned off there will be no visual
or audible alerts from either the BSM or RCP systems.
NOTE: The BSM system will store the current operating
mode when the vehicle is shut off. Each time the vehicle is
started the previously stored mode will be recalled and
used.
General Information
The following regulatory statement applies to all Radio
Frequency (RF) devices equipped in this vehicle:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and
with Industry Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s).
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference.
2. This device must accept any interference received, in-
cluding interference that may cause undesired opera-
tion.
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved
by the party responsible for compliance could void the
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS)
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) will warn the
driver of a low tire pressure based on the vehicle recom-
mended cold placard pressure.
NOTE: The TPMS Warning Light will illuminate in the
instrument cluster and a chime will sound when tire
pressure is low in one or more of the four active road tires.
In addition, the instrument cluster will display a graphic
showing the pressure values of each tire with the low tire
pressure values in a different color, when this occurs you
must increase the tire pressure to the recommended cold
placard pressure in order for the TPMS Warning Light to
turn off.
172 SAFETY
The tire pressure will vary with temperature by approxi-
mately 1 psi (7 kPa) for every 12°F (6.5°C). This means that
when the outside temperature decreases, the tire pressure
will decrease. Tire pressure should always be set based on
cold inflation tire pressure. This is defined as the tire
pressure after the vehicle has not been driven for at least
three hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) after a three
hour period. The cold tire inflation pressure must not
exceed the maximum inflation pressure molded into the
tire sidewall. Refer to “Tires” in “Servicing and Mainte-
nance” for information on how to properly inflate the
vehicle’s tires. The tire pressure will also increase as the
vehicle is driven. This is normal and there should be no
adjustment for this increased pressure.
The TPMS will warn the driver of a low tire pressure if the
tire pressure falls below the low-pressure warning limit for
any reason, including low temperature effects and natural
pressure loss through the tire.
The TPMS will continue to warn the driver of low tire
pressure as long as the condition exists, and will not turn
off until the tire pressure is at or above the recommended
cold placard pressure. Once the low tire pressure warning
(TPMS Warning Light) illuminates, you must increase the
tire pressure to the recommended cold placard pressure in
order for the TPMS Warning Light to turn off.
The system will automatically update and the TPMS
Warning Light will turn off once the system receives the
updated tire pressures. The vehicle may need to be driven
for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h) in order for
the TPMS to receive this information.
For example, your vehicle may have a recommended cold
(parked for more than three hours) placard pressure of 33
psi (227 kPa). If the ambient temperature is 68°F (20°C) and
the measured tire pressure is 28 psi (193 kPa), a tempera-
ture drop to 20°F (-7°C) will decrease the tire pressure to
approximately 24 psi (165 kPa). This tire pressure is low
enough to turn ON the “TPMS Warning Light.” Driving
the vehicle may cause the tire pressure to rise to approxi-
mately 28 psi (193 kPa), but the TPMS Warning Light will
still be on. In this situation, the TPMS Warning Light will
turn off only after the tires are inflated to the vehicle’s
recommended cold placard pressure value.
NOTE: When filling warm tires, the tire pressure may need
to be increased up to an additional 4 psi (28 kPa) above the
recommended cold placard pressure in order to turn the
TPMS Warning Light off.
5
SAFETY 173
CAUTION!
• The TPMS has been optimized for the original
equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures and
warning have been established for the tire size
equipped on your vehicle. Undesirable system op-
eration or sensor damage may result when using
replacement equipment that is not of the same size,
type, and/or style. The TPM sensor is not designed
for use on aftermarket wheels and may contribute to
a poor overall system performance or sensor damage.
Customers are encouraged to use OEM wheels to
assure proper TPM feature operation.
• Using aftermarket tire sealants may cause the Tire
Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) sensor to be-
come inoperable. After using an aftermarket tire
sealant it is recommended that you take your vehicle
to your authorized dealer to have your sensor func-
tion checked.
• After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure always
reinstall the valve stem cap. This will prevent mois-
ture and dirt from entering the valve stem, which
could damage the TPMS sensor.
NOTE:
• The TPMS is not intended to replace normal tire care and
maintenance, or to provide warning of a tire failure or
condition.
• The TPMS should not be used as a tire pressure gauge
while adjusting your tire pressure.
• Driving on a significantly underinflated tire causes the
tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure. Underinfla-
tion also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and
may affect the vehicle’s handling and stopping ability.
• The TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire mainte-
nance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to maintain
correct tire pressure using an accurate tire pressure
gauge, even if underinflation has not reached the level to
trigger illumination of the TPMS Warning Light.
• Seasonal temperature changes will affect tire pressure,
and the TPMS will monitor the actual tire pressure in the
tire.
System Operation
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) uses wireless
technology with wheel rim-mounted electronic sensors to
174 SAFETY
monitor tire pressure levels. Sensors, mounted to each
wheel as part of the valve stem, transmit tire pressure
readings to the Receiver Module.
NOTE: It is particularly important for you to check the tire
pressure in all of your tires regularly and to maintain the
proper pressure.
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) consists of the
following components:
• Receiver Module
• Four Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensors
• Tire Pressure Monitoring System Warning Light
Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Tire Pressure Warnings
The TPMS Warning Light will illuminate in the
instrument cluster, a “LOW TIRE PRESSURE”
message will display in the instrument cluster,
and an audible chime will be activated when one
or more of the four active road tire pressures are low.
Should this occur, you should stop as soon as possible,
check the inflation pressure of each tire on your vehicle,
and inflate each tire to the vehicle’s recommended cold tire
placard pressure value (located on the placard label on the
driver’s-side B-Pillar).
NOTE: When filling warm tires, the tire pressure may
need to be increased up to an additional 4 psi (28 kPa)
above the recommended cold placard pressure in order to
turn the TPMS Warning Light off.
The system will automatically update and the TPMS
Warning Light will extinguish once the updated tire pres-
sures have been received.
NOTE: The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20
minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h) to receive this informa-
tion.
Service Tpm System
The TPMS Warning Light will flash on and off for 75
seconds, and remain on solid when a system fault is
detected. The system fault will also sound a chime. If the
ignition switch is cycled, this sequence will repeat, provid-
ing the system fault still exists. The TPMS Warning Light
will turn off when the fault condition no longer exists. A
system fault can occur with any of the following scenarios:
• Jamming due to electronic devices or driving next to
facilities emitting the same radio frequencies as the
TPMS sensors.
• Installing some form of aftermarket window tinting that
affects radio wave signals.
5
SAFETY 175
• Accumulation of excessive snow and/or ice around the
wheels or wheel housings.
• Using tire chains on the vehicle.
• Using wheels/tires not equipped with TPMS sensors.
Vehicles With Compact Spare
• The compact spare tire (if equipped) does not have a
TPMS sensor. Therefore the TPMS will not monitor the
pressure in the compact spare tire.
• If you install the compact spare tire in place of a road tire
that has a pressure below the low-pressure warning
limit, upon the next ignition switch cycle, a chime will
sound, a “LOW TIRE PRESSURE” message will be
displayed and the TPMS Warning Light will turn on.
• After driving for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph
(24 km/h), the TPMS Warning Light will flash on and off
for 75 seconds and then remain on solid.
• For each subsequent ignition switch cycle, a chime will
sound, the TPMS Warning Light will flash on and off for
75 seconds and then remain on solid.
• Once you repair or replace the original road tire and
reinstall it on the vehicle in place of the compact spare
tire, the TPMS will automatically update, and the TPMS
Warning Light will turn off as long as no tire pressure is
below the low-pressure warning limit in any of the four
active road tires.
TPMS Deactivation — If Equipped
The TPMS can be deactivated if replacing all four wheel
and tire assemblies (road tires) with wheel and tire assem-
blies that do not have TPMS Sensors, such as when
installing winter wheel and tire assemblies on your vehicle.
To deactivate the TPMS, first, replace all four wheel and
tire assemblies (road tires) with tires not equipped with
Tire Pressure Monitoring (TPM) Sensors. Then, drive the
vehicle for 20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h). The TPMS
will chime, the TPMS Warning Light will flash on and off
for 75 seconds and then remain on.
Beginning with the next ignition cycle, the TPMS will no
longer chime or flash the TPMS Warning Light.
To reactivate the TPMS, replace all four wheel and tire
assemblies (road tires) with tires equipped with TPM
sensors. Then, drive the vehicle for up to 20 minutes above
15 mph (24 km/h). The TPMS will chime, the TPMS
Warning Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then
turn off.
176 SAFETY
General Information
The following regulatory statement applies to all radio
frequency (RF) devices equipped in this vehicle:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and
with Industry Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s).
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
(1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and
(2) This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired operation.
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved
by the party responsible for compliance could void the
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
Some of the most important safety features in your vehicle
are the restraint systems:
Occupant Restraint Systems Features
• Seat Belt Systems
• Supplemental Restraint Systems (SRS) Air Bags
• Supplemental Active Head Restraints
• Child Restraints
Some of the safety features described in this section may be
standard equipment on some models, or may be optional
equipment on others. If you are not sure, ask an authorized
dealer.
Important Safety Precautions
Please pay close attention to the information in this section.
It tells you how to use your restraint system properly, to
keep you and your passengers as safe as possible.
Here are some simple steps you can take to minimize the
risk of harm from a deploying air bag:
1. Children 12 years old and under should always ride
buckled up in the rear seat of a vehicle with a rear seat.
2. If a child from 2 to 12 years old (not in a rear-facing child
restraint) must ride in the front passenger seat, move the
seat as far back as possible and use the proper child
restraint (refer to “Child Restraints” in this section for
further information).
3. Children that are not big enough to wear the vehicle seat
belt properly (refer to “Child Restraints” in this section
for further information) should be secured in the rear
seat of a vehicle with a rear seat in child restraints or
belt-positioning booster seats. Older children who do
5
SAFETY 177
not use child restraints or belt-positioning booster seats
should ride properly buckled up in the rear seat of a
vehicle with a rear seat.
4. Never allow children to slide the shoulder belt behind
them or under their arm.
5. You should read the instructions provided with your
child restraint to make sure that you are using it
properly.
6. All occupants should always wear their lap and shoul-
der belts properly.
7. The driver and front passenger seats should be moved
back as far as practical to allow the front air bags room
to inflate.
8. Do not lean against the door or window. If your vehicle
has side air bags, and deployment occurs, the side air
bags will inflate forcefully into the space between occu-
pants and the door and occupants could be injured.
9. If the air bag system in this vehicle needs to be modified
to accommodate a disabled person, refer to the “Cus-
tomer Assistance” section for customer service contact
information.
WARNING!
• Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of an
air bag. A deploying passenger front air bag can
cause death or serious injury to a child 12 years or
younger, including a child in a rear-facing child
restraint.
• Only use a rear-facing child restraint in the rear seat
of a vehicle with a rear seat.
Seat Belt Systems
Buckle up even though you are an excellent driver, even on
short trips. Someone on the road may be a poor driver and
could cause a collision that includes you. This can happen
far away from home or on your own street.
Research has shown that seat belts save lives, and they can
reduce the seriousness of injuries in a collision. Some of the
worst injuries happen when people are thrown from the
vehicle. Seat belts reduce the possibility of ejection and the
risk of injury caused by striking the inside of the vehicle.
Everyone in a motor vehicle should be belted at all times.
178 SAFETY
Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System (BeltAlert)
Driver and Passenger BeltAlert (if equipped)
BeltAlert is a feature intended to remind the driver
and outboard front seat passenger (if equipped with
outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert) to buckle their
seat belts. The Belt Alert feature is active whenever the
ignition switch is in the START or ON/RUN position.
Initial Indication
If the driver is unbuckled when the ignition switch is first
in the START or ON/RUN position, a chime will signal for
a few seconds. If the driver or outboard front seat passen-
ger (if equipped with outboard front passenger seat
BeltAlert) is unbuckled when the ignition switch is first in
the START or ON/RUN position the Seat Belt Reminder
Light will turn on and remain on until both outboard front
seat belts are buckled. The outboard front passenger seat
BeltAlert is not active when an outboard front passenger
seat is unoccupied.
BeltAlert Warning Sequence
The BeltAlert warning sequence is activated when the
vehicle is moving above a specified vehicle speed range
and the driver or outboard front seat passenger is unbuck-
led (if equipped with outboard front passenger seat
BeltAlert) (the outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert is
not active when the outboard front passenger seat is
unoccupied). The BeltAlert warning sequence starts by
blinking the Seat Belt Reminder Light and sounding an
intermittent chime. Once the BeltAlert warning sequence
has completed, the Seat Belt Reminder Light will remain on
until the seat belts are buckled. The BeltAlert warning
sequence may repeat based on vehicle speed until the
driver and occupied outboard front seat passenger seat
belts are buckled. The driver should instruct all occupants
to buckle their seat belts.
Change of Status
If the driver or outboard front seat passenger (if equipped
with outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert) unbuckles
their seat belt while the vehicle is traveling, the BeltAlert
warning sequence will begin until the seat belts are buck-
led again.
The outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert is not active
when the outboard front passenger seat is unoccupied.
BeltAlert may be triggered when an animal or other items
are placed on the outboard front passenger seat or when
the seat is folded flat (if equipped). It is recommended that
5
SAFETY 179
pets be restrained in the rear seat (if equipped) in pet
harnesses or pet carriers that are secured by seat belts, and
cargo is properly stowed.
BeltAlert can be activated or deactivated by an authorized
dealer. FCA US LLC does not recommend deactivating
BeltAlert.
NOTE: If BeltAlert has been deactivated and the driver or
outboard front seat passenger (if equipped with outboard
front passenger seat BeltAlert) is unbuckled the Seat Belt
Reminder Light will turn on and remain on until the driver
and outboard front seat passenger seat belts are buckled.
Lap/Shoulder Belts
All seating positions in your vehicle are equipped with
lap/shoulder belts.
The seat belt webbing retractor will lock only during very
sudden stops or collisions. This feature allows the shoulder
part of the seat belt to move freely with you under normal
conditions. However, in a collision the seat belt will lock
and reduce your risk of striking the inside of the vehicle or
being thrown out of the vehicle.
WARNING!
• Relying on the air bags alone could lead to more
severe injuries in a collision. The air bags work with
your seat belt to restrain you properly. In some
collisions, the air bags won’t deploy at all. Always
wear your seat belt even though you have air bags.
• In a collision, you and your passengers can suffer
much greater injuries if you are not properly buckled
up. You can strike the interior of your vehicle or
other passengers, or you can be thrown out of the
vehicle. Always be sure you and others in your
vehicle are buckled up properly.
•
It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or outside
of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in these areas
are more likely to be seriously injured or killed.
• Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts.
• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly. Occupants, including the
driver, should always wear their seat belts whether
or not an air bag is also provided at their seating
position to minimize the risk of severe injury or
death in the event of a crash.
(Continued)
180 SAFETY
WARNING! (Continued)
• Wearing your seat belt incorrectly could make your
injuries in a collision much worse. You might suffer
internal injuries, or you could even slide out of the
seat belt. Follow these instructions to wear your seat
belt safely and to keep your passengers safe, too.
• Two people should never be belted into a single seat
belt. People belted together can crash into one an-
other in a collision, hurting one another badly. Never
use a lap/shoulder belt or a lap belt for more than one
person, no matter what their size.
WARNING!
•
A lap belt worn too high can increase the risk of injury
in a collision. The seat belt forces won’t be at the strong
hip and pelvic bones, but across your abdomen. Always
wear the lap part of your seat belt as low as possible and
keep it snug.
•
A twisted seat belt may not protect you properly. In a
collision, it could even cut into you. Be sure the seat belt
is flat against your body, without twists. If you can’t
straighten a seat belt in your vehicle, take it to an
authorized dealer immediately and have it fixed.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• A seat belt that is buckled into the wrong buckle will
not protect you properly. The lap portion could ride
too high on your body, possibly causing internal
injuries. Always buckle your seat belt into the
buckle nearest you.
• A seat belt that is too loose will not protect you
properly. In a sudden stop, you could move too far
forward, increasing the possibility of injury. Wear
your seat belt snugly.
• A seat belt that is worn under your arm is dangerous.
Your body could strike the inside surfaces of the
vehicle in a collision, increasing head and neck
injury. A seat belt worn under the arm can cause
internal injuries. Ribs aren’t as strong as shoulder
bones. Wear the seat belt over your shoulder so that
your strongest bones will take the force in a collision.
• A shoulder belt placed behind you will not protect
you from injury during a collision. You are more
likely to hit your head in a collision if you do not
wear your shoulder belt. The lap and shoulder belt
are meant to be used together.
(Continued)
5
SAFETY 181
WARNING! (Continued)
• A frayed or torn seat belt could rip apart in a
collision and leave you with no protection. Inspect
the seat belt system periodically, checking for cuts,
frays, or loose parts. Damaged parts must be replaced
immediately. Do not disassemble or modify the seat
belt system. Seat belt assemblies must be replaced
after a collision.
Lap/Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions
1. Enter the vehicle and close the door. Sit back and adjust
the seat.
2. The seat belt latch plate is above the back of the front
seat, and next to your arm in the rear seat (for vehicles
equipped with a rear seat). Grasp the latch plate and
pull out the seat belt. Slide the latch plate up the
webbing as far as necessary to allow the seat belt to go
around your lap.
3. When the seat belt is long enough to fit, insert the latch
plate into the buckle until you hear a “click.”
Pulling Out The Latch Plate
182 SAFETY
4. Position the lap belt so that it is snug and lies low across
your hips, below your abdomen. To remove slack in the
lap belt portion, pull up on the shoulder belt. To loosen
the lap belt if it is too tight, tilt the latch plate and pull
on the lap belt. A snug seat belt reduces the risk of
sliding under the seat belt in a collision.
5. Position the shoulder belt across the shoulder and chest
with minimal, if any slack so that it is comfortable and
not resting on your neck. The retractor will withdraw
any slack in the shoulder belt.
6. To release the seat belt, push the red button on the
buckle. The seat belt will automatically retract to its
stowed position. If necessary, slide the latch plate down
the webbing to allow the seat belt to retract fully.
Inserting Latch Plate Into Buckle Positioning The Lap Belt
5
SAFETY 183
Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure
Use the following procedure to untwist a twisted lap/
shoulder belt.
1. Position the latch plate as close as possible to the anchor
point.
2. At about 6 to 12 inches (15 to 30 cm) above the latch
plate, grasp and twist the seat belt webbing 180 degrees
to create a fold that begins immediately above the latch
plate.
3. Slide the latch plate upward over the folded webbing.
The folded webbing must enter the slot at the top of the
latch plate.
4. Continue to slide the latch plate up until it clears the
folded webbing and the seat belt is no longer twisted.
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage
In the front and second row outboard seats the shoulder
belt can be adjusted upward or downward to position the
seat belt away from your neck. Push or squeeze the
anchorage button to release the anchorage, and move it up
or down to the position that serves you best.
As a guide, if you are shorter than average, you will prefer
the shoulder belt anchorage in a lower position, and if you
are taller than average, you will prefer the shoulder belt
anchorage in a higher position. After you release the
anchorage button, try to move it up or down to make sure
that it is locked in position.
Adjustable Anchorage
184 SAFETY
NOTE: The adjustable upper shoulder belt anchorage is
equipped with an Easy Up feature. This feature allows the
shoulder belt anchorage to be adjusted in the upward
position without pushing or squeezing the release button.
To verify the shoulder belt anchorage is latched, pull
downward on the shoulder belt anchorage until it is locked
into position.
WARNING!
• Wearing your seat belt incorrectly could make your
injuries in a collision much worse. You might suffer
internal injuries, or you could even slide out of the
seat belt. Follow these instructions to wear your seat
belt safely and to keep your passengers safe, too.
• Position the shoulder belt across the shoulder and
chest with minimal, if any slack so that it is comfort-
able and not resting on your neck. The retractor will
withdraw any slack in the shoulder belt.
• Misadjustment of the seat belt could reduce the
effectiveness of the safety belt in a crash.
Second Row Center (If Equipped) and Third Row
Center Seat Belt Operating Instructions
The second row center (if equipped) and third row center
seat belts feature a seat belt with a mini-latch plate and
buckle, which allows the seat belt to detach from the lower
anchor when the seat is folded. The mini-latch plate and
regular latch plate can then be stored out of the way in the
headliner for added convenience to open up utilization of
the storage areas behind the front seats when the seat is not
occupied.
1. Remove the mini-latch plate and regular latch plate
from its stowed position in the headliner slightly behind
the second or third row seat.
Mini-Latch Stowage
5
SAFETY 185
2. Grasp the mini-latch plate and pull the seat belt over the
seat.
3. Route the shoulder belt to the inside of the left head
restraint.
Mini-Latch Stowage Mini-Latch And Buckle Connected
186 SAFETY
4. When the seat belt is long enough to fit, insert the
mini-latch plate into the mini-buckle until you hear a
“click.”
5. Sit back in seat. Slide the regular latch plate up the
webbing as far as necessary to allow the seat belt to go
around your lap.
Connect Mini-Latch To Buckle Rear Center Seat Belt Buckled
5
SAFETY 187
6. When the seat belt is long enough to fit, insert the latch
plate into the buckle until you hear a “click.”
7. Position the lap belt so that it is snug and lies low across
your hips, below your abdomen. To remove slack in the
lap belt portion, pull up on the shoulder belt. To loosen
the lap belt if it is too tight, pull on the lap belt. A snug
seat belt reduces the risk of sliding under the seat belt in
a collision.
8. Position the shoulder belt on your chest so that it is
comfortable and not resting on your neck. The retractor
will withdraw any slack in the seat belt.
9. To release the seat belt, push the red button on the
buckle.
10. To disengage the mini-latch plate from the mini-buckle
for storage, insert the regular latch plate into the center
red slot on the mini-buckle. The seat belt will automati-
cally retract to its stowed position. If necessary, slide
the latch plate down the webbing to allow the seat belt
to retract fully. Insert the mini-latch plate and regular
latch plate into its stowed position.
WARNING!
• If the mini-latch plate and mini-buckle are not prop-
erly connected when the seat belt is used by an
occupant, the seat belt will not be able to provide
proper restraint and will increase the risk of injury in
a collision.
• When reattaching the mini-latch plate and mini-
buckle, ensure the seat belt webbing is not twisted.
If the webbing is twisted, follow the preceding
procedure to detach the mini-latch plate and mini-
buckle, untwist the webbing, and reattach the mini-
latch plate and mini-buckle.
Rear Center Seat Belt Buckled
188 SAFETY
Seat Belt Extender
If a seat belt is not long enough to fit properly, even when
the webbing is fully extended and the adjustable upper
shoulder belt anchorage (if equipped) is in its lowest
position, an authorized dealer can provide you with a Seat
Belt Extender. The Seat Belt Extender should be used only
if the existing seat belt is not long enough. When the Seat
Belt Extender is not required for a different occupant, it
must be removed.
WARNING!
• ONLY use a Seat Belt Extender if it is physically
required in order to properly fit the original seat belt
system. DO NOT USE the Seat Belt Extender if,
when worn, the distance between the front edge of
the Seat Belt Extender buckle and the center of the
occupant’s body is LESS than 6 inches.
• Using a Seat Belt Extender when not needed can
increase the risk of serious injury or death in a
collision. Only use the Seat Belt Extender when the
lap belt is not long enough and only use in the
recommended seating positions. Remove and store
the Seat Belt Extender when not needed.
Seat Belts And Pregnant Women
Seat belts must be worn by all occupants including preg-
nant women: the risk of injury in the event of an accident
is reduced for the mother and the unborn child if they are
wearing a seat belt.
Position the lap belt snug and low below the abdomen and
across the strong bones of the hips. Place the shoulder belt
across the chest and away from the neck. Never place the
shoulder belt behind the back or under the arm.
Pregnant Women And Seat Belts
5
SAFETY 189
Seat Belt Pretensioner
The front seat belt system is equipped with pretensioning
devices that are designed to remove slack from the seat belt
in the event of a collision. These devices may improve the
performance of the seat belt by removing slack from the
seat belt early in a collision. Pretensioners work for all size
occupants, including those in child restraints.
NOTE: These devices are not a substitute for proper seat
belt placement by the occupant. The seat belt still must be
worn snugly and positioned properly.
The pretensioners are triggered by the Occupant Restraint
Controller (ORC). Like the air bags, the pretensioners are
single use items. A deployed pretensioner or a deployed air
bag must be replaced immediately.
Energy Management Feature
The front seat belt system is equipped with an Energy
Management feature that may help further reduce the risk
of injury in the event of a collision. The seat belt system has
a retractor assembly that is designed to release webbing in
a controlled manner.
Switchable Automatic Locking Retractors (ALR) (If
Equipped)
The seat belts in the passenger seating positions may be
equipped with a Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
(ALR) which is used to secure a child restraint system. For
additional information, refer to “Installing Child Restraints
Using The Vehicle Seat Belt” under the “Child Restraints”
section of this manual. The figure below illustrates the
locking feature for each seating position.
ALR — Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor (2nd Row
Bench Seat )
190 SAFETY
If the passenger seating position is equipped with an ALR
and is being used for normal usage, only pull the seat belt
webbing out far enough to comfortably wrap around the
occupant’s mid-section so as to not activate the ALR. If the
ALR is activated, you will hear a clicking sound as the seat
belt retracts. Allow the webbing to retract completely in
this case and then carefully pull out only the amount of
webbing necessary to comfortably wrap around the occu-
pant’s mid-section. Slide the latch plate into the buckle
until you hear a ⬙click.⬙
In Automatic Locking Mode, the shoulder belt is automati-
cally pre-locked. The seat belt will still retract to remove
any slack in the shoulder belt. Use the Automatic Locking
Mode anytime a child restraint is installed in a seating
position that has a seat belt with this feature. Children 12
years old and under should always be properly restrained
in the rear seat of a vehicle with a rear seat.
WARNING!
• Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of an
air bag. A deploying passenger front air bag can
cause death or serious injury to a child 12 years or
younger, including a child in a rear-facing child
restraint.
• Only use a rear-facing child restraint in the rear seat
of a vehicle with a rear seat.
How To Engage The Automatic Locking Mode
1. Buckle the combination lap and shoulder belt.
2. Grasp the shoulder portion and pull downward until
the entire seat belt is extracted.
ALR — Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor (2nd Row
Quad Seating – Same For Stow ‘n Go And Non Stow ‘n
Go)
5
SAFETY 191
3. Allow the seat belt to retract. As the seat belt retracts,
you will hear a clicking sound. This indicates the seat
belt is now in the Automatic Locking Mode.
How To Disengage The Automatic Locking Mode
Unbuckle the combination lap/shoulder belt and allow it
to retract completely to disengage the Automatic Locking
Mode and activate the vehicle sensitive (emergency) lock-
ing mode.
WARNING!
• The seat belt assembly must be replaced if the
switchable Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) fea-
ture or any other seat belt function is not working
properly when checked according to the procedures
in the Service Manual.
• Failure to replace the seat belt assembly could in-
crease the risk of injury in collisions.
• Do not use the Automatic Locking Mode to restrain
occupants who are wearing the seat belt or children
who are using booster seats. The locked mode is only
used to install rear-facing or forward-facing child
restraints that have a harness for restraining the
child.
Supplemental Active Head Restraints (AHR)
These head restraints are passive, deployable components,
and vehicles with this equipment cannot be readily iden-
tified by any markings, only through visual inspection of
the head restraint. The head restraint will be split in two
halves, with the front half being soft foam and trim, the
back half being decorative plastic.
How The Active Head Restraints (AHR) Work
The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) determines
whether the severity or type of rear impact will require the
Active Head Restraints (AHR) to deploy. If a rear impact
requires deployment, both the driver and front passenger
seat AHRs will be deployed.
When AHRs deploy during a rear impact, the front half of
the head restraint extends forward to minimize the gap
between the back of the occupant’s head and the AHR. This
system is designed to help prevent or reduce the extent of
injuries to the driver and front passenger in certain types of
rear impacts.
192 SAFETY
NOTE: The Active Head Restraints (AHR) may or may not
deploy in the event of a front or side impact. However, if
during a front impact, a secondary rear impact occurs, the
AHR may deploy based on the severity and type of the
impact.
Active Head Restraint (AHR) Components:
WARNING!
• All occupants, including the driver, should not oper-
ate a vehicle or sit in a vehicle’s seat until the head
restraints are placed in their proper positions in
order to minimize the risk of neck injury in the event
of a collision.
• Do not place items over the top of the Active Head
Restraint, such as coats, seat covers or portable DVD
players. These items may interfere with the opera-
tion of the Active Head Restraint in the event of a
collision and could result in serious injury or death.
• Active Head Restraints may be deployed if they are
struck by an object such as a hand, foot or loose
cargo. To avoid accidental deployment of the Active
Head Restraint, ensure that all cargo is secured, as
loose cargo could contact the Active Head Restraint
during sudden stops. Failure to follow this warning
could cause personal injury if the Active Head Re-
straint is deployed.
NOTE: For more information on properly adjusting and
positioning the head restraint, refer to “Head Restraints” in
“Getting To Know Your Vehicle.”
Active Head Restraint (AHR) Components
1 — Head Restraint Front Half (Soft Foam And Trim)
2 — Head Restraint Back Half (Decorative Plastic Rear Cover)
3 — Head Restraint Guide Tubes
4 — Seat Back
5
SAFETY 193
Resetting Active Head Restraints (AHR)
If the Active Head Restraints are triggered during a colli-
sion, the front half of the head restraint will be extended
forward and separated from the rear half of the head
restraint (See Image). Do not drive your vehicle after the
AHRs have deployed. The head restraint must be reset into
the original position to best protect the occupant for all
types of collisions. An authorized FCA US LLC dealer must
reset the AHRs on the driver’s and front passenger’s seat
before driving. Personally attempting to reset the AHRs
may result in damage to the AHRs that could impair their
function.
WARNING!
Deployed AHRs are not able to best protect you in all
types of collisions. Have deployed AHRs reset by an
authorized dealer immediately.
Supplemental Restraint Systems (SRS)
Some of the safety features described in this section may be
standard equipment on some models, or may be optional
equipment on others. If you are not sure, ask an authorized
dealer.
The air bag system must be ready to protect you in a
collision. The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) moni-
tors the internal circuits and interconnecting wiring asso-
ciated with the electrical Air Bag System Components.
Your vehicle may be equipped with the following Air Bag
System Components:
Air Bag System Components
• Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
• Air Bag Warning Light
Active Head Restraint (AHR) Deployed
194 SAFETY
• Steering Wheel and Column
• Instrument Panel
• Knee Impact Bolsters
• Driver and Front Passenger Air Bags
• Seat Belt Buckle Switch
• Supplemental Side Air Bags
• Supplemental Knee Air Bags
• Front and Side Impact Sensors
• Seat Belt Pretensioners
• Seat Track Position Sensors
Air Bag Warning Light
The ORC monitors the readiness of the electronic
parts of the air bag system whenever the ignition
switch is in the START or ON/RUN position. If
the ignition switch is in the OFF position or in the
ACC position, the air bag system is not on and the air bags
will not inflate.
The ORC contains a backup power supply system that may
deploy the air bag system even if the battery loses power or
it becomes disconnected prior to deployment.
The ORC turns on the Air Bag Warning Light in the
instrument panel for approximately four to eight seconds
for a self-check when the ignition switch is first in the
ON/RUN position. After the self-check, the Air Bag Warn-
ing Light will turn off. If the ORC detects a malfunction in
any part of the system, it turns on the Air Bag Warning
Light, either momentarily or continuously. A single chime
will sound to alert you if the light comes on again after
initial startup.
The ORC also includes diagnostics that will illuminate the
instrument panel Air Bag Warning Light if a malfunction is
detected that could affect the air bag system. The diagnos-
tics also record the nature of the malfunction. While the air
bag system is designed to be maintenance free, if any of the
following occurs, have an authorized dealer service the air
bag system immediately.
• The Air Bag Warning Light does not come on during the
four to eight seconds when the ignition switch is first in
the ON/RUN position.
• The Air Bag Warning Light remains on after the four to
eight-second interval.
• The Air Bag Warning Light comes on intermittently or
remains on while driving.
5
SAFETY 195
NOTE: If the speedometer, tachometer, or any engine
related gauges are not working, the Occupant Restraint
Controller (ORC) may also be disabled. In this condition
the air bags may not be ready to inflate for your protection.
Have an authorized dealer service the air bag system
immediately.
WARNING!
Ignoring the Air Bag Warning Light in your instrument
panel could mean you won’t have the air bag system to
protect you in a collision. If the light does not come on
as a bulb check when the ignition is first turned on,
stays on after you start the vehicle, or if it comes on as
you drive, have an authorized dealer service the air bag
system immediately.
Front Air Bags
This vehicle has front air bags and lap/shoulder belts for
both the driver and front passenger. The front air bags are
a supplement to the seat belt restraint systems. The driver
front air bag is mounted in the center of the steering wheel.
The passenger front air bag is mounted in the instrument
panel, above the glove compartment. The words “SRS
AIRBAG” or “AIRBAG” are embossed on the air bag
covers.
WARNING!
• Being too close to the steering wheel or instrument
panel during front air bag deployment could cause
serious injury, including death. Air bags need room
to inflate. Sit back, comfortably extending your arms
to reach the steering wheel or instrument panel.
(Continued)
Front Air Bag/Knee Impact Bolster Locations
1 — Driver And Passenger Front Air Bags
2 — Passenger Knee Impact Bolster
3 — Driver Knee Impact Bolster/Supplemental Driver Knee Air Bag
196 SAFETY
WARNING! (Continued)
• Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of an
air bag. A deploying passenger front air bag can
cause death or serious injury to a child 12 years or
younger, including a child in a rear-facing child
restraint.
• Only use a rear-facing child restraint in the rear seat
of a vehicle with a rear seat.
Driver And Passenger Front Air Bag Features
The Advanced Front Air Bag system has multistage driver
and front passenger air bags. This system provides output
appropriate to the severity and type of collision as deter-
mined by the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC), which
may receive information from the front impact sensors (if
equipped) or other system components.
The first stage inflator is triggered immediately during an
impact that requires air bag deployment. A low energy
output is used in less severe collisions. A higher energy
output is used for more severe collisions.
This vehicle may be equipped with a driver and/or front
passenger seat belt buckle switch that detects whether the
driver or front passenger seat belt is buckled. The seat belt
buckle switch may adjust the inflation rate of the Ad-
vanced Front Air Bags.
This vehicle may be equipped with driver and/or front
passenger seat track position sensors that may adjust the
inflation rate of the Advanced Front Air Bags based upon
seat position.
WARNING!
• No objects should be placed over or near the air bag
on the instrument panel or steering wheel because
any such objects could cause harm if the vehicle is in
a collision severe enough to cause the air bag to
inflate.
• Do not put anything on or around the air bag covers
or attempt to open them manually. You may damage
the air bags and you could be injured because the air
bags may no longer be functional. The protective
covers for the air bag cushions are designed to open
only when the air bags are inflating.
• Relying on the air bags alone could lead to more
severe injuries in a collision. The air bags work with
your seat belt to restrain you properly. In some
(Continued)
5
SAFETY 197
WARNING! (Continued)
collisions, air bags won’t deploy at all. Always wear
your seat belts even though you have air bags.
Front Air Bag Operation
Front Air Bags are designed to provide additional protec-
tion by supplementing the seat belts. Front air bags are not
expected to reduce the risk of injury in rear, side, or
rollover collisions. The front air bags will not deploy in all
frontal collisions, including some that may produce sub-
stantial vehicle damage — for example, some pole colli-
sions, truck underrides, and angle offset collisions.
On the other hand, depending on the type and location of
impact, front air bags may deploy in crashes with little
vehicle front-end damage but that produce a severe initial
deceleration.
Because air bag sensors measure vehicle deceleration over
time, vehicle speed and damage by themselves are not
good indicators of whether or not an air bag should have
deployed.
Seat belts are necessary for your protection in all collisions,
and also are needed to help keep you in position, away
from an inflating air bag.
When the ORC detects a collision requiring the front air
bags, it signals the inflator units. A large quantity of
non-toxic gas is generated to inflate the front air bags.
The steering wheel hub trim cover and the upper passen-
ger side of the instrument panel separate and fold out of
the way as the air bags inflate to their full size. The front air
bags fully inflate in less time than it takes to blink your
eyes. The front air bags then quickly deflate while helping
to restrain the driver and front passenger.
Knee Impact Bolsters
The Knee Impact Bolsters help protect the knees of the
driver and front passenger, and position the front occu-
pants for improved interaction with the front air bags.
WARNING!
• Do not drill, cut, or tamper with the knee impact
bolsters in any way.
• Do not mount any accessories to the knee impact
bolsters such as alarm lights, stereos, citizen band
radios, etc.
198 SAFETY
Supplemental Driver Knee Air Bag
This vehicle is equipped with a Supplemental Driver Knee
Air Bag mounted in the instrument panel below the
steering column. The Supplemental Driver Knee Air Bag
provides enhanced protection during a frontal impact by
working together with the seat belts, pretensioners, and
front air bags.
Supplemental Side Air Bags
Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SABs)
This vehicle is equipped with Supplemental Seat-Mounted
Side Air Bags (SABs).
Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SABs) are
located in the outboard side of the front seats. The SABs are
marked with “SRS AIRBAG” or “AIRBAG” on a label or on
the seat trim on the outboard side of the seats.
The SABs may help to reduce the risk of occupant injury
during certain side impacts, in addition to the injury
reduction potential provided by the seat belts and body
structure.
When the SAB deploys, it opens the seam on the outboard
side of the seatback’s trim cover. The inflating SAB deploys
through the seat seam into the space between the occupant
and the door. The SAB moves at a very high speed and
with such a high force that it could injure occupants if they
are not seated properly, or if items are positioned in the
area where the SAB inflates. Children are at an even greater
risk of injury from a deploying air bag.
Front Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bag
5
SAFETY 199
WARNING!
Do not use accessory seat covers or place objects
between you and the Side Air Bags; the performance
could be adversely affected and/or objects could be
pushed into you, causing serious injury.
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains (SABICs)
This vehicle is equipped with Supplemental Side Air Bag
Inflatable Curtains (SABICs).
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains (SABICs)
are located above the side windows. The trim covering the
SABICs is labeled “SRS AIRBAG” or “AIRBAG.”
SABICs may help reduce the risk of head and other injuries
to front and rear seat outboard occupants in certain side
impacts, in addition to the injury reduction potential
provided by the seat belts and body structure.
The SABIC deploys downward, covering the side win-
dows. An inflating SABIC pushes the outside edge of the
headliner out of the way and covers the window. The
SABICs inflate with enough force to injure occupants if
they are not belted and seated properly, or if items are
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain (SABIC)
Label Location
200 SAFETY
positioned in the area where the SABICs inflate. Children
are at an even greater risk of injury from a deploying air
bag.
The SABICs may help reduce the risk of partial or complete
ejection of vehicle occupants through side windows in
certain side impact events.
WARNING!
• Do not mount equipment, or stack luggage or other
cargo up high enough to block the deployment of the
SABICs. The trim covering above the side windows
where the SABIC and its deployment path are lo-
cated should remain free from any obstructions.
• In order for the SABICs to work as intended, do not
install any accessory items in your vehicle which
could alter the roof. Do not add an aftermarket
sunroof to your vehicle. Do not add roof racks that
require permanent attachments (bolts or screws) for
installation on the vehicle roof. Do not drill into the
roof of the vehicle for any reason.
Side Impacts
The Side Air Bags are designed to activate in certain side
impacts. The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) deter-
mines whether the deployment of the Side Air Bags in a
particular impact event is appropriate, based on the sever-
ity and type of collision. The side impact sensors aid the
ORC in determining the appropriate response to impact
events. The system is calibrated to deploy the Side Air Bags
on the impact side of the vehicle during impacts that
require Side Air Bag occupant protection. In side impacts,
the Side Air Bags deploy independently; a left side impact
deploys the left Side Air Bags only and a right-side impact
deploys the right Side Air Bags only. Vehicle damage by
itself is not a good indicator of whether or not Side Air
Bags should have deployed.
The Side Air Bags will not deploy in all side collisions,
including some collisions at certain angles, or some side
collisions that do not impact the area of the passenger
compartment. The Side Air Bags may deploy during
angled or offset frontal collisions where the front air bags
deploy.
5
SAFETY 201
Side Air Bags are a supplement to the seat belt restraint
system. Side Air Bags deploy in less time than it takes to
blink your eyes.
WARNING!
• Occupants, including children, who are up against or
very close to Side Air Bags can be seriously injured
or killed. Occupants, including children, should
never lean on or sleep against the door, side win-
dows, or area where the side air bags inflate, even if
they are in an infant or child restraint.
• Seat belts (and child restraints where appropriate)
are necessary for your protection in all collisions.
They also help keep you in position, away from an
inflating Side Air Bag. To get the best protection
from the Side Air Bags, occupants must wear their
seat belts properly and sit upright with their backs
against the seats. Children must be properly re-
strained in a child restraint or booster seat that is
appropriate for the size of the child.
WARNING!
• Side Air Bags need room to inflate. Do not lean
against the door or window. Sit upright in the center
of the seat.
• Being too close to the Side Air Bags during deploy-
ment could cause you to be severely injured or
killed.
• Relying on the Side Air Bags alone could lead to
more severe injuries in a collision. The Side Air Bags
work with your seat belt to restrain you properly. In
some collisions, Side Air Bags won’t deploy at all.
Always wear your seat belt even though you have
Side Air Bags.
NOTE: Air bag covers may not be obvious in the interior
trim, but they will open during air bag deployment.
Rollover Events
Side Air Bags are designed to activate in certain rollover
events. The ORC determines whether the deployment of
the Side Air Bags in a particular rollover event is appro-
priate, based on the severity and type of collision. Vehicle
damage by itself is not a good indicator of whether or not
Side Air Bags should have deployed.
202 SAFETY
The Side Air Bags will not deploy in all rollover events. The
rollover sensing system determines if a rollover event may
be in progress and whether deployment is appropriate. In
the event the vehicle experiences a rollover or near rollover
event, and deployment of the Side Air Bags is appropriate,
the rollover sensing system will also deploy the seat belt
pretensioners on both sides of the vehicle.
The SABICs may help reduce the risk of partial or complete
ejection of vehicle occupants through side windows in
certain rollover or side impact events.
Air Bag System Components
NOTE: The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) monitors
the internal circuits and interconnecting wiring associated
with electrical Air Bag System Components listed below:
• Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
• Air Bag Warning Light
• Steering Wheel and Column
• Instrument Panel
• Knee Impact Bolsters
• Driver and Front Passenger Air Bags
• Seat Belt Buckle Switch
• Supplemental Side Air Bags
• Supplemental Knee Air Bags
• Front and Side Impact Sensors
• Seat Belt Pretensioners
• Seat Track Position Sensors
If A Deployment Occurs
The front air bags are designed to deflate immediately after
deployment.
NOTE: Front and/or side air bags will not deploy in all
collisions. This does not mean something is wrong with the
air bag system.
If you do have a collision which deploys the air bags, any
or all of the following may occur:
• The air bag material may sometimes cause abrasions
and/or skin reddening to the occupants as the air bags
deploy and unfold. The abrasions are similar to friction
rope burns or those you might get sliding along a carpet
or gymnasium floor. They are not caused by contact with
chemicals. They are not permanent and normally heal
quickly. However, if you haven’t healed significantly
within a few days, or if you have any blistering, see your
doctor immediately.
5
SAFETY 203
• As the air bags deflate, you may see some smoke-like
particles. The particles are a normal by-product of the
process that generates the non-toxic gas used for air bag
inflation. These airborne particles may irritate the skin,
eyes, nose, or throat. If you have skin or eye irritation,
rinse the area with cool water. For nose or throat
irritation, move to fresh air. If the irritation continues,
see your doctor. If these particles settle on your clothing,
follow the garment manufacturer’s instructions for
cleaning.
Do not drive your vehicle after the air bags have deployed.
If you are involved in another collision, the air bags will
not be in place to protect you.
WARNING!
Deployed air bags and seat belt pretensioners cannot
protect you in another collision. Have the air bags, seat
belt pretensioners, and the seat belt retractor assem-
blies replaced by an authorized dealer immediately.
Also, have the Occupant Restraint Controller System
serviced as well.
NOTE:
• Air bag covers may not be obvious in the interior trim,
but they will open during air bag deployment.
• After any collision, the vehicle should be taken to an
authorized dealer immediately.
Enhanced Accident Response System
In the event of an impact, if the communication network
remains intact, and the power remains intact, depending
on the nature of the event, the ORC will determine whether
to have the Enhanced Accident Response System perform
the following functions:
• Cut off fuel to the engine (If Equipped)
• Cut off battery power to the electric motor (If Equipped)
• Flash hazard lights as long as the battery has power
• Turn on the interior lights, which remain on as long as
the battery has power or for 15 minutes from the
intervention of the Enhanced Accident Response Sys-
tem.
• Unlock the power door locks.
204 SAFETY
Your vehicle may also be designed to perform any of these
other functions in response to the Enhanced Accident
Response System:
• Turn off the Fuel Filter Heater, Turn off the HVAC
Blower Motor, Close the HVAC Circulation Door
• Cut off battery power to the:
• Engine
• Electric Motor (if equipped)
• Electric power steering
• Brake booster
• Electric park brake
• Automatic transmission gear selector
• Horn
• Front wiper
• Headlamp washer pump
NOTE: After an accident, remember to cycle the ignition
to the STOP (OFF/LOCK) position and remove the key
from the ignition switch to avoid draining the battery.
Carefully check the vehicle for fuel leaks in the engine
compartment and on the ground near the engine compart-
ment and fuel tank before resetting the system and starting
the engine. If there are no fuel leaks or damage to the
vehicle electrical devices (e.g. headlights) after an accident,
reset the system by following the procedure described
below. If you have any doubt, contact an authorized dealer.
Enhanced Accident Response System Reset
Procedure
In order to reset the Enhanced Accident Response System
functions after an event, the ignition switch must be
changed from ignition START or ON/RUN to ignition OFF.
Carefully check the vehicle for fuel leaks in the engine
compartment and on the ground near the engine compart-
ment and fuel tank before resetting the system and starting
the engine.
5
SAFETY 205
Maintaining Your Air Bag System
WARNING!
• Modifications to any part of the air bag system could
cause it to fail when you need it. You could be
injured if the air bag system is not there to protect
you. Do not modify the components or wiring, in-
cluding adding any kind of badges or stickers to the
steering wheel hub trim cover or the upper passenger
side of the instrument panel. Do not modify the front
bumper, vehicle body structure, or add aftermarket
side steps or running boards.
• It is dangerous to try to repair any part of the air bag
system yourself. Be sure to tell anyone who works on
your vehicle that it has an air bag system.
• Do not attempt to modify any part of your air bag
system. The air bag may inflate accidentally or may
not function properly if modifications are made.
Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer for any air
bag system service. If your seat, including your trim
cover and cushion, needs to be serviced in any way
(including removal or loosening/tightening of seat
attachment bolts), take the vehicle to an authorized
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
dealer. Only manufacturer approved seat accessories
may be used. If it is necessary to modify the air bag
system for persons with disabilities, contact an au-
thorized dealer.
Event Data Recorder (EDR)
This vehicle is equipped with an event data recorder
(EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is to record, in certain
crash or near crash-like situations, such as an air bag
deployment or hitting a road obstacle, data that will assist
in understanding how a vehicle’s systems performed. The
EDR is designed to record data related to vehicle dynamics
and safety systems for a short period of time, typically 30
seconds or less. The EDR in this vehicle is designed to
record such data as:
• How various systems in your vehicle were operating;
• Whether or not the driver and passenger safety belts
were buckled/fastened;
• How far (if at all) the driver was depressing the accel-
erator and/or brake pedal; and,
• How fast the vehicle was traveling.
206 SAFETY
These data can help provide a better understanding of the
circumstances in which crashes and injuries occur.
NOTE: EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if a
non-trivial crash situation occurs; no data are recorded by
the EDR under normal driving conditions and no personal
data (e.g., name, gender, age, and crash location) are
recorded. However, other parties, such as law enforcement,
could combine the EDR data with the type of personally
identifying data routinely acquired during a crash investi-
gation.
To read data recorded by an EDR, special equipment is
required, and access to the vehicle or the EDR is needed. In
addition to the vehicle manufacturer, other parties, such as
law enforcement, that have the special equipment, can read
the information if they have access to the vehicle or the
EDR.
Child Restraints
Everyone in your vehicle needs to be buckled up at all
times, including babies and children. Every state in the
United States, and every Canadian province, requires that
small children ride in proper restraint systems. This is the
law, and you can be prosecuted for ignoring it.
Children 12 years or younger should ride properly buckled
up in a rear seat, if available. According to crash statistics,
children are safer when properly restrained in the rear
seats rather than in the front.
WARNING!
In a collision, an unrestrained child can become a
projectile inside the vehicle. The force required to hold
even an infant on your lap could become so great that
you could not hold the child, no matter how strong you
are. The child and others could be badly injured or
killed. Any child riding in your vehicle should be in a
proper restraint for the child’s size.
There are different sizes and types of restraints for children
from newborn size to the child almost large enough for an
adult safety belt. Always check the child seat Owner’s
Manual to make sure you have the correct seat for your
child. Carefully read and follow all the instructions and
warnings in the child restraint Owner’s Manual and on all
the labels attached to the child restraint.
Before buying any restraint system, make sure that it has a
label certifying that it meets all applicable Safety Stan-
dards. You should also make sure that you can install it in
the vehicle where you will use it.
5
SAFETY 207
NOTE:
• For additional information, refer to http://
www.nhtsa.gov/parents-and-caregivers or call: 1–888–
327–4236
• Canadian residents should refer to Transport Canada’s
website for additional information: http://
www.tc.gc.ca/eng/motorvehiclesafety/safedrivers-
childsafety-index-53.htm
Summary Of Recommendations For Restraining Children In Vehicles
Child Size, Height, Weight Or Age
Recommended Type Of Child Re-
straint
Infants and Toddlers Children who are two years old or
younger and who have not reached
the height or weight limits of their
child restraint
Either an Infant Carrier or a Convert-
ible Child Restraint, facing rearward
in the rear seat of the vehicle
Small Children Children who are at least two years
old or who have outgrown the
height or weight limit of their rear-
facing child restraint
Forward-Facing Child Restraint with
a five-point Harness, facing forward
in the rear seat of the vehicle
Larger Children Children who have outgrown their
forward-facing child restraint, but
are too small to properly fit the vehi-
cle’s seat belt
Belt Positioning Booster Seat and the
vehicle seat belt, seated in the rear
seat of the vehicle
Children Too Large for Child Re-
straints
Children 12 years old or younger,
who have outgrown the height or
weight limit of their booster seat
Vehicle Seat Belt, seated in the rear
seat of the vehicle
208 SAFETY
Infant And Child Restraints
Safety experts recommend that children ride rear-facing in
the vehicle until they are two years old or until they reach
either the height or weight limit of their rear-facing child
restraint. Two types of child restraints can be used rear-
facing: infant carriers and convertible child seats.
The infant carrier is only used rear-facing in the vehicle. It
is recommended for children from birth until they reach
the weight or height limit of the infant carrier. Convertible
child seats can be used either rear-facing or forward-facing
in the vehicle. Convertible child seats often have a higher
weight limit in the rear-facing direction than infant carriers
do, so they can be used rear-facing by children who have
outgrown their infant carrier but are still less than at least
two years old. Children should remain rear-facing until
they reach the highest weight or height allowed by their
convertible child seat.
WARNING!
• Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of an
air bag. A deploying passenger front air bag can
cause death or serious injury to a child 12 years or
younger, including a child in a rear-facing child
restraint.
• Only use a rear-facing child restraint in the rear seat
of a vehicle with a rear seat.
5
SAFETY 209
WARNING!
Do not install a rear-facing car seat using a rear support
leg in this vehicle. The floor of this vehicle is not
designed to manage the crash forces of this type of car
seat. In a crash, the support leg may not function as it
was designed by the car seat manufacturer, and your
child may be more severely injured as a result.
Older Children And Child Restraints
Children who are two years old or who have outgrown
their rear-facing convertible child seat can ride forward-
facing in the vehicle. Forward-facing child seats and con-
vertible child seats used in the forward-facing direction are
for children who are over two years old or who have
outgrown the rear-facing weight or height limit of their
rear-facing convertible child seat. Children should remain
in a forward-facing child seat with a harness for as long as
possible, up to the highest weight or height allowed by the
child seat.
All children whose weight or height is above the forward-
facing limit for the child seat should use a belt-positioning
booster seat until the vehicle’s seat belts fit properly. If the
child cannot sit with knees bent over the vehicle’s seat
cushion while the child’s back is against the seatback, they
should use a belt-positioning booster seat. The child and
belt-positioning booster seat are held in the vehicle by the
seat belt.
210 SAFETY
WARNING!
• Improper installation can lead to failure of an infant
or child restraint. It could come loose in a collision.
The child could be badly injured or killed. Follow
the child restraint manufacturer’s directions exactly
when installing an infant or child restraint.
• After a child restraint is installed in the vehicle, do
not move the vehicle seat forward or rearward be-
cause it can loosen the child restraint attachments.
Remove the child restraint before adjusting the ve-
hicle seat position. When the vehicle seat has been
adjusted, reinstall the child restraint.
• When your child restraint is not in use, secure it in
the vehicle with the seat belt or LATCH anchorages,
or remove it from the vehicle. Do not leave it loose in
the vehicle. In a sudden stop or accident, it could
strike the occupants or seatbacks and cause serious
personal injury.
Children Too Large For Booster Seats
Children who are large enough to wear the shoulder belt
comfortably, and whose legs are long enough to bend over
the front of the seat when their back is against the seatback,
should use the seat belt in a rear seat. Use this simple 5-step
test to decide whether the child can use the vehicle’s seat
belt alone:
1. Can the child sit all the way back against the back of the
vehicle seat?
2. Do the child’s knees bend comfortably over the front of
the vehicle seat – while the child is still sitting all the
way back?
3. Does the shoulder belt cross the child’s shoulder be-
tween their neck and arm?
4. Is the lap part of the belt as low as possible, touching the
child’s thighs and not the stomach?
5. Can the child stay seated like this for the whole trip?
If the answer to any of these questions was “no,” then the
child still needs to use a booster seat in this vehicle. If the
child is using the lap/shoulder belt, check seat belt fit
periodically and make sure the seat belt buckle is latched.
A child’s squirming or slouching can move the belt out of
position. If the shoulder belt contacts the face or neck,
move the child closer to the center of the vehicle, or use a
booster seat to position the seat belt on the child correctly.
5
SAFETY 211
WARNING!
Never allow a child to put the shoulder belt under an
arm or behind their back. In a crash, the shoulder belt
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
will not protect a child properly, which may result in
serious injury or death. A child must always wear both
the lap and shoulder portions of the seat belt correctly.
Recommendations For Attaching Child Restraints
Restraint Type Combined
Weight of the
Child + Child
Restraint
Use Any Attachment Method Shown With An “X” Below
LATCH – Lower
Anchors Only
Seat Belt Only LATCH – Lower
Anchors + Top
Tether Anchor
Seat Belt + Top
Tether Anchor
Rear-Facing
Child Restraint
Up to 65 lbs
(29.5 kg)
XX
Rear-Facing
Child Restraint
More than 65 lbs
(29.5 kg)
X
Forward-Facing
Child Restraint
Up to 65 lbs
(29.5 kg)
XX
Forward-Facing
Child Restraint
More than 65 lbs
(29.5 kg)
X
212 SAFETY
Lower Anchors And Tethers For CHildren (LATCH)
Restraint System
Your vehicle is equipped with the child restraint anchorage
system called LATCH, which stands for Lower Anchors
and Tethers for CHildren. The LATCH system has three
vehicle anchor points for installing LATCH-equipped child
seats. There are two lower anchorages located at the back
of the seat cushion where it meets the seatback and one top
tether anchorage located behind the seating position. These
anchorages are used to install LATCH-equipped child seats
without using the vehicle’s seat belts. Some seating posi-
tions may have a top tether anchorage but no lower
anchorages. In these seating positions, the seat belt must be
used with the top tether anchorage to install the child
restraint. Please see the following table for more
information.
LATCH Label
5
SAFETY 213
LATCH Positions For Installing Child Restraints In
This Vehicle
2nd Row Bench Seat – LATCH Positions
•
Lower Anchorage Symbol 2 anchorages per seat-
ing position
•
Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
2nd Row Quad Seating – Same For Stow ‘n Go And Non
Stow ‘n Go
•
Lower Anchorage Symbol 2 anchorages per seat-
ing position
•
Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
214 SAFETY
Frequently Asked Questions About Installing Child Restraints With LATCH
What is the weight limit (child’s
weight + weight of the child re-
straint) for using the LATCH anchor-
age system to attach the child re-
straint?
65 lbs (29.5 kg) Use the LATCH anchorage system
until the combined weight of the
child and the child restraint is 65 lbs
(29.5 kg). Use the seat belt and tether
anchor instead of the LATCH system
once the combined weight is more
than 65 lbs (29.5 kg).
Can the LATCH anchorages and the
seat belt be used together to attach a
rear-facing or forward-facing child
restraint?
No Do not use the seat belt when you
use the LATCH anchorage system to
attach a rear-facing or forward-facing
child restraint.
Booster seats may be attached to the
LATCH anchorages if allowed by the
booster seat manufacturer. See your
booster seat owner’s manual for more
information.
Can two child restraints be attached
using a common lower LATCH an-
chorage?
No
Never “share” a LATCH anchorage with
two or more child restraints. If the cen-
ter position does not have dedicated
LATCH lower anchorages, use the seat
belt to install a child seat in the center
position next to a child seat using the
LATCH anchorages in an outboard posi-
tion.
5
SAFETY 215
Frequently Asked Questions About Installing Child Restraints With LATCH
Can the rear-facing child restraint
touch the back of the front passenger
seat?
Yes The child seat may touch the back of
the front passenger seat if the child
restraint manufacturer also allows
contact. See your child restraint own-
er’s manual for more information.
Can the head restraints be removed? Yes The 2nd row head restraints on
bench and fixed quad seats are re-
movable. The 2nd row stow n’ go
head restraints are not removable.
The 3rd row center head restraint is
removable in all vehicles, but the 3rd
row outboard head restraints are not
removable.
NOTE: If the folding, non-adjustable head restraint inter-
feres with the installation of the child restraint, the head
restraint may be folded and the child seat installed in front
of it.
WARNING!
Always make sure the head restraint is in its upright
position when the seat is to be used by an occupant
who is not in a child restraint. Sitting in a seat with the
head restraint in its lowered position could result in
serious injury or death in a collision.
216 SAFETY
Locating The LATCH Anchorages
The lower anchorages are round bars that are
found at the rear of the seat cushion where it
meets the seatback. They are just visible when
you lean into the rear seat to install the child
restraint. You will easily feel them if you run your finger
along the gap between the seatback and seat cushion.
Car Seat With Head Restraint Folded
1 – Folded Headrest
2 – Child Restraint
2nd Row Bench Seat LATCH Lower Anchorages
5
SAFETY 217
2nd Row Quad Seat LATCH Lower Anchorages 3rd Row 60/40 Seat LATCH Lower Anchorages
218 SAFETY
Locating The Upper Tether Anchorages
Bench Seating
There are tether strap anchorages behind each rear seating
position located on the back of the seat, near the floor.
Quad and Stow n’ Go Seating
There are tether strap anchorages located behind the
second row seating positions and the third row center
seating position. The tether anchorages are located on the
back of the seat, near the floor.
Tether Strap Anchorages (Second Row Bench Anchorage
Shown)
Tether Strap Anchorages (Third Row 60/40 Anchorage
Shown)
5
SAFETY 219
LATCH-compatible child restraint systems will be
equipped with a rigid bar or a flexible strap on each side.
Each will have a hook or connector to attach to the lower
anchorage and a way to tighten the connection to the
anchorage. Forward-facing child restraints and some rear-
facing child restraints will also be equipped with a tether
strap. The tether strap will have a hook at the end to attach
to the top tether anchorage and a way to tighten the strap
after it is attached to the anchorage.
Center Seat LATCH
If a child restraint installed in the center position blocks the
seat belt webbing or buckle for the outboard position, do
not use that outboard position. If a child seat in the center
position blocks the outboard LATCH anchors or seat belt,
do not install a child seat in that outboard position.
WARNING!
Never use the same lower anchorage to attach more
than one child restraint.
Please refer to “To Install A LATCH-Compatible Child
Restraint” for typical installation instructions.
Always follow the directions of the child restraint manu-
facturer when installing your child restraint. Not all child
restraint systems will be installed as described here.
To Install A LATCH-Compatible Child Restraint
If the selected seating position has a Switchable Automatic
Locking Retractor (ALR) seat belt, stow the seat belt,
following the instructions below. See the section “Installing
Child Restraints Using the Vehicle Seat Belt” to check what
type of seat belt each seating position has.
Tether Strap Anchorages (Second Row Captains Chair
Anchorage Shown)
220 SAFETY
1. Loosen the adjusters on the lower straps and on the
tether strap of the child seat so that you can more easily
attach the hooks or connectors to the vehicle anchor-
ages.
2. Place the child seat between the lower anchorages for
that seating position. For some second row seats, you
may need to recline the seat and / or raise the head
restraint to get a better fit. If the rear seat can be moved
forward and rearward in the vehicle, you may wish to
move it to its rear-most position to make room for the
child seat. You may also move the front seat forward to
allow more room for the child seat.
3. Attach the lower hooks or connectors of the child
restraint to the lower anchorages in the selected seating
position.
4. If the child restraint has a tether strap, connect it to the
top tether anchorage. See the section “Installing Child
Restraints Using the Top Tether Anchorage” for direc-
tions to attach a tether anchor.
5. Tighten all of the straps as you push the child restraint
rearward and downward into the seat. Remove slack in
the straps according to the child restraint manufactur-
er’s instructions.
6. Test that the child restraint is installed tightly by pulling
back and forth on the child seat at the belt path. It
should not move more than 1 inch (25.4 mm) in any
direction.
How To Stow An Unused Switchable-ALR (ALR)
Seat Belt:
When using the LATCH attaching system to install a child
restraint, stow all ALR seat belts that are not being used by
other occupants or being used to secure child restraints. An
unused belt could injure a child if they play with it and
accidentally lock the seat belt retractor. Before installing a
child restraint using the LATCH system, buckle the seat
belt behind the child restraint and out of the child’s reach.
If the buckled seat belt interferes with the child restraint
installation, instead of buckling it behind the child re-
straint, route the seat belt through the child restraint belt
path and then buckle it. Do not lock the seat belt. Remind
all children in the vehicle that the seat belts are not toys and
that they should not play with them.
5
SAFETY 221
WARNING!
• Improper installation of a child restraint to the
LATCH anchorages can lead to failure of the re-
straint. The child could be badly injured or killed.
Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s directions
exactly when installing an infant or child restraint.
• Child restraint anchorages are designed to withstand
only those loads imposed by correctly-fitted child
restraints. Under no circumstances are they to be
used for adult seat belts, harnesses, or for attaching
other items or equipment to the vehicle.
Installing Child Restraints Using The Vehicle Seat
Belt
Child restraint systems are designed to be secured in
vehicle seats by lap belts or the lap belt portion of a
lap/shoulder belt.
WARNING!
• Improper installation or failure to properly secure a
child restraint can lead to failure of the restraint. The
child could be badly injured or killed.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s directions
exactly when installing an infant or child restraint.
The seat belts in the passenger seating positions are
equipped with either a Switchable Automatic Locking
Retractor (ALR) or a cinching latch plate or both. Both
types of seat belts are designed to keep the lap portion of
the seat belt tight around the child restraint so that it is not
necessary to use a locking clip. The ALR retractor can be
“switched” into a locked mode by pulling all of the
webbing out of the retractor and then letting the webbing
retract back into the retractor. If it is locked, the ALR will
make a clicking noise while the webbing is pulled back into
the retractor. Refer to the “Automatic Locking Mode”
description in “Switchable Automatic Locking Retractors
(ALR)” under “Occupant Restraint Systems” for additional
information on ALR. The cinching latch plate is designed to
hold the lap portion of the seat belt tight when webbing is
pulled tight and straight through a child restraint’s belt
path.
Please see the table below and the following sections for
more information.
222 SAFETY
Lap/Shoulder Belt Systems For Installing Child
Restraints In This Vehicle
Second Row Bench Seating
• ALR = Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
•
Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
• Cinch = Cinching Latch Plate
Second Row Quad Seating – Same For Stow n’ Go And
Non Stow n’ Go
• ALR = Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
•
Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
• Cinch = Cinching Latch Plate
5
SAFETY 223
Frequently Asked Questions About Installing Child Restraints With Seat Belts
What is the weight limit (child’s
weight + weight of the child re-
straint) for using the Tether Anchor
with the seat belt to attach a forward
facing child restraint?
Weight limit of the Child Restraint Always use the tether anchor when
using the seat belt to install a for-
ward facing child restraint, up to the
recommended weight limit of the
child restraint.
Can the rear-facing child restraint
touch the back of the front passenger
seat?
Yes Contact between the front passenger
seat and the child restraint is al-
lowed, if the child restraint manufac-
turer also allows contact.
Can the head restraints be removed? Yes The 2nd row head restraints on
bench and fixed quad seats are re-
movable. The 2nd row stow n’ go
head restraints are not removable.
The 3rd row center head restraint is
removable in all vehicles, but the 3rd
row outboard head restraints are not
removable.
Can the buckle stalk be twisted to
tighten the seat belt against the belt
path of the child restraint?
Yes – Cinching Latch Plate
No – ALR
In positions with cinching latch
plates (CINCH), the buckle stalk may
be twisted up to 3 full turns. Do not
twist the buckle stalk in a seating
position with an ALR retractor.
224 SAFETY
NOTE: If the folding, non-adjustable head restraint inter-
feres with the installation of the child restraint, the head
restraint may be folded and the child seat installed in front
of it.
WARNING!
Always make sure the head restraint is in its upright
position when the seat is to be used by an occupant
who is not in a child restraint. Sitting in a seat with the
head restraint in its lowered position could result in
serious injury or death in a collision.
Car Seat With Head Restraint Folded
1 – Folded Headrest
2 – Child Restraint
5
SAFETY 225
Installing A Child Restraint With A Switchable
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR):
Child restraint systems are designed to be secured in
vehicle seats by lap belts or the lap belt portion of a
lap/shoulder belt.
WARNING!
• Improper installation or failure to properly secure a
child restraint can lead to failure of the restraint. The
child could be badly injured or killed.
• Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s directions
exactly when installing an infant or child restraint.
1. Place the child seat in the center of the seating position.
For some second row seats, you may need to recline the
seat and/or raise the head restraint to get a better fit. If
the rear seat can be moved forward and rearward in the
vehicle, you may wish to move it to its rear-most
position to make room for the child seat. You may also
move the front seat forward to allow more room for the
child seat.
2. Pull enough of the seat belt webbing from the retractor
to pass it through the belt path of the child restraint. Do
not twist the belt webbing in the belt path.
3. Slide the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a
“click.”
4. Pull on the webbing to make the lap portion tight
against the child seat.
5. To lock the seat belt, pull down on the shoulder part of
the belt until you have pulled all the seat belt webbing
out of the retractor. Then, allow the webbing to retract
back into the retractor. As the webbing retracts, you will
hear a clicking sound. This means the seat belt is now in
the Automatic Locking mode.
6. Try to pull the webbing out of the retractor. If it is
locked, you should not be able to pull out any webbing.
If the retractor is not locked, repeat step 5.
7. Finally, pull up on any excess webbing to tighten the lap
portion around the child restraint while you push the
child restraint rearward and downward into the vehicle
seat.
8. If the child restraint has a top tether strap and the
seating position has a top tether anchorage, connect the
tether strap to the anchorage and tighten the tether
strap. See the section “Installing Child Restraints Using
the Top Tether Anchorage” for directions to attach a
tether anchor.
226 SAFETY
9. Test that the child restraint is installed tightly by pulling
back and forth on the child seat at the belt path. It
should not move more than 1 inch (25.4 mm) in any
direction.
Any seat belt system will loosen with time, so check the
belt occasionally, and pull it tight if necessary.
Installing A Child Restraint With A Cinching Latch
Plate (CINCH) — If Equipped:
Child restraint systems are designed to be secured in
vehicle seats by lap belts or the lap belt portion of a
lap/shoulder belt.
WARNING!
• Improper installation or failure to properly secure a
child restraint can lead to failure of the restraint. The
child could be badly injured or killed.
• Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s directions
exactly when installing an infant or child restraint.
1. Place the child seat in the center of the seating position.
For some second row seats, you may need to recline the
seat and / or raise the head restraint to get a better fit. If
the rear seat can be moved forward and rearward in the
vehicle, you may wish to move it to its rear-most
position to make room for the child seat. You may also
move the front seat forward to allow more room for the
child seat.
2. Next, pull enough of the seat belt webbing from the
retractor to pass it through the belt path of the child
restraint. Do not twist the belt webbing in the belt path.
3. Slide the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a
“click.”
4. Finally, pull up on any excess webbing to tighten the lap
portion around the child restraint while you push the
child restraint rearward and downward into the vehicle
seat.
5. If the child restraint has a top tether strap and the
seating position has a top tether anchorage, connect the
tether strap to the anchorage and tighten the tether
strap. See the section “Installing Child Restraints Using
the Top Tether Anchorage” for directions to attach a
tether anchor.
6. Test that the child restraint is installed tightly by pulling
back and forth on the child seat at the belt path. It
should not move more than 1 inch (25.4 mm) in any
direction.
5
SAFETY 227
Any seat belt system will loosen with time, so check the
belt occasionally, and pull it tight if necessary.
If the buckle or the cinching latch plate is too close to the
belt path opening of the child restraint, you may have
trouble tightening the seat belt. If this happens, disconnect
the latch plate from the buckle and twist the short buckle-
end belt up to three full turns to shorten it. Insert the latch
plate into the buckle with the release button facing out,
away from the child restraint. Repeat steps 4 to 6, above, to
complete the installation of the child restraint.
If the belt still cannot be tightened after you shorten the
buckle, disconnect the latch plate from the buckle, turn the
buckle around one half turn, and insert the latch plate into
the buckle again. If you still cannot make the child restraint
installation tight, try a different seating position.
Installing Child Restraints Using The Top Tether
Anchorage
WARNING!
Do not attach a tether strap for a rear-facing car seat to
any location in front of the car seat, including the seat
frame or a tether anchorage. Only attach the tether
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
strap of a rear-facing car seat to the tether anchorage
that is approved for that seating position, located
behind the top of the vehicle seat. See the section
“Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren (LATCH)
Restraint System” for the location of approved tether
anchorages in your vehicle.
1. Look behind the seating position where you plan to
install the child restraint to find the tether anchorage.
You may need to move the seat forward to provide
better access to the tether anchorage. If there is no top
tether anchorage for that seating position, move the
child restraint to another position in the vehicle if one is
available.
228 SAFETY
Rear Seat Tether Strap Mounting (Second Row Bench
Anchorage Shown)
Rear Seat Tether Strap Mounting (Second Row Captains
Chair Anchorage Shown)
5
SAFETY 229
2. Route the tether strap to provide the most direct path for
the strap between the anchor and the child seat. If your
vehicle is equipped with adjustable rear head restraints,
raise the head restraint, and where possible, route the
tether strap under the head restraint and between the
two posts. If not possible, lower the head restraint and
pass the tether strap around the outboard side of the
head restraint.
3. Attach the tether strap hook of the child restraint to the
top tether anchorage as shown in the diagram.
4. Remove slack in the tether strap according to the child
restraint manufacturer’s instructions.
WARNING!
• An incorrectly anchored tether strap could lead to
increased head motion and possible injury to the
child. Use only the anchorage position directly be-
hind the child seat to secure a child restraint top
tether strap.
• If your vehicle is equipped with a split rear seat,
make sure the tether strap does not slip into the
opening between the seatbacks as you remove slack
in the strap.
Transporting Pets
Air Bags deploying in the front seat could harm your pet.
An unrestrained pet will be thrown about and possibly
injured, or injure a passenger during panic braking or in a
collision.
Pets should be restrained in the rear seat (if equipped) in
pet harnesses or pet carriers that are secured by seat belts.
Tether Strap Anchorages (Third Row 60/40 Anchorage
Shown)
230 SAFETY
SAFETY TIPS
Transporting Passengers
NEVER TRANSPORT PASSENGERS IN THE CARGO
AREA.
WARNING!
• Do not leave children or animals inside parked
vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build-up may
cause serious injury or death.
• It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area,
inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people
riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously
injured or killed.
• Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts.
• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.
Exhaust Gas
WARNING!
Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain carbon
monoxide (CO), which is colorless and odorless.
Breathing it can make you unconscious and can even-
tually poison you. To avoid breathing (CO), follow
these safety tips:
• Do not run the engine in a closed garage or in
confined areas any longer than needed to move your
vehicle in or out of the area.
• If you are required to drive with the trunk/liftgate/
rear doors open, make sure that all windows are
closed and the climate control BLOWER switch is set
at high speed. DO NOT use the recirculation mode.
• If it is necessary to sit in a parked vehicle with the
engine running, adjust your heating or cooling con-
trols to force outside air into the vehicle. Set the
blower at high speed.
The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into the
vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust
system.
5
SAFETY 231
Whenever a change is noticed in the sound of the exhaust
system, when exhaust fumes can be detected inside the
vehicle, or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is
damaged, have a competent mechanic inspect the complete
exhaust system and adjacent body areas for broken, dam-
aged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Open seams or
loose connections could permit exhaust fumes to seep into
the passenger compartment. In addition, inspect the ex-
haust system each time the vehicle is raised for lubrication
or oil change. Replace as required.
Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The Vehicle
Seat Belts
Inspect the seat belt system periodically, checking for cuts,
frays, and loose parts. Damaged parts must be replaced
immediately. Do not disassemble or modify the system.
Front seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a collision.
Rear seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a collision
if they have been damaged (i.e., bent retractor, torn web-
bing, etc.). If there is any question regarding seat belt or
retractor condition, replace the seat belt.
Air Bag Warning Light
The Air Bag warning light
will turn on for four to
eight seconds as a bulb check when the ignition switch
is first turned to ON/RUN. If the light is either not on
during starting, stays on, or turns on while driving,
have the system inspected at an authorized dealer as
soon as possible. After the bulb check, this light will
illuminate with a single chime when a fault with the Air
Bag System has been detected. It will stay on until the
fault is removed. If the light comes on intermittently or
remains on while driving, have an authorized dealer
service the vehicle immediately.
Refer to “Occupant Restraint Systems” in “Safety” for
further information.
Defroster
Check operation by selecting the defrost mode and place
the blower control on high speed. You should be able to
feel the air directed against the windshield. See an autho-
rized dealer for service if your defroster is inoperable.
Floor Mat Safety Information
Always use floor mats designed to fit your vehicle. Only
use a floor mat that does not interfere with the operation of
the accelerator, brake or clutch pedals. Only use a floor mat
that is securely attached using the floor mat fasteners so it
232 SAFETY
cannot slip out of position and interfere with the accelera-
tor, brake or clutch pedals or impair safe operation of your
vehicle in other ways.
WARNING!
An improperly attached, damaged, folded, or stacked
floor mat, or damaged floor mat fasteners may cause
your floor mat to interfere with the accelerator, brake,
or clutch pedals and cause a loss of vehicle control. To
prevent SERIOUS INJURY or DEATH:
• ALWAYS securely attach
your floor mat using the
floor mat fasteners. DO NOT install your floor mat
upside down or turn your floor mat over. Lightly pull
to confirm mat is secured using the floor mat fasten-
ers on a regular basis.
• ALWAYS REMOVE THE EXISTING FLOOR MAT
FROM THE VEHICLE
before installing any other
floor mat. NEVER install or stack an additional floor
mat on top of an existing floor mat.
• ONLY install floor mats designed to fit your vehicle.
NEVER install a floor mat that cannot be properly
attached and secured to your vehicle. If a floor mat
needs to be replaced, only use a FCA approved floor
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
mat for the specific make, model, and year of your
vehicle.
• ONLY use the driver’s side floor mat on the driver’s
side floor area. To check for interference, with the
vehicle properly parked with the engine off, fully
depress the accelerator, the brake, and the clutch
pedal (if present) to check for interference. If your
floor mat interferes with the operation of any pedal,
or is not secure to the floor, remove the floor mat
from the vehicle and place the floor mat in your
trunk.
• ONLY use the passenger’s side floor mat on the
passenger’s side floor area.
• ALWAYS make sure objects cannot fall or slide into
the driver’s side floor area when the vehicle is
moving. Objects can become trapped under accelera-
tor, brake, or clutch pedals and could cause a loss of
vehicle control.
• NEVER place any objects under the floor mat (e.g.,
towels, keys, etc.). These objects could change the
position of the floor mat and may cause interference
with the accelerator, brake, or clutch pedals.
(Continued)
5
SAFETY 233
WARNING! (Continued)
• If the vehicle carpet has been removed and re-
installed, always properly attach carpet to the floor
and check the floor mat fasteners are secure to the
vehicle carpet. Fully depress each pedal to check for
interference with the accelerator, brake, or clutch
pedals then re-install the floor mats.
• It is recommended to only use mild soap and water
to clean your floor mats. After cleaning, always check
your floor mat has been properly installed and is
secured to your vehicle using the floor mat fasteners
by lightly pulling mat.
Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make Outside
The Vehicle
Tires
Examine tires for excessive tread wear and uneven wear
patterns. Check for stones, nails, glass, or other objects
lodged in the tread or sidewall. Inspect the tread for cuts
and cracks. Inspect sidewalls for cuts, cracks, and bulges.
Check the wheel nuts for tightness. Check the tires (includ-
ing spare) for proper cold inflation pressure.
Lights
Have someone observe the operation of brake lights and
exterior lights while you work the controls. Check turn
signal and high beam indicator lights on the instrument
panel.
Door Latches
Check for proper closing, latching, and locking.
Fluid Leaks
Check area under the vehicle after overnight parking for
fuel, coolant, oil, or other fluid leaks. Also, if gasoline
fumes are detected or if fuel, or brake fluid leaks are
suspected. The cause should be located and corrected
immediately.
234 SAFETY
STARTING AND OPERATING
CONTENTS
䡵 STARTING THE ENGINE ..................237
▫ Normal Starting ........................237
▫ Cold Weather Operation (Below –22°F Or
−30°C) ..............................237
▫ After Starting — Warming Up The Engine .....238
▫ If Engine Fails To Start ..................238
䡵 ENGINE BLOCK HEATER — IF EQUIPPED . . . .238
䡵 ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS . . . .238
䡵 PARK BRAKE ..........................239
䡵 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION ..............241
▫ Key Ignition Park Interlock ................242
▫ Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock System . . . .242
▫ Fuel Economy (ECON) Mode ..............243
▫ Six-Speed Automatic Transmission...........243
▫ Gear Ranges ..........................244
䡵 POWER STEERING ......................250
▫ Power Steering Fluid Check ...............250
䡵 SPEED CONTROL — IF EQUIPPED ..........251
▫ To Activate ...........................252
▫ To Set A Desired Speed...................252
▫ To Vary The Speed Setting ................252
▫ To Accelerate For Passing .................253
▫ To Resume Speed ......................254
▫ To Deactivate .........................254
䡵 PARKSENSE REAR PARK ASSIST — IF
EQUIPPED ............................254
▫ ParkSense Sensors ......................255
▫ ParkSense Warning Display................255
6
▫ ParkSense Display ......................256
▫ Enabling/Disabling ParkSense..............259
▫ Service The ParkSense Rear Park Assist System. .259
▫ Cleaning The ParkSense System.............259
▫ ParkSense System Usage Precautions .........259
䡵 PARKVIEW REAR BACK UP CAMERA ........261
䡵 REFUELING THE VEHICLE ................263
▫ Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message .............264
䡵 VEHICLE LOADING .....................264
▫ Certification Label ......................264
䡵 TRAILER TOWING ......................266
▫ Common Towing Definitions...............266
▫ Trailer Hitch Classification ................268
▫ Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer Weight
Ratings) .............................269
▫ Trailer And Tongue Weight ...............270
▫ Towing Requirements ...................270
▫ Towing Tips ..........................274
䡵 RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND
MOTORHOME, ETC.) ....................276
▫ Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle . . .276
▫ Recreational Towing — All Models ..........276
䡵 DRIVING TIPS ..........................277
▫ Driving On Slippery Surfaces ..............277
▫ Driving Through Water ..................278
236 STARTING AND OPERATING
STARTING THE ENGINE
Before starting your vehicle, adjust your seat, adjust both
inside and outside mirrors, and fasten your seat belts.
WARNING!
• When exiting the vehicle, always remove the key fob
from the vehicle and lock your vehicle.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle.
• Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is
dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or others
could be seriously or fatally injured. Children
should be warned not to touch the parking brake,
brake pedal or the transmission gear selector.
• Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle, or in
a location accessible to children, and do not leave the
ignition in the ACC or ON/RUN mode. A child could
operate power windows, other controls, or move the
vehicle.
• Do not leave children or animals inside parked
vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build-up may
cause serious injury or death.
Start the engine with the gear selector in the NEUTRAL or
PARK position. Apply the brake before shifting to any
driving range.
Normal Starting
1. Do not press the accelerator.
2. Use the fob with Integrated Key to briefly turn the
ignition switch to the START position and release it as
soon as the starter engages. The starter motor will
continue to run, and it will disengage automatically
when the engine is running.
3. If the engine fails to start, the starter will disengage
automatically in 10 seconds. If this occurs, turn the
ignition switch to the OFF position, wait 10 to 15
seconds, then repeat the “Normal Starting” procedure
(Steps 1–3 above).
NOTE: This vehicle is equipped with a transmission
shift interlocking system. The brake pedal must be
pressed to shift out of PARK.
Cold Weather Operation (Below –22°F Or −30°C)
To ensure reliable starting at these temperatures, use of an
externally powered electric engine block heater (available
from your authorized dealer) is recommended.
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 237
After Starting — Warming Up The Engine
The idle speed is controlled automatically and it will
decrease as the engine warms up.
If Engine Fails To Start
WARNING!
• Never pour fuel or other flammable liquid into the
throttle body air inlet opening in an attempt to start
the vehicle. This could result in flash fire causing
serious personal injury.
• Do not attempt to push or tow your vehicle to get it
started. Vehicles equipped with an automatic trans-
mission cannot be started this way. Unburned fuel
could enter the catalytic converter and once the
engine has started, ignite and damage the converter
and vehicle.
• If the vehicle has a discharged battery, booster cables
may be used to obtain a start from a booster battery
or the battery in another vehicle. This type of start
can be dangerous if done improperly. Refer to “Jump
Starting Procedure” in “In Case Of Emergency” for
further information.
ENGINE BLOCK HEATER — IF EQUIPPED
The engine block heater warms the engine, and permits
quicker starts in cold weather. Connect the cord to a
standard 110-115 Volt AC electrical outlet with a grounded,
three-wire extension cord.
The engine block heater must be plugged in at least one
hour to have an adequate warming effect on the engine.
The engine block heater cord is routed under the hood on
the driver’s side of the vehicle. It has a removable cap that
is located on the driver side of the Integrated Power
Module.
WARNING!
Remember to disconnect the engine block heater cord
before driving. Damage to the 110-115 Volt electrical
cord could cause electrocution.
ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS
A long break-in period is not required for the engine and
drivetrain (transmission and axle) in your vehicle.
238 STARTING AND OPERATING
Drive moderately during the first 300 miles (500 km). After
the initial 60 miles (100 km), speeds up to 50 or 55 mph (80
or 90 km/h) are desirable.
While cruising, brief full-throttle acceleration within the
limits of local traffic laws contributes to a good break-in.
Wide-open throttle acceleration in low gear can be detri-
mental and should be avoided.
The engine oil installed in the engine at the factory is a
high-quality energy conserving type lubricant. Oil changes
should be consistent with anticipated climate conditions
under which vehicle operations will occur. For the recom-
mended viscosity and quality grades, refer to “Dealer
Service” in “Servicing And Maintenance”.
CAUTION!
Never use Non-Detergent Oil or Straight Mineral Oil
in the engine or damage may result.
NOTE: A new engine may consume some oil during its
first few thousand miles (kilometers) of operation. This
should be considered a normal part of the break-in and not
interpreted as a problem.
PARK BRAKE
Before leaving the vehicle, make sure that the parking
brake is fully applied and place the gear selector in the
PARK position.
The foot operated parking brake is positioned below the
lower left corner of the instrument panel. To apply the park
brake, firmly push the park brake pedal fully. To release the
parking brake, press the park brake pedal a second time
and let your foot up as you feel the brake disengage.
Parking Brake
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 239
When the parking brake is applied with the ignition switch
in the ON position, the “Brake Warning Light” in the
instrument cluster will illuminate.
NOTE:
• When the parking brake is applied and the automatic
transmission is placed in gear, the “Brake Warning
Light” will flash. If vehicle speed is detected, a chime
will sound to alert the driver. Fully release the parking
brake before attempting to move the vehicle.
• This light only shows that the parking brake is applied.
It does not show the degree of brake application.
When parking on a hill, it is important to turn the front
wheels toward the curb on a downhill grade and away
from the curb on an uphill grade. For vehicles equipped
with an automatic transmission, apply the parking brake
before placing the gear selector in PARK, otherwise the
load on the transmission locking mechanism may make it
difficult to move the gear selector out of PARK. The
parking brake should always be applied whenever the
driver is not in the vehicle.
WARNING!
• When exiting the vehicle, always remove the key fob
from the ignition and lock your vehicle.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle.
• Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is
dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or others
could be seriously or fatally injured. Children
should be warned not to touch the parking brake,
brake pedal or the gear selector.
• Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle (or in
a location accessible to children), and do not leave
the ignition in the ACC or ON/ RUN mode. A child
could operate power windows, other controls, or
move the vehicle.
• Be sure the parking brake is fully disengaged before
driving; failure to do so can lead to brake failure and
a collision.
• Always fully apply the parking brake when leaving
your vehicle, or it may roll and cause damage or
injury. Also be certain to leave the transmission in
PARK. Failure to do so may allow the vehicle to roll
and cause damage or injury.
240 STARTING AND OPERATING
CAUTION!
If the Brake System Warning Light remains on with the
parking brake released, a brake system malfunction is
indicated. Have the brake system serviced by an au-
thorized dealer immediately.
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
WARNING!
• It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or NEUTRAL if
the engine speed is higher than idle speed. If your
foot is not firmly pressing the brake pedal, the
vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in re-
verse. You could lose control of the vehicle and hit
someone or something. Only shift into gear when the
engine is idling normally and your foot is firmly
pressing the brake pedal.
• Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure
those in or near the vehicle. As with all vehicles, you
should never exit a vehicle while the engine is
running. Before exiting a vehicle, always come to a
complete stop, then apply the parking brake, shift
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
the transmission into PARK, turn the engine OFF,
and remove the key fob. When the ignition is in the
LOCK/OFF (key removal) position, the transmission
is locked in PARK, securing the vehicle against
unwanted movement.
• When leaving the vehicle, always make sure the
ignition is in the OFF mode, remove the key fob from
the vehicle, and lock the vehicle.
• Never use the PARK position as a substitute for the
parking brake. Always apply the parking brake fully
when exiting the vehicle to guard against vehicle
movement and possible injury or damage.
• Your vehicle could move and injure you and others if
it is not in PARK. Check by trying to move the gear
selector out of PARK with the brake pedal released.
Make sure the transmission is in PARK before exit-
ing the vehicle.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to
be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number
of reasons. A child or others could be seriously or
fatally injured. Children should be warned not to
(Continued)
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 241
WARNING! (Continued)
touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the trans-
mission gear selector.
• Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle (or in
a location accessible to children), and do not leave
the ignition in the ACC or ON/RUN mode. A child
could operate power windows, other controls, or
move the vehicle.
CAUTION!
Damage to the transmission may occur if the following
precautions are not observed:
• Shift into or out of PARK or REVERSE only after the
vehicle has come to a complete stop.
• Do not shift between PARK, REVERSE, NEUTRAL,
or DRIVE when the engine is above idle speed.
• Before shifting into any gear, make sure your foot is
firmly pressing the brake pedal.
NOTE: You must press and hold the brake pedal while
shifting out of PARK.
Key Ignition Park Interlock
This vehicle is equipped with a Key Ignition Park Interlock
which requires the transmission to be in PARK before the
ignition can be turned to the LOCK/OFF (key removal)
position. The key fob can only be removed from the
ignition when the ignition is in the LOCK/OFF position,
and the transmission is locked in PARK whenever the
ignition is in the LOCK/OFF position.
NOTE: If a malfunction occurs, the system will trap the key
fob in the ignition to warn you that this safety feature is
inoperable. The engine can be started and stopped but the
key fob cannot be removed until you obtain service.
Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock System
This vehicle is equipped with a Brake Transmission Shift
Interlock System (BTSI) that holds the transmission gear
selector in PARK unless the brakes are applied. To shift the
transmission out of PARK, the ignition must be in the
ON/RUN mode (engine running or not) and the brake
pedal must be pressed.
242 STARTING AND OPERATING
Fuel Economy (ECON) Mode
The Fuel Economy (ECON) mode can improve the vehi-
cle’s overall fuel economy during normal driving condi-
tions. Push the “econ” switch in the center stack of the
instrument panel and a green light will indicate the ECON
mode is engaged.
When the Fuel Economy (ECON) Mode is enabled, the
vehicle control systems will change the following:
• The transmission will upshift sooner and downshift
later.
• The transmission will skip select gears during shifts to
allow the engine to operate at lower speeds.
• The torque converter clutch may engage at lower engine
speeds and remain on longer.
• The engine idle speed will be lower.
• The overall driving performance will be more conserva-
tive.
• Some ECON mode functions may be temporarily inhib-
ited based on temperature and other factors.
Six-Speed Automatic Transmission
The transmission gear position display (located in the
instrument cluster) indicates the transmission gear range.
You must press the brake pedal to move the gear selector
out of PARK (Refer to “Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock
System” in this section). To drive, move the gear selector
from PARK or NEUTRAL to the DRIVE position.
The electronically-controlled transmission provides a pre-
cise shift schedule. The transmission electronics are self-
calibrating; therefore, the first few shifts on a new vehicle
may be somewhat abrupt. This is a normal condition, and
precision shifts will develop within a few hundred miles
(kilometers).
Fuel Economy Mode Switch
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 243
Only shift from DRIVE to PARK or REVERSE when the
accelerator pedal is released and the vehicle is stopped. Be
sure to keep your foot on the brake pedal when shifting
between these gears.
The transmission gear selector has only PARK, REVERSE,
NEUTRAL, and DRIVE shift positions. Manual downshifts
can be made using the Electronic Range Select (ERS) shift
control (refer to “Electronic Range Select (ERS) Operation”
in this section for further information). Moving the gear
selector to the left or right (–/+) while in the DRIVE
position will select the highest available transmission gear,
and will display that gear in the instrument cluster as 1, 2,
3, etc.
Gear Ranges
Do not depress the accelerator pedal when shifting from
PARK or NEUTRAL into another gear range.
NOTE: After selecting any gear range, wait a moment to
allow the selected gear to engage before accelerating. This
is especially important when the engine is cold.
PARK (P)
This range supplements the parking brake by locking the
transmission. The engine can be started in this range.
Never attempt to use PARK while the vehicle is in motion.
Apply the parking brake when exiting the vehicle in this
range.
When parking on a level surface, you may shift the
transmission into PARK first, and then apply the parking
brake.
When parking on a hill, apply the parking brake before
shifting the transmission to PARK, otherwise the load on
the transmission locking mechanism may make it difficult
to move the gear selector out of PARK. As an added
Gear Selector
244 STARTING AND OPERATING
precaution, turn the front wheels toward the curb on a
downhill grade, and away from the curb on an uphill
grade.
When exiting the vehicle, always:
• Apply the parking brake.
• Shift the transmission into PARK.
• Turn the engine OFF.
• Remove the key fob.
WARNING!
• It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or NEUTRAL if
the engine speed is higher than idle speed. If your
foot is not firmly pressing the brake pedal, the
vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in re-
verse. You could lose control of the vehicle and hit
someone or something. Only shift into gear when the
engine is idling normally and your foot is firmly
pressing the brake pedal.
• Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure
those in or near the vehicle. As with all vehicles, you
should never exit a vehicle while the engine is
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
running. Before exiting a vehicle, always come to a
complete stop, then apply the parking brake, shift
the transmission into PARK, turn the engine OFF,
and remove the key fob. When the ignition is in the
LOCK/OFF (key removal) position, the transmission
is locked in PARK, securing the vehicle against
unwanted movement.
• When leaving the vehicle, always make sure the
ignition is in the OFF mode, remove the key fob from
the vehicle, and lock the vehicle.
• Never use the PARK position as a substitute for the
parking brake. Always apply the parking brake fully
when exiting the vehicle to guard against vehicle
movement and possible injury or damage.
• Your vehicle could move and injure you and others if
it is not in PARK. Check by trying to move the gear
selector out of PARK with the brake pedal released.
Make sure the transmission is in PARK before exit-
ing the vehicle.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to
be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number
(Continued)
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 245
WARNING! (Continued)
of reasons. A child or others could be seriously or
fatally injured. Children should be warned not to
touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the trans-
mission gear selector.
• Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle (or in
a location accessible to children), and do not leave
the ignition in the ACC or ON/RUN mode. A child
could operate power windows, other controls, or
move the vehicle.
The following indicators should be used to ensure that you
have properly engaged the transmission into the PARK
position:
• When shifting into PARK, firmly move the gear selector
all the way forward and to the left until it stops and is
fully seated.
• Look at the transmission gear position display and
verify that it indicates the PARK position (P).
• With brake pedal released, verify that the gear selector
will not move out of PARK.
CAUTION!
• Before moving the transmission gear selector out of
PARK, you must turn the ignition to the ON/RUN
mode, and also press the brake pedal. Otherwise,
damage to the gear selector could result.
• DO NOT race the engine when shifting from PARK
or NEUTRAL into another gear range, as this can
damage the drivetrain.
REVERSE (R)
This range is for moving the vehicle backward. Shift into
REVERSE only after the vehicle has come to a complete
stop.
NEUTRAL (N)
Use this range when the vehicle is standing for prolonged
periods with the engine running. The engine may be
started in this range. Apply the parking brake and shift the
transmission into PARK if you must exit the vehicle.
246 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
Do not coast in NEUTRAL and never turn off the
ignition to coast down a hill. These are unsafe practices
that limit your response to changing traffic or road
conditions. You might lose control of the vehicle and
have a collision.
CAUTION!
Towing the vehicle, coasting, or driving for any other
reason with the transmission in NEUTRAL can cause
severe transmission damage. Refer to “Recreational
Towing” in “Starting And Operating” and “Towing A
Disabled Vehicle” in “What To Do In Emergencies” for
further information.
DRIVE (D)
This range should be used for most city and highway
driving. It provides the smoothest upshifts and downshifts,
and the best fuel economy. The transmission automatically
upshifts through all forward gears. The DRIVE position
provides optimum driving characteristics under all normal
operating conditions.
When frequent transmission shifting occurs (such as when
operating the vehicle under heavy loading conditions, in
hilly terrain, traveling into strong head winds, or while
towing a heavy trailer), use the Electronic Range Select
(ERS) shift control (refer to ⬙Electronic Range Select (ERS)
Operation⬙ in this section for further information) to select
a lower gear range. Under these conditions, using a lower
gear range will improve performance and extend transmis-
sion life by reducing excessive shifting and heat buildup.
During cold temperatures, transmission operation may be
modified depending on engine and transmission tempera-
ture as well as vehicle speed. This feature improves warm
up time of the engine and transmission to achieve maxi-
mum efficiency. Engagement of the torque converter clutch
is inhibited until the transmission fluid is warm (refer to
the “Note” under “Torque Converter Clutch” in this sec-
tion). During extremely cold temperatures (-16°F [-27°C] or
below), operation may briefly be limited to third gear only.
Normal operation will resume once the transmission tem-
perature has risen to a suitable level.
Transmission Limp Home Mode
Transmission function is monitored electronically for ab-
normal conditions. If a condition is detected that could
result in transmission damage, Transmission Limp Home
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 247
Mode is activated. In this mode, the transmission remains
in third gear regardless of which forward gear is selected.
PARK, REVERSE, and NEUTRAL will continue to operate.
The Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) may be illuminated.
Limp Home Mode allows the vehicle to be driven to an
authorized dealer for service without damaging the trans-
mission.
In the event of a momentary problem, the transmission can
be reset to regain all forward gears by performing the
following steps:
1. Stop the vehicle.
2. Shift the transmission into PARK.
3. Turn the ignition OFF.
4. Wait approximately 10 seconds.
5. Restart the engine.
6. Shift into the desired gear range. If the problem is no
longer detected, the transmission will return to normal
operation.
NOTE: Even if the transmission can be reset, we recom-
mend that you visit an authorized dealer at your earliest
possible convenience. An authorized dealer has diagnostic
equipment to assess the condition of your transmission.
If the transmission cannot be reset, authorized dealer
service is required.
Electronic Range Select (ERS) Operation
The Electronic Range Select (ERS) shift control allows the
driver to limit the highest available gear when the trans-
mission is in DRIVE. For example, if you set the transmis-
sion gear limit to 4 (fourth gear), the transmission will not
shift above fourth gear (except to prevent engine over-
speed), but will shift through the lower gears normally.
You can switch between DRIVE and ERS mode at any
vehicle speed. When the gear selector is in the DRIVE
position, the transmission will operate automatically, shift-
ing between all available gears. Tapping the gear selector to
the left (-) will activate ERS mode, display the current gear
in the instrument cluster, and set that gear as the top
available gear. Once in ERS mode, tapping the gear selector
to the left (-) or right (+) will change the top available gear.
248 STARTING AND OPERATING
To exit ERS mode, simply hold the gear selector to the right
(+) until the gear limit display disappears from the instru-
ment cluster.
WARNING!
Do not downshift for additional engine braking on a
slippery surface. The drive wheels could lose their grip
and the vehicle could skid, causing a collision or
personal injury.
Transmission Gear Position Dis-
play
123456D
Actual Gear(s) Allowed 1 1–2 1–3 1–4 1–5 1–6 1–6
NOTE: To select the proper gear position for maximum
deceleration (engine braking), tap the gear selector to the
left (-) repeatedly as the vehicle slows. The transmission
will shift to the range from which the vehicle can best be
slowed down.
Overdrive Operation
The automatic transmission includes an electronically con-
trolled Overdrive (sixth gear). The transmission will auto-
matically shift into Overdrive if the following conditions
are present:
• The gear selector is in the DRIVE position.
• The transmission fluid has reached an adequate tem-
perature.
• The engine coolant has reached an adequate tempera-
ture.
• The vehicle speed is sufficiently high.
• The driver is not heavily pressing the accelerator.
Torque Converter Clutch
A feature designed to improve fuel economy has been
included in the automatic transmission on your vehicle. A
clutch within the torque converter engages automatically
at calibrated speeds. This may result in a slightly different
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 249
feeling or response during normal operation in the upper
gears. When the vehicle speed drops or during some
accelerations, the clutch automatically disengages.
NOTE: The torque converter clutch will not engage until
the transmission fluid and engine coolant are warm [usu-
ally after 1 to 3 miles (2 to 5 km) of driving]. Because the
engine speed is higher when the torque converter clutch is
not engaged, it may seem as if the transmission is not
shifting into Overdrive when cold. This is normal. Using
the Electronic Range Select (ERS) shift control, when the
transmission is sufficiently warm, will demonstrate that
the transmission is able to shift into and out of Overdrive.
POWER STEERING
The standard power steering system will give you good
vehicle response and increased ease of maneuverability in
tight spaces. The system will provide mechanical steering
capability if power assist is lost.
If for some reason the power assist is interrupted, it will
still be possible to steer your vehicle. Under these condi-
tions, you will observe a substantial increase in steering
effort, especially at very low vehicle speeds and during
parking maneuvers.
NOTE:
• Increased noise levels at the end of the steering wheel
travel are considered normal and do not indicate that
there is a problem with the power steering system.
• Upon initial start-up in cold weather, the power steering
pump may make noise for a short amount of time. This
is due to the cold, thick fluid in the steering system. This
noise should be considered normal, and it does not in
any way damage the steering system.
CAUTION!
Prolonged operation of the steering system at the end
of the steering wheel travel will increase the steering
fluid temperature and it should be avoided when
possible. Damage to the power steering pump may
occur.
Power Steering Fluid Check
Checking the power steering fluid level at a defined service
interval is not required. The fluid should only be checked
if a leak is suspected, abnormal noises are apparent,
and/or the system is not functioning as anticipated. Coor-
dinate inspection efforts through an authorized dealer.
250 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
Fluid level should be checked on a level surface and
with the engine off to prevent injury from moving
parts and to ensure accurate fluid level reading. Do not
overfill. Use only manufacturer’s recommended power
steering fluid.
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your power steering
system as the chemicals can damage your power steer-
ing components. Such damage is not covered by the
New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
If necessary, add fluid to restore to the proper indicated
level. With a clean cloth, wipe any spilled fluid from all
surfaces. Refer to “Fluids And Lubricants” in “Technical
Specifications” for the correct fluid type.
SPEED CONTROL — IF EQUIPPED
When engaged, the Speed Control takes over accelerator
operations at speeds greater than 25 mph (40 km/h).
The Speed Control buttons are located on the right side of
the steering wheel.
NOTE: In order to ensure proper operation, the Speed
Control System has been designed to shut down if multiple
Speed Control functions are operated at the same time. If
this occurs, the Speed Control System can be reactivated by
pushing the Speed Control ON/OFF button and resetting
the desired vehicle set speed.
Speed Control Buttons
1 — ON/OFF 3 — SET (-)
2 — RES (+) 4 — CANCEL
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 251
WARNING!
Speed Control can be dangerous where the system
cannot maintain a constant speed. Your vehicle could
go too fast for the conditions, and you could lose
control and have an accident. Do not use Speed Control
in heavy traffic or on roads that are winding, icy,
snow-covered or slippery.
To Activate
Push the ON/OFF button. The Cruise Indicator Light in
the instrument cluster display will illuminate. To turn the
system off, push the ON/OFF button a second time. The
Cruise Indicator Light will turn off. The system should be
turned off when not in use.
WARNING!
Leaving the Speed Control system on when not in use
is dangerous. You could accidentally set the system or
cause it to go faster than you want. You could lose
control and have an accident. Always leave the system
off when you are not using it.
To Set A Desired Speed
Turn the Speed Control on. When the vehicle has reached
the desired speed, push the SET (-) button and release.
Release the accelerator and the vehicle will operate at the
selected speed.
NOTE: The vehicle should be traveling at a steady speed
and on level ground before pushing the SET (-) button.
To Vary The Speed Setting
To Increase Speed
When the Speed Control is set, you can increase speed by
pushing the RES (+) button.
The driver’s preferred units can be selected through the
instrument panel settings if equipped. Refer to “Getting To
Know Your Instrument Panel” for more information. The
speed decrement shown is dependant on the chosen speed
unit of U.S. (mph) or Metric (km/h):
U.S. Speed (mph)
• Pushing the RES (+) button once will result in a 1 mph
increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the button
results in an increase of 1 mph.
252 STARTING AND OPERATING
• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
continue to increase until the button is released, then the
new set speed will be established.
Metric Speed (km/h)
• Pushing the RES (+) button once will result in a 1 km/h
increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the button
results in an increase of 1 km/h.
• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
continue to increase until the button is released, then the
new set speed will be established.
To Decrease Speed
When the Speed Control is set, you can decrease speed by
pushing the SET (-) button.
The driver’s preferred units can be selected through the
instrument panel settings if equipped. Refer to “Getting To
Know Your Instrument Panel” for more information. The
speed decrement shown is dependant on the chosen speed
unit of U.S. (mph) or Metric (km/h):
U.S. Speed (mph)
• Pushing the SET (-) button once will result in a 1 mph
decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the button
results in a decrease of 1 mph.
• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
continue to decrease until the button is released, then the
new set speed will be established.
Metric Speed (km/h)
• Pushing the SET (-) button once will result in a 1 km/h
decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the button
results in a decrease of 1 km/h.
• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
continue to decrease until the button is released, then the
new set speed will be established.
To Accelerate For Passing
Press the accelerator as you would normally. When the
pedal is released, the vehicle will return to the set speed.
Using Speed Control On Hills
The transmission may downshift on hills to maintain the
vehicle set speed.
NOTE: The Speed Control system maintains speed up and
down hills. A slight speed change on moderate hills is
normal.
On steep hills, a greater speed loss or gain may occur so it
may be preferable to drive without Speed Control.
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 253
WARNING!
Speed Control can be dangerous where the system
cannot maintain a constant speed. Your vehicle could
go too fast for the conditions, and you could lose
control and have an accident. Do not use Speed Control
in heavy traffic or on roads that are winding, icy,
snow-covered or slippery.
To Resume Speed
To resume a previously set speed, push the RES (+) button
and release. Resume can be used at any speed above
20 mph (32 km/h).
To Deactivate
A soft tap on the brake pedal, pushing the CANCEL
button, or normal brake pressure while slowing the vehicle
will deactivate the Speed Control without erasing the set
speed from memory.
Pushing the ON/OFF button, or returning the ignition to
OFF, erases the set speed from memory.
PARKSENSE REAR PARK ASSIST — IF EQUIPPED
The ParkSense Rear Park Assist system provides visual and
audible indications of the distance between the rear fascia
and a detected obstacle when backing up, e.g. during a
parking maneuver. Refer to “ParkSense System Usage
Precautions” in this section for limitations of this system
and recommendations.
ParkSense will retain the last system state (enabled or
disabled) from the last ignition cycle when the ignition is
changed to the ON/RUN position.
ParkSense can be active only when the gear selector is in
REVERSE. If ParkSense is enabled at this gear selector
position, the system will remain active until the vehicle
speed is increased to approximately 7 mph (11 km/h) or
above. The system will become active again if the vehicle
speed is decreased to speeds less than approximately
6 mph (9 km/h).
254 STARTING AND OPERATING
ParkSense Sensors
The four ParkSense sensors, located in the rear fascia/
bumper, monitor the area behind the vehicle that is within
the sensors’ field of view. The sensors can detect obstacles
from approximately 12 inches (30 cm) up to 79 inches (200
cm) from the rear fascia/bumper in the horizontal direc-
tion, depending on the location, type and orientation of the
obstacle.
ParkSense Warning Display
The ParkSense Warning Display is located in the instru-
ment cluster display. It provides both visual and audible
warnings to indicate the distance between the rear fascia/
bumper and the detected obstacle.
The ParkSense Warning screen will only be displayed if
Sound and Display is selected from the Customer-
Programmable Features section of the instrument cluster
display. Refer to “Instrument Cluster Display” in “Getting
To Know Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
ParkSense Warning Display
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 255
ParkSense Display
When the vehicle is in REVERSE, the warning display will
turn on indicating the system status.
The system will indicate a detected obstacle by showing
three solid arcs and will produce a one-half second tone. As
the vehicle moves closer to the object the instrument cluster
display will show fewer arcs and the sound tone will
change from slow, to fast, to continuous.
Park Assist System On
Park Assist System Off
256 STARTING AND OPERATING
Slow Tone Fast Tone
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 257
The vehicle is close to the obstacle when the instrument
cluster display shows one flashing arc and sounds a
continuous tone. The following chart shows the warning
alert operation when the system is detecting an obstacle:
WARNING ALERTS
Rear Distance
(inches/cm)
Greater than
79 inches (200 cm)
79-39 inches
(200-100 cm)
39-25 inches
(100-65 cm)
25-12 inches
(65-30 cm)
Less than
12 inches (30 cm)
Audible Alert
Chime
None Single 1/2
Second Tone
Slow Fast Continuous
Arcs None 3 Solid
(Continuous)
3 Slow
Flashing
2 Slow
Flashing
1 Slow
Flashing
Radio Volume
Reduced
No Yes Yes Yes Yes
Continuous Tone
258 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE: ParkSense will reduce the radio volume, if on,
when the system is sounding an audio tone.
Enabling/Disabling ParkSense
ParkSense can be enabled and disabled through the
Customer-Programmable Features section of the instru-
ment cluster display. The available choices are: OFF, Sound
Only, or Sound and Display.
When ParkSense is disabled, the instrument cluster will
display the “PARK ASSIST SYSTEM OFF” message for
approximately five seconds. When the gear selector is
moved to REVERSE and the system is disabled, the instru-
ment cluster display will display the “PARK ASSIST SYS-
TEM OFF” message for as long as the vehicle is in
REVERSE.
Refer to “Instrument Cluster Display” in “Getting To Know
Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
Service The ParkSense Rear Park Assist System
During vehicle start up, when the ParkSense Rear Park
Assist System has detected a faulted condition, the instru-
ment cluster will actuate a single chime, once per ignition
cycle, and it will display the “SERVICE PARK ASSIST
SYSTEM” message. When the gear selector is moved to
REVERSE and the system has detected a faulted condition,
the instrument cluster display will display the “SERVICE
PARK ASSIST SYSTEM” message for as long as the vehicle
is in REVERSE. Under this condition, ParkSense will not
operate.
Refer to “Instrument Cluster Display” in “Getting To Know
Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
If “SERVICE PARK ASSIST SYSTEM” appears in the in-
strument cluster display after making sure the rear fascia/
bumper is free from snow, ice, mud, dirt and debris, see
your authorized dealer.
Cleaning The ParkSense System
Clean the ParkSense sensors with water, car wash soap and
a soft cloth. Do not use rough or hard cloths. Do not scratch
or poke the sensors. Otherwise, you could damage the
sensors.
ParkSense System Usage Precautions
NOTE:
• Ensure that the rear bumper is free of snow, ice, mud,
dirt and debris to keep the ParkSense system operating
properly.
• Jackhammers, large trucks, and other vibrations could
affect the performance of ParkSense.
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 259
• When you turn ParkSense off, the instrument cluster
will display “PARKSENSE OFF.” Furthermore, once you
turn ParkSense off, it remains off until you turn it on
again, even if you cycle the ignition.
• When you move the gear selector to the REVERSE
position and ParkSense is turned off, the instrument
cluster display will display “PARKSENSE OFF” mes-
sage for as long as the vehicle is in REVERSE.
• ParkSense, when on, will reduce the volume of the radio
when it is sounding a tone.
• Clean the ParkSense sensors regularly, taking care not to
scratch or damage them. The sensors must not be
covered with ice, snow, slush, mud, dirt or debris.
Failure to do so can result in the system not working
properly. The ParkSense system might not detect an
obstacle behind the fascia/bumper, or it could provide a
false indication that an obstacle is behind the fascia/
bumper.
• Use the ParkSense switch to turn the ParkSense system
off if objects such as bicycle carriers, trailer hitches, etc.
are placed within 12 inches (30 cm) from the rear
fascia/bumper. Failure to do so can result in the system
misinterpreting a close object as a sensor problem,
causing the “PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE
REQUIRED” message to be displayed in the instrument
cluster display.
WARNING!
• Drivers must be careful when backing up even when
using ParkSense. Always check carefully behind
your vehicle, look behind you, and be sure to check
for pedestrians, animals, other vehicles, obstructions,
and blind spots before backing up. You are respon-
sible for safety and must continue to pay attention to
your surroundings. Failure to do so can result in
serious injury or death.
• Before using ParkSense, it is strongly recommended
that the ball mount and hitch ball assembly is
disconnected from the vehicle when the vehicle is
not used for towing. Failure to do so can result in
injury or damage to vehicles or obstacles because the
hitch ball will be much closer to the obstacle than the
rear fascia when the loudspeaker sounds the con-
tinuous tone. Also, the sensors could detect the ball
mount and hitch ball assembly, depending on its size
and shape, giving a false indication that an obstacle
is behind the vehicle.
260 STARTING AND OPERATING
CAUTION!
• ParkSense is only a parking aid and it is unable to
recognize every obstacle, including small obstacles.
Parking curbs might be temporarily detected or not
detected at all. Obstacles located above or below the
sensors will not be detected when they are in close
proximity.
• The vehicle must be driven slowly when using
ParkSense in order to be able to stop in time when an
obstacle is detected. It is recommended that the
driver looks over his/her shoulder when using
ParkSense.
PARKVIEW REAR BACK UP CAMERA
Your vehicle is equipped with the ParkView Rear Back Up
Camera that allows you to see an on-screen image of the
rear surroundings of your vehicle whenever the gear
selector is put into REVERSE. The image will be displayed
on the touchscreen or if equipped, in the rearview mirror,
along with a caution note to “check entire surroundings”
across the top of the screen. After five seconds this note will
disappear. The ParkView Rear Back Up Camera is located
on the rear of the vehicle, above the rear license plate.
When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE, the rear
camera mode is exited and the last selected touchscreen
appears again.
If your vehicle is equipped with the Camera Delay feature
and it is turned on, the rear camera image will be displayed
for up to 10 seconds when the vehicle is shifted out of
REVERSE unless the forward vehicle speed exceeds 8 mph
(13 km/h), the transmission is shifted into PARK or the
vehicle’s ignition is cycled to the OFF position.
NOTE: The programmable features of the ParkView Rear
Backup Camera can be selected through the touchscreen.
Refer to your Uconnect Owner’s Manual Supplement for
further information.
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 261
When displayed, static grid lines will illustrate the width of
the vehicle while a dashed center-line will indicate the
center of the vehicle to assist with aligning to a hitch/
receiver. The static grid lines will show separate zones that
will help indicate the distance to the rear of the vehicle. The
following table shows the approximate distances for each
zone:
Zone Distance To The Rear Of The Vehicle
Red 0 - 1 ft (0 - 30 cm)
Yellow 1 ft - 3 ft (30 cm - 1 m)
Green 3 ft or greater (1 m or greater)
WARNING!
Drivers must be careful when backing up even when
using the ParkView Rear Back Up Camera. Always
check carefully behind your vehicle, and be sure to
check for pedestrians, animals, other vehicles, obstruc-
tions, or blind spots before backing up. You are re-
sponsible for the safety of your surroundings and must
continue to pay attention while backing up. Failure to
do so can result in serious injury or death.
CAUTION!
•
To avoid vehicle damage, ParkView should only be
used as a parking aid. The ParkView camera is unable to
view every obstacle or object in your drive path.
• To avoid vehicle damage, the vehicle must be driven
slowly when using ParkView to be able to stop in
time when an obstacle is seen. It is recommended
that the driver look frequently over his/her shoulder
when using ParkView.
NOTE: If snow, ice, mud, or any foreign substance builds
up on the camera lens, clean the lens, rinse with water, and
dry with a soft cloth. Do not cover the lens.
262 STARTING AND OPERATING
REFUELING THE VEHICLE
The gas cap is located behind the fuel filler door on the left
side of the vehicle. If the gas cap is lost or damaged, be sure
the replacement cap is for use with this vehicle.
NOTE: The driver’s side sliding door cannot be opened
while the fuel door is open. This feature operates only
when the sliding door is fully closed prior to opening the
fuel door.
CAUTION!
• Damage to the fuel system or emissions control
system could result from using an improper fuel
tank filler tube cap. A poorly fitting cap could let
impurities into the fuel system and may cause the
“Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)” to turn on, due
to fuel vapors escaping from the system.
• To avoid fuel spillage and overfilling, do not “top
off” the fuel tank after filling.
WARNING!
• Never have any smoking materials lit in or near the
vehicle when the gas cap is removed or the tank is
being filled.
• Never add fuel when the engine is running. This is
in violation of most state and federal fire regulations
and may cause the MIL to turn on.
• A fire may result if gasoline is pumped into a
portable container that is inside of a vehicle. You
could be burned. Always place gas containers on the
ground while filling.
Fuel Filler Cap
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 263
NOTE:
• When the fuel nozzle “clicks” or shuts off, the fuel tank
is full.
• Tighten the fuel filler cap until you hear a “clicking”
sound. This is an indication that the fuel filler cap is
properly tightened.
• If the gas cap is not tightened properly, the MIL may
come on. Be sure the gas cap is tightened every time the
vehicle is refueled.
Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message
If the vehicle diagnostic system determines that the fuel
filler cap is loose, improperly installed, or damaged, a
”gASCAP” message will display in the odometer or a
“Check Gascap” message will display in the instrument
cluster. If this occurs, tighten the fuel filler cap properly
and press the Trip Odometer button to turn off the mes-
sage. If the problem continues, the message will appear the
next time the vehicle is started.
A loose, improperly installed, or damaged fuel filler cap
may also turn on the MIL.
VEHICLE LOADING
Certification Label
As required by National Highway Traffic Safety Adminis-
tration regulations, your vehicle has a certification label
affixed to the driver’s side door or pillar.
This label contains the month and year of manufacture,
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR), Gross Axle Weight
Rating (GAWR) front and rear, and Vehicle Identification
Number (VIN). A Month-Day-Hour (MDH) number is
included on this label and indicates the Month, Day and
Hour of manufacture. The bar code that appears on the
bottom of the label is your VIN.
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
The GVWR is the total permissible weight of your vehicle
including driver, passengers, vehicle, options and cargo.
The label also specifies maximum capacities of front and
rear axle systems (GAWR). Total load must be limited so
GVWR and front and rear GAWR are not exceeded.
Payload
The payload of a vehicle is defined as the allowable load
weight a truck can carry, including the weight of the driver,
all passengers, options and cargo.
264 STARTING AND OPERATING
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)
The GAWR is the maximum permissible load on the front
and rear axles. The load must be distributed in the cargo
area so that the GAWR of each axle is not exceeded.
Each axle GAWR is determined by the components in the
system with the lowest load carrying capacity (axle,
springs, tires or wheels). Heavier axles or suspension
components sometimes specified by purchasers for in-
creased durability does not necessarily increase the vehi-
cle’s GVWR.
Tire Size
The tire size on the Vehicle Certification Label represents
the actual tire size on your vehicle. Replacement tires must
be equal to the load capacity of this tire size.
Rim Size
This is the rim size that is appropriate for the tire size
listed.
Inflation Pressure
This is the cold tire inflation pressure for your vehicle for
all loading conditions up to full GAWR.
Curb Weight
The curb weight of a vehicle is defined as the total weight
of the vehicle with all fluids, including vehicle fuel, at full
capacity conditions, and with no occupants or cargo loaded
into the vehicle. The front and rear curb weight values are
determined by weighing your vehicle on a commercial
scale before any occupants or cargo are added.
Loading
The actual total weight and the weight of the front and rear
of your vehicle at the ground can best be determined by
weighing it when it is loaded and ready for operation.
The entire vehicle should first be weighed on a commercial
scale to insure that the GVWR has not been exceeded. The
weight on the front and rear of the vehicle should then be
determined separately to be sure that the load is properly
distributed over the front and rear axle. Weighing the
vehicle may show that the GAWR of either the front or rear
axles has been exceeded but the total load is within the
specified GVWR. If so, weight must be shifted from front to
rear or rear to front as appropriate until the specified
weight limitations are met. Store the heavier items down
low and be sure that the weight is distributed equally. Stow
all loose items securely before driving.
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 265
Improper weight distributions can have an adverse effect
on the way your vehicle steers and handles and the way
the brakes operate.
CAUTION!
Do not load your vehicle any heavier than the GVWR
or the maximum front and rear GAWR. If you do, parts
on your vehicle can break, or it can change the way
your vehicle handles. This could cause you to lose
control. Also overloading can shorten the life of your
vehicle.
TRAILER TOWING
In this section you will find safety tips and information on
limits to the type of towing you can reasonably do with
your vehicle. Before towing a trailer, carefully review this
information to tow your load as efficiently and safely as
possible.
To maintain the New Vehicle Limited Warranty coverage,
follow the requirements and recommendations in this
manual concerning vehicles used for trailer towing.
Common Towing Definitions
The following trailer towing related definitions will assist
you in understanding the following information:
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your vehicle.
This includes driver, passengers, cargo and tongue weight.
The total load must be limited so that you do not exceed
the GVWR. Refer to “Vehicle Loading/Vehicle Certification
Label” in “Starting And Operating” for further informa-
tion.
Gross Trailer Weight (GTW)
The GTW is the weight of the trailer plus the weight of all
cargo, consumables and equipment (permanent or tempo-
rary) loaded in or on the trailer in its ⬙loaded and ready for
operation⬙ condition.
The recommended way to measure GTW is to put your
fully loaded trailer on a vehicle scale. The entire weight of
the trailer must be supported by the scale.
266 STARTING AND OPERATING
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)
The GAWR is the maximum capacity of the front and rear
axles. Distribute the load over the front and rear axles
evenly. Make sure that you do not exceed either front or
rear GAWR. Refer to “Vehicle Loading/Vehicle Certifica-
tion Label” in “Starting And Operating” for further infor-
mation.
WARNING!
It is important that you do not exceed the maximum
front or rear GAWR. A dangerous driving condition
can result if either rating is exceeded. You could lose
control of the vehicle and have a collision.
Tongue Weight (TW)
The tongue weight is the downward force exerted on the
hitch ball by the trailer. You must consider this as part of
the load on your vehicle.
Trailer Frontal Area
The frontal area is the maximum height multiplied by the
maximum width of the front of a trailer.
Trailer Sway Control
The trailer sway control can be a mechanical telescoping
link that can be installed between the hitch receiver and the
trailer tongue that typically provides adjustable friction
associated with the telescoping motion to dampen any
unwanted trailer swaying motions while traveling.
If equipped, the electronic Trailer Sway Control (TSC)
recognizes a swaying trailer and automatically applies
individual wheel brakes and/or reduces engine power to
attempt to eliminate the trailer sway.
Weight-Carrying Hitch
A weight-carrying hitch supports the trailer tongue weight,
just as if it were luggage located at a hitch ball or some other
connecting point of the vehicle. These kinds of hitches are the
most popular on the market today and they are commonly
used to tow small and medium sized trailers.
Weight-Distributing Hitch
A weight-distributing system works by applying leverage
through spring (load) bars. They are typically used for heavier
loads to distribute trailer tongue weight to the tow vehicle’s
front axle and the trailer axle(s). When used in accordance with
the manufacturer’s directions, it provides for a more level ride,
offering more consistent steering and brake control thereby
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 267
enhancing towing safety. The addition of a friction/hydraulic
sway control also dampens sway caused by traffic and cross-
winds and contributes positively to tow vehicle and trailer
stability. Trailer sway control and a weight distributing (load
equalizing) hitch are recommended for heavier Tongue
Weights (TW) and may be required depending on vehicle and
trailer configuration/loading to comply with Gross Axle
Weight Rating (GAWR) requirements.
WARNING!
• An improperly adjusted Weight Distributing Hitch
system may reduce handling, stability, braking per-
formance, and could result in a collision.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• Weight Distributing Systems may not be compatible
with Surge Brake Couplers. Consult with your hitch
and trailer manufacturer or a reputable Recreational
Vehicle dealer for additional information.
Trailer Hitch Classification
The following chart provides the industry standard for the
maximum trailer weight a given trailer hitch class can tow
and should be used to assist you in selecting the correct
trailer hitch for your intended towing condition.
Trailer Hitch Classification Definitions
Class Max. Trailer Hitch Industry Standards
Class I - Light Duty 2,000 lbs (907 kg)
Class II - Medium Duty 3,500 lbs (1,587 kg)
Class III - Heavy Duty 5,000 lbs (2,267 kg)
Class IV - Extra Heavy Duty 10,000 lbs (4,535 kg)
Refer to the “Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings)” chart for the Maximum Gross Trailer Weight
(GTW) towable for your given drivetrain.
All trailer hitches should be professionally installed on your vehicle.
268 STARTING AND OPERATING
Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer Weight
Ratings)
The following chart provides the maximum trailer weight
ratings towable for your given drivetrain.
Engine/Transmission
GCWR (Gross Com-
bined Weight Rat-
ing)
Frontal Area
Max. GTW (Gross
Trailer Weight)
Max. Tongue Weight
3.6L/Automatic 8,750 lbs (3 968 kg) 40 sq ft (3.72 sq m) Up to 2 persons &
Luggage 3,600 lbs (1
632 kg)*
360 lbs (163 kg)
8,750 lbs (3 968 kg) 40 sq ft (3.72 sq m) 3 to 5 persons &
Luggage 3,450 lbs (1
565 kg)*
345 lbs (156 kg)
8,750 lbs (3 968 kg) 40 sq ft (3.72 sq m) 6 to 7 persons &
Luggage 3,000 lbs (1
360 kg)*
300 lbs (136 kg)
Refer to local laws for maximum trailer towing speeds.
NOTE: The trailer tongue weight must be considered as
part of the combined weight of occupants and cargo, and
should never exceed the weight referenced on the Tire and
Loading Information placard. Refer to “Tire Safety Infor-
mation” in “Servicing and Maintenance” for further infor-
mation.
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 269
Trailer And Tongue Weight
Never exceed the maximum tongue weight stamped on
your bumper or trailer hitch.
Consider the following items when computing the weight
on the rear axle of the vehicle:
• The tongue weight of the trailer.
• The weight of any other type of cargo or equipment put
in or on your vehicle.
• The weight of the driver and all passengers.
NOTE: Remember that everything put into or on the
trailer adds to the load on your vehicle. Also, additional
factory-installed options or dealer-installed options must
be considered as part of the total load on your vehicle.
Refer to the “Tire And Loading Information” placard for
the maximum combined weight of occupants and cargo for
your vehicle.
Towing Requirements
To promote proper break-in of your new vehicle drivetrain
components, the following guidelines are recommended.
CAUTION!
• Do not tow a trailer at all during the first 500 miles
(805 km) the new vehicle is driven. The engine, axle
or other parts could be damaged.
• Then, during the first 500 miles (805 km) that a trailer
is towed, do not drive over 50 mph (80 km/h) and do
not make starts at full throttle. This helps the engine
and other parts of the vehicle wear in at the heavier
loads.
Weight Distribution
270 STARTING AND OPERATING
Perform the maintenance listed in the “Scheduled Servic-
ing”. Refer to “Scheduled Servicing” in “Servicing And
Maintenance” for the proper maintenance intervals. When
towing a trailer, never exceed the GAWR or GCWR ratings.
WARNING!
Improper towing can lead to a collision. Follow these
guidelines to make your trailer towing as safe as
possible:
• Make certain that the load is secured in the trailer
and will not shift during travel. When trailering
cargo that is not fully secured, dynamic load shifts
can occur that may be difficult for the driver to
control. You could lose control of your vehicle and
have a collision.
• When hauling cargo or towing a trailer, do not
overload your vehicle or trailer. Overloading can
cause a loss of control, poor performance or damage
to brakes, axle, engine, transmission, steering, sus-
pension, chassis structure or tires.
• Safety chains must always be used between your
vehicle and trailer. Always connect the chains to the
hook retainers of the vehicle hitch. Cross the chains
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
under the trailer tongue and allow enough slack for
turning corners.
• Vehicles with trailers should not be parked on a
grade. When parking, apply the parking brake on the
tow vehicle. Put the tow vehicle transmission in
PARK. For four-wheel drive vehicles, make sure the
transfer case is not in NEUTRAL. Always, block or
ⴖchockⴖ the trailer wheels.
• GCWR must not be exceeded.
• Total weight must be distributed between the tow
vehicle and the trailer such that the following four
ratings are not exceeded:
1. GVWR
2. GTW
3. GAWR
4. Tongue weight rating for the trailer hitch utilized.
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 271
Towing Requirements — Tires
• Do not attempt to tow a trailer while using a compact
spare tire.
• Do not drive more than 50 mph (80 km/h) when towing
while using a full size spare tire.
• Proper tire inflation pressures are essential to the safe
and satisfactory operation of your vehicle. Refer to
“Tires” in “Servicing And Maintenance” for proper tire
inflation procedures.
• Check the trailer tires for proper tire inflation pressures
before trailer usage.
• Check for signs of tire wear or visible tire damage before
towing a trailer. Refer to “Tires” in “Servicing And
Maintenance” for the proper inspection procedure.
• When replacing tires, refer to “Tires” in “Servicing And
Maintenance” for the proper tire replacement proce-
dures. Replacing tires with a higher load carrying capac-
ity will not increase the vehicle’s GVWR and GAWR
limits.
Towing Requirements — Trailer Brakes
• Do not interconnect the hydraulic brake system or
vacuum system of your vehicle with that of the trailer.
This could cause inadequate braking and possible per-
sonal injury.
• An electronically actuated trailer brake controller is
required when towing a trailer with electronically actu-
ated brakes. When towing a trailer equipped with a
hydraulic surge actuated brake system, an electronic
brake controller is not required.
• Trailer brakes are recommended for trailers over
1,000 lbs (453 kg) and required for trailers in excess of
2,000 lbs (907 kg).
WARNING!
• Do not connect trailer brakes to your vehicle’s hy-
draulic brake lines. It can overload your brake sys-
tem and cause it to fail. You might not have brakes
when you need them and could have an accident.
• Towing any trailer will increase your stopping dis-
tance. When towing, you should allow for additional
space between your vehicle and the vehicle in front
of you. Failure to do so could result in an accident.
272 STARTING AND OPERATING
CAUTION!
If the trailer weighs more than 1,000 lbs (453 kg)
loaded, it should have its own brakes and they should
be of adequate capacity. Failure to do this could lead to
accelerated brake lining wear, higher brake pedal
effort, and longer stopping distances.
Towing Requirements — Trailer Lights And Wiring
Whenever you pull a trailer, regardless of the trailer size,
stoplights and turn signals on the trailer are required for
motoring safety.
The Trailer Tow Package may include a four- and seven-pin
wiring harness. Use a factory approved trailer harness and
connector.
NOTE: Do not cut or splice wiring into the vehicle’s wiring
harness.
The electrical connections are all complete to the vehicle
but you must mate the harness to a trailer connector. Refer
to the following illustrations.
NOTE:
• Disconnect trailer wiring connector from the vehicle
before launching a boat (or any other device plugged
into vehicle’s electrical connect) into water.
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 273
• Be sure to reconnect after clear from water area.
Towing Tips
Before setting out on a trip, practice turning, stopping, and
backing up the trailer in an area located away from heavy
traffic.
Four-Pin Connector
1 — Female Pins 4 — Park
2 — Male Pin 5 — Left Stop/Turn
3 — Ground 6 — Right Stop/Turn
Seven-Pin Connector
1 — Battery 5 — Ground
2 — Backup Lamps 6 — Left Stop/Turn
3 — Right Stop/Turn 7 — Running Lamps
4 — Electric Brakes
274 STARTING AND OPERATING
Automatic Transmission
The DRIVE range can be selected when towing. However,
if frequent shifting occurs while in DRIVE, use the Elec-
tronic Range Select (ERS) shift control to manually select a
lower gear range.
NOTE: Using a lower gear range while operating the
vehicle under heavy loading conditions, will improve
performance and extend transmission life by reducing
excessive shifting and heat buildup. This action will also
provide better engine braking.
If you REGULARLY tow a trailer for more than 45 minutes
of continuous operation, then change the transmission
fluid and filter as specified for ⬙police, taxi, fleet, or
frequent trailer towing.⬙ Refer to the “Maintenance Plan”
for the proper maintenance intervals.
Electronic Range Select (ERS)
• When using the ERS shift control, select the highest gear
that allows for adequate performance and avoids fre-
quent downshifts. For example, choose “4” if the desired
speed can be maintained. Choose “3” or “2” if needed to
maintain the desired speed.
• To prevent excess heat generation, avoid continuous
driving at high RPM. Reduce vehicle speed as necessary
to avoid extended driving at high RPM. Return to a
higher gear range or vehicle speed when grade and road
conditions allow.
Speed Control — If Equipped
• Do not use on hilly terrain or with heavy loads.
• When using the speed control, if you experience speed
drops greater than 10 mph (16 km/h), disengage until
you can get back to cruising speed.
• Use speed control in flat terrain and with light loads to
maximize fuel efficiency.
Cooling System
To reduce potential for engine and transmission overheat-
ing, take the following actions:
City Driving
• In city traffic — while stopped, place the transmission in
NEUTRAL, but do not increase engine idle speed.
Highway Driving
• Reduce speed.
• Temporarily turn off air conditioning.
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 275
RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND MOTORHOME, ETC.)
Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle
Towing Condition Wheels OFF The Ground All Models
Flat Tow NONE NOT ALLOWED
Dolly Tow Front OK
Rear NOT ALLOWED
On Trailer ALL BEST METHOD
NOTE: When towing your vehicle, always follow appli-
cable state and provincial laws. Contact state and provin-
cial Highway Safety offices for additional details.
Recreational Towing — All Models
Recreational towing is allowed ONLY if the front wheels
are OFF the ground. This may be accomplished using a tow
dolly or vehicle trailer. If using a tow dolly, follow this
procedure:
1. Properly secure the dolly to the tow vehicle, following
the dolly manufacturer’s instructions.
2. Drive the front wheels onto the tow dolly.
3. Firmly apply the parking brake. Place the transmission
in PARK.
4. Properly secure the front wheels to the dolly, following
the dolly manufacturer’s instructions.
5. Release the parking brake.
CAUTION!
• DO NOT flat tow this vehicle. Damage to the drive-
train will result. If this vehicle requires towing,
make sure the drive wheels are OFF the ground.
• Towing this vehicle in violation of the above require-
ments can cause severe transmission damage. Dam-
age from improper towing is not covered under the
New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
• Do not use a bumper mounted clamp-on tow bar on
your vehicle. The bumper face bar will be damaged.
276 STARTING AND OPERATING
DRIVING TIPS
Driving On Slippery Surfaces
Information in this section will aid in safe controlled
launches in adverse conditions.
Acceleration
Rapid acceleration on snow covered, wet, or other slippery
surfaces may cause the driving wheels to pull erratically to
the right or left. This phenomenon occurs when there is a
difference in the surface traction under the front (driving)
wheels.
WARNING!
Rapid acceleration on slippery surfaces is dangerous.
Unequal traction can cause sudden pulling of the front
wheels. You could lose control of the vehicle and
possibly have a collision. Accelerate slowly and care-
fully whenever there is likely to be poor traction (ice,
snow, wet, mud, loose sand, etc.).
Traction
When driving on wet or slushy roads, it is possible for a
wedge of water to build up between the tire and road
surface. This is hydroplaning and may cause partial or
complete loss of vehicle control and stopping ability. To
reduce this possibility, the following precautions should be
observed:
• Slow down during rainstorms or when the roads are
slushy.
• Slow down if the road has standing water or puddles.
• Replace the tires when tread wear indicators first be-
come visible.
• Keep tires properly inflated.
• Maintain sufficient distance between your vehicle and
the vehicle in front of you to avoid a collision in a
sudden stop.
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 277
Driving Through Water
Driving through water more than a few inches/centimeters
deep will require extra caution to ensure safety and pre-
vent damage to your vehicle.
Flowing/Rising Water
WARNING!
Do not drive on or across a road or path where water is
flowing and/or rising (as in storm run-off). Flowing
water can wear away the road or path’s surface and
cause your vehicle to sink into deeper water. Further-
more, flowing and/or rising water can carry your ve-
hicle away swiftly. Failure to follow this warning may
result in injuries that are serious or fatal to you, your
passengers, and others around you.
Shallow Standing Water
Although your vehicle is capable of driving through shal-
low standing water, consider the following Cautions and
Warnings before doing so.
WARNING!
• Driving through standing water limits your vehicle’s
traction capabilities. Do not exceed 5 mph (8 km/h)
when driving through standing water.
• Driving through standing water limits your vehicle’s
braking capabilities, which increases stopping dis-
tances. Therefore, after driving through standing
water, drive slowly and lightly press on the brake
pedal several times to dry the brakes.
• Failure to follow these warnings may result in inju-
ries that are serious or fatal to you, your passengers,
and others around you.
278 STARTING AND OPERATING
CAUTION!
• Always check the depth of the standing water before
driving through it. Never drive through standing
water that is deeper than the bottom of the tire rims
mounted on the vehicle.
• Determine the condition of the road or the path that
is under water and if there are any obstacles in the
way before driving through the standing water.
• Do not exceed 5 mph (8 km/h) when driving through
standing water. This will minimize wave effects.
• Driving through standing water may cause damage
to your vehicle’s drivetrain components. Always in-
spect your vehicle’s fluids (i.e., engine oil, transmis-
sion, axle, etc.) for signs of contamination (i.e., fluid
that is milky or foamy in appearance) after driving
through standing water. Do not continue to operate
the vehicle if any fluid appears contaminated, as this
may result in further damage. Such damage is not
covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
• Getting water inside your vehicle’s engine can cause
it to lock up and stall out, and cause serious internal
damage to the engine. Such damage is not covered by
the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 279
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
CONTENTS
䡵 HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS ............282
䡵 BULB REPLACEMENT ....................282
▫ Replacement Bulbs ......................282
▫ Replacing Exterior Bulbs ..................283
䡵 FUSES ................................286
▫ General Information .....................286
▫ Totally Integrated Power Module (Fuses) ......287
䡵 JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING ...........292
▫ Jack Location .........................293
▫ Spare Tire Tools ........................293
▫ To Access Spare Tire Winch Drive Nut ........294
▫ Spare Tire Removal .....................296
▫ Spare Tire Removal Instructions.............296
▫ Preparations For Jacking .................298
▫ Jacking Instructions .....................298
▫ Securing The Compact Spare Tire ...........305
▫ Road Tire Installation ....................306
䡵 TIRE SERVICE KIT — IF EQUIPPED ..........308
䡵 JUMP STARTING ........................319
▫ Preparations For Jump Start ...............320
▫ Jump Starting Procedure ..................321
䡵 GEAR SELECTOR OVERRIDE ..............322
䡵 IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS .............323
䡵 FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE ..............323
䡵 TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE ............325
䡵 ENHANCED ACCIDENT RESPONSE SYSTEM
(EARS) ...............................326
䡵 EVENT DA
TA RECORDER (EDR) ............326
7
HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS
The Hazard Warning flasher switch is located in the lower
center area of the instrument panel.
Push the switch to turn on the Hazard Warning
flasher. When the switch is activated, all direc-
tional turn signals will flash on and off to warn
oncoming traffic of an emergency. Push the
switch a second time to turn off the Hazard Warning
flashers.
This is an emergency warning system and it should not be
used when the vehicle is in motion. Use it when your
vehicle is disabled and it is creating a safety hazard for
other motorists.
When you must leave the vehicle to seek assistance, the
Hazard Warning flashers will continue to operate even
though the ignition is placed in the OFF position.
NOTE: With extended use, the Hazard Warning flashers
may wear down your battery.
BULB REPLACEMENT
Replacement Bulbs
Interior Bulbs
Bulb Number
Center & Rear Dome Lamp 578
Center & Rear Reading Lamps 578
Front Door Courtesy Lamp 578
Front Header Reading Lamps – If Equipped 578
Instrument Cluster Lamps PC74
Liftgate Lamp(s) 578
Overhead Console Reading Lamps PC579
Removable Console Lamp – If Equipped 194
Visor Vanity Lamps 6501966
282 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
NOTE: For lighted switches, see an authorized dealer for
replacement instructions.
Exterior Bulbs
Bulb Number
Headlamp H11LL
Fog Lamp – If Equipped PSX24W
Front Side Marker, Park/Turn Signal 3757A or PY27/7W
Rear Tail, Stop, Turn Signal Lamp LED (Serviced at authorized dealer)
Center High-Mounted Stop Lamp LED (Serviced at authorized dealer)
Backup Lamp 3157
License 168
NOTE: All of the interior bulbs are glass wedge base or
glass cartridge types. Aluminum base bulbs are not ap-
proved and should not be used for replacement.
Replacing Exterior Bulbs
Headlamps
1. Raise the hood to access the rear of the headlamp
housing.
2. Slide the red lock tab rearward on the connector, then
depress the tab and remove the connector from the bulb.
3. Twist the headlamp bulb and pull the bulb from the
headlamp housing.
4. Install the new headlamp bulb and twist until locked
into the headlamp housing.
CAUTION!
Do not touch the new bulb with your fingers. Oil
contamination will severely shorten bulb life. If the
bulb comes in contact with an oily surface, clean the
bulb with rubbing alcohol.
7
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 283
5. Connect the wiring connector to bulb and slide red lock
tab forward.
Front Park/Turn Signal Lamps
1. Raise the hood to access the rear of the headlamp
housing.
2. Twist the turn signal socket and remove from the
headlamp housing, then pull the bulb out.
3. Push the new bulb into the socket and reinstall the
socket by twisting until locked into the headlamp hous-
ing.
Fog Lamps
NOTE: Access to the fog lamp bulb is from the rear of the
fascia. On the left rear side of the fascia, remove the push
pin and lower the hinged access door on the air dam.
1. From behind the bumper fascia, or the access panel on
the air dam, squeeze the two tabs on the side of the bulb
socket and pull straight out from the fog lamp.
CAUTION!
Do not touch the new bulb with your fingers. Oil
contamination will severely shorten bulb life. If the
bulb comes in contact with an oily surface, clean the
bulb with rubbing alcohol.
2. Disconnect the wire harness from the bulb.
3. Reconnect the wiring harness to the new bulb and
reinstall by inserting the new bulb straight into the fog
lamp until it locks into place.
Rear Tail, Stop, Turn Signal, Side Marker And
Backup Lamps
1. Raise the liftgate.
2. Remove the tail lamp assembly by removing the two
screws from the inboard side. Use a fiber stick or similar
tool to gently pry the light on the outboard side to
disengage the two ball studs.
284 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
NOTE:
• If a screwdriver is used, make sure a soft material is
placed between the vehicle body and tool so not to
scratch the paint.
• The PRY location is best closest to the studs while
dislodging them separately.
3. Twist the socket and remove from the lamp assembly.
4. Pull the bulb to remove it from the socket.
5. Replace the bulb, reinstall the socket, and reattach the
lamp assembly.
Center High-Mounted Stop Lamp (CHMSL)
The CHMSL uses LED lamps that are not serviceable
separately. The CHMSL must be replaced as an assembly.
See your authorized dealer.
License Lamp
The license plate lamp is located under the tailgate light
bar and above the license plate.
1. Using a small screwdriver, press inward the locking tab
on the outboard side of the lamp assembly and pull
down on the lamp assembly for removal.
2. Twist and remove the socket from the lamp assembly
and pull the bulb out to remove.
3. Push the bulb into the socket, twist the socket into the
lamp assembly and reinstall the lamp assembly into
place ensuring the locking tab is secure.
Tail Lamp Assembly Screws
7
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 285
FUSES
WARNING!
• When replacing a blown fuse, always use an appro-
priate replacement fuse with the same amp rating as
the original fuse. Never replace a fuse with another
fuse of higher amp rating. Never replace a blown
fuse with metal wires or any other material. Do not
place a fuse inside a circuit breaker cavity or vice
versa. Failure to use proper fuses may result in
serious personal injury, fire and/or property damage.
• Before replacing a fuse, make sure that the ignition is
off and that all the other services are switched off
and/or disengaged.
• If the replaced fuse blows again, contact an autho-
rized dealer.
• If a general protection fuse for safety systems (air
bag system, braking system), power unit systems
(engine system, transmission system) or steering
system blows, contact an authorized dealer.
General Information
The fuses protect electrical systems against excessive cur-
rent.
When a device does not work, you must check the fuse
element inside the blade fuse for a break/melt.
Also, please be aware that when using power outlets for
extended periods of time with the engine off may result in
vehicle battery discharge.
Blade Fuses
1 — Fuse Element
2 — Blade Fuse with a good/functional fuse element.
3 — Blade fuse with a NOT functional / BAD fuse element (blown
fuse).
286 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
Totally Integrated Power Module (Fuses)
The Totally Integrated Power Module is located in the
engine compartment near the battery. Refer to the appli-
cable “Engine Compartment” illustration in this section.
This center contains cartridge fuses and mini-fuses. A label
that identifies each component may be printed or em-
bossed on the inside of the cover.
CAUTION!
• When installing the Totally Integrated Power Mod-
ule cover, it is important to ensure the cover is
properly positioned and fully latched. Failure to do
so may allow water to get into the Integrated Power
Module, and possibly result in a electrical system
failure.
• When replacing a blown fuse, it is important to use
only a fuse having the correct amperage rating. The
use of a fuse with a rating other than indicated may
result in a dangerous electrical system overload. If a
properly rated fuse continues to blow, it indicates a
problem in the circuit that must be corrected.
Totally Integrated Power Module
7
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 287
The numbers inside the TIPM cover correspond to the
following table.
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Mini-Fuse Description
J1 40 Amp Green – Power Folding Seat
J2 30 Amp Pink – Power Liftgate Module
J3 30 Amp Pink – Rear Door Module
J4 25 Amp Clear – Driver Door Node
J5 25 Amp Clear – Passenger Door Node
J6 40 Amp Green – Antilock Brakes Pump/Stability Control Sys-
tem
J7 30 Amp Pink – Antilock Brakes Valve/Stability Control Sys-
tem
J8 40 Amp Green – Power Memory Seat – If Equipped
J9 – – Not Used
J10 30 Amp Pink – Headlamp Wash/Manifold Tuning Valve – If
Equipped
J11 30 Amp Pink – Power Sliding Door Module/Anti–Theft
Module – If Equipped
J12 30 Amp Pink – HVAC Rear Blower, Radiator Fan Motor
J13 60 Amp Yellow – Ignition Off Draw (IOD) – Main
J14 40 Amp Green – Rear Window Defogger
288 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Mini-Fuse Description
J15 40 Amp Green – Front Blower
J17 40 Amp Green – Starter Solenoid
J18 20 Amp Blue – Powertrain Control Module Trans Range
J19 60 Amp Yellow – Radiator Fan
J20 30 Amp Pink – Front Wiper LO/HI
J21 20 Amp Blue – Front/Rear Washer
J22 25 Amp Clear – Sunroof Module
M1 – 15 Amp Blue Rear Center Brake Lamp/Brake Switch
M2 – 20 Amp Yellow Front Fog Lamps
M3 – 20 Amp Yellow Vacuum Pump Motor
M5 – 25 Amp Clear Inverter
M6 – 20 Amp Yellow Power Outlet #1 (ACC), Rain Sensor, Cigar
Lighter (Instrument Panel or with Console
Rear)
M7 – 20 Amp Yellow Power Outlet #2 (BATT/ACC SELECT) –
Center Seat or with Console Rear
M8 – 20 Amp Yellow Front Heated Seat — If Equipped
M9 – 20 Amp Yellow Rear Heated Seat — If Equipped
7
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 289
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Mini-Fuse Description
M10 – 15 Amp Blue Ignition Off Draw — Video System, Satellite
Radio, DVD, Hands-Free Module, Universal
Garage Door Opener, Vanity Lamp, Stream-
ing Video Module — If Equipped
M11 – 10 Amp Red Climate Control System
M12 – 30 Amp Green Amplifier/Radio
M13 – 20 Amp Yellow Instrument Cluster, SIREN, Clock Module,
Multifunction Control Switch – If Equipped
M14 – 20 Amp Yellow Trailer Tow — If Equipped
M15 – 20 Amp Yellow Rear View Mirror, Instrument Cluster, Multi-
function Control Switch, Tire Pressure Moni-
tor
M16 – 10 Amp Red Airbag Module/Occupant Classification
Module
M17 – 15 Amp Blue Left Tail/License/Park Lamp, Running
Lamps
M18 – 15 Amp Blue Right Tail/Park/Run Lamp
M19 – 25 Amp Clear Powertrain
M20 – 15 Amp Blue Instrument Cluster Interior Light, Switch
Bank, Steering Column Module, Switch
Steering Wheel
290 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Mini-Fuse Description
M21 – 20 Amp Yellow Powertrain
M22 – 10 Amp Red Horn
M23 – 10 Amp Red Horn
M24 – 25 Amp Clear Rear Wiper
M25 – 20 Amp Yellow Fuel Pump
M26 – 10 Amp Red Power Mirror Switch, Driver Window Switch
M27 – 10 Amp Red Wireless Control Module, Keyless Entry
Module
M28 – 10 Amp Red Powertrain, Transmission Control Module
M29 – 10 Amp Red Occupant Classification Module
M30 – 15 Amp Blue Diagnostic Feed
M31 – 20 Amp Yellow Back-Up Lamps
M32 – 10 Amp Red Airbag Module, THATCHUM — If
Equipped
M33 – 10 Amp Red Powertrain
M34 – 10 Amp Red Park Assist, Heater Climate Control Module,
Headlamp Wash, Compass, Rear Camera,
Door Lamps, Flashlight, Relay Diesel Cabin
Heater
M35 – 10 Amp Red Heated Mirrors
7
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 291
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Mini-Fuse Description
M36 – 20 Amp Yellow Power Outlet #3 (Instrument Panel Or With
Console Center)
M37 – 10 Amp Red Antilock Brakes, Stability Control, Stop
Lamp, Fuel Pump
M38 – 25 Amp Clear Door Lock/Unlock Motors, Liftgate Lock/
Unlock Motors
The power windows are fused by a 25 Amp circuit breaker
located in the Totally Integrated Power Module.
JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING
WARNING!
• Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the
vehicle close to moving traffic. Pull far enough off
the road to avoid the danger of being hit when
operating the jack or changing the wheel.
• Being under a jacked-up vehicle is dangerous. The
vehicle could slip off the jack and fall on you. You
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
could be crushed. Never put any part of your body
under a vehicle that is on a jack. If you need to get
under a raised vehicle, take it to a service center
where it can be raised on a lift.
• Never start or run the engine while the vehicle is on
a jack.
• The jack is designed to be used as a tool for changing
tires only. The jack should not be used to lift the
vehicle for service purposes. The vehicle should be
jacked on a firm level surface only. Avoid ice or
slippery areas.
292 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
Jack Location
If equipped, the jack, jack handle and winch handle tools
are stowed behind the rear left side trim panel in the rear
cargo area. Turn the two cover latches to release the cover.
Spare Tire Tools
The tool pouch contains three pieces and can be assembled
into a spare tire hook; to remove the compact spare
tire/cover assembly from under the vehicle, or a Winch
T-handle; to raise/lower the compact spare tire/cover
assembly.
Jack And Tool Location
Assembled T-handle
1 — Spare Tire Hook/T-handle
2 — Extension 1
3 — Extension 2
7
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 293
To Access Spare Tire Winch Drive Nut
To access the spare tire winch drive nut and lower the spare
tire, you will need to refer to one of the following center
console configurations.
Super Console
For vehicles equipped with the Super Console, the spare
tire winch assembly drive nut is located beneath the
console.
Assembling The Spare Tire Hook
1 — Spare Tire Hook/T-handle
2 — Extension 1
3 — Extension 2
Super Console
1 — Lower Drawer
2 — Front Drawer
3 — Front Drawer Liner
294 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
1. Pull the lower drawer out from the rear of the floor
console to gain clear access to the tire winch drive nut.
2. Open the front drawer to expose the storage compart-
ment.
3. Remove the liner from the console’s storage compart-
ment to access the spare tire winch drive nut.
Base Cargo Center Console
Pull the Winch Cover assembly plug (if equipped) to access
the winch drive nut.
Drive Nut Access
Winch Cover Assembly Plug (If Equipped)
7
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 295
Spare Tire Removal
The spare tire is stowed inside a protective cover located
under the center of the vehicle between the front doors by
means of a cable winch mechanism. The “spare tire drive”
nut is located on the floor, under a plastic cap at the front
of the floor console or under front super console forward
bin liner.
Spare Tire Removal Instructions
The spare tire is located under the vehicle beneath the
center console area.
1. Assemble the spare tire tools into a T-handle and place
the square end over the spare tire winch drive nut.
2. Rotate the nut to the left until the winch mechanism
stops turning freely. This will allow enough slack in the
cable to allow you to pull the spare tire out from
underneath the vehicle.
Spare Tire Location
Spare Tire And Cover
296 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
CAUTION!
The winch mechanism is designed for use with the
winch T-handle only. Use of an air wrench or other
power tools is not recommended and can damage the
winch.
3. To remove the compact spare tire/cover assembly, as-
semble the winch T-handle extensions to form a spare
tire hook, and pull the spare tire out from under the
vehicle.
NOTE: If either front tire is flat it may be necessary to jack
up the vehicle to remove the compact spare tire/cover
assembly from under the vehicle.
4. Stand the tire/cover assembly upright and remove the
wheel spacer by squeezing the winch retaining tabs
together. Push the retainer through the spare tire to
release it from the wheel.
Pulling Spare Tire
Removing Wheel Spacer
7
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 297
Preparations For Jacking
1. Park the vehicle on a firm, level surface. Avoid ice or
slippery areas.
WARNING!
Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the
vehicle close to moving traffic. Pull far enough off the
road to avoid being hit when operating the jack or
changing the wheel.
2. Turn on the Hazard Warning flasher.
3. Apply the parking brake.
4. Place the gear selector into PARK.
5. Turn OFF the ignition.
6. Block both the front and rear of the wheel diagonally
opposite the jacking position. For example, if the right
front wheel is being changed, block the left rear wheel.
NOTE: Passengers should not remain in the
vehicle when the vehicle is being jacked.
Jacking Instructions
WARNING!
Carefully follow these tire changing warnings to help
prevent personal injury or damage to your vehicle:
• Always park on a firm, level surface as far from the
edge of the roadway as possible before raising the
vehicle.
• Turn on the Hazard Warning flasher.
• Block the wheel diagonally opposite the wheel to be
raised.
• Apply the parking brake firmly and shift an auto-
matic transmission to PARK; a manual transmission
to REVERSE.
• Never start or run the engine with the vehicle on a
jack.
• Do not let anyone sit in the vehicle when it is on a
jack.
• Do not get under the vehicle when it is on a jack. If
you need to get under a raised vehicle, take it to a
service center where it can be raised on a lift.
• Only use the jack in the positions indicated and for
lifting this vehicle during a tire change.
(Continued)
298 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
WARNING! (Continued)
• If working on or near a roadway, be extremely
careful of motor traffic.
• To assure that spare tires, flat or inflated, are securely
stowed, spares must be stowed with the valve stem
facing the ground.
CAUTION!
Do not attempt to raise the vehicle by jacking on
locations other than those indicated in the Jacking
Instructions for this vehicle.
NOTE: Refer to the “Compact Spare Tire” section of “Tires
– General Information” in “Servicing And Maintenance”
for information about the compact spare tire, its use, and
operation.
1. Loosen (but do not remove) the wheel lug nuts by
turning them to the left one turn while the wheel is still
on the ground.
Jack Warning Label
7
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 299
2. There are two jack engagement locations on each side of
the vehicle body. These locations are on the sill flange of
the vehicle body.
CAUTION!
Do not attempt to raise the vehicle by jacking on
locations other than those indicated.
Jack Locations
Jack Location
300 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
Rear jack locations are between a pair of down-facing tabs
on the sill flange of the vehicle side body.
Rear Jacking Locations
Rear Jack Engaged
7
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 301
Front jack location is on the sill flange of the vehicle body
and is located 6 inches (150 mm) from door edge.
NOTE: In some situations the jack may need to be placed
on its side in order to be pushed under the vehicle. Return
the jack to its correct orientation once it is under the
vehicle.
WARNING!
Being under a jacked-up vehicle is dangerous. The
vehicle could slip off the jack and fall on you. You
could be crushed. Never get any part of your body
under a vehicle that is on a jack. If you need to get
(Continued)
Front Jack Locations
Front Jack Engaged
302 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
WARNING! (Continued)
under a raised vehicle, take it to a service center where
it can be raised on a lift.
3. Place the wrench on the jack screw and turn to the right
until the jack head is properly engaged in the described
location. Do not raise the vehicle until you are sure the
jack is securely engaged.
4. Raise the vehicle by turning the jack screw to the right,
using the swivel wrench. Raise the vehicle only until the
tire just clears the surface and enough clearance is
obtained to install the compact spare tire. Minimum tire
lift provides maximum stability.
WARNING!
Raising the vehicle higher than necessary can make the
vehicle less stable. It could slip off the jack and hurt
someone near it. Raise the vehicle only enough to
remove the tire.
5. Remove the wheel lug nuts, for vehicles with wheel
covers, remove the cover from the wheel by hand. Do
not pry the wheel cover off. Then pull the wheel off the
hub.
6. Install the compact spare tire. Lightly tighten the lug
nuts.
CAUTION!
Be sure to mount the spare tire with the valve stem
facing outward. The vehicle could be damaged if the
spare tire is mounted incorrectly.
Mounting Compact Spare Tire
7
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 303
WARNING!
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack, do
not tighten the wheel nuts fully until the vehicle has
been lowered. Failure to follow this warning may
result in serious injury.
NOTE: Do not install the wheel cover on the compact
spare.
7. Lower the vehicle by turning the jack screw to the left.
8.
Finish tightening the lug nuts. Push down on the wrench
while at the end of the handle for increased leverage. Tighten
the lug nuts in a star pattern until each nut has been
tightened twice. For correct lug nut torque refer to “Torque
Specifications” in “Technical Specifications”. If in doubt
about the correct tightness, have them checked with a torque
wrench by your authorized dealer or at a service station.
9. Lower the jack to its fully-closed position.
WARNING!
A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a collision or
hard stop could endanger the occupants of the vehicle.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
Always stow the jack parts and the spare tire in the
places provided. Have the deflated (flat) tire repaired
or replaced immediately.
10. Place the deflated (flat) tire and compact spare tire
cover assembly in the rear cargo area. Do not stow the
deflated tire in the compact spare tire location. Have
the full-sized tire repaired or replaced, as soon as
possible.
11. Stow the cable and wheel spacer before driving the
vehicle. Reassemble the winch handle extensions to
form a “T” and fit the winch T-handle over the drive
nut. Rotate the nut to the right until the winch mecha-
nism clicks at least three times.
NOTE: Refer to the “Spare Tire Tools” section for instruc-
tions on assembling the T-handle.
12. Stow the jack, jack handle and winch handle tools back
in the stowage compartment.
13. Check the compact spare tire pressure as soon as
possible. Correct the tire pressure, as required.
304 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
Securing The Compact Spare Tire
1. Assemble the winch handle extensions to form a
T-handle and fit the winch T-handle over the drive nut.
Rotate the nut to the left until the winch mechanism
stops turning freely. This will allow enough slack in the
cable to allow you to pull the wheel spacer out from
under the vehicle.
WARNING!
A loose compact spare tire/cover assembly, thrown
forward in a collision or hard stop could endanger the
occupants of the vehicle. Always stow the compact
spare tire with the cover assembly in the place pro-
vided.
CAUTION!
The winch mechanism is designed for use with the
winch T-handle only. Use of an air wrench or other
power tools is not recommended and can damage the
winch.
2. Assemble the winch handle extensions to form the spare
tire hook, and pull the wheel spacer from under the
vehicle.
3. Turn the compact spare tire so that the valve stem is
down, and place the tire into the compact spare tire/
cover assembly. Slide the wheel spacer through the
center of the wheel and compact spare tire/cover assem-
bly, so that the two retainer tabs snap out and engage the
compact spare tire cover on the opposite side.
WARNING!
Verify that both retainer tabs of the wheel spacer have
been properly extended through the center of the
wheel and compact spare tire/cover assembly. Failure
to properly engage both retainer tabs could result in
loss of the compact spare tire and cover assembly,
which will cause vehicle damage and may cause loss of
vehicle control and serious personal injury.
7
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 305
CAUTION!
The compact spare tire/cover assembly must be used
when the compact spare tire is stored. Failure to use
this cover could drastically reduce the life of the
compact spare tire.
4. Using the winch T-handle, rotate the drive nut to the
right until the compact spare tire/cover assembly is
drawn into place against the underside of the vehicle.
5. Continue to rotate the nut to the right until you hear the
winch mechanism click three times. It cannot be over-
tightened. Check under the vehicle to ensure the com-
pact spare tire/cover assembly is positioned correctly
against the underside of the vehicle.
CAUTION!
The winch mechanism is designed specifically to stow
a compact spare tire only. Do not attempt to use the
winch to stow the full size deflated tire, or any other
full-size tire, as the tire may not be held securely.
Vehicle damage may result.
Road Tire Installation
Vehicles Equipped With Wheel Covers
1. Mount the road tire on the axle.
2. To ease the installation process for steel wheels with
wheel covers, install two lug nuts on the mounting
studs which are on each side of the valve stem. Install
the lug nuts with the cone shaped end of the nut toward
the wheel. Lightly tighten the lug nuts.
306 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
3. Align the valve notch in the wheel cover with the valve
stem on the wheel. Install the cover by hand, snapping
the cover over the two lug nuts. Do not use a hammer or
excessive force to install the cover.
4. Install the remaining lug nuts with the cone shaped end
of the nut toward the wheel. Lightly tighten the lug
nuts.
WARNING!
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack, do
not tighten the wheel nuts fully until the vehicle has
been lowered. Failure to follow this warning may
result in serious injury.
5. Lower the vehicle to the ground by turning the jack
handle counterclockwise.
6. Finish tightening the lug nuts. Push down on the
wrench while at the end of the handle for increased
leverage. Tighten the lug nuts in a star pattern until each
nut has been tightened twice. Refer to “Torque Specifi-
cations” in “Technical Specifications” for proper wheel
lug nut torque. If in doubt about the correct tightness,
have them checked with a torque wrench by an autho-
rized dealer or at a service station.
7. After 25 miles (40 km) check the lug nut torque with a
torque wrench to ensure that all lug nuts are properly
seated against the wheel.
Tire And Wheel Cover Or Center Cap
1 — Valve Stem 4 — Wheel Cover
2 — Valve Notch 5 — Mounting Stud
3 — Wheel Lug Nut
7
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 307
Vehicles Without Wheel Covers
1. Mount the road tire on the axle.
2. Install the remaining lug nuts with the cone shaped end
of the nut toward the wheel. Lightly tighten the lug
nuts.
WARNING!
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack, do
not tighten the wheel nuts fully until the vehicle has
been lowered. Failure to follow this warning may
result in serious injury.
3. Lower the vehicle to the ground by turning the jack
handle counterclockwise.
4. Finish tightening the lug nuts. Push down on the
wrench while at the end of the handle for increased
leverage. Tighten the lug nuts in a star pattern until each
nut has been tightened twice. Refer to “Torque Specifi-
cations” in the “Technical Specifications” section for
proper wheel lug nut torque. If in doubt about the
correct tightness, have them checked with a torque
wrench by your authorized dealer or at a service station.
5. After 25 miles (40 km) check the lug nut torque with a
torque wrench to ensure that all lug nuts are properly
seated against the wheel.
TIRE SERVICE KIT — IF EQUIPPED
Your vehicle may be equipped with a Tire Service Kit.
Small punctures up to 1/4 inch (6 mm) in the tire tread can
be sealed with Tire Service Kit. Foreign objects (e.g., screws
or nails) should not be removed from the tire. Tire Service
Kit can be used in outside temperatures down to approxi-
mately -4°F (-20°C). This kit will provide a temporary tire
seal, allowing you to drive your vehicle up to 100 miles
(160 km) with a maximum speed of 50 mph (80 km/h).
308 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
Tire Service Kit Storage
The Tire Service Kit is stowed behind the rear left side trim
panel in the rear cargo area.
1. Open the liftgate.
2. Turn the two rear left side trim panel latches to release
the trim panel.
Tire Service Kit And Components And Operation
Tire Service Kit Location
Tire Service Kit Components
1 — Mode Select Knob
2 — Sealant/Air Hose
3 — Hose Accessories
4 — Sealant Bottle
5 — Power Plug
6 — Power Switch
7 — Deflation Button
8 — Pressure Gauge
7
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 309
Using The Mode Select Knob And Hoses
Your Tire Service Kit is equipped with the following
symbols to indicate the air or sealant mode.
Selecting Air Mode
Push in the Mode Select Knob and turn
to this position for air pump operation
only.
Selecting Sealant Mode
Push in the Mode Select Knob and turn
to this position to inject the Tire Service
Kit Sealant and to inflate the tire.
Using The Power Button
Push and release the Power Button once
to turn On the Tire Service Kit. Push and
release the Power Button again to turn
Off the Tire Service Kit.
Using The Deflation Button
Push the Deflation Button to reduce the
air pressure in the tire if it becomes
over-inflated.
Tire Service Kit Usage Precautions
• Replace the Tire Service Kit Sealant Bottle prior to the
expiration date (printed at the lower right hand corner
on the bottle label) to assure optimum operation of the
system. Refer to “Sealant Bottle Replacement” in this
section.
310 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
• The Sealant Bottle is a one tire application use and needs
to be replaced after each use. Always replace these
components immediately at your original equipment
vehicle dealer.
• When the Tire Service Kit sealant is in a liquid form,
clean water, and a damp cloth will remove the material
from the vehicle or tire and wheel components. Once the
sealant dries, it can easily be peeled off and properly
discarded.
• For optimum performance, make sure the valve stem on
the wheel is free of debris before connecting the Tire
Service Kit.
• The Tire Service Kit Sealant is only intended to seal
punctures less than 1/4 inch (6 mm) diameter in the
tread/contact surface of your vehicle’s tires.
• The Tire Service Kit Sealant is not intended to seal
punctures on the tires’ side walls.
• You can use the Tire Service Kit air pump to inflate
bicycle tires. The kit also comes with two needles,
located in the Accessory Storage Compartment (on the
bottom of the air pump) for inflating sport balls, rafts, or
similar inflatable items. However, use only the Air Pump
and make sure the Mode Select Knob is in the Air Mode
when inflating such items to avoid injecting sealant into
them.
• Do not lift or carry the Tire Service Kit by the hoses.
WARNING!
•
Do not attempt to seal a tire on the side of the vehicle
closest to traffic. Pull far enough off the road to avoid
the danger of being hit when using the Tire Service Kit.
• Do not use Tire Service Kit or drive the vehicle under
the following circumstances:
– If the puncture in the tire tread is approximately
1/4 inch (6 mm) or larger.
– If the tire has any sidewall damage.
– If the tire has any damage from driving with
extremely low tire pressure.
– If the tire has any damage from driving on a flat
tire.
– If the wheel has any damage.
– If you are unsure of the condition of the tire or the
wheel.
• Keep Tire Service Kit away from open flames or heat
source.
(Continued)
7
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 311
WARNING! (Continued)
• A loose Tire Service Kit thrown forward in a collision
or hard stop could endanger the occupants of the
vehicle. Always stow the Tire Service Kit in the place
provided. Failure to follow these warnings can result
in injuries that are serious or fatal to you, your
passengers, and others around you.
• Take care not to allow the contents of Tire Service Kit
to come in contact with hair, eyes, or clothing. Tire
Service Kit sealant is harmful if inhaled, swallowed,
or absorbed through the skin. It causes skin, eye, and
respiratory irritation. Flush immediately with plenty
of water if there is any contact with eyes or skin.
Change clothing as soon as possible, if there is any
contact with clothing.
• Tire Service Kit Sealant solution contains latex. In
case of an allergic reaction or rash, consult a physi-
cian immediately. Keep Tire Service Kit out of reach
of children. If swallowed, rinse mouth immediately
with plenty of water and drink plenty of water. Do
not induce vomiting! Consult a physician immedi-
ately.
Sealing A Tire With Tire Service Kit
Whenever You Stop To Use Tire Service Kit:
1. Pull over to a safe location and turn on the vehicle’s
Hazard Warning flashers.
2. Verify that the valve stem (on the wheel with the
deflated tire) is in a position that is near to the ground.
This will allow the Tire Service Kit Hose to reach the
valve stem and keep the Tire Service Kit flat on the
ground. This will provide the best positioning of the kit
when injecting the sealant into the deflated tire and
running the air pump. Move the vehicle as necessary to
place the valve stem in this position before proceeding.
3. Place the transmission in PARK and cycle the ignition in
the OFF position.
4. Apply the parking brake.
Setting Up To Use Tire Service Kit:
1. Uncoil the Sealant Hose and then remove the cap from
the fitting at the end of the hose.
2. Place the Tire Service Kit flat on the ground next to the
deflated tire.
312 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
3. Remove the cap from the valve stem and then screw the
fitting at the end of the Sealant Hose
onto the valve stem.
4. Uncoil the Power Plug and insert the plug into the
vehicle’s 12 Volt power outlet.
NOTE: Do not remove foreign objects (e.g., screws or nails)
from the tire.
Injecting Tire Service Kit Sealant Into The Deflated Tire:
1. Always start the vehicle before turning ON the Tire
Service Kit.
2. Ensure the Mode Select Knob is to the Sealant Mode
position.
3. After pushing the Power Button, the sealant (white
fluid) will flow from the Sealant
Bottle through the Sealant Hose and
into the tire.
7
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 313
NOTE: Sealant may leak out through the puncture in the
tire.
If the sealant (white fluid) does not flow within0–10
seconds through the Sealant Hose:
1. Push the Power Button to turn Off the Tire Service Kit.
Disconnect the Sealant Hose from the valve stem. Make
sure the valve stem is free of debris. Reconnect the
Sealant Hose to the valve stem. Check that the Mode
Select Knob is in the Sealant Mode position and not Air
Mode. Push the Power Button to turn On the Tire
Service Kit.
2. Connect the Power Plug to a different 12 Volt power
outlet in your vehicle or another vehicle, if available.
Make sure the vehicle is running before turning ON the
Tire Service Kit.
3. The Sealant Bottle may be empty due to previous use.
Call for assistance.
If the sealant (white fluid) does flow through the Sealant
Hose:
1. Continue to operate the pump until sealant is no longer
flowing through hose (typically takes
30 - 70 seconds). As the sealant flows
through the Sealant Hose, the Pres-
sure Gauge can read as high as 70 psi
(4.8 Bar). The Pressure Gauge will
decrease quickly from approximately
70 psi (4.8 Bar) to the actual tire
pressure when the Sealant Bottle is empty.
2.
The pump will start to inject air into the tire immediately
after the Sealant Bottle is empty. Con-
tinue to operate the pump and inflate
the tire to the cold tire inflation pres-
sure found on the tire and loading
information label located in the driver-
side door opening. Check the tire pres-
sure by looking at the Pressure Gauge.
314 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
If the tire does not inflate to at least 26 psi (1.8 Bar)
pressure within 15 minutes:
• The tire is too badly damaged. Do not attempt to drive
the vehicle further. Call for assistance.
If the tire inflates to the recommended pressure or is at
least 26 psi (1.8 Bar) pressure within 15 minutes:
NOTE: If the tire becomes over-inflated, push the Deflation
Button to reduce the tire pressure to the recommended
inflation pressure before continuing.
1. Push the Power Button to turn off the Tire Service Kit.
2. Remove the speed limit label from
the Tire Service Kit and place sticker
on the steering wheel.
3. Immediately disconnect the Sealant
Hose from the valve stem, reinstall
the cap on the fitting at the end of the
hose, and place the Tire Service Kit in
the vehicle storage location. Proceed
to “Drive Vehicle.”
Drive Vehicle:
Immediately after injecting sealant and inflating the tire,
drive the vehicle 5 miles (8 km) or 10
minutes to ensure distribution of the
Tire Service Kit Sealant within the tire.
Do not exceed 50 mph (80 km/h).
WARNING!
The Tire Service Kit is not a permanent flat tire repair.
Have the tire inspected and repaired or replaced after
using the Tire Service Kit. Do not exceed 50 mph
(80 km/h) until the tire is repaired or replaced. Failure
to follow this warning can result in injuries that are
serious or fatal to you, your passengers, and others
around you. Have the tire checked as soon as possible
at your authorized dealer.
7
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 315
After Driving:
Pull over to a safe location. Refer to “Whenever You Stop
To Use Tire Service Kit” in this section before continuing.
1. Uncoil the Sealant Hose, and then remove the cap from
the fitting at the end of the hose.
2. Place the Tire Service Kit flat on the ground next to the
deflated tire.
3. Remove the cap from the valve stem, and then screw the
fitting at the end of the Sealant Hose
onto the valve stem.
4. Uncoil the Power Plug and insert the plug into the
vehicle’s 12 Volt power outlet.
5. Uncoil the Hose and screw the fitting at the end of the
hose onto the valve stem.
6. Turn the Mode Select Knob and turn to the Air Mode
position.
7. Check the pressure in the tire by reading the Pressure
Gauge.
If tire pressure is less than 19 psi (1.3 Bar):
The tire is too badly damaged. Do not attempt to drive the
vehicle further. Call for assistance.
316 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
If the tire pressure is 19 psi (1.3 Bar) or higher:
1. Push the Power Button to turn on Tire Service Kit and
inflate the tire to the cold tire inflation
pressure found on the tire and load-
ing information label located in the
driver-side door opening.
NOTE: If the tire becomes over-inflated,
push the Deflation Button to reduce the
tire pressure to the recommended infla-
tion pressure before continuing.
2. Disconnect the Tire Service Kit from the valve stem,
reinstall the cap on the valve stem and unplug from 12
Volt outlet.
3. Place the Tire Service Kit in its proper storage area in the
vehicle.
4. Have the tire inspected and repaired or replaced at the
earliest opportunity at an authorized dealer or tire
service center.
5. Remove the Speed Limit sticker from the steering wheel
after the tire has been repaired.
6. Replace the Sealant Bottle at an authorized dealer as
soon as possible. Refer to “Sealant Bottle Replacement”.
NOTE: When having the tire serviced, advise the autho-
rized dealer or service center that the tire has been sealed
using the Tire Service Kit.
Sealant Bottle Replacement:
1. Unwrap the power cord.
2. Unwrap the hose.
Unwrap The Hose
7
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 317
3. Remove the bottle cover. 4. Rotate the bottle up beyond vertical to release.
Remove The Bottle Cover Rotate The Bottle Up
318 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
5. Pull the bottle away from the Compressor.
NOTE:
• For sealant bottle installation, follow these steps reverse
order.
• Replacement sealant bottles are available at authorized
service centers.
JUMP STARTING
If your vehicle has a discharged battery it can be jump
started using a set of jumper cables and a battery in another
vehicle or by using a portable battery booster pack. Jump
starting can be dangerous if done improperly so please
follow the procedures in this section carefully.
NOTE: When using a portable battery booster pack follow
the manufacturer’s operating instructions and precautions.
WARNING!
Do not attempt jump starting if the battery is frozen. It
could rupture or explode and cause personal injury.
CAUTION!
Do not use a portable battery booster pack or any other
booster source with a system voltage greater than 12
Volts or damage to the battery, starter motor, alternator
or electrical system may occur.
Remove The Bottle
7
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 319
Preparations For Jump Start
The battery in your vehicle is located on the left side of the
engine compartment.
WARNING!
• Take care to avoid the radiator cooling fan whenever
the hood is raised. It can start anytime the ignition
switch is ON. You can be injured by moving fan
blades.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• Remove any metal jewelry such as rings, watch
bands and bracelets that could make an inadvertent
electrical contact. You could be seriously injured.
• Batteries contain sulfuric acid that can burn your
skin or eyes and generate hydrogen gas which is
flammable and explosive. Keep open flames or
sparks away from the battery.
1. Apply the parking brake, shift the automatic transmis-
sion into PARK and turn the ignition to OFF/LOCK.
2. Turn off the heater, radio, and all unnecessary electrical
accessories.
3. If using another vehicle to jump start the battery, park
the vehicle within the jumper cables reach, set the
parking brake and make sure the ignition is in the
OFF/LOCK position.
WARNING!
Do not allow vehicles to touch each other as this could
establish a ground connection and personal injury
could result.
Positive Battery Post
320 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
Jump Starting Procedure
WARNING!
Failure to follow this jump starting procedure could
result in personal injury or property damage due to
battery explosion.
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these procedures could result in
damage to the charging system of the booster vehicle
or the discharged vehicle.
Connecting The Jumper Cables
1. Connect the positive (+) end of the jumper cable to the
positive (+) post of the discharged vehicle.
2. Connect the opposite end of the positive (+) jumper
cable to the positive (+) post of the booster battery.
3. Connect the negative (-) end of the jumper cable to the
negative (-) post of the booster battery.
4. Connect the opposite end of the negative (-) jumper
cable to a good engine ground (exposed metal part of
the discharged vehicle’s engine) away from the battery
and the fuel injection system.
WARNING!
Do not connect the jumper cable to the negative (-) post
of the discharged battery. The resulting electrical spark
could cause the battery to explode and could result in
personal injury. Only use the specific ground point, do
not use any other exposed metal parts.
5. Start the engine in the vehicle that has the booster
battery, let the engine idle for a few minutes, and then
start the engine in the vehicle with the discharged
battery.
6. Once the engine is started, remove the jumper cables in
the reverse sequence:
Disconnecting The Jumper Cables
1. Disconnect the negative (-) end of the jumper cable from
the engine ground of the vehicle with the discharged
battery.
2. Disconnect the opposite end of the negative (-) jumper
cable from the negative (-) post of the booster battery.
7
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 321
3. Disconnect the positive (+) end of the jumper cable from
the positive (+) post of the booster battery.
4. Disconnect the opposite end of the positive (+) jumper
cable from the positive (+) post of the vehicle with the
discharged battery.
If frequent jump starting is required to start your vehicle,
you should have the battery and charging system in-
spected at an authorized dealer.
CAUTION!
Accessories plugged into the vehicle power outlets
draw power from the vehicle’s battery, even when not
in use (i.e., cellular devices, etc.). Eventually, if plugged
in long enough without engine operation, the vehicle’s
battery will discharge sufficiently to degrade battery
life and/or prevent the engine from starting.
GEAR SELECTOR OVERRIDE
If a malfunction occurs and the gear selector cannot be
moved out of the PARK position, you can use the following
procedure to temporarily move the gear selector:
1. Turn the engine OFF.
2. Firmly apply the parking brake.
3. Using a small screwdriver or similar tool, remove the
gear selector override access cover (located near the top
right of the gear selector in the instrument panel).
4. Press and maintain firm pressure on the brake pedal.
5.
Insert the screwdriver or similar tool into the access hole,
and push and hold the override release lever forward.
6. Move the gear selector to the NEUTRAL position.
7. The vehicle may then be started in NEUTRAL.
8. Reinstall the gear selector override access cover.
Gear Selector Override Access Cover
322 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS
In any of the following situations, you can reduce the
potential for overheating your engine by taking the appro-
priate action.
• On the highways — slow down.
• In city traffic — while stopped, place the transmission in
NEUTRAL, but do not increase engine idle speed.
CAUTION!
Driving with a hot cooling system could damage your
vehicle. If the temperature gauge reads “H,” pull over
and stop the vehicle. Idle the vehicle with the air
conditioner turned off until the pointer drops back
into the normal range. If the pointer remains on the
“H” and you hear continuous chimes, turn the engine
off immediately and call for service.
NOTE: There are steps that you can take to slow down an
impending overheat condition:
• If your Air Conditioner (A/C) is on, turn it off. The A/C
system adds heat to the engine cooling system and
turning the A/C off can help remove this heat.
• You can also turn the temperature control to maximum
heat, the mode control to floor and the blower control to
high. This allows the heater core to act as a supplement
to the radiator and aids in removing heat from the
engine cooling system.
WARNING!
You or others can be badly burned by hot engine
coolant (antifreeze) or steam from your radiator. If you
see or hear steam coming from under the hood, do not
open the hood until the radiator has had time to cool.
Never try to open a cooling system pressure cap when
the radiator or coolant bottle is hot.
FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE
If your vehicle becomes stuck in mud, sand, or snow, it can
often be moved using a rocking motion. Turn the steering
wheel right and left to clear the area around the front
wheels. Then, shift back and forth between DRIVE and
REVERSE while gently pressing the accelerator. Use the
least amount of accelerator pedal pressure that will main-
tain the rocking motion, without spinning the wheels or
racing the engine.
7
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 323
CAUTION!
Racing the engine or spinning the wheels may lead to
transmission overheating and failure. Allow the en-
gine to idle with the transmission in NEUTRAL for at
least one minute after every five rocking-motion
cycles. This will minimize overheating and reduce the
risk of transmission failure during prolonged efforts to
free a stuck vehicle.
Push the ⬙ESC Off⬙ switch, to place the Electronic
Stability Control (ESC) system in ⬙ESC Partial
Off⬙ mode, before rocking the vehicle. Refer to
“Electronic Brake Control” in “Safety” for further
information. Once the vehicle has been freed, push the
⬙ESC Off⬙ switch again to restore ⬙ESC On⬙ mode.
WARNING!
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces generated
by excessive wheel speeds may cause damage, or even
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
failure, of the axle and tires. A tire could explode and
injure someone. Do not spin your vehicle’s wheels
faster than 30 mph (48 km/h) or for longer than 30
seconds continuously without stopping when you are
stuck and do not let anyone near a spinning wheel, no
matter what the speed.
CAUTION!
• When “rocking” a stuck vehicle by shifting between
DRIVE and REVERSE, do not spin the wheels faster
than 15 mph (24 km/h), or drivetrain damage may
result.
• Revving the engine or spinning the wheels too fast
may lead to transmission overheating and failure. It
can also damage the tires. Do not spin the wheels
above 30 mph (48 km/h) while in gear (no transmis-
sion shifting occurring).
324 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE
This section describes procedures for towing a disabled
vehicle using a commercial towing service.
Towing Condition Wheels OFF The Ground ALL MODELS
Flat Tow NONE If transmission is operable:
• Transmission in NEUTRAL
• 25 mph (40 km/h) max speed
• 15 miles (24 km) max distance
Wheel Lift Or Dolly Tow Rear
Front OK
Flatbed ALL BEST METHOD
Proper towing or lifting equipment is required to prevent
damage to your vehicle. Use only tow bars and other
equipment designed for this purpose, following equipment
manufacturer’s instructions. Use of safety chains is man-
datory. Attach a tow bar or other towing device to main
structural members of the vehicle, not to bumpers or
associated brackets. State and local laws regarding vehicles
under tow must be observed.
If you must use the accessories (wipers, defrosters, etc.)
while being towed, the ignition must be in the ON/RUN
mode, not the ACC mode.
If the key fob is unavailable or the vehicle’s battery is
discharged, refer to ⬙Gear Selector Override⬙ in this section
for instructions on shifting the transmission out of PARK
for towing.
CAUTION!
• Do not use sling type equipment when towing.
Vehicle damage may occur.
• When securing the vehicle to a flatbed truck, do not
attach to front or rear suspension components. Dam-
age to your vehicle may result from improper towing.
(Continued)
7
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 325
CAUTION! (Continued)
• Do not push or tow this vehicle with another vehicle
as damage to the bumper fascia and transmission
may result.
The manufacturer recommends towing your vehicle with
all four wheels OFF the ground using a flatbed. If flatbed
equipment is not available, and the transmission is oper-
able, the vehicle may be flat towed (with all four wheels on
the ground) under the following conditions:
• The transmission must be in NEUTRAL.
• The towing distance must not exceed 15 miles (24 km).
• The towing speed must not exceed 25 mph (40 km/h).
If the transmission is not operable, or the vehicle must be
towed faster than 25 mph (40 km/h) or farther than 15
miles (24 km), it must be towed with the front wheels
OFF the ground (using a flatbed truck, or wheel lift
equipment with the front wheels raised).
CAUTION!
Towing faster than 25 mph (40 km/h) or farther than 15
miles (24 km) with front wheels on the ground can
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
cause severe transmission damage. Damage from im-
proper towing is not covered by the New Vehicle
Limited Warranty.
ENHANCED ACCIDENT RESPONSE SYSTEM
(EARS)
This vehicle is equipped with an Enhanced Accident
Response System.
Please refer to “Occupant Restraint Systems” in “Safety”
for further information on the Enhanced Accident Re-
sponse System (EARS) function.
EVENT DATA RECORDER (EDR)
This vehicle is equipped with an Event Data Recorder
(EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is to record data that
will assist in understanding how a vehicle’s systems per-
formed under certain crash or near crash-like situations,
such as an air bag deployment or hitting a road obstacle.
Please refer to “Occupant Restraint Systems” in “Safety”
for further information on the Event Data Recorder (EDR).
326 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
CONTENTS
䡵 SCHEDULED SERVICING .................329
▫ Maintenance Plan.......................330
䡵 ENGINE COMPARTMENT .................333
▫ Engine Compartment — 3.6L ..............333
▫ Checking Oil Level .....................334
▫ Adding Washer Fluid ...................334
▫ Maintenance-Free Battery .................334
䡵 DEALER SERVICE .......................335
▫ Engine Oil ...........................336
▫ Engine Oil Filter .......................337
▫ Engine Air Cleaner Filter .................337
▫ Air Conditioner Maintenance ..............338
▫ Accessory Drive Belt Inspection ............340
▫ Body Lubrication ......................341
▫ Windshield Wiper Blades .................342
▫ Exhaust System ........................342
▫ Cooling System ........................344
▫ Brake System .........................348
▫ Automatic Transmission ..................349
䡵 RAISING THE VEHICLE ..................350
䡵 TIRES ................................350
▫ Tire Safety Information ..................350
▫ Tires — General Information ..............359
▫ Tire Types ............................366
▫ Spare Tires — If Equipped ................367
▫ Wheel And Wheel Trim Care ..............369
▫ Tir
e Chains (Traction Devices) .............370
▫ Tire Rotation Recommendations ............371
8
䡵 DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM
TIRE QUALITY GRADES ..................372
▫ Treadwear ............................372
▫ Traction Grades ........................372
▫ Temperature Grades .....................373
䡵 VEHICLE STORAGE .....................373
䡵 BODYWORK ...........................374
▫ Protection From Atmospheric Agents ........374
▫ Body And Underbody Maintenance ..........374
▫ Preserving The Bodywork .................374
䡵 INTERIORS ............................376
▫ Seats And Fabric Parts ...................376
▫ Plastic And Coated Parts..................376
▫ Glass Surfaces .........................377
▫ Cleaning The Instrument Panel Cupholders . . . .377
328 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
SCHEDULED SERVICING
Your vehicle is equipped with an automatic oil change
indicator system. The oil change indicator system will
remind you that it is time to take your vehicle in for
scheduled maintenance.
Based on engine operation conditions, the oil change
indicator message will illuminate. This means that service
is required for your vehicle. Operating conditions such as
frequent short-trips, trailer tow, extremely hot or cold
ambient temperatures, and E85 fuel usage will influence
when the “Oil Change Required” message is displayed.
Severe Operating Conditions can cause the change oil
message to illuminate as early as 3,500 miles (5,600 km)
since last reset. Have your vehicle serviced as soon as
possible, within the next 500 miles (805 km).
Your authorized dealer will reset the oil change indicator
message after completing the scheduled oil change. If a
scheduled oil change is performed by someone other than
your authorized dealer, the message can be reset by
referring to the steps described under “Instrument Cluster
Display” in “Getting To Know Your Instrument Panel” for
further information.
NOTE: Under no circumstances should oil change inter-
vals exceed 10,000 miles (16,000 km), twelve months or 350
hours of engine run time, whichever comes first. The 350
hours of engine run or idle time is generally only a concern
for fleet customers.
Severe Duty All Models
Change engine oil at 4,000 miles (6,500 km) if the vehicle is
operated in a dusty and off road environment or is
operated predominately at idle or only very low engine
RPM’s. This type of vehicle use is considered Severe Duty.
Once A Month Or Before A Long Trip:
• Check engine oil level.
• Check windshield washer fluid level.
• Check tire pressure and look for unusual wear or
damage. Rotate tires at the first sign of irregular wear,
even if it occurs before the oil indicator system turns on.
• Check the fluid levels of the coolant reservoir, brake
master cylinder, and power steering and fill as needed.
• Check function of all interior and exterior lights.
8
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 329
Maintenance Plan
Required Maintenance Intervals.
Refer to the maintenance schedules on the following page
for the required maintenance intervals.
At Every Oil Change Interval As Indicated By Oil Change Indicator System:
• Change oil and filter.
• Rotate the tires. Rotate at the first sign of irregular wear, even if it occurs before the oil indicator system turns
on.
• Inspect battery and clean and tighten terminals as required.
• Inspect brake pads, shoes, rotors, drums, hoses and park brake.
• Inspect engine cooling system protection and hoses.
• Inspect exhaust system.
• Inspect engine air cleaner if using in dusty or off-road conditions.
330 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Mileage or time passed (which-
ever comes first)
20,000
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
100,000
110,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
Or Years: 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Or Kilometers:
32,000
48,000
64,000
80,000
96,000
112,000
128,000
144,000
160,000
176,000
192,000
208,000
224,000
240,000
Additional Inspections
Inspect the CV joints. X X X X X
Inspect front suspension, tie rod
ends, boot seals, and replace if
necessary.
XXX X X X X
Inspect the brake linings, replace
as necessary.
XXX X X X X
Additional Maintenance
Replace engine air filter. X X X X X
Replace cabin/air conditioning fil-
ter.
XXX X X X X
Replace spark plugs. (**) X
Flush and replace the engine cool-
ant at 10 years or 150,000 miles
(240,000 km) whichever comes
first.
XX
8
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 331
Mileage or time passed (which-
ever comes first)
20,000
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
100,000
110,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
Or Years: 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Or Kilometers:
32,000
48,000
64,000
80,000
96,000
112,000
128,000
144,000
160,000
176,000
192,000
208,000
224,000
240,000
Change automatic transmission
fluid and filter if using your vehicle
for any of the following: police,
taxi, fleet, or frequent trailer tow-
ing.
XX
Change automatic transmission
fluid and filter.
X
Inspect and replace PCV valve if
necessary.
X
(**) The spark plug change interval is mileage based only,
yearly intervals do not apply.
WARNING!
• You can be badly injured working on or around a
motor vehicle. Do only service work for which you
have the knowledge and the right equipment. If you
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
have any doubt about your ability to perform a
service job, take your vehicle to a competent me-
chanic.
• Failure to properly inspect and maintain your vehicle
could result in a component malfunction and effect
vehicle handling and performance. This could cause
an accident.
332 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
Engine Compartment — 3.6L
1 — Air Filter 6 — Engine Coolant Reservoir
2 — Power Steering Fluid Reservoir 7 — Engine Oil Dipstick
3 — Brake Fluid Reservoir 8 — Engine Oil Fill
4 — Battery 9 — Coolant Pressure Cap
5 — Totally Integrated Power Module (Fuses) 10 — Washer Fluid Reservoir
8
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 333
Checking Oil Level
To assure proper engine lubrication, the engine oil must be
maintained at the correct level. Check the oil level at
regular intervals, such as every fuel stop. The best time to
check the engine oil level is about five minutes after a fully
warmed engine is shut OFF.
Checking the oil while the vehicle is on level ground will
improve the accuracy of the oil level readings. Maintain the
oil level within the SAFE crosshatch marking on the
dipstick. Adding one quart of oil when the reading is at the
bottom of the mark will result in reading the top of the
mark on these engines.
CAUTION!
Overfilling or underfilling will cause oil aeration, or
loss of oil pressure. This could damage your engine.
Adding Washer Fluid
The fluid reservoir for the windshield washers and the rear
window washer is shared. It is located in the engine
compartment and should be checked at regular intervals.
Fill the reservoir with windshield washer solvent (not
radiator antifreeze) and operate the system for a few
seconds to flush out any residual water.
The washer fluid reservoir will hold a full gallon of fluid
when the Low Washer Fluid Light illuminates.
WARNING!
Commercially available windshield washer solvents
are flammable. They could ignite and burn you. Care
must be exercised when filling or working around the
washer solution.
After the engine has warmed, operate the defroster for a
few minutes to reduce the possibility of smearing or
freezing the fluid on the cold windshield. Mopar All
Weather Windshield Washer Solution or equivalent, used
with water as directed on the container, aids cleaning
action, reduces the freezing point to avoid line clogging,
and is not harmful to paint or trim.
Maintenance-Free Battery
Your vehicle is equipped with a maintenance-free battery.
You will never have to add water, nor is periodic mainte-
nance required.
334 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
WARNING!
• Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution and can
burn or even blind you. Do not allow battery fluid to
contact your eyes, skin, or clothing. Do not lean over
a battery when attaching clamps. If acid splashes in
eyes or on skin, flush the area immediately with
large amounts of water. Refer to “Jump Starting
Procedure” in “In Case Of Emergency” for further
information.
• Battery gas is flammable and explosive. Keep flame
or sparks away from the battery. Do not use a booster
battery or any other booster source with an output
greater than 12 Volts. Do not allow cable clamps to
touch each other.
• Battery posts, terminals, and related accessories con-
tain lead and lead compounds. Wash hands after
handling.
CAUTION!
• It is essential when replacing the cables on the
battery that the positive cable is attached to the
positive post and the negative cable is attached to the
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
negative post. Battery posts are marked positive (+)
and negative (-) and are identified on the battery
case. Cable clamps should be tight on the terminal
posts and free of corrosion.
• If a “fast charger” is used while the battery is in the
vehicle, disconnect both vehicle battery cables before
connecting the charger to the battery. Do not use a
“fast charger” to provide starting voltage.
DEALER SERVICE
An authorized dealer has the qualified service personnel,
special tools, and equipment to perform all service opera-
tions in an expert manner. Service Manuals are available
which include detailed service information for your ve-
hicle. Refer to these Service Manuals before attempting any
procedure yourself.
NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control sys-
tems may void your warranty and could result in civil
penalties being assessed against you.
8
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 335
WARNING!
You can be badly injured working on or around a
motor vehicle. Only do service work for which you
have the knowledge and the proper equipment. If you
have any doubt about your ability to perform a service
job, take your vehicle to a competent mechanic.
Engine Oil
Change Engine Oil
The oil change indicator system will remind you that it is
time to take your vehicle in for scheduled maintenance.
Refer to the “Maintenance Plan” for further information.
NOTE: Under no circumstances should oil change inter-
vals exceed 10,000 miles (16,000 km), twelve months or 350
hours of engine run time, whichever comes first. The 350
hours of engine run or idle time is generally only a concern
for fleet customers.
Engine Oil Selection
For best performance and maximum protection under all
types of operating conditions, the manufacturer only rec-
ommends engine oils that are API Certified and meet the
requirements of FCA Material Standard MS-6395.
American Petroleum Institute (API) Engine Oil
Identification Symbol
This symbol means that the oil has
been certified by the American Pe-
troleum Institute (API). The manu-
facturer only recommends API Cer-
tified engine oils.
This symbol certifies 0W-20, 5W-20,
0W-30, 5W-30 and 10W-30 engine
oils.
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your engine oil as the
chemicals can damage your engine. Such damage is not
covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Engine Oil Viscosity (SAE Grade) — 3.6L Engine
Mopar SAE 5W-20 engine oil approved to FCA Material
Standard MS-6395 such as Pennzoil, Shell Helix or equiva-
lent is recommended for all operating temperatures. This
engine oil improves low temperature starting and vehicle
fuel economy.
336 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
The engine oil filler cap also shows the recommended
engine oil viscosity for your engine. For information on
engine oil filler cap location, refer to the “Engine Compart-
ment” illustration in this section.
NOTE: Mopar SAE 5W-30 engine oil approved to FCA
Material Standard MS-6395 such as Pennzoil, Shell Helix or
equivalent may be used when SAE 5W-20 engine oil
meeting MS-6395 is not available.
Lubricants which do not have both the engine oil certifi-
cation mark and the correct SAE viscosity grade number
should not be used.
Synthetic Engine Oils
You may use synthetic engine oils provided the recom-
mended oil quality requirements are met, and the recom-
mended maintenance intervals for oil and filter changes are
followed.
Synthetic engine oils which do not have both the engine oil
certification mark and the correct SAE viscosity grade
number should not be used.
Materials Added To Engine Oil
The manufacturer strongly recommends against the addi-
tion of any additives (other than leak detection dyes) to the
engine oil. Engine oil is an engineered product and its
performance may be impaired by supplemental additives.
Disposing Of Used Engine Oil And Oil Filters
Care should be taken in disposing of used engine oil and
oil filters from your vehicle. Used oil and oil filters,
indiscriminately discarded, can present a problem to the
environment. Contact an authorized dealer, service station
or governmental agency for advice on how and where used
oil and oil filters can be safely discarded in your area.
Engine Oil Filter
The engine oil filter should be replaced with a new filter at
every engine oil change.
Engine Oil Filter Selection
This manufacturer’s engines have a full-flow type dispos-
able oil filter. Use a filter of this type for replacement. The
quality of replacement filters varies considerably. Only
high quality filters should be used to assure most efficient
service. Mopar engine oil filters are high quality oil filters
and are recommended.
Engine Air Cleaner Filter
Refer to the “Maintenance Plan” in this section for the
proper maintenance intervals.
8
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 337
NOTE: Be sure to follow the “Severe Duty Conditions”
maintenance interval if applicable.
WARNING!
The air induction system (air cleaner, hoses, etc.) can
provide a measure of protection in the case of engine
backfire. Do not remove the air induction system (air
cleaner, hoses, etc.) unless such removal is necessary
for repair or maintenance. Make sure that no one is
near the engine compartment before starting the ve-
hicle with the air induction system (air cleaner, hoses,
etc.) removed. Failure to do so can result in serious
personal injury.
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Selection
The quality of replacement engine air cleaner filters varies
considerably. Only high quality filters should be used to
assure most efficient service. Mopar engine air cleaner
filters are a high quality filter and are recommended.
Air Conditioner Maintenance
For best possible performance, your air conditioner should
be checked and serviced by an authorized dealer at the
start of each warm season. This service should include
cleaning of the condenser fins and a performance test.
Drive belt tension should also be checked at this time.
WARNING!
• Use only refrigerants and compressor lubricants ap-
proved by the manufacturer for your air conditioning
system. Some unapproved refrigerants are flam-
mable and can explode, injuring you. Other unap-
proved refrigerants or lubricants can cause the sys-
tem to fail, requiring costly repairs. Refer to
Warranty Information Book, for further warranty
information.
• The air conditioning system contains refrigerant un-
der high pressure. To avoid risk of personal injury or
damage to the system, adding refrigerant or any
repair requiring lines to be disconnected should be
done by an experienced technician.
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your air conditioning
system as the chemicals can damage your air condition-
ing components. Such damage is not covered by the
New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
338 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Refrigerant Recovery And Recycling R-134a — If
Equipped
R-134a Air Conditioning Refrigerant is a hydrofluoro-
carbon (HFC) that is an ozone-friendly substance. The
manufacturer recommends that air conditioning service be
performed by an authorized dealer or other service facili-
ties using recovery and recycling equipment.
NOTE: Use only manufacturer approved A/C system PAG
compressor oil and refrigerants.
A/C Air Filter
Refer to the “Maintenance Plan” in the “Scheduled Servic-
ing” chapter for the proper maintenance intervals.
WARNING!
Do not remove the cabin air filter while the vehicle is
running, or while the ignition is in the ACC or ON/
RUN mode. With the cabin air filter removed and the
blower operating, the blower can contact hands and
may propel dirt and debris into your eyes, resulting in
personal injury.
The A/C air filter is located in the fresh air inlet behind the
glove compartment. Perform the following procedure to
replace the filter:
1. Open the glove compartment and remove all contents.
2. Push in on the sides of the glove compartment, remove
tether and lower the door.
3. Pivot the glove compartment downward.
4. Disengage the two retaining tabs that secure the filter
cover to the HVAC housing, and remove the cover.
A/C Air Filter Replacement
8
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 339
5. Remove the A/C air filter by pulling it straight out of
the housing.
6. Install the A/C air filter with the arrow on the filter
pointing toward the floor. When installing the filter
cover, make sure the retaining tabs fully engage the
cover.
CAUTION!
The cabin air filter is identified with an arrow to
indicate airflow direction through the filter. Failure to
properly install the filter will result in the need to
replace it more often.
7. Rotate the glove compartment door back into position
and reinstall tether.
Accessory Drive Belt Inspection
WARNING!
• Do not attempt to inspect an accessory drive belt
with vehicle running.
• When working near the radiator cooling fan, discon-
nect the fan motor lead. The fan is temperature
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
controlled and can start at any time regardless of
ignition mode. You could be injured by the moving
fan blades.
• You can be badly injured working on or around a
motor vehicle. Only do service work for which you
have the knowledge and the proper equipment. If
you have any doubt about your ability to perform a
service job, take your vehicle to a competent me-
chanic.
When inspecting accessory drive belts, small cracks that
run across ribbed surface of belt from rib to rib, are
considered normal. These are not a reason to replace belt.
However, cracks running along a rib (not across) are not
normal. Any belt with cracks running along a rib must be
replaced. Also have the belt replaced if it has excessive
wear, frayed cords or severe glazing.
340 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Conditions that would require replacement:
• Rib chunking (one or more ribs has separated from belt
body)
• Rib or belt wear
• Longitudinal belt cracking (cracks between two ribs)
• Belt slips
• “Groove jumping⬙ (belt does not maintain correct posi-
tion on pulley)
• Belt broken (note: identify and correct problem before
new belt is installed)
• Noise (objectionable squeal, squeak, or rumble is heard
or felt while drive belt is in operation)
Some conditions can be caused by a faulty component such
as a belt pulley. Belt pulleys should be carefully inspected
for damage and proper alignment.
Belt replacement on some models requires the use of
special tools, we recommend having your vehicle serviced
at an authorized dealer.
Body Lubrication
Locks and all body pivot points, including such items as
seat tracks, door hinge pivot points and rollers, liftgate,
tailgate, decklid, sliding doors and hood hinges, should be
lubricated periodically with a lithium based grease, such as
Mopar Spray White Lube to assure quiet, easy operation
and to protect against rust and wear. Prior to the applica-
tion of any lubricant, the parts concerned should be wiped
clean to remove dust and grit; after lubricating excess oil
and grease should be removed. Particular attention should
also be given to hood latching components to ensure
proper function. When performing other underhood ser-
vices, the hood latch, release mechanism and safety catch
should be cleaned and lubricated.
Accessory Belt (Serpentine Belt)
8
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 341
The external lock cylinders should be lubricated twice a
year, preferably in the Fall and Spring. Apply a small
amount of a high quality lubricant, such as Mopar Lock
Cylinder Lubricant directly into the lock cylinder.
Windshield Wiper Blades
Clean the rubber edges of the wiper blades and the
windshield periodically with a sponge or soft cloth and a
mild nonabrasive cleaner. This will remove accumulations
of salt or road film.
Operation of the wipers on dry glass for long periods may
cause deterioration of the wiper blades. Always use washer
fluid when using the wipers to remove salt or dirt from a
dry windshield.
Avoid using the wiper blades to remove frost or ice from
the windshield. Keep the blade rubber out of contact with
petroleum products such as engine oil, gasoline, etc.
NOTE: Life expectancy of wiper blades varies depending
on geographical area and frequency of use. Poor perfor-
mance of blades may be present with chattering, marks,
water lines or wet spots. If any of these conditions are
present, clean the wiper blades or replace as necessary.
Exhaust System
The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into the
vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust
system.
If you notice a change in the sound of the exhaust system;
or if the exhaust fumes can be detected inside the vehicle;
or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is damaged;
have an authorized technician inspect the complete ex-
haust system and adjacent body areas for broken, dam-
aged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Open seams or
loose connections could permit exhaust fumes to seep into
the passenger compartment. In addition, have the exhaust
system inspected each time the vehicle is raised for lubri-
cation or oil change. Replace as required.
WARNING!
• Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain carbon
monoxide (CO), which is colorless and odorless.
Breathing it can make you unconscious and can
eventually poison you. To avoid breathing CO, refer
to “Safety Tips” in “Safety” for further information.
• A hot exhaust system can start a fire if you park over
materials that can burn. Such materials might be
(Continued)
342 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
WARNING! (Continued)
grass or leaves coming into contact with your exhaust
system. Do not park or operate your vehicle in areas
where your exhaust system can contact anything that
can burn.
CAUTION!
• The catalytic converter requires the use of unleaded
fuel only. Leaded gasoline will destroy the effective-
ness of the catalyst as an emissions control device
and may seriously reduce engine performance and
cause serious damage to the engine.
• Damage to the catalytic converter can result if your
vehicle is not kept in proper operating condition. In
the event of engine malfunction, particularly involv-
ing engine misfire or other apparent loss of perfor-
mance, have your vehicle serviced promptly. Contin-
ued operation of your vehicle with a severe
malfunction could cause the converter to overheat,
resulting in possible damage to the converter and
vehicle.
Under normal operating conditions, the catalytic converter
will not require maintenance. However, it is important to
keep the engine properly tuned to assure proper catalyst
operation and prevent possible catalyst damage.
NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control sys-
tems can result in civil penalties being assessed against
you.
In unusual situations involving grossly malfunctioning
engine operation, a scorching odor may suggest severe and
abnormal catalyst overheating. If this occurs, stop the
vehicle, turn off the engine and allow it to cool. Service,
including a tune-up to manufacturer’s specifications,
should be obtained immediately.
To minimize the possibility of catalytic converter damage:
• Do not interrupt the ignition when the transmission is in
gear and the vehicle is in motion.
• Do not try to start the vehicle by pushing or towing the
vehicle.
• Do not idle the engine with any ignition components
disconnected or removed, such as when diagnostic
testing, or for prolonged periods during very rough idle
or malfunctioning operating conditions.
8
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 343
Cooling System
WARNING!
• You or others can be badly burned by hot engine
coolant (antifreeze) or steam from your radiator. If
you see or hear steam coming from under the hood,
do not open the hood until the radiator has had time
to cool. Never open a cooling system pressure cap
when the radiator or coolant bottle is hot.
• Keep hands, tools, clothing, and jewelry away from
the radiator cooling fan when the hood is raised. The
fan starts automatically and may start at any time,
whether the engine is running or not.
• When working near the radiator cooling fan, discon-
nect the fan motor lead or turn the ignition to the
OFF mode. The fan is temperature controlled and can
start at any time the ignition is in the ON mode.
Engine Coolant Checks
Check the engine coolant (antifreeze) protection every 12
months (before the onset of freezing weather, where appli-
cable). If the engine coolant (antifreeze) is dirty, the system
should be drained, flushed, and refilled with fresh OAT
coolant (conforming to MS.90032) by an authorized dealer.
Check the front of the A/C condenser for any accumula-
tion of bugs, leaves, etc. If dirty, clean by gently spraying
water from a garden hose vertically down the face of the
condenser.
Check the engine cooling system hoses for brittle rubber,
cracking, tears, cuts, and tightness of the connection at the
coolant recovery bottle and radiator. Inspect the entire
system for leaks. DO NOT REMOVE THE COOLANT
PRESSURE CAP WHEN THE COOLING SYSTEM IS HOT.
Cooling System — Drain, Flush And Refill
NOTE: Some vehicles require special tools to add coolant
properly. Failure to fill these systems properly could lead to
severe internal engine damage. If any coolant is needed to
be added to the system please contact an authorized dealer.
If the engine coolant (antifreeze) is dirty or contains visible
sediment, have an authorized dealer clean and flush with
OAT coolant (antifreeze) (conforming to MS.90032).
Refer to the “Maintenance Plan” in this section for the
proper maintenance intervals.
Selection Of Coolant
Refer to “Fluids And Lubricants” in “Technical Specifica-
tions” for further information.
344 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
NOTE:
• Mixing of engine coolant (antifreeze) other than speci-
fied Organic Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant
(antifreeze), may result in engine damage and may
decrease corrosion protection. Organic Additive Tech-
nology (OAT) engine coolant is different and should not
be mixed with Hybrid Organic Additive Technology
(HOAT) engine coolant (antifreeze) or any “globally
compatible” coolant (antifreeze). If a non-OAT engine
coolant (antifreeze) is introduced into the cooling system
in an emergency, the cooling system will need to be
drained, flushed, and refilled with fresh OAT coolant
(conforming to MS.90032), by an authorized dealer as
soon as possible.
• Do not use water alone or alcohol-based engine coolant
(antifreeze) products. Do not use additional rust inhibi-
tors or antirust products, as they may not be compatible
with the radiator engine coolant and may plug the
radiator.
• This vehicle has not been designed for use with propyl-
ene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze). Use of
propylene glycolbased engine coolant (antifreeze) is not
recommended.
• Some vehicles require special tools to add coolant prop-
erly. Failure to fill these systems properly could lead to
severe internal engine damage. If any coolant is needed
to be added to the system please contact an authorized
dealer.
Adding Coolant
Your vehicle has been built with an improved engine
coolant (OAT coolant conforming to MS.90032) that allows
extended maintenance intervals. This engine coolant (anti-
freeze) can be used up to ten years or 150,000 miles
(240,000 km) before replacement. To prevent reducing this
extended maintenance period, it is important that you use
the same engine coolant (OAT coolant conforming to
MS.90032) throughout the life of your vehicle.
Please review these recommendations for using Organic
Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant (antifreeze)
that meets the requirements of FCA Material Standard
MS.90032. When adding engine coolant (antifreeze):
• We recommend using Mopar Antifreeze/Coolant 10
Year/150,000 Mile (240,000 km) Formula OAT (Organic
Additive Technology) that meets the requirements of
FCA Material Standard MS.90032.
8
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 345
• Mix a minimum solution of 50% OAT engine coolant
that meets the requirements of FCA Material Standard
MS.90032 and distilled water. Use higher concentrations
(not to exceed 70%) if temperatures below −34°F (−37°C)
are anticipated. Please contact an authorized dealer for
assistance.
• Use only high purity water such as distilled or deionized
water when mixing the water/engine coolant (anti-
freeze) solution. The use of lower quality water will
reduce the amount of corrosion protection in the engine
cooling system.
NOTE:
• It is the owner’s responsibility to maintain the proper
level of protection against freezing according to the
temperatures occurring in the area where the vehicle is
operated.
• Some vehicles require special tools to add coolant prop-
erly. Failure to fill these systems properly could lead to
severe internal engine damage. If any coolant is needed
to be added to the system, please contact a local autho-
rized dealer.
•
Mixing engine coolant (antifreeze) types is not recom-
mended and can result in cooling system damage. If HOAT
and OAT coolant are mixed in an emergency, have a
authorized dealer drain, flush, and refill with OAT coolant
(conforming to MS.90032) as soon as possible.
Cooling System Pressure Cap
The cap must be fully tightened to prevent loss of engine
coolant (antifreeze), and to ensure that engine coolant
(antifreeze) will return to the radiator from the coolant
expansion bottle/recovery tank if so equipped.
The cap should be inspected and cleaned if there is any
accumulation of foreign material on the sealing surfaces.
WARNING!
• Do not open hot engine cooling system. Never add
engine coolant (antifreeze) when the engine is over-
heated. Do not loosen or remove the cap to cool an
overheated engine. Heat causes pressure to build up
in the cooling system. To prevent scalding or injury,
do not remove the pressure cap while the system is
hot or under pressure.
• Do not use a pressure cap other than the one speci-
fied for your vehicle. Personal injury or engine
damage may result.
346 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Disposal Of Used Coolant
Used ethylene glycol-based coolant (antifreeze) is a regu-
lated substance requiring proper disposal. Check with your
local authorities to determine the disposal rules for your
community. To prevent ingestion by animals or children,
do not store ethylene glycol-based coolant in open contain-
ers or allow it to remain in puddles on the ground. If
ingested by a child or pet, seek emergency assistance
immediately. Clean up any ground spills immediately.
Points To Remember
NOTE: When the vehicle is stopped after a few miles/
kilometers of operation, you may observe vapor coming
from the front of the engine compartment. This is normally
a result of moisture from rain, snow, or high humidity
accumulating on the radiator and being vaporized when
the thermostat opens, allowing hot engine coolant (anti-
freeze) to enter the radiator.
If an examination of your engine compartment shows no
evidence of radiator or hose leaks, the vehicle may be
safely driven. The vapor will soon dissipate.
• Do not overfill the coolant expansion bottle.
• Check the coolant freeze point in the radiator and in the
coolant expansion bottle. If engine coolant (antifreeze)
needs to be added, the contents of the coolant expansion
bottle must also be protected against freezing.
• If frequent engine coolant (antifreeze) additions are
required, the cooling system should be pressure tested
for leaks.
• Maintain engine coolant (antifreeze) concentration at a
minimum of 50% OAT coolant (conforming to
MS.90032) and distilled water for proper corrosion pro-
tection of your engine which contains aluminum com-
ponents.
• Make sure that the coolant expansion bottle overflow
hoses are not kinked or obstructed.
• Keep the front of the radiator clean. If your vehicle is
equipped with air conditioning, keep the front of the
condenser clean.
• Do not change the thermostat for Summer or Winter
operation. If replacement is ever necessary, install ONLY
the correct type thermostat. Other designs may result in
unsatisfactory engine coolant (antifreeze) performance,
poor gas mileage, and increased emissions.
8
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 347
Brake System
In order to assure brake system performance, all brake
system components should be inspected periodically. Refer
to the “Maintenance Plan” in this section for the proper
maintenance intervals.
WARNING!
Riding the brakes can lead to brake failure and possi-
bly a collision. Driving with your foot resting or riding
on the brake pedal can result in abnormally high brake
temperatures, excessive lining wear, and possible
brake damage. You would not have your full braking
capacity in an emergency.
Master Cylinder — Brake Fluid Level Check
The fluid level in the master cylinder should be checked
when performing underhood services, or immediately if
the “Brake System Warning Light” indicates system failure.
Clean the top of the master cylinder area before removing
the cap. Add fluid to bring the level up to the top of the
“FULL” mark on the side of the master cylinder reservoir.
Overfilling of fluid is not recommended because it may
cause leaking in the system.
Add enough fluid to bring the level up to the requirements
described on the brake fluid reservoir. With disc brakes,
fluid level can be expected to fall as the brake pads wear.
However, low fluid level may be caused by a leak and a
checkup may be needed.
Use only manufacturer’s recommended brake fluid. Refer
to “Fluids And Lubricants” in “Technical Specifications”
for further information.
WARNING!
• Use only manufacturer’s recommended brake fluid.
Refer to “Fluids And Lubricants” in “Technical
Specifications” for further information. Using the
wrong type of brake fluid can severely damage your
brake system and/or impair its performance. The
proper type of brake fluid for your vehicle is also
identified on the original factory installed hydraulic
master cylinder reservoir.
• To avoid contamination from foreign matter or mois-
ture, use only new brake fluid or fluid that has been
in a tightly closed container. Keep the master cylin-
der reservoir cap secured at all times. Brake fluid in
a open container absorbs moisture from the air
(Continued)
348 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
WARNING! (Continued)
resulting in a lower boiling point. This may cause it
to boil unexpectedly during hard or prolonged brak-
ing, resulting in sudden brake failure. This could
result in a collision.
• Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can result in
spilling brake fluid on hot engine parts, causing the
brake fluid to catch fire. Brake fluid can also damage
painted and vinyl surfaces, care should be taken to
avoid its contact with these surfaces.
• Do not allow petroleum based fluid to contaminate
the brake fluid. Brake seal components could be
damaged, causing partial or complete brake failure.
This could result in a collision.
Automatic Transmission
Selection Of Lubricant
It is important to use the proper transmission fluid to
ensure optimum transmission performance and life. Use
only the manufacturer’s specified transmission fluid. Refer
to “Fluids And Lubricants” in “Technical Specifications”
for fluid specifications. It is important to maintain the
transmission fluid at the correct level using the recom-
mended fluid. No chemical flushes should be used in any
transmission; only the approved lubricant should be used.
CAUTION!
Using a transmission fluid other than the manufactur-
er’s recommended fluid may cause deterioration in
transmission shift quality and/or torque converter
shudder, and will require more frequent fluid and
filter changes. Refer to “Fluids And Lubricants” in
“Technical Specifications” for fluid specifications.
Special Additives
The manufacturer strongly recommends against using any
special additives in the transmission. Automatic Transmis-
sion Fluid (ATF) is an engineered product and its perfor-
mance may be impaired by supplemental additives. There-
fore, do not add any fluid additives to the transmission.
The only exception to this policy is the use of special dyes
for diagnosing fluid leaks. Avoid using transmission seal-
ers as they may adversely affect seals.
8
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 349
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your transmission as
the chemicals can damage your transmission compo-
nents. Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle
Limited Warranty.
Fluid Level Check
The fluid level is preset at the factory and does not require
adjustment under normal operating conditions. Routine
fluid level checks are not required, therefore the transmis-
sion fill tube is capped and no dipstick is provided. An
authorized dealer can check your transmission fluid level
using a special service dipstick. If you notice fluid leakage
or transmission malfunction, visit an authorized dealer
immediately to have the transmission fluid level checked.
Operating the vehicle with an improper fluid level can
cause severe transmission damage.
CAUTION!
If a transmission fluid leak occurs, visit an authorized
dealer immediately. Severe transmission damage may
occur. An authorized dealer has the proper tools to
adjust the fluid level accurately.
Fluid And Filter Changes
Refer to the “Maintenance Plan” in this section for the
proper maintenance intervals.
In addition, change the fluid and filter if the fluid becomes
contaminated (with water, etc.), or if the transmission is
disassembled for any reason.
RAISING THE VEHICLE
In the case where it is necessary to raise the vehicle, go to
an authorized dealer or service station.
TIRES
Tire Safety Information
Tire safety information will cover aspects of the following
information: Tire Markings, Tire Identification Numbers,
Tire Terminology and Definitions, Tire Pressures, and Tire
Loading.
350 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Tire Markings
NOTE:
• P (Passenger) — Metric tire sizing is based on U.S.
design standards. P-Metric tires have the letter “P”
molded into the sidewall preceding the size designation.
Example: P215/65R15 95H.
• European — Metric tire sizing is based on European
design standards. Tires designed to this standard have
the tire size molded into the sidewall beginning with the
section width. The letter ⬙P⬙ is absent from this tire size
designation. Example: 215/65R15 96H.
• LT (Light Truck) — Metric tire sizing is based on U.S.
design standards. The size designation for LT-Metric
tires is the same as for P-Metric tires except for the letters
“LT” that are molded into the sidewall preceding the
size designation. Example: LT235/85R16.
• Temporary spare tires are designed for temporary emer-
gency use only. Temporary high pressure compact spare
tires have the letter “T” or “S” molded into the sidewall
preceding the size designation. Example: T145/80D18
103M.
• High flotation tire sizing is based on U.S. design stan-
dards and it begins with the tire diameter molded into
the sidewall. Example: 31x10.5 R15 LT.
Tire Markings
1 — U.S. DOT Safety
Standards Code (TIN)
4 — Maximum Load
2 — Size Designation 5 — Maximum Pressure
3 — Service Description 6 — Treadwear, Traction
and Temperature Grades
8
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 351
Tire Sizing Chart
EXAMPLE:
Example Size Designation: P215/65R15XL 95H, 215/65R15 96H, LT235/85R16C, T145/80D18 103M, 31x10.5 R15 LT
P = Passenger car tire size based on U.S. design standards, or
ⴖ....blank....ⴖ = Passenger car tire based on European design standards, or
LT = Light truck tire based on U.S. design standards, or
TorS= Temporary spare tire or
31 = Overall diameter in inches (in)
215, 235, 145 = Section width in millimeters (mm)
65, 85, 80 = Aspect ratio in percent (%)
–
Ratio of section height to section width of tire, or
10.5 = Section width in inches (in)
R = Construction code
–
⬙R⬙ means radial construction, or
–
⬙D⬙ means diagonal or bias construction
15, 16, 18 = Rim diameter in inches (in)
352 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
EXAMPLE:
Service Description:
95 = Load Index
–
A numerical code associated with the maximum load a tire can carry
H = Speed Symbol
–
A symbol indicating the range of speeds at which a tire can carry a load corresponding to its load index under cer-
tain operating conditions
–
The maximum speed corresponding to the speed symbol should only be achieved under specified operating condi-
tions (i.e., tire pressure, vehicle loading, road conditions, and posted speed limits)
Load Identification:
Absence of the following load identification symbols on the sidewall of the tire indicates a Standard Load (SL) tire:
• XL = Extra load (or reinforced) tire, or
• LL = Light load tire or
• C, D, E, F, G = Load range associated with the maximum load a tire can carry at a specified pressure
Maximum Load – Maximum load indicates the maximum load this tire is designed to carry
Maximum Pressure – Maximum pressure indicates the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for this tire
Tire Identification Number (TIN)
The TIN may be found on one or both sides of the tire;
however, the date code may only be on one side. Tires with
white sidewalls will have the full TIN, including the date
code, located on the white sidewall side of the tire. Look for
the TIN on the outboard side of black sidewall tires as
mounted on the vehicle. If the TIN is not found on the
outboard side, then you will find it on the inboard side of
the tire.
8
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 353
EXAMPLE:
DOT MA L9 ABCD 0301
DOT = Department of Transportation
–
This symbol certifies that the tire is in compliance with the U.S. Department of Transportation tire safety standards
and is approved for highway use
MA = Code representing the tire manufacturing location (two digits)
L9 = Code representing the tire size (two digits)
ABCD = Code used by the tire manufacturer (one to four digits)
03 = Number representing the week in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
–
03 means the 3rd week
01 = Number representing the year in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
–
01 means the year 2001
–
Prior to July 2000, tire manufacturers were only required to have one number to represent the year in which the
tire was manufactured. Example: 031 could represent the 3rd week of 1981 or 1991
Tire Terminology And Definitions
Term Definition
B-Pillar The vehicle B-Pillar is the structural member of the body located be-
hind the front door.
354 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Term Definition
Cold Tire Inflation Pressure Cold tire inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure after the
vehicle has not been driven for at least three hours, or driven less
than 1 mile (1.6 km) after sitting for a minimum of three hours. In-
flation pressure is measured in units of PSI (pounds per square inch)
or kPa (kilopascals).
Maximum Inflation Pressure The maximum inflation pressure is the maximum permissible cold
tire inflation pressure for this tire. The maximum inflation pressure is
molded into the sidewall.
Recommended Cold Tire Inflation Pressure Vehicle manufacturer’s recommended cold tire inflation pressure as
shown on the tire placard.
Tire Placard A label permanently attached to the vehicle describing the vehicle’s
loading capacity, the original equipment tire sizes and the recom-
mended cold tire inflation pressures.
8
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 355
Tire Loading And Tire Pressure
NOTE: The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on
the driver’s side B-Pillar or the rear edge of the driver’s
side door.
Check the inflation pressure of each tire, including the
spare tire (if equipped), at least monthly and inflate to the
recommended pressure for your vehicle.
Example Tire Placard Location (Door)
Example Tire Placard Location (B-Pillar)
356 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Tire And Loading Information Placard
This placard tells you important information about the:
1. Number of people that can be carried in the vehicle.
2. Total weight your vehicle can carry.
3. Tire size designed for your vehicle.
4. Cold tire inflation pressures for the front, rear, and spare
tires.
Loading
The vehicle maximum load on the tire must not exceed the
load carrying capacity of the tire on your vehicle. You will
not exceed the tire’s load carrying capacity if you adhere to
the loading conditions, tire size, and cold tire inflation
pressures specified on the Tire and Loading Information
placard in “Vehicle Loading” in the “Starting And Operat-
ing” section of this manual.
NOTE: Under a maximum loaded vehicle condition, gross
axle weight ratings (GAWRs) for the front and rear axles
must not be exceeded.
For further information on GAWRs, vehicle loading, and
trailer towing, refer to “Vehicle Loading” in the “Starting
And Operating” section of this manual.
To determine the maximum loading conditions of your
vehicle, locate the statement “The combined weight of
occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or
XXX lbs” on the Tire and Loading Information placard. The
combined weight of occupants, cargo/luggage and trailer
tongue weight (if applicable) should never exceed the
weight referenced here.
Tire And Loading Information Placard
8
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 357
Steps For Determining Correct Load Limit—
(1) Locate the statement “The combined weight of
occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or
XXX lbs.” on your vehicle’s placard.
(2) Determine the combined weight of the driver and
passengers that will be riding in your vehicle.
(3) Subtract the combined weight of the driver and
passengers from XXX kg or XXX lbs.
(4) The resulting figure equals the available amount of
cargo and luggage load capacity. For example, if “XXX”
amount equals 1400 lbs. and there will be five 150 lb
passengers in your vehicle, the amount of available
cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs. (1400-750
(5x150) = 650 lbs.)
(5) Determine the combined weight of luggage and
cargo being loaded on the vehicle. That weight may not
safely exceed the available cargo and luggage load
capacity calculated in Step 4.
(6) If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from
your trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. Consult
this manual to determine how this reduces the available
cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle.
Metric Example For Load Limit
For example, if “XXX” amount equals 635 kg and there will
be five 68 kg passengers in your vehicle, the amount of
available cargo and luggage load capacity is 295 kg (635-
340 (5x68) = 295 kg) as shown in step 4.
NOTE:
• If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your
trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. The following
table shows examples on how to calculate total load,
cargo/luggage, and towing capacities of your vehicle
with varying seating configurations and number and
size of occupants. This table is for illustration purposes
only and may not be accurate for the seating and load
carry capacity of your vehicle.
• For the following example, the combined weight of
occupants and cargo should never exceed 865 lbs
(392 kg).
358 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
WARNING!
Overloading of your tires is dangerous. Overloading
can cause tire failure, affect vehicle handling, and
increase your stopping distance. Use tires of the rec-
ommended load capacity for your vehicle. Never over-
load them.
Tires — General Information
Tire Pressure
Proper tire inflation pressure is essential to the safe and
satisfactory operation of your vehicle. Four primary areas
are affected by improper tire pressure:
• Safety and Vehicle Stability
8
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 359
• Economy
• Tread Wear
• Ride Comfort
Safety
WARNING!
• Improperly inflated tires are dangerous and can
cause collisions.
• Underinflation increases tire flexing and can result
in overheating and tire failure.
• Overinflation reduces a tire’s ability to cushion
shock. Objects on the road and chuckholes can cause
damage that result in tire failure.
• Overinflated or underinflated tires can affect vehicle
handling and can fail suddenly, resulting in loss of
vehicle control.
• Unequal tire pressures can cause steering problems.
You could lose control of your vehicle.
• Unequal tire pressures from one side of the vehicle
to the other can cause the vehicle to drift to the right
or left.
• Always drive with each tire inflated to the recom-
mended cold tire inflation pressure.
Both under-inflation and over-inflation affect the stability
of the vehicle and can produce a feeling of sluggish
response or over responsiveness in the steering.
NOTE:
• Unequal tire pressures from side to side may cause
erratic and unpredictable steering response.
• Unequal tire pressure from side to side may cause the
vehicle to drift left or right.
Fuel Economy
Underinflated tires will increase tire rolling resistance
resulting in higher fuel consumption.
Tread Wear
Improper cold tire inflation pressures can cause abnormal
wear patterns and reduced tread life, resulting in the need
for earlier tire replacement.
Ride Comfort And Vehicle Stability
Proper tire inflation contributes to a comfortable ride.
Over-inflation produces a jarring and uncomfortable ride.
360 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Tire Inflation Pressures
The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on the
driver’s side B-Pillar or rear edge of the driver’s side door.
At least once a month:
• Check and adjust tire pressure with a good quality
pocket-type pressure gauge. Do not make a visual
judgement when determining proper inflation. Tires
may look properly inflated even when they are under-
inflated.
• Inspect tires for signs of tire wear or visible damage.
CAUTION!
After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure, always
reinstall the valve stem cap. This will prevent moisture
and dirt from entering the valve stem, which could
damage the valve stem.
Inflation pressures specified on the placard are always
“cold tire inflation pressure”. Cold tire inflation pressure is
defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not been
driven for at least three hours, or driven less than 1 mile
(1.6 km) after sitting for a minimum of three hours. The
cold tire inflation pressure must not exceed the maximum
inflation pressure molded into the tire sidewall.
Check tire pressures more often if subject to a wide range
of outdoor temperatures, as tire pressures vary with tem-
perature changes.
Tire pressures change by approximately 1 psi (7 kPa) per
12°F (7°C) of air temperature change. Keep this in mind
when checking tire pressure inside a garage, especially in
the Winter.
Example: If garage temperature = 68°F (20°C) and the
outside temperature = 32°F (0°C) then the cold tire inflation
pressure should be increased by 3 psi (21 kPa), which
equals 1 psi (7 kPa) for every 12°F (7°C) for this outside
temperature condition.
Tire pressure may increase from 2 to 6 psi (13 to 40 kPa)
during operation. DO NOT reduce this normal pressure
build up or your tire pressure will be too low.
Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation
The manufacturer advocates driving at safe speeds and
within posted speed limits. Where speed limits or condi-
tions are such that the vehicle can be driven at high speeds,
maintaining correct tire inflation pressure is very impor-
tant. Increased tire pressure and reduced vehicle loading
8
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 361
may be required for high-speed vehicle operation. Refer to
an authorized tire dealer or original equipment vehicle
dealer for recommended safe operating speeds, loading
and cold tire inflation pressures.
WARNING!
High speed driving with your vehicle under maximum
load is dangerous. The added strain on your tires could
cause them to fail. You could have a serious collision.
Do not drive a vehicle loaded to the maximum capacity
at continuous speeds above 75 mph (120 km/h).
Radial Ply Tires
WARNING!
Combining radial ply tires with other types of tires on
your vehicle will cause your vehicle to handle poorly.
The instability could cause a collision. Always use
radial ply tires in sets of four. Never combine them
with other types of tires.
Tire Repair
If your tire becomes damaged, it may be repaired if it meets
the following criteria:
• The tire has not been driven on when flat.
• The damage is only on the tread section of your tire
(sidewall damage is not repairable).
• The puncture is no greater thana¼ofaninch (6 mm).
Consult an authorized tire dealer for tire repairs and
additional information.
Damaged Run Flat tires, or Run Flat tires that have
experienced a loss of pressure should be replaced immedi-
ately with another Run Flat tire of identical size and service
description (Load Index and Speed Symbol).
Run Flat Tires — If Equipped
Run Flat tires allow you the capability to drive 50 miles
(80 km) at 50 mph (80 km/h) after a rapid loss of inflation
pressure. This rapid loss of inflation is referred to as the
Run Flat mode. A Run Flat mode occurs when the tire
inflation pressure is of/or below 14 psi (96 kPa). Once a
Run Flat tire reaches the run flat mode it has limited
driving capabilities and needs to be replaced immediately.
A Run Flat tire is not repairable.
362 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
It is not recommended driving a vehicle loaded at full
capacity or to tow a trailer while a tire is in the run flat
mode.
See the tire pressure monitoring section for more informa-
tion.
Tire Spinning
When stuck in mud, sand, snow, or ice conditions, do not
spin your vehicle’s wheels above 30 mph (48 km/h) or for
longer than 30 seconds continuously without stopping.
Refer to “Freeing A Stuck Vehicle” in “In Case Of Emer-
gency” for further information.
WARNING!
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces generated
by excessive wheel speeds may cause tire damage or
failure. A tire could explode and injure someone. Do
not spin your vehicle’s wheels faster than 30 mph
(48 km/h) for more than 30 seconds continuously when
you are stuck, and do not let anyone near a spinning
wheel, no matter what the speed.
Tread Wear Indicators
Tread wear indicators are in the original equipment tires to
help you in determining when your tires should be re-
placed.
Tire Tread
1—WornTire
2—NewTire
8
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 363
These indicators are molded into the bottom of the tread
grooves. They will appear as bands when the tread depth
becomes a 1/16 of an inch (1.6 mm). When the tread is
worn to the tread wear indicators, the tire should be
replaced. Refer to “Replacement Tires” in this section for
further information.
Life Of Tire
The service life of a tire is dependent upon varying factors
including, but not limited to:
• Driving style.
• Tire pressure - Improper cold tire inflation pressures can
cause uneven wear patterns to develop across the tire
tread. These abnormal wear patterns will reduce tread
life, resulting in the need for earlier tire replacement.
• Distance driven.
• Performance tires, tires with a speed rating of V or
higher, and Summer tires typically have a reduced tread
life. Rotation of these tires per the vehicle scheduled
maintenance is highly recommended.
WARNING!
Tires and the spare tire should be replaced after six
years, regardless of the remaining tread. Failure to
follow this warning can result in sudden tire failure.
You could lose control and have a collision resulting in
serious injury or death.
NOTE: Wheel Valve Stem must be replaced as well when
installing new tires due to wear and tear in existing tires.
Keep dismounted tires in a cool, dry place with as little
exposure to light as possible. Protect tires from contact with
oil, grease, and gasoline.
Replacement Tires
The tires on your new vehicle provide a balance of many
characteristics. They should be inspected regularly for
wear and correct cold tire inflation pressures. The manu-
facturer strongly recommends that you use tires equivalent
to the originals in size, quality and performance when
replacement is needed. Refer to the paragraph on “Tread
Wear Indicators” in this section. Refer to the Tire and
Loading Information placard or the Vehicle Certification
364 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Label for the size designation of your tire. The Load Index
and Speed Symbol for your tire will be found on the
original equipment tire sidewall.
See the Tire Sizing Chart example found in the “Tire Safety
Information” section of this manual for more information
relating to the Load Index and Speed Symbol of a tire.
It is recommended to replace the two front tires or two rear
tires as a pair. Replacing just one tire can seriously affect
your vehicle’s handling. If you ever replace a wheel, make
sure that the wheel’s specifications match those of the
original wheels.
It is recommended you contact an authorized tire dealer or
original equipment dealer with any questions you may
have on tire specifications or capability. Failure to use
equivalent replacement tires may adversely affect the
safety, handling, and ride of your vehicle.
WARNING!
• Do not use a tire, wheel size, load rating, or speed
rating other than that specified for your vehicle.
Some combinations of unapproved tires and wheels
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
may change suspension dimensions and perfor-
mance characteristics, resulting in changes to steer-
ing, handling, and braking of your vehicle. This can
cause unpredictable handling and stress to steering
and suspension components. You could lose control
and have a collision resulting in serious injury or
death. Use only the tire and wheel sizes with load
ratings approved for your vehicle.
• Never use a tire with a smaller load index or capacity,
other than what was originally equipped on your
vehicle. Using a tire with a smaller load index could
result in tire overloading and failure. You could lose
control and have a collision.
• Failure to equip your vehicle with tires having ad-
equate speed capability can result in sudden tire
failure and loss of vehicle control.
CAUTION!
Replacing original tires with tires of a different size
may result in false speedometer and odometer read-
ings.
8
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 365
Tire Types
All Season Tires — If Equipped
All Season tires provide traction for all seasons (Spring,
Summer, Fall, and Winter). Traction levels may vary be-
tween different all season tires. All season tires can be
identified by the M+S, M&S, M/S or MS designation on the
tire sidewall. Use all season tires only in sets of four; failure
to do so may adversely affect the safety and handling of
your vehicle.
Summer Or Three Season Tires — If Equipped
Summer tires provide traction in both wet and dry condi-
tions, and are not intended to be driven in snow or on ice.
If your vehicle is equipped with Summer tires, be aware
these tires are not designed for Winter or cold driving
conditions. Install Winter tires on your vehicle when am-
bient temperatures are less than 40°F (5°C) or if roads are
covered with ice or snow. For more information, contact an
authorized dealer.
Summer tires do not contain the all season designation or
mountain/snowflake symbol on the tire sidewall. Use
Summer tires only in sets of four; failure to do so may
adversely affect the safety and handling of your vehicle.
WARNING!
Do not use Summer tires in snow/ice conditions. You
could lose vehicle control, resulting in severe injury or
death. Driving too fast for conditions also creates the
possibility of loss of vehicle control.
Snow Tires
Some areas of the country require the use of snow tires
during the Winter. Snow tires can be identified by a
“mountain/snowflake” symbol on the tire sidewall.
If you need snow tires, select tires
equivalent in size and type to the origi-
nal equipment tires. Use snow tires only
in sets of four; failure to do so may
adversely affect the safety and handling
of your vehicle.
Snow tires generally have lower speed ratings than what
was originally equipped with your vehicle and should not
be operated at sustained speeds over 75 mph (120 km/h).
For speeds above 75 mph (120 km/h) refer to original
equipment or an authorized tire dealer for recommended
safe operating speeds, loading and cold tire inflation
pressures.
366 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
While studded tires improve performance on ice, skid and
traction capability on wet or dry surfaces may be poorer
than that of non-studded tires. Some states prohibit stud-
ded tires; therefore, local laws should be checked before
using these tire types.
Spare Tires — If Equipped
NOTE: For vehicles equipped with Tire Service Kit instead
of a spare tire, please refer to “Tire Service Kit” in “In Case
Of Emergency” for further information.
CAUTION!
Because of the reduced ground clearance, do not take
your vehicle through an automatic car wash with a
compact or limited use temporary spare installed.
Damage to the vehicle may result.
Spare Tire Matching Original Equipped Tire And
Wheel — If Equipped
Your vehicle may be equipped with a spare tire and wheel
equivalent in look and function to the original equipment
tire and wheel found on the front or rear axle of your
vehicle. This spare tire may be used in the tire rotation for
your vehicle. If your vehicle has this option, refer to an
authorized tire dealer for the recommended tire rotation
pattern.
Compact Spare Tire — If Equipped
The compact spare is for temporary emergency use only.
You can identify if your vehicle is equipped with a compact
spare by looking at the spare tire description on the Tire
and Loading Information Placard located on the driver’s
side door opening or on the sidewall of the tire. Compact
spare tire descriptions begin with the letter “T” or “S”
preceding the size designation. Example: T145/80D18
103M.
T, S = Temporary Spare Tire
Since this tire has limited tread life, the original equipment
tire should be repaired (or replaced) and reinstalled on
your vehicle at the first opportunity.
Do not install a wheel cover or attempt to mount a
conventional tire on the compact spare wheel, since the
wheel is designed specifically for the compact spare tire.
Do not install more than one compact spare tire and wheel
on the vehicle at any given time.
8
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 367
WARNING!
Compact and collapsible spares are for temporary
emergency use only. With these spares, do not drive
more than 50 mph (80 km/h). Temporary use spares
have limited tread life. When the tread is worn to the
tread wear indicators, the temporary use spare tire
needs to be replaced. Be sure to follow the warnings,
which apply to your spare. Failure to do so could result
in spare tire failure and loss of vehicle control.
Collapsible Spare Tire — If Equipped
The collapsible spare is for temporary emergency use only.
You can identify if your vehicle is equipped with a collaps-
ible spare by looking at the spare tire description on the
Tire and Loading Information Placard located on the
driver’s side door opening or on the sidewall of the tire.
Collapsible spare tire description example: 165/80-17 101P.
Since this tire has limited tread life, the original equipment
tire should be repaired (or replaced) and reinstalled on
your vehicle at the first opportunity.
Inflate collapsible tire only after the wheel is properly
installed to the vehicle. Inflate the collapsible tire using the
electric air pump before lowering the vehicle.
Do not install a wheel cover or attempt to mount a
conventional tire on the collapsible spare wheel, since the
wheel is designed specifically for the collapsible spare tire.
WARNING!
Compact and Collapsible spares are for temporary
emergency use only. With these spares, do not drive
more than 50 mph (80 km/h). Temporary use spares
have limited tread life. When the tread is worn to the
tread wear indicators, the temporary use spare tire
needs to be replaced. Be sure to follow the warnings,
which apply to your spare. Failure to do so could result
in spare tire failure and loss of vehicle control.
Full Size Spare — If Equipped
The full size spare is for temporary emergency use only.
This tire may look like the originally equipped tire on the
front or rear axle of your vehicle, but it is not. This spare
tire may have limited tread life. When the tread is worn to
the tread wear indicators, the temporary use full size spare
tire needs to be replaced. Since it is not the same as your
original equipment tire, replace (or repair) the original
equipment tire and reinstall on the vehicle at the first
opportunity.
368 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Limited Use Spare — If Equipped
The limited use spare tire is for temporary emergency use
only. This tire is identified by a label located on the limited
use spare wheel. This label contains the driving limitations
for this spare. This tire may look like the original equipped
tire on the front or rear axle of your vehicle, but it is not.
Installation of this limited use spare tire affects vehicle
handling. Since it is not the same as your original equip-
ment tire, replace (or repair) the original equipment tire
and reinstall on the vehicle at the first opportunity.
WARNING!
Limited use spares are for emergency use only. Instal-
lation of this limited use spare tire affects vehicle
handling. With this tire, do not drive more than the
speed listed on the limited use spare wheel. Keep
inflated to the cold tire inflation pressures listed on
your Tire and Loading Information Placard located on
the driver’s side B-Pillar or the rear edge of the driver’s
side door. Replace (or repair) the original equipment
tire at the first opportunity and reinstall it on your
vehicle. Failure to do so could result in loss of vehicle
control.
Wheel And Wheel Trim Care
All wheels and wheel trim, especially aluminum and chrome
plated wheels, should be cleaned regularly using mild (neu-
tral Ph) soap and water to maintain their luster and to prevent
corrosion. Wash wheels with the same soap solution recom-
mended for the body of the vehicle and remember to always
wash when the surfaces are not hot to the touch.
Your wheels are susceptible to deterioration caused by salt,
sodium chloride, magnesium chloride, calcium chloride,
etc., and other road chemicals used to melt ice or control
dust on dirt roads. Use a soft cloth or sponge and mild soap
to wipe away promptly. Do not use harsh chemicals or a
stiff brush. They can damage the wheel’s protective coating
that helps keep them from corroding and tarnishing.
CAUTION!
Avoid products or automatic car washes that use acidic
solutions or strong alkaline additives or harsh brushes.
Many aftermarket wheel cleaners and automatic car
washes may damage the wheel’s protective finish.
Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle
Limited Warranty. Only car wash soap, Mopar Wheel
Cleaner or equivalent is recommended.
8
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 369
When cleaning extremely dirty wheels including excessive
brake dust, care must be taken in the selection of tire and
wheel cleaning chemicals and equipment to prevent dam-
age to the wheels. Mopar Wheel Treatment or Mopar
Chrome Cleaner or their equivalent is recommended or
select a non-abrasive, non-acidic cleaner for aluminum or
chrome wheels.
CAUTION!
Do not use scouring pads, steel wool, a bristle brush,
metal polishes or oven cleaner. These products may
damage the wheel’s protective finish. Such damage is
not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Only car wash soap, Mopar Wheel Cleaner or equiva-
lent is recommended.
NOTE: If you intend parking or storing your vehicle for an
extended period after cleaning the wheels with wheel
cleaner, drive your vehicle and apply the brakes to remove
the water droplets from the brake components. This activ-
ity will remove the red rust on the brake rotors and prevent
vehicle vibration when braking.
Dark Vapor Chrome, Black Satin Chrome, or Low Gloss
Clear Coat Wheels
CAUTION!
If your vehicle is equipped with these specialty
wheels, DO NOT USE wheel cleaners, abrasives, or
polishing compounds. They will permanently damage
this finish and such damage is not covered by the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty. HAND WASH ONLY US-
ING MILD SOAP AND WATER WITH A SOFT
CLOTH. Used on a regular basis; this is all that is
required to maintain this finish.
Tire Chains (Traction Devices)
Use of traction devices require sufficient tire-to-body clear-
ance. Follow these recommendations to guard against
damage:
• Traction device must be of proper size for the tire, as
recommended by the traction device manufacturer.
• Install on front tires only.
• Due to limited clearance, a 225/65R17 tire with a Peer-
less Super Z6 low profile traction device or equivalent is
recommended.
370 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
WARNING!
Using tires of different size and type (M+S, Snow)
between front and rear axles can cause unpredictable
handling. You could lose control and have a collision.
CAUTION!
To avoid damage to your vehicle or tires, observe the
following precautions:
• Because of restricted traction device clearance be-
tween tires and other suspension components, it is
important that only traction devices in good condi-
tion are used. Broken devices can cause serious
damage. Stop the vehicle immediately if noise occurs
that could indicate device breakage. Remove the
damaged parts of the device before further use.
• Install device as tightly as possible and then re-
tighten after driving about ½ mile (0.8 km).
• Do not exceed 30 mph (48 km/h).
• Drive cautiously and avoid severe turns and large
bumps, especially with a loaded vehicle.
• Do not drive for a prolonged period on dry pave-
ment.
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
• Observe the traction device manufacturer’s instruc-
tions on the method of installation, operating speed,
and conditions for use. Always use the suggested
operating speed of the device manufacturer’s if it is
less than 30 mph (48 km/h).
• Do not use traction devices on a compact spare tire.
Tire Rotation Recommendations
The tires on the front and rear of your vehicle operate at
different loads and perform different steering, driving, and
braking functions. For these reasons, they wear at unequal
rates.
These effects can be reduced by timely rotation of tires. The
benefits of rotation are especially worthwhile with aggres-
sive tread designs such as those on all season type tires.
Rotation will increase tread life, help to maintain mud,
snow and wet traction levels, and contribute to a smooth,
quiet ride.
Refer to the “Maintenance Plan” for the proper mainte-
nance intervals. The reasons for any rapid or unusual wear
should be corrected prior to rotation being performed.
8
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 371
The suggested rotation method is the “forward cross”
shown in the following diagram. This rotation pattern does
not apply to some directional tires that must not be
reversed.
DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM
TIRE QUALITY GRADES
The following tire grading categories were established
by the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration.
The specific grade rating assigned by the tire’s manu-
facturer in each category is shown on the sidewall of the
tires on your vehicle.
All passenger vehicle tires must conform to Federal
safety requirements in addition to these grades.
Treadwear
The Treadwear grade is a comparative rating, based on
the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled
conditions on a specified government test course. For
example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and one-half
times as well on the government course as a tire graded
100. The relative performance of tires depends upon the
actual conditions of their use, however, and may depart
significantly from the norm due to variations in driving
habits, service practices, and differences in road charac-
teristics and climate.
Traction Grades
The Traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A,
B, and C. These grades represent the tire’s ability to stop
on wet pavement, as measured under controlled condi-
tions on specified government test surfaces of asphalt
and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction
performance.
Tire Rotation
372 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
WARNING!
The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on
straight-ahead braking traction tests, and does not
include acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning, or
peak traction characteristics.
Temperature Grades
The Temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C,
representing the tire’s resistance to the generation of
heat and its ability to dissipate heat, when tested under
controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory
test wheel.
Sustained high temperature can cause the material of
the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and excessive
temperature can lead to sudden tire failure. The grade C
corresponds to a level of performance, which all pas-
senger vehicle tires must meet under the Federal Motor
Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A
represent higher levels of performance on the laboratory
test wheel, than the minimum required by law.
WARNING!
The temperature grade for this tire is established for
a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded.
Excessive speed, under-inflation, or excessive load-
ing, either separately or in combination, can cause
heat buildup and possible tire failure.
VEHICLE STORAGE
If you are leaving your vehicle dormant for more than 21
days, you may want to take steps to protect your battery.
You may do the following:
• Remove the 60 Amp cartridge in the Totally Integrated
Power Module (TIPM) labeled Ignition-Off Draw (IOD).
• Or, disconnect the negative cable from the battery.
• Anytime you store your vehicle, or keep it out of service
for two weeks or more, run the air conditioning system
at idle for about five minutes in the fresh air and high
blower setting. This will ensure adequate system lubri-
cation to minimize the possibility of compressor damage
when the system is started again.
8
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 373
BODYWORK
Protection From Atmospheric Agents
Vehicle body care requirements vary according to geo-
graphic locations and usage. Chemicals that make roads
passable in snow and ice and those that are sprayed on
trees and road surfaces during other seasons are highly
corrosive to the metal in your vehicle. Outside parking,
which exposes your vehicle to airborne contaminants, road
surfaces on which the vehicle is operated, extreme hot or
cold weather and other extreme conditions will have an
adverse effect on paint, metal trim, and underbody protec-
tion.
The following maintenance recommendations will enable
you to obtain maximum benefit from the corrosion resis-
tance built into your vehicle.
What Causes Corrosion?
Corrosion is the result of deterioration or removal of paint
and protective coatings from your vehicle.
The most common causes are:
• Road salt, dirt and moisture accumulation.
• Stone and gravel impact.
• Insects, tree sap and tar.
• Salt in the air near seacoast localities.
• Atmospheric fallout/industrial pollutants.
Body And Underbody Maintenance
Cleaning Headlights
Your vehicle is equipped with plastic headlights and fog
lights that are lighter and less susceptible to stone breakage
than glass headlights.
Plastic is not as scratch resistant as glass and therefore
different lens cleaning procedures must be followed.
To minimize the possibility of scratching the lenses and
reducing light output, avoid wiping with a dry cloth. To
remove road dirt, wash with a mild soap solution followed
by rinsing.
Do not use abrasive cleaning components, solvents, steel
wool or other aggressive material to clean the lenses.
Preserving The Bodywork
Washing
• Wash your vehicle regularly. Always wash your vehicle
in the shade using Mopar Car Wash, or a mild car wash
soap, and rinse the panels completely with clear water.
374 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
• If insects, tar, or other similar deposits have accumulated
on your vehicle, use Mopar Super Kleen Bug and Tar
Remover to remove.
• Use a high quality cleaner wax, such as Mopar Cleaner
Wax to remove road film, stains and to protect your
paint finish. Take care never to scratch the paint.
• Avoid using abrasive compounds and power buffing
that may diminish the gloss or thin out the paint finish.
CAUTION!
• Do not use abrasive or strong cleaning materials such
as steel wool or scouring powder that will scratch
metal and painted surfaces.
• Use of power washers exceeding 1,200 psi (8,274 kPa)
can result in damage or removal of paint and decals.
Special Care
• If you drive on salted or dusty roads or if you drive near
the ocean, hose off the undercarriage at least once a
month.
• It is important that the drain holes in the lower edges of
the doors, rocker panels, and trunk be kept clear and
open.
• If you detect any stone chips or scratches in the paint,
touch them up immediately. The cost of such repairs is
considered the responsibility of the owner.
• If your vehicle is damaged due to a collision or similar
cause that destroys the paint and protective coating,
have your vehicle repaired as soon as possible. The cost
of such repairs is considered the responsibility of the
owner.
• If you carry special cargo such as chemicals, fertilizers,
de-icer salt, etc., be sure that such materials are well
packaged and sealed.
• If a lot of driving is done on gravel roads, consider mud
or stone shields behind each wheel.
• Use Mopar Touch Up Paint on scratches as soon as
possible. An authorized dealer has touch up paint to
match the color of your vehicle.
8
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 375
INTERIORS
Seats And Fabric Parts
Use Mopar Total Clean to clean fabric upholstery and
carpeting.
WARNING!
Do not use volatile solvents for cleaning purposes.
Many are potentially flammable, and if used in closed
areas they may cause respiratory harm.
Seat Belt Maintenance
Do not bleach, dye or clean the belts with chemical solvents
or abrasive cleaners. This will weaken the fabric. Sun
damage can also weaken the fabric.
If the belts need cleaning, use a mild soap solution or
lukewarm water. Do not remove the belts from the vehicle
to wash them. Dry with a soft cloth.
Replace the belts if they appear frayed or worn or if the
buckles do not work properly.
WARNING!
A frayed or torn belt could rip apart in a collision and
leave you with no protection. Inspect the belt system
periodically, checking for cuts, frays, or loose parts.
Damaged parts must be replaced immediately. Do not
disassemble or modify the system. Seat belt assemblies
must be replaced after a collision if they have been
damaged (i.e., bent retractor, torn webbing, etc.).
Plastic And Coated Parts
Use Mopar Total Clean to clean vinyl upholstery.
CAUTION!
• Direct contact of air fresheners, insect repellents,
suntan lotions, or hand sanitizers to the plastic,
painted, or decorated surfaces of the interior may
cause permanent damage. Wipe away immediately.
• Damage caused by these type of products may not be
covered by your New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
376 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Cleaning Plastic Instrument Cluster Lenses
The lenses in front of the instruments in this vehicle are
molded in clear plastic. When cleaning the lenses, care
must be taken to avoid scratching the plastic.
1. Clean with a wet soft cloth. A mild soap solution may be
used, but do not use high alcohol content or abrasive
cleaners. If soap is used, wipe clean with a clean damp
cloth.
2. Dry with a soft cloth.
Glass Surfaces
All glass surfaces should be cleaned on a regular basis with
Mopar Glass Cleaner, or any commercial household-type
glass cleaner. Never use an abrasive type cleaner. Use
caution when cleaning the inside rear window equipped
with electric defrosters or windows equipped with radio
antennas. Do not use scrapers or other sharp instruments
that may scratch the elements.
When cleaning the rear view mirror, spray cleaner on the
towel or cloth that you are using. Do not spray cleaner
directly on the mirror.
Cleaning The Instrument Panel Cupholders
Removal
Pull the flexible liner from the cupholder drawer starting at
one edge to ease removal.
Cleaning
The liner is top shelf dishwasher safe, or you may follow
the cleaning procedure below.
Soak the liner in a mixture of medium hot tap water and
one teaspoon of mild liquid dish soap. Let soak for
approximately 30 minutes. After 30 minutes, pull the liner
from the water and dip it back into the water about six
times. This will loosen any remaining debris. Rinse the
liner thoroughly under warm running water. Shake the
excess water from the liner and dry the outer surfaces with
a clean soft cloth.
Installation
Place the liner into the cupholder drawer and push the
liner into place so that the retention tabs seat into the
corresponding openings in the drawer.
8
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 377
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
CONTENTS
䡵 IDENTIFICATION DATA...................380
▫ Vehicle Identification Number .............380
䡵 BRAKE SYSTEM ........................380
䡵 WHEEL AND TIRE TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS . .381
▫ Torque Specifications ....................381
䡵 FLEXIBLE FUEL (3.6L ENGINE ONLY) ........382
▫ E-85 General Information .................382
▫ Ethanol Fuel (E-85)......................382
▫ Fuel Requirements .....................383
▫ Selection Of Engine Oil For Flexible Fuel Vehicles
(E-85) And Gasoline Vehicles ..............383
▫ Starting .............................384
▫ Cruising Range ........................384
▫ Replacement Parts ......................384
▫ Maintenance ..........................384
䡵 FUEL REQUIREMENTS ...................384
▫ 3.6L Engine ...........................384
▫ Reformulated Gasoline ..................385
▫ Materials Added To Fuel .................385
▫ Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends ...............385
▫ Do Not Use E-85 In Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles . . . .386
▫ CNG And LP Fuel System Modifications ......386
▫ MMT In Gasoline .......................386
▫ Fuel System Cautions ....................387
▫ Carbon Monoxide Warnings ...............387
䡵 FLUID CAPACITIES ......................388
䡵 FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS ................389
▫ Engine ..............................389
▫ Chassis .............................390
9
IDENTIFICATION DATA
Vehicle Identification Number
The Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) is found on the
left front corner of the instrument panel, visible through
the windshield. This number also appears stamped on the
right sliding door sill under the sill moulding and printed
on the Automobile Information Disclosure Label affixed to
a window on your vehicle, the vehicle registration and title.
NOTE: It is illegal to remove or alter the VIN.
BRAKE SYSTEM
Your vehicle is equipped with dual hydraulic brake sys-
tems. If either of the two hydraulic systems loses normal
capability, the remaining system will still function. How-
ever, there will be some loss of overall braking effective-
ness. You may notice increased pedal travel during appli-
cation, greater pedal force required to slow or stop, and
potential activation of the Brake Warning Light.
Vehicle Identification Number
Stamped VIN Location
380 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
In the event power assist is lost for any reason (i.e.,
repeated brake applications with the engine off) the brakes
will still function. However, the effort required to brake the
vehicle will be much greater than that required with the
power system operating.
WHEEL AND TIRE TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS
Proper lug nut/bolt torque is very important to ensure that
the wheel is properly mounted to the vehicle. Any time a
wheel has been removed and reinstalled on the vehicle, the
lug nuts/bolts should be torqued using a properly cali-
brated torque wrench using a high quality six sided (hex)
deep wall socket.
Torque Specifications
Lug Nut/Bolt
Torque
**Lug Nut/Bolt
Size
Lug Nut/Bolt
Socket Size
100 Ft-Lbs (135
N·m)
M12 x 1.5 19 mm
**Use only your authorized dealer recommended lug nuts/
bolts and clean or remove any dirt or oil before tightening.
Inspect the wheel mounting surface prior to mounting the
tire and remove any corrosion or loose particles.
Tighten the lug nuts/bolts in a star pattern until each
nut/bolt has been tightened twice. Ensure that the socket is
fully engaged on the lug nut/bolt (do not insert it half-
way).
Wheel Mounting Surface
9
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 381
After 25 miles (40 km), check the lug nut/bolt torque to be
sure that all the lug nuts/bolts are properly seated against
the wheel.
WARNING!
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack, do
not tighten the lug nuts/bolts fully until the vehicle has
been lowered. Failure to follow this warning may
result in personal injury.
FLEXIBLE FUEL (3.6L ENGINE ONLY)
E-85 General Information
The information in this section is unique for Flexible Fuel
vehicles only. These vehicles can be identified by a unique
fuel filler door label that states Ethanol (E-85) or Unleaded
Gasoline Only and/or a yellow fuel cap. Please refer to the
other sections of this manual for information on features
that are common between Flexible Fuel and Non-Flexible
Fuel powered vehicles.
CAUTION!
Only vehicles with the E-85 fuel filler door label or a
yellow gas cap can operate on E-85.
Ethanol Fuel (E-85)
E-85 is a mixture of approximately 85% ethanol and 15%
unleaded gasoline.
WARNING!
Ethanol vapors are extremely flammable and could
cause serious personal injury. Never have any smoking
(Continued)
Torque Patterns
382 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
WARNING! (Continued)
materials lit or products that can cause spark in or near
the vehicle when removing the fuel filler tube cap (gas
cap) or filling the tank. Do not use E-85 as a cleaning
agent and never use it near an open flame.
Fuel Requirements
If your vehicle is E-85 compatible, it will operate on
unleaded gasoline with any octane rating greater than 87
(R+M)/2, or solely E-85 fuel, or any mixture of these fuels.
For best results, avoid fueling patterns alternating be-
tween E-85 and unleaded gasoline.
When switching fuel types:
• Add 5 gallons (19 liters) or more when refueling.
• Drive the vehicle immediately after refueling for at least
5 miles (8 km).
Observing these precautions will avoid possible hard start-
ing and/or driveability problems during warm up.
NOTE:
• Use seasonally adjusted E-85 fuel (ASTM D5798). With
non-seasonally adjusted E-85 fuel, hard starting and
rough idle following start up may be experienced even if
the above recommendations are followed, especially
when the ambient temperature is below 32°F (0°C).
• Some additives used in regular gasoline are not fully
compatible with E-85 and may form deposits in your
engine. To eliminate driveability issues that may be
caused by these deposits, a supplemental gasoline addi-
tive, such as Mopar Injector Cleanup or Techron may be
used.
Selection Of Engine Oil For Flexible Fuel Vehicles
(E-85) And Gasoline Vehicles
FFV vehicles operated on E-85 require specially formulated
engine oils. These special requirements are included in
Mopar engine oils, and in equivalent oils meeting FCA US
Material Standard MS-6395. It is recommended that engine
oils that are API Certified and meet the requirements of
Material Standard MS-6395 be used. MS-6395 contains
additional requirements, developed during extensive fleet
testing, to provide additional protection to FCA US LLC
engines.
9
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 383
Starting
The characteristics of E-85 fuel make it unsuitable for use
when ambient temperatures fall below 0°F (-18°C). In the
range of 0°F (-18°C) to 32°F (0°C), an increase in the time it
takes for your engine to start may be experienced, and a
deterioration in driveability (sags and/or hesitations) until
the engine is fully warmed up. These issues may be
improved with the use of seasonally adjusted E-85 fuel.
NOTE: Use of the engine block heater (if equipped) may
improve engine start time when using E-85 fuel when the
ambient temperature is less than 32°F (0°C).
Cruising Range
Because E-85 fuel contains less energy per gallon/liter than
gasoline, an increase in fuel consumption will be experi-
enced. The miles per gallon (mpg)/kilometers per liter and
the driving range will decrease by approximately 30%,
compared to gasoline operation.
Replacement Parts
All fuel and engine components in your Flexible Fuel
Vehicle (FFV) are designed to be compatible with ethanol.
Ethanol compatible service components are required.
CAUTION!
Replacing fuel system components with non-ethanol
compatible components can damage your vehicle.
Maintenance
CAUTION!
Do not use ethanol mixture greater than 85% in your
vehicle. It will cause difficulty in cold starting and may
affect drivability.
FUEL REQUIREMENTS
3.6L Engine
This engine is designed to meet all emis-
sions regulations and provide excellent
fuel economy and performance when
using high-quality unleaded “Regular”
gasoline having an octane rating of 87 as
specified by the (R+M)/2 method. The
use of higher octane “Premium” gaso-
line will not provide any benefit over “Regular” gasoline in
these engines.
384 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
While operating on gasoline with an octane number of 87,
hearing a light knocking sound from the engine is not a
cause for concern. However, if the engine is heard making
a heavy knocking sound, see your dealer immediately. Use
of gasoline with an octane number lower than 87 can cause
engine failure and may void or not be covered by the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Poor quality gasoline can cause problems such as hard
starting, stalling, and hesitations. If you experience these
symptoms, try another brand of gasoline before consider-
ing service for the vehicle.
Reformulated Gasoline
Many areas of the country require the use of cleaner
burning gasoline referred to as “Reformulated Gasoline”.
Reformulated gasoline contains oxygenates and are specifi-
cally blended to reduce vehicle emissions and improve air
quality.
The use of reformulated gasoline is recommended. Prop-
erly blended reformulated gasoline will provide improved
performance and durability of engine and fuel system
components.
Materials Added To Fuel
Besides using unleaded gasoline with the proper octane
rating, gasolines that contain detergents, corrosion and
stability additives are recommended. Using gasolines that
have these additives will help improve fuel economy,
reduce emissions, and maintain vehicle performance.
Designated TOP TIER Detergent Gaso-
line contains a higher level of detergents
to further aide in minimizing engine
and fuel system deposits. When avail-
able, the usage of TOP TIER Detergent
gasoline is recommended. Visit
www.toptiergas.com for a list of TOP
TIER Detergent Gasoline Retailers.
Indiscriminate use of fuel system cleaning agents should be
avoided. Many of these materials intended for gum and
varnish removal may contain active solvents or similar
ingredients. These can harm fuel system gasket and dia-
phragm materials.
Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends
Some fuel suppliers blend unleaded gasoline with oxygen-
ates such as ethanol.
9
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 385
CAUTION!
DO NOT use E-85, gasoline containing methanol, or
gasoline containing more than 15% ethanol (E-15). Use
of these blends may result in starting and drivability
problems, damage critical fuel system components,
cause emissions to exceed the applicable standard,
and/or cause the “Malfunction Indicator Light” to
illuminate. Please observe pump labels as they should
clearly communicate if a fuel contains greater than 15%
ethanol (E-15).
Problems that result from using gasoline containing more
than 15% ethanol (E-15) or gasoline containing methanol
are not the responsibility of the manufacturer and may
void or not be covered under New Vehicle Limited War-
ranty.
Do Not Use E-85 In Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles
Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles (FFV) are compatible with gasoline
containing up to 15% ethanol (E-15). Use of gasoline with
higher ethanol content may void the New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.
If a Non-FFV vehicle is inadvertently fueled with E-85 fuel,
the engine will have some or all of these symptoms:
• Operate in a lean mode.
• OBD II “Malfunction Indicator Light” on.
• Poor engine performance.
• Poor cold start and cold drivability.
• Increased risk for fuel system component corrosion.
CNG And LP Fuel System Modifications
Modifications that allow the engine to run on Compressed
Natural Gas (CNG) or Liquid Propane (LP) may result in
damage to the engine, emissions, and fuel system compo-
nents. Problems that result from running CNG or LP are
not the responsibility of the manufacturer and may void or
not be covered under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
MMT In Gasoline
Methylcyclopentadienyl Manganese Tricarbonyl (MMT) is
a manganese-containing metallic additive that is blended
into some gasoline to increase octane. Gasoline blended
with MMT provides no performance advantage beyond
gasoline of the same octane number without MMT. Gaso-
line blended with MMT reduces spark plug life and
reduces emissions system performance in some vehicles.
386 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
The manufacturer recommends that gasoline without
MMT be used in your vehicle. The MMT content of
gasoline may not be indicated on the gasoline pump;
therefore, you should ask your gasoline retailer whether
the gasoline contains MMT. MMT is prohibited in Federal
and California reformulated gasoline.
Fuel System Cautions
CAUTION!
Follow these guidelines to maintain your vehicle’s
performance:
• The use of leaded gasoline is prohibited by Federal
law. Using leaded gasoline can impair engine perfor-
mance and damage the emissions control system.
• An out-of-tune engine or certain fuel or ignition
malfunctions can cause the catalytic converter to
overheat. If you notice a pungent burning odor or
some light smoke, your engine may be out of tune or
malfunctioning and may require immediate service.
Contact an authorized dealer for service assistance.
• The use of fuel additives, which are now being sold
as octane enhancers, is not recommended. Most of
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
these products contain high concentrations of metha-
nol. Fuel system damage or vehicle performance
problems resulting from the use of such fuels or
additives is not the responsibility of the manufac-
turer and may void or not be covered under the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty.
NOTE: Intentional tampering with the emissions control
system can result in civil penalties being assessed against
you.
Carbon Monoxide Warnings
WARNING!
Carbon monoxide (CO) in exhaust gases is deadly.
Follow the precautions below to prevent carbon mon-
oxide poisoning:
• Do not inhale exhaust gases. They contain carbon
monoxide, a colorless and odorless gas, which can
kill. Never run the engine in a closed area, such as a
garage, and never sit in a parked vehicle with the
engine running for an extended period. If the vehicle
(Continued)
9
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 387
WARNING! (Continued)
is stopped in an open area with the engine running
for more than a short period, adjust the ventilation
system to force fresh, outside air into the vehicle.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• Guard against carbon monoxide with proper main-
tenance. Have the exhaust system inspected every
time the vehicle is raised. Have any abnormal condi-
tions repaired promptly. Until repaired, drive with
all side windows fully open.
FLUID CAPACITIES
U.S. Metric
Fuel (Approximate) 20 Gallons 76 Liters
Engine Oil with Filter
3.6L Engine (SAE 5W-20, API Certi-
fied).
6 Quarts 5.6 Liters
Cooling System *
3.6L Engine (Mopar Antifreeze/
Engine Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile
Formula or equivalent) meeting the
requirements of FCA Material Stan-
dard MS.90032.
13.4 Quarts 12.6 Liters
* Includes heater and coolant recovery bottle filled to MAX level. Add 2.9 Quarts (2.8 Liters) if equipped with a rear
heater.
388 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS
Engine
Component Fluid, Lubricant, Or Genuine Part
Engine Coolant We recommend you use Mopar Antifreeze/Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile Formula OAT
(Organic Additive Technology) meeting the requirements of FCA Material Standard
MS.90032.
Engine Oil We recommend you use API Certified SAE 5W-20 Engine Oil, meeting the requirements
of FCA Material Standard MS-6395 such as Mopar, Pennzoil, and Pennzoil Gold
Semi-Synthetic. Refer to your engine oil filler cap for correct SAE grade.
Engine Oil Filter We recommend you use Mopar Engine Oil Filters.
Spark Plugs We recommend you use Mopar Spark Plugs.
Fuel Selection – 3.6L Engine 87 Octane, 0-15% Ethanol.
Fuel Selection – 3.6L Flex
Fuel (E-85) Engine
87 Octane, Up to 85% Ethanol.
CAUTION!
• Mixing of engine coolant (antifreeze) other than
specified Organic Additive Technology (OAT) en-
gine coolant (antifreeze), may result in engine dam-
age and may decrease corrosion protection. Organic
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant is differ-
ent and should not be mixed with Hybrid Organic
Additive Technology (HOAT) engine coolant (anti-
freeze) or any “globally compatible” coolant (anti-
freeze). If a non-OAT engine coolant (antifreeze) is
(Continued)
9
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 389
CAUTION! (Continued)
introduced into the cooling system in an emergency,
the cooling system will need to be drained, flushed,
and refilled with fresh OAT coolant (conforming to
MS.90032), by an authorized dealer as soon as pos-
sible.
• Do not use water alone or alcohol-based engine
coolant (antifreeze) products. Do not use additional
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
rust inhibitors or antirust products, as they may not
be compatible with the radiator engine coolant and
may plug the radiator.
• This vehicle has not been designed for use with
propylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze).
Use of propylene glycol-based engine coolant (anti-
freeze) is not recommended.
Chassis
Component Fluid, Lubricant, Or Genuine Part
Automatic Transmission Use only ATF+4 Automatic Transmission Fluid meeting the
requirements of FCA Material Standard MS-9602. Failure to
use ATF+4 fluid may affect the function or performance of
your transmission. We recommend Mopar ATF+4 Fluid.
Brake Master Cylinder We recommend you use Mopar DOT 3 meeting the require-
ments of FCA Material Standard MS.90039.
Power Steering Reservoir We recommend you use Mopar Power Steering Fluid +4,
Mopar ATF+4 Automatic Transmission Fluid meeting the
requirements of FCA Material Standard MS-9602.
390 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
MULTIMEDIA
CONTENTS
䡵 CYBERSECURITY .......................394
䡵 RADIO 130 ............................395
▫ Operating Instructions — Radio Mode ........395
▫ Operation Instructions — CD Mode For CD And
MP3 Audio Play........................398
▫ Notes On Playing MP3 Files ...............399
▫ Operation Instructions — Auxiliary Mode .....401
䡵 RADIO 130 WITH SATELLITE RADIO ........402
▫ SiriusXM Satellite Radio .................402
▫ Operating Instructions — Radio Mode ........402
▫ Operation Instructions — CD Mode For CD And
MP3 Audio Play........................407
▫ Notes On Playing MP3 Files ...............408
▫ LIST Button — CD Mode For MP3 Play .......410
▫ INFO Button — CD Mode For MP3 Play ......411
▫ Uconnect (Satellite Radio) — If Equipped .....411
▫ Operating Instructions — Uconnect (Satellite)
Mode ...............................413
▫ Operating Instructions (Uconnect Phone) — If
Equipped ............................414
䡵 RADIO 430/430N CD/DVD/HDD/NAV — IF
EQUIPPED ............................414
▫ Operating Instructions (Voice Command System) —
If Equipped ...........................415
▫ Operating Instructions (Uconnect Phone) — If
Equipped ............................415
▫ Accessibility — If Equipped ...............415
䡵 STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROLS — IF
EQUIPPED ............................415
▫ Radio Operation........................416
▫ CD Player ............................416
10
䡵 IPOD/USB/MP3 CONTROL — IF EQUIPPED . . .416
▫ Connecting The iPod Or External USB Device. . .417
▫ Using This Feature ......................418
▫ Controlling The iPod Or External USB Device Using
Radio Buttons .........................418
▫ Play Mode............................418
▫ List Or Browse Mode ....................419
▫ Bluetooth Streaming Audio (BTSA) ..........421
䡵 UCONNECT MULTIMEDIA — VIDEO
ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEM (VES) — IF
EQUIPPED ............................422
▫ Getting Started ........................422
▫ Play Video Games ......................422
▫ Play A DVD Using The Touchscreen Radio .....424
▫ Play A DVD Using The VES Player — If
Equipped ............................425
▫ VES Remote Control — If Equipped .........427
▫ Remote Control Storage ..................429
▫ Locking The Remote Control ...............430
▫ Replacing The Remote Control Batteries .......430
▫ Headphones Operation ...................430
▫ Controls .............................431
▫ Replacing The Headphone Batteries ..........431
▫ Accessibility — If Equipped ...............431
▫ Stereo Headphone Lifetime Limited Warranty . . .432
▫ System Information .....................433
䡵 UCONNECT PHONE — IF EQUIPPED ........443
▫ Operation ............................444
▫ Help Command ........................445
▫ Cancel Command.......................445
▫ Pair (Link) Uconnect Phone To A Mobile Phone .445
▫ Dial
By Saying A Number.................446
▫ Call By Saying A Name ..................446
▫ Phonebook Download – Automatic Phonebook
Transfer From Mobile Phone ...............447
392 MULTIMEDIA
▫ Add Names To Your Uconnect Phonebook .....448
▫ Edit Uconnect Phonebook Entries ...........448
▫ Delete Uconnect Phonebook Entry ...........449
▫ Delete/Erase “All” Uconnect Phonebook Entries .449
▫ List All Names In The Uconnect Phonebook . . . .450
▫ Phone Call Features .....................450
▫ Uconnect Phone Features .................452
▫ Advanced Phone Connectivity .............456
▫ Things You Should Know About Your Uconnect
Phone ...............................457
▫ General Information ....................466
䡵 RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE PHONES . . .466
▫ Regulatory And Safety Information ..........467
䡵 VOICE COMMAND — IF EQUIPPED .........468
▫ Voice Command System Operation ..........468
▫ Commands ...........................469
▫ Voice Training .........................472
䡵 CD/DVD DISC MAINTENANCE ............473
10
MULTIMEDIA 393
CYBERSECURITY
Your vehicle may be a connected vehicle and may be
equipped with both wired and wireless networks. These
networks allow your vehicle to send and receive informa-
tion. This information allows systems and features in your
vehicle to function properly.
Your vehicle may be equipped with certain security fea-
tures to reduce the risk of unauthorized and unlawful
access to vehicle systems and wireless communications.
Vehicle software technology continues to evolve over time
and FCA US LLC, working with its suppliers, evaluates
and takes appropriate steps as needed. Similar to a com-
puter or other devices, your vehicle may require software
updates to improve the usability and performance of your
systems or to reduce the potential risk of unauthorized and
unlawful access to your vehicle systems.
The risk of unauthorized and unlawful access to your
vehicle systems may still exist, even if the most recent
version of vehicle software (such as Uconnect software) is
installed.
WARNING!
• It is not possible to know or to predict all of the
possible outcomes if your vehicle’s systems are
breached. It may be possible that vehicle systems,
including safety related systems, could be impaired
or a loss of vehicle control could occur that may
result in an accident involving serious injury or
death.
• ONLY insert media (e.g., USB, SD card, or CD) into
your vehicle if it came from a trusted source. Media
of unknown origin could possibly contain malicious
software, and if installed in your vehicle, it may
increase the possibility for vehicle systems to be
breached.
• As always, if you experience unusual vehicle behav-
ior, take your vehicle to your nearest authorized
dealer immediately.
394 MULTIMEDIA
NOTE:
• FCA US LLC or your dealer may contact you directly
regarding software updates.
• To help further improve vehicle security and minimize
the potential risk of a security breach, vehicle owners
should:
• Routinely check www.driveuconnect.com/support/
software-update.html (U.S. Residents) or www.driveu-
connect.ca (Canadian Residents) to learn about avail-
able Uconnect software updates.
• Only connect and use trusted media devices (e.g.
personal mobile phones, USBs, CDs).
Privacy of any wireless and wired communications cannot
be assured. Third parties may unlawfully intercept infor-
mation and private communications without your consent.
For further information, refer to “Onboard Diagnostic
System (OBD II) Cybersecurity” in “Getting To Know Your
Instrument Panel”.
RADIO 130
Operating Instructions — Radio Mode
NOTE: The ignition switch must be in the ON/RUN or
ACC position to operate the radio.
Power Switch/Volume Control (Rotary)
Push the ON/VOLUME control knob to turn on the radio.
Push the ON/VOLUME control knob a second time to turn
off the radio.
Radio 130
10
MULTIMEDIA 395
Electronic Volume Control
The electronic volume control turns continuously (360
degrees) in either direction, without stopping. Turning the
ON/VOLUME control knob to the right increases the
volume, and to the left decreases it.
When the audio system is turned on, the sound will be set
at the same volume level as last played.
SEEK Buttons
Push and release the SEEK buttons to search for the next
listenable station in AM/FM mode. Push the right switch
to seek up and the left switch to seek down. The radio will
remain tuned to the new station until you make another
selection. Holding either button will bypass stations with-
out stopping, until you release it.
TIME Button
Push the TIME button to alternate display of the time and
radio frequency.
Clock Setting Procedure
1. Push and hold the TIME button until the hours blink.
2. Adjust the hours by turning the right side TUNE/
SCROLL control knob.
3. After adjusting the hours, push the right side TUNE/
SCROLL control knob to set the minutes. The minutes
will begin to blink.
4. Adjust the minutes using the right side TUNE/SCROLL
control knob. Push the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to
save time change.
5. To exit, push any button/knob, or wait five seconds.
RW/FF
Pushing the RW (Rewind) or FF (Fast Forward) buttons
causes the tuner to search for the next frequency in the
direction of the arrows. This feature operates in either AM
or FM frequencies.
TUNE Control
Turn the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob clockwise to
increase or counterclockwise to decrease the frequency.
Setting The Tone, Balance And Fade
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob and BASS
will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to the
right or left to increase or decrease the bass tones.
396 MULTIMEDIA
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a second
time and MID will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL
control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the
mid-range tones.
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a third time
and TREBLE will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control
knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the treble
tones.
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a fourth time
and BALANCE will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL
control knob to the right or left to adjust the sound level
from the right or left side speakers.
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a fifth time
and FADE will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control
knob to the left or right to adjust the sound level between
the front and rear speakers.
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob again to exit
setting tone, balance, and fade.
AM/FM Button
Push the buttons to select either AM or FM mode.
SET/RND Button — To Set The Pushbutton Memory
When you are receiving a station that you wish to commit
to pushbutton memory, push the SET/RND button. The
symbol SET 1 will now show in the display window. Select
the button (1 to 6) you wish to lock onto this station and
push and release that button. If a button is not selected
within five seconds after pushing the SET/RND button,
the station will continue to play but will not be stored into
pushbutton memory.
You may add a second station to each pushbutton by
repeating the above procedure with this exception: Push
the SET/RND button twice and SET 2 will show in the
display window. Each button can be set for SET 1 and SET
2 in both AM and FM. This allows a total of 12 AM and 12
FM stations to be stored into pushbutton memory. The
stations stored in SET 2 memory can be selected by
pushing the pushbutton twice.
Every time a preset button is used, a corresponding button
number will display.
Buttons1-6
These buttons tune the radio to the stations that you
commit to pushbutton memory (12 AM and 12 FM sta-
tions).
10
MULTIMEDIA 397
DISC Button
Pushing the DISC button will allow you to switch from
AM/FM modes to Disc modes.
Operation Instructions — CD Mode For CD And
MP3 Audio Play
NOTE:
• The ignition switch must be in the ON/RUN or ACC
position to operate the radio.
• This radio is capable of playing compact discs (CD),
recordable compact discs (CD-R), rewritable compact
discs (CD-RW), compact discs with MP3 tracks and
multisession compact discs with CD and MP3 tracks.
Inserting Compact Disc(s)
Gently insert one CD into the CD player with the CD label
facing up. The CD will automatically be pulled into the CD
player and the CD icon will illuminate on the radio display.
If a CD does not go into the slot more than 1.0 inch (2.5 cm),
a disc may already be loaded and must be ejected before a
new disc can be loaded.
If you insert a disc with the ignition ON/RUN and the
radio ON, the unit will switch from radio to CD mode and
begin to play when you insert the disc. The display will
show the track number, and index time in minutes and
seconds. Play will begin at the start of track 1.
CAUTION!
• This CD player will accept 4–3/4 inch (12 cm) discs
only. The use of other sized discs may damage the
CD player mechanism.
• Do not use adhesive labels. These labels can peel
away and jam the player mechanism.
• The Radio 130 is a single CD player. Do not attempt
to insert a second CD if one is already loaded.
• Dual-media disc types (one side is a DVD, the other
side is a CD) should not be used, and they can cause
damage to the player.
EJECT Button — Ejecting A CD
Push the EJECT button to eject the CD.
If you have ejected a disc and have not removed it within
ten seconds, it will be reloaded. If the CD is not removed,
the radio will reinsert the CD but will not play it.
A disc can be ejected with the radio and ignition OFF.
398 MULTIMEDIA
NOTE: Ejecting with the ignition OFF is not allowed on
convertible or soft-top models (if equipped.)
SEEK Button
Push the right SEEK button for the next selection on the
CD. Push the left SEEK button to return to the beginning of
the current selection, or return to the beginning of the
previous selection if the CD is within the first second of the
current selection. Pushing and holding the SEEK button
will allow faster scrolling through the tracks in CD and
MP3 modes.
TIME Button
Push this button to change the display from a large CD
playing time display to a small CD playing time display.
RW/FF
Push and hold the FF (Fast Forward) button and the CD
player will begin to fast forward until FF is released, or RW
or another CD button is pushed. The RW (Reverse) button
operates in a similar manner.
AM/FM Button
Push the button to select either AM or FM mode.
SET/RND Button (Random Play Button)
Push this button while the CD is playing to activate
Random Play. This feature plays the selections on the
compact disc in random order to provide an interesting
change of pace.
Push the right SEEK button to move to the next randomly
selected track.
Push the RND button a second time to stop Random Play.
Notes On Playing MP3 Files
The radio can play MP3 files; however, acceptable MP3 file
recording media and formats are limited. When writing
MP3 files, pay attention to the following restrictions.
Supported Media (Disc Types)
The MP3 file recording media supported by the radio are
CDDA, CD-R, CD-RW, MP3, and CDDA+MP3.
10
MULTIMEDIA 399
Supported Medium Formats (File Systems)
The medium formats supported by the radio are ISO 9660
Level 1 and Level 2 and includes the Joliet extension. When
reading discs recorded using formats other than ISO 9660
Level 1 and Level 2, the radio may fail to read files properly
and may be unable to play the file normally. UDF and
Apple HFS formats are not supported.
The radio uses the following limits for file systems:
• Maximum number of folder levels: 8
• Maximum number of files: 255
• Maximum number of folders. (The radio display of file
names and folder names is limited. For large numbers of
files and/or folders, the radio may be unable to display
the file name and folder name, and will assign a number
instead. With a maximum number of files, exceeding 20
folders will result in this display. With 200 files, exceed-
ing 50 folders will result in this display.)
Maximum number of characters in file/folder names:
• Level 1: 12 (including a separator ⬙.⬙ and a three-
character extension)
• Level 2: 31 (including a separator ⬙.⬙ and a three-
character extension)
Multi-session disc formats are supported by the radio.
Multi-session discs may contain combinations of normal
CD audio tracks and computer files (including MP3 files).
Discs created with an option such as ⬙keep disc open after
writing⬙ are most likely multi-session discs. The use of
multi-session for CD audio or MP3 playback may result in
longer disc loading times.
Supported MP3 File Formats
The radio will recognize only files with the *.MP3 exten-
sion as MP3 files. Non-MP3 files named with the *.MP3
extension may cause playback problems. The radio is
designed to recognize the file as an invalid MP3 and will
not play the file.
When using the MP3 encoder to compress audio data to an
MP3 file, the bit rate and sampling frequencies in the
following table are supported. In addition, variable bit
rates (VBR) are also supported. The majority of MP3 files
use a 44.1 kHz sampling rate and a 192, 160, 128, 96 or VBR
bit rate.
400 MULTIMEDIA
MPEG Specifi-
cation
Sampling Fre-
quency (kHz)
Bit Rate (kbps)
MPEG-1 Audio
Layer 3
48, 44.1, 32 320, 256, 224,
192, 160, 128,
112, 96, 80, 64,
56, 48, 40, 32
MPEG-2 Audio
Layer 3
24, 22.05, 16 160, 128, 144,
112, 96, 80, 64,
56, 48, 40, 32, 24,
16, 8
ID3 Tag information for artist, song title, and album title
are supported for version 1 ID3 tags. ID3 version 2 is not
supported by the radios.
Playlist files are not supported. MP3 Pro files are not
supported.
Playback Of MP3 Files
When a medium containing MP3 data is loaded, the radio
checks all files on the medium. If the medium contains a lot
of folders or files, the radio will take more time to start
playing the MP3 files.
Loading times for playback of MP3 files may be affected by
the following:
• Media - CD-RW media may take longer to load than
CD-R media
• Medium formats - Multisession discs may take longer to
load than non-multisession discs
• Number of files and folders - Loading times will increase
with more files and folders
To increase the speed of disc loading, it is recommended to
use CD-R media and single-session discs. To create a
single-session disc, enable the “Disc at Once” option before
writing to the disc.
Operation Instructions — Auxiliary Mode
The auxiliary (AUX) jack is an audio input jack, which
allows the user to plug in a portable device, such as an MP3
player, or iPod, and utilize the vehicle’s audio system to
amplify the source and play through the vehicle speakers.
Pushing the DISC/AUX button will change the mode to
auxiliary device if the AUX jack is connected.
NOTE: The AUX device must be turned on and the
device’s volume set to proper level. If the AUX audio is not
loud enough, turn the device’s volume up. If the AUX
audio sounds distorted, turn the device’s volume down.
10
MULTIMEDIA 401
TIME Button (Auxiliary Mode)
Push this button to change the display to time of day. The
time of day will display for five seconds (when ignition is
OFF).
RADIO 130 WITH SATELLITE RADIO
SiriusXM Satellite Radio
SiriusXM Satellite Radio gives you over 130 channels,
including 100% commercial-free music from nearly every
genre, plus all your favorite sports, news, talk and enter-
tainment channels – all with crystal clear, coast-to-coast
coverage, all in one place and all at your fingertips.
• To access SiriusXM Satellite Radio, push the SAT button
on the faceplate.
Operating Instructions — Radio Mode
NOTE: The ignition switch must be in the ON/RUN or
ACC position to operate the radio.
Power Switch/Volume Control (Rotary)
Push the ON/VOLUME control knob to turn on the radio.
Push the ON/VOLUME control knob a second time to turn
off the radio.
Electronic Volume Control
The electronic volume control turns continuously (360
degrees) in either direction, without stopping. Turning the
ON/VOLUME control knob to the right increases the
volume, and to the left decreases it.
When the audio system is turned on, the sound will be set
at the same volume level as last played.
Radio 130
402 MULTIMEDIA
SEEK Buttons
Push and release the SEEK buttons to search for the next
listenable station in AM/FM mode. Push the right switch
to seek up and the left switch to seek down. The radio will
remain tuned to the new station until you make another
selection. Holding either button will bypass stations with-
out stopping, until you release it.
Voice Command System (Radio) — If Equipped
Refer to “Voice Command” in “Multimedia”.
Voice Command Button Uconnect Phone — If
Equipped
Push this button to operate the Uconnect Phone feature (if
equipped). Refer to “Uconnect Phone” in “Multimedia”.
If your vehicle is not equipped with or this feature is not
available on your vehicle, a “Not Equipped With Uconnect
Phone” message will display on the radio screen.
Phone Button Uconnect Phone — If Equipped
Push this button to operate the Uconnect Phone feature (if
equipped). Refer to “Uconnect Phone” in “Multimedia”.
If your vehicle is not equipped with, or this feature is not
available on your vehicle, a “Not Equipped With Uconnect
Phone” message will display on the radio screen.
TIME Button
Push the TIME button to alternate display of the time and
radio frequency.
Clock Setting Procedure
1. Push and hold the TIME button until the hours blink.
2. Adjust the hours by turning the right side TUNE/
SCROLL control knob.
3. After adjusting the hours, push the right side TUNE/
SCROLL control knob to set the minutes. The minutes
will begin to blink.
4. Adjust the minutes using the right side TUNE/SCROLL
control knob. Push the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to
save time change.
5. To exit, push any button/knob, or wait five seconds.
INFO Button
Push the INFO button for an RDS station (one with call
letters displayed). The radio will return a Radio Text
message broadcast from an FM station (FM mode only).
10
MULTIMEDIA 403
RW/FF
Pushing the RW (Rewind) or FF (Fast Forward) buttons
causes the tuner to search for the next frequency in the
direction of the arrows. This feature operates in either AM
or FM frequencies.
TUNE Control
Turn the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob clockwise to
increase or counterclockwise to decrease the frequency.
Setting The Tone, Balance And Fade
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob and BASS
will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to the
right or left to increase or decrease the bass tones.
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a second
time and MID will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL
control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the
mid-range tones.
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a third time
and TREBLE will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control
knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the treble
tones.
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a fourth time
and BALANCE will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL
control knob to the right or left to adjust the sound level
from the right or left side speakers.
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a fifth time
and FADE will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control
knob to the left or right to adjust the sound level between
the front and rear speakers.
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob again to exit
setting tone, balance, and fade.
MUSIC TYPE Button
Pushing this button once will turn on the Music Type mode
for five seconds. Pushing the MUSIC TYPE button or
turning the TUNE/SCROLL control knob within five sec-
onds will allow the program format type to be selected.
Many radio stations do not currently broadcast Music Type
information.
404 MULTIMEDIA
Toggle the MUSIC TYPE button to select the following
format types:
Program Type
16-Digit Character Dis-
play
No program type or un-
defined
None
Adult Hits Adlt Hit
Classical Classicl
Classic Rock Cls Rock
College College
Country Country
Foreign Language Language
Information Inform
Jazz Jazz
News News
Nostalgia Nostalga
Oldies Oldies
Personality Persnlty
Public Public
Rhythm and Blues R & B
Religious Music Rel Musc
Program Type
16-Digit Character Dis-
play
Religious Talk Rel Talk
Rock Rock
Soft Soft
Soft Rock Soft Rck
Soft Rhythm and Blues Soft R&B
Sports Sports
Talk Talk
Top 40 Top 40
Weather Weather
By pushing the SEEK button when the Music Type icon is
displayed, the radio will be tuned to the next frequency
station with the same selected Music Type name. The
Music Type function only operates when in the FM mode.
If a preset button is activated while in the Music Type
(Program Type) mode, the Music Type mode will be exited
and the radio will tune to the preset station.
10
MULTIMEDIA 405
SETUP Button
Pushing the SETUP button allows you to select between
the following items:
• Set Clock — Pushing the SELECT button will allow you
to set the clock. Adjust the hours by turning the TUNE/
SCROLL control knob. After adjusting the hours, push
the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to set the minutes. The
minutes will begin to blink. Adjust the minutes using the
right side TUNE/SCROLL control knob. Push the
TUNE/SCROLL control knob to save time change.
AM/FM Button
Push the buttons to select either AM or FM mode.
SET/RND Button — To Set The Pushbutton Memory
When you are receiving a station that you wish to commit
to pushbutton memory, push the SET/RND button. The
symbol SET 1 will now show in the display window. Select
the button (1 to 6) you wish to lock onto this station and
push and release that button. If a button is not selected
within five seconds after pushing the SET/RND button,
the station will continue to play but will not be stored into
pushbutton memory.
You may add a second station to each pushbutton by
repeating the above procedure with this exception: Push
the SET/RND button twice and SET 2 will show in the
display window. Each button can be set for SET 1 and SET
2 in both AM and FM. This allows a total of 12 AM and 12
FM stations to be stored into pushbutton memory. The
stations stored in SET 2 memory can be selected by
pushing the pushbutton twice.
Every time a preset button is used, a corresponding button
number will display.
Buttons1-6
These buttons tune the radio to the stations that you
commit to pushbutton memory (12 AM and 12 FM sta-
tions).
DISC/AUX Button
Pushing the DISC/AUX button will allow you to switch
from AM/FM modes to DISC/AUX mode.
406 MULTIMEDIA
Operation Instructions — CD Mode For CD And
MP3 Audio Play
NOTE:
• The ignition switch must be in the ON/RUN or ACC
position to operate the radio.
• This radio is capable of playing compact discs (CD),
recordable compact discs (CD-R), rewritable compact
discs (CD-RW), compact discs with MP3 tracks and
multisession compact discs with CD and MP3 tracks.
Inserting Compact Disc(s)
Gently insert one CD into the CD player with the CD label
facing up. The CD will automatically be pulled into the CD
player and the CD icon will illuminate on the radio display.
If a CD does not go into the slot more than 1.0 inch (2.5 cm),
a disc may already be loaded and must be ejected before a
new disc can be loaded.
If you insert a disc with the ignition ON/RUN and the
radio ON, the unit will switch from radio to CD mode and
begin to play when you insert the disc. The display will
show the track number, and index time in minutes and
seconds. Play will begin at the start of track 1.
CAUTION!
• This CD player will accept 4–3/4 inch (12 cm) discs
only. The use of other sized discs may damage the
CD player mechanism.
• Do not use adhesive labels. These labels can peel
away and jam the player mechanism.
• The Radio 130 is a single CD player. Do not attempt
to insert a second CD if one is already loaded.
• Dual-media disc types (one side is a DVD, the other
side is a CD) should not be used, and they can cause
damage to the player.
EJECT Button — Ejecting A CD
Push the EJECT button to eject the CD.
If you have ejected a disc and have not removed it within
ten seconds, it will be reloaded. If the CD is not removed,
the radio will reinsert the CD but will not play it.
A disc can be ejected with the radio and ignition OFF.
NOTE: Ejecting with the ignition OFF is not allowed on
convertible or soft-top models (if equipped.)
10
MULTIMEDIA 407
SEEK Button
Push the right SEEK button for the next selection on the
CD. Push the left SEEK button to return to the beginning of
the current selection, or return to the beginning of the
previous selection if the CD is within the first second of the
current selection. Pushing and holding the SEEK button
will allow faster scrolling through the tracks in CD and
MP3 modes.
TIME Button
Push this button to change the display from a large CD
playing time display to a small CD playing time display.
RW/FF
Push and hold the FF (Fast Forward) button and the CD
player will begin to fast forward until FF is released, or RW
or another CD button is pushed. The RW (Reverse) button
operates in a similar manner.
AM/FM Button
Push the button to select either AM or FM mode.
SET/RND Button (Random Play Button)
Push this button while the CD is playing to activate
Random Play. This feature plays the selections on the
compact disc in random order to provide an interesting
change of pace.
Push the right SEEK button to move to the next randomly
selected track.
Push the RND button a second time to stop Random Play.
Notes On Playing MP3 Files
The radio can play MP3 files; however, acceptable MP3 file
recording media and formats are limited. When writing
MP3 files, pay attention to the following restrictions.
Supported Media (Disc Types)
The MP3 file recording media supported by the radio are
CDDA, CD-R, CD-RW, MP3, and CDDA+MP3.
Supported Medium Formats (File Systems)
The medium formats supported by the radio are ISO 9660
Level 1 and Level 2 and includes the Joliet extension. When
reading discs recorded using formats other than ISO 9660
408 MULTIMEDIA
Level 1 and Level 2, the radio may fail to read files properly
and may be unable to play the file normally. UDF and
Apple HFS formats are not supported.
The radio uses the following limits for file systems:
• Maximum number of folder levels: 8
• Maximum number of files: 255
• Maximum number of folders. (The radio display of file
names and folder names is limited. For large numbers of
files and/or folders, the radio may be unable to display
the file name and folder name, and will assign a number
instead. With a maximum number of files, exceeding 20
folders will result in this display. With 200 files, exceed-
ing 50 folders will result in this display.)
Maximum number of characters in file/folder names:
• Level 1: 12 (including a separator ⬙.⬙ and a three-
character extension)
• Level 2: 31 (including a separator ⬙.⬙ and a three-
character extension)
Multi-session disc formats are supported by the radio.
Multi-session discs may contain combinations of normal
CD audio tracks and computer files (including MP3 files).
Discs created with an option such as ⬙keep disc open after
writing⬙ are most likely multi-session discs. The use of
multi-session for CD audio or MP3 playback may result in
longer disc loading times.
Supported MP3 File Formats
The radio will recognize only files with the *.MP3 exten-
sion as MP3 files. Non-MP3 files named with the *.MP3
extension may cause playback problems. The radio is
designed to recognize the file as an invalid MP3 and will
not play the file.
When using the MP3 encoder to compress audio data to an
MP3 file, the bit rate and sampling frequencies in the
following table are supported. In addition, variable bit
rates (VBR) are also supported. The majority of MP3 files
use a 44.1 kHz sampling rate and a 192, 160, 128, 96 or VBR
bit rate.
10
MULTIMEDIA 409
MPEG Specifi-
cation
Sampling Fre-
quency (kHz)
Bit Rate (kbps)
MPEG-1 Audio
Layer 3
48, 44.1, 32 320, 256, 224,
192, 160, 128,
112, 96, 80, 64,
56, 48, 40, 32
MPEG-2 Audio
Layer 3
24, 22.05, 16 160, 128, 144,
112, 96, 80, 64,
56, 48, 40, 32, 24,
16, 8
ID3 Tag information for artist, song title, and album title
are supported for version 1 ID3 tags. ID3 version 2 is not
supported by the radios.
Playlist files are not supported. MP3 Pro files are not
supported.
Playback Of MP3 Files
When a medium containing MP3 data is loaded, the radio
checks all files on the medium. If the medium contains a lot
of folders or files, the radio will take more time to start
playing the MP3 files.
Loading times for playback of MP3 files may be affected by
the following:
• Media - CD-RW media may take longer to load than
CD-R media
• Medium formats - Multisession discs may take longer to
load than non-multisession discs
• Number of files and folders - Loading times will increase
with more files and folders
To increase the speed of disc loading, it is recommended to
use CD-R media and single-session discs. To create a
single-session disc, enable the “Disc at Once” option before
writing to the disc.
LIST Button — CD Mode For MP3 Play
Pushing the LIST button will bring up a list of all folders on
the disc. Scrolling up or down the list is done by turning
the TUNE/SCROLL control knob. Selecting a folder by
pushing the TUNE/SCROLL control knob will begin play-
ing the files contained in that folder (or the next folder in
sequence if the selection does not contain playable files).
The folder list will time out after five seconds.
410 MULTIMEDIA
INFO Button — CD Mode For MP3 Play
Pushing the INFO button repeatedly will scroll through the
following TAG information: Song Title, Artist, File Name,
and Folder Name (if available).
Push the INFO button once more to return to ⬙elapsed
time⬙ priority mode.
Push and hold the INFO button for three seconds or more
and the radio will display song titles for each file.
Push and hold the INFO button again for three seconds to
return to ⬙elapsed time⬙ display.
Operation Instructions — Auxiliary Mode
The auxiliary (AUX) jack is an audio input jack which
allows the user to plug in a portable device such as an MP3
player and utilize the vehicle’s audio system to amplify the
source and play through the vehicle speakers.
Pushing the AUX button will change the mode to auxiliary
device if the AUX jack is connected.
NOTE: The AUX device must be turned on and the
device’s volume set to the proper level. If the AUX audio is
not loud enough, turn the device’s volume up. If the AUX
audio sounds distorted, turn the device’s volume down.
TIME Button (Auxiliary Mode)
Push this button to change the display to time of day. The
time of day will display for five seconds (when the ignition
is OFF).
Uconnect (Satellite Radio) — If Equipped
Satellite radio uses direct satellite-to-receiver broadcasting
technology to provide clear digital sound, coast to coast.
The subscription service provider is Sirius Satellite Radio.
This service offers over 130 channels of music, sports,
news, entertainment, and programming for children, di-
rectly from its satellites and broadcasting studios.
NOTE: Sirius service is not available in Hawaii and has
limited coverage in Alaska.
System Activation
Sirius Satellite Radio service is pre-activated, and you may
begin listening immediately to the one year of audio
service that is included with the factory-installed satellite
radio system in your vehicle. Sirius will supply a welcome
kit that contains general information, including how to
setup your online listening account. For further informa-
tion, call the toll-free number 888-539-7474, or visit the
Sirius web site at www.siriusxm.com, or at
www.siriusxm.ca for Canadian residents.
10
MULTIMEDIA 411
Electronic Serial Number/Sirius Identification
Number (ESN/SID)
Please have the following information available when
calling:
1. The Electronic Serial Number/Sirius Identification
Number (ESN/SID).
2. Your Vehicle Identification Number.
To access the ESN/SID, refer to the following steps:
ESN/SID Access
With the ignition switch in the ON/RUN or ACC position
and the radio on, push the SETUP button and scroll using
the TUNE/SCROLL control knob until Sirius ID is selected.
Push the TUNE/SCROLL control knob and the Sirius ID
number will display. The Sirius ID number display will
time out in two minutes. Push any button on the radio to
exit this screen.
Selecting Uconnect (Satellite) Mode
Push the SAT button until ⬙SAT⬙ appears in the display. A
CD may remain in the radio while in the Satellite radio
mode.
Satellite Antenna
To ensure optimum reception, do not place items on the
roof around the rooftop antenna location. Metal objects
placed within the line of sight of the antenna will cause
decreased performance. Larger luggage items such as bikes
should be placed as far rearward as possible, within the
loading design of the rack. Do not place items directly on
or above the antenna.
Reception Quality
Satellite reception may be interrupted due to one of the
following reasons:
• The vehicle is parked in an underground parking struc-
ture or under a physical obstacle.
• Dense tree coverage may interrupt reception in the form
of short audio mutes.
• Driving under wide bridges or along tall buildings can
cause intermittent reception.
• Placing objects over or too close to the antenna can cause
signal blockage.
412 MULTIMEDIA
Operating Instructions — Uconnect (Satellite)
Mode
NOTE: The ignition switch must be in the ON/RUN or
ACC position to operate the radio.
SEEK Buttons
Push and release the SEEK buttons to search for the next
listenable station in AM/FM mode. Push the right switch
to seek up and the left switch to seek down. The radio will
remain tuned to the new station until you make another
selection. Holding either button will bypass stations with-
out stopping, until you release it.
SCAN Button
Pushing the SCAN button causes the tuner to search for the
next channel, pausing for eight seconds before continuing
to the next. To stop the search, push the SCAN button a
second time.
INFO Button
Pushing the INFO button will cycle the display informa-
tion between Artist, Song Title, and Composer (if avail-
able). Also, pushing and holding the INFO button for an
additional three seconds will make the radio display the
Song Title all of the time (push and hold again to return to
normal display).
RW/FF
Pushing the RW (Rewind) or FF (Fast Forward) buttons
causes the tuner to search for the next channel in the
direction of the arrows.
TUNE Control
Turn the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob clockwise to
increase or counterclockwise to decrease the frequency.
MUSIC TYPE Button
Pushing this button once will turn on the Music Type mode
for five seconds. Pushing the MUSIC TYPE button or
turning the TUNE/SCROLL control knob within five sec-
onds will allow the program format type to be selected.
Toggle the MUSIC TYPE button again to select the music
type.
By pushing the SEEK button when the Music Type function
is active, the radio will be tuned to the next channel with
the same selected Music Type name.
10
MULTIMEDIA 413
If a preset button is activated while in the Music Type
(Program Type) mode, the Music Type mode will be exited
and the radio will tune to the preset channel.
SETUP Button
Pushing the SETUP button allows you to select the follow-
ing items:
• Display Sirius ID number — Push the AUDIO/SELECT
button to display the Sirius ID number. This number is
used to activate, deactivate, or change the Sirius sub-
scription.
SET Button — To Set The Pushbutton Memory
When you are receiving a channel that you wish to commit
to push button memory, push the SET button. The symbol
SET 1 will now show in the display window. Select the
button (1-6) you wish to lock onto this channel and push
and release that button. If a button is not selected within
five seconds after pushing the SET button, the channel will
continue to play but will not be stored into push button
memory.
You may add a second channel to each push button by
repeating the above procedure with this exception: Push
the SET button twice and SET 2 will show in the display
window. Each button can be set for SET 1 and SET 2. This
allows a total of 12 Satellite channels to be stored into push
button memory. The channels stored in SET 2 memory can
be selected by pushing the push button twice.
Every time a preset button is used, a corresponding button
number will display.
Buttons1-6
These buttons tune the radio to the channels that you
commit to pushbutton memory (12 Satellite stations).
Operating Instructions (Uconnect Phone) — If
Equipped
Refer to “Uconnect Phone” in “Multimedia”.
RADIO 430/430N CD/DVD/HDD/NAV — IF
EQUIPPED
Refer to your Uconnect Owner’s Manual Supplement for
detailed operating instructions.
414 MULTIMEDIA
Operating Instructions (Voice Command System)
— If Equipped
Refer to “Voice Command” in “Multimedia” for further
details.
Operating Instructions (Uconnect Phone) — If
Equipped
Refer to “Uconnect Phone” in “Multimedia” for further
details.
Accessibility — If Equipped
The accessibility feature announces DVD functions prior to
performing them. For example, when activated, the acces-
sibility feature will announce that the “Play” button was
pressed the first time the “Play” button is pressed, and the
second time the “Play” button is pressed it will perform the
“Play” function. The accessibility feature can be turned on
and off in the settings of the radio.
STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROLS — IF
EQUIPPED
The remote sound system controls are located on the rear
surface of the steering wheel, at the three and nine o’clock
positions.
Remote Sound System Controls (Back View Of Steering
Wheel)
10
MULTIMEDIA 415
The right-hand rocker switch has a push-button in the
center, and controls the volume and mode of the sound
system. Pushing the top of the rocker switch will increase
the volume. Pushing the bottom of the rocker switch will
decrease the volume. Pushing the center button changes
the operation of the radio from AM to FM, or to CD mode,
depending on which radio is in the vehicle.
The left-hand rocker switch has a push-button in the center.
The function of the left-hand switch is different, depending
on which mode you are in.
The following describes the left-hand rocker switch opera-
tion in each mode.
Radio Operation
Pushing the top of the switch will SEEK up for the next
listenable station, and pushing the bottom of the switch
will SEEK down for the next listenable station.
The button located in the center of the left-hand switch will
tune to the next preset station that you have programmed
in the radio preset push-button.
CD Player
Pushing the top of the switch once will go to the next track
on the CD. Pushing the bottom of the switch once will go
to the beginning of the current track, or to the beginning of
the previous track if it is within one second after the
current track begins to play.
If you push the switch up or down twice it plays the
second track; three times, it will play the third, etc.
The button in the center of the left-hand switch has no
function in this mode.
IPOD/USB/MP3 CONTROL — IF EQUIPPED
This feature allows an iPod or external USB device to be
plugged into the USB port, located in the glove compart-
ment. If equipped, there may also be two USB ports located
on the lower trim piece right behind the driver’s sliding
door that are for charging devices only.
iPod control supports Mini, 4G, Photo, Nano, 5G iPod and
iPhone devices. Some iPod software versions may not fully
support the iPod control features. Please visit Apple’s
website for software updates.
416 MULTIMEDIA
NOTE:
• If the radio has a USB port, refer to the appropriate
Uconnect Owner’s Manual Supplement for iPod or
external USB device support capability.
• Connecting an iPod or consumer electronic audio device
to the AUX port located in the radio faceplate, plays
media, but does not use the iPod / MP3 control feature
to control the connected device.
Connecting The iPod Or External USB Device
Use the connection cable to connect an iPod or external
USB device to the vehicle’s USB connector port which is
located in the glove compartment.
NOTE: The glove compartment will have a position where
the iPod or consumer electronic audio device cable can be
routed through without damaging the cable when closing
the lid. This allows routing of the cable without damaging
it while closing the lid. If a cut out is not available in the
glove compartment, route the cable away from the lid latch
and in a place that will allow the lid to close without
damaging the cable.
USB Port
10
MULTIMEDIA 417
Once the audio device is connected and synchronized to
the vehicle’s iPod/USB/MP3 control system (iPod or ex-
ternal USB device may take a few minutes to connect), the
audio device starts charging and is ready for use by
pushing radio buttons, as described below.
NOTE: If the audio device battery is completely dis-
charged, it may not communicate with the iPod/USB/MP3
control system until a minimum charge is attained. Leav-
ing the audio device connected to the iPod/USB/MP3
control system may charge it to the required level.
Using This Feature
By using an external USB device to connect to the USB port:
• The audio device can be played on the vehicle’s sound
system, providing metadata (artist, track title, album,
etc.) information on the radio display.
• The audio device can be controlled using the radio
buttons to Play, Browse, and List the iPod contents.
• The audio device battery charges when plugged into the
USB connector (if supported by the specific audio de-
vice).
Controlling The iPod Or External USB Device
Using Radio Buttons
To enter the AUX/USB/MP3 control mode and access a
connected audio device, either push the “AUX” button on
the radio faceplate or push the VR button and say ⬙USB⬙ or
⬙Switch to USB.⬙ Once in the AUX/USB/MP3 control
mode, audio tracks (if available from audio device) start
playing over the vehicle’s audio system.
Play Mode
When switched to AUX/USB/MP3 control mode, the iPod
or external USB device automatically starts Play mode. In
Play mode, the following buttons on the radio faceplate
may be used to control the iPod or external USB device and
display data:
• Use the TUNE control knob to select the next or previ-
ous track.
• Turning it clockwise (forward) by one click, while play-
ing a track, skips to the next track or push the VR button
and say ⬙Next Track.⬙
• Turning it counterclockwise (backward) by one click,
will jump to the previous track in the list or push the VR
button and say ⬙Previous Track.⬙
418 MULTIMEDIA
• Jump backward in the current track by pushing and
holding the << RW button. Holding the << RW button
long enough will jump to the beginning of the current
track.
• Jump forward in the current track by pushing and
holding the FF >> button.
• A single push backward << RW or forward FF >> will
jump backward or forward respectively, for five seconds.
• Use the << SEEK and SEEK >> buttons to jump to the
previous or next track. Pushing the SEEK >> button
during play mode will jump to the next track in the list,
or push the VR button and say ⬙Next or Previous Track.⬙
• While a track is playing, push the INFO button to see the
associated metadata (artist, track title, album, etc.) for
that track. Pushing the INFO button again jumps to the
next screen of data for that track. Once all screens have
been viewed, the last INFO button push will go back to
the play mode screen on the radio.
• Pushing the REPEAT button will change the audio
device mode to repeat the current playing track or push
the VR button and say ⬙Repeat ON⬙ or ⬙Repeat Off.⬙
• Push the SCAN button to use AUX/USB/MP3 device
scan mode, which will play the first ten seconds of each
track in the current list and then forward to the next
song. To stop SCAN mode and start playing the desired
track, when it is playing the track, push the SCAN
button again. During Scan mode, pushing the << SEEK
and SEEK >> buttons will select the previous and next
tracks.
• RND button (available on sales code RES radio only):
Pushing this button toggles between Shuffle ON and
Shuffle OFF modes for the iPod or external USB device,
or push the VR button and say ⬙Shuffle ON⬙ or ⬙Shuffle
Off.⬙ If the RND icon is showing on the radio display,
then the shuffle mode is ON.
List Or Browse Mode
During Play mode, pushing any of the buttons described
below, will bring up List mode. List mode enables scrolling
through the list of menus and tracks on the audio device.
TUNE control knob: The TUNE control knob functions in
a similar manner as the scroll wheel on the audio device or
external USB device.
10
MULTIMEDIA 419
• Turning it clockwise (forward) and counterclockwise
(backward) scrolls through the lists, displaying the track
detail on the radio display. Once the track to be played
is highlighted on the radio display, push the TUNE
control knob to select and start playing the track. Turn-
ing the TUNE control knob fast will scroll through the
list faster. During fast scroll, a slight delay in updating
the information on the radio display may be noticeable.
During all List modes, the iPod displays all lists in “wrap-
around” mode. So if the track is at the bottom of the list,
just turn the wheel backward (counterclockwise) to get to
the track faster.
In List mode, the radio PRESET buttons are used as
shortcuts to the following lists on the iPod or external USB
device:
• Preset 1 – Playlists
• Preset 2 – Artists
• Preset 3 – Albums
• Preset 4 – Genres
• Preset 5 – Audiobooks
• Preset 6 – Podcasts
Pushing a PRESET button will display the current list on
the top line and the first item in that list on the second line.
To exit List mode without selecting a track, push the same
PRESET button again to go back to Play mode.
LIST button: The LIST button will display the top level
menu of the iPod or external USB device.
• Turn the TUNE control knob to list the top-menu item to
be selected and push the TUNE control knob. This will
display the next sub-menu list item on the audio device,
then follow the same steps to go to the desired track in
that list. Not all iPod or external USB device sub-menu
levels are available on this system.
MUSIC TYPE button: The MUSIC TYPE button is another
shortcut button to the genre listing on your audio device.
WARNING!
Do not plug in or remove the iPod or external USB
device while driving. Failure to follow this warning
could result in an accident.
420 MULTIMEDIA
CAUTION!
• Leaving the iPod or external USB device (or any
supported device) anywhere in the vehicle in ex-
treme heat or cold can alter the operation or damage
the device. Follow the device manufacturer’s guide-
lines.
• Placing items on the iPod or external USB device, or
connections to the iPod or external USB device in the
vehicle, can cause damage to the device and/or to the
connectors.
Bluetooth Streaming Audio (BTSA)
Music can be streamed from your cellular phone to the
Uconnect phone system.
Refer to the Uconnect Owner’s Manual Supplement for
further information on Bluetooth connectivity.
Controlling BTSA Using Radio Buttons
To enter BTSA mode, push either “AUX” button on the
radio or push the VR
button and say “Bluetooth
Streaming Audio.”
Play Mode
When switched to BTSA mode, some audio devices can
start playing music over the vehicle’s audio system, but
some devices require the music to be initiated on the device
first, then it will get streamed to the Uconnect phone
system. Seven devices can be paired to the Uconnect phone
system, but just one can be selected and played.
Selecting A Different Audio Device
1. Push the Phone
button to begin.
2. After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and following the beep, say
⬙Setup⬙, then say ⬙Select Audio Devices.⬙
3. Say the name of the audio device or ask the Uconnect
phone system to list the audio devices.
Next Track
Use the SEEK UP button, or push the VR
button on the
radio and say “Next Track,” to jump to the next music
track on your cellular phone.
Previous Track
Use the SEEK DOWN button, or push the VR
button on
the radio and say “Previous Track,” to jump to the
previous music track on your cellular phone.
10
MULTIMEDIA 421
Browse
Browsing is not available on a Bluetooth Streaming Audio
(BTSA) device. Only the current song that is playing will
display info.
UCONNECT MULTIMEDIA — VIDEO
ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEM (VES) — IF EQUIPPED
Your rear seat Video Entertainment System (VES) is de-
signed to give your family years of enjoyment. You can
play your favorite CDs or DVDs, listen to audio over the
wireless headphones, or plug and play a variety of stan-
dard video games or audio devices. Please review this
Owner’s Manual to become familiar with its features and
operation.
NOTE: The screen is located in the 2nd row overhead
console.
Getting Started
• Screen located in the overhead console: Unfold the
overhead LCD screen(s) by pushing the button on the
overhead console behind the screen(s).
• Cycle the ignition to the ON or ACC position.
• Turn on the Player by pushing the Power button, located
on the far left, or by pushing the button on the Remote
Control.
• When the video screen is open and a DVD is inserted
into the VES player, the screen turns on automatically,
the headphone transmitters turn on and playback be-
gins.
• The system can be controlled by the front seat occupants
using either the touchscreen radio, the DVD, or by the
rear seat occupants using the remote control.
Play Video Games
Connect the video game console to the Auxiliary RCA
input jacks or HDMI port, located on the left side behind
the second row seat.
422 MULTIMEDIA
When connecting an external source to the AUX input, be
sure to follow the standard color coding for the VES jacks:
NOTE: Certain high-end video game consoles will exceed
the power limit of the vehicle’s Power Inverter. Refer to
“Power Inverter — If Equipped” in “Getting To Know Your
Vehicle” for more information.
Using The Remote Control
1. Push the MODE button on the Remote Control.
2. While looking at the video screen, highlight VES AUX 1,
by either pushing Up/Down/Left/Right buttons or by
repeatedly pushing the MODE button, then push EN-
TER on the Remote Control.
RCA/HDMI/USB Inputs
1 — HDMI Port 4 — USB Ports (Charge Only)
2 — Audio/Video In 5 — Power Inverter
3 — Power Outlet
Select VES AUX1 Mode On The VES Screen
10
MULTIMEDIA 423
Using The Touchscreen Radio Controls
1. Push the MENU button on the radio faceplate.
2. Press the Rear VES button on the touchscreen to display
the Rear VES Controls. If a channel list is displayed,
press the HIDE LIST button on the touchscreen to
display the Rear VES Controls screen.
3. Press the 1 button on the touchscreen and then press
either AUX 1 or AUX 2 in the VES column (depending
which AUX input is used). To exit press the back arrow
button at the top of the touchscreen.
Play A DVD Using The Touchscreen Radio
NOTE: Headunit DVD player does not play Blu-ray Discs.
1. Push the OPEN/CLOSE or LOAD button on the radio
faceplate (Touchscreen).
2. Insert the DVD with the label facing up. The radio
automatically selects the appropriate mode after the disc
is recognized and displays the menu screen or starts
playing the first track.
Using The Remote Control
1. Push the SOURCE button on the Remote Control.
2. Highlight DISC by either pushing Up/Down/Left/
Right buttons or by repeatedly pushing the SOURCE
button, then push ENTER/OK.
NOTE: The VES will retain the last setting when turned off.
Using The Touchscreen Radio Controls
1. Push the MENU button on the radio faceplate.
2. Press the Rear VES button on the touchscreen to display
the Rear VES Controls. If a channel list is displayed,
press the HIDE LIST button on the touchscreen to
display the Rear VES Controls screen.
Rear VES Button On The Touchscreen
424 MULTIMEDIA
3. Press the DISC button on the touchscreen in the MEDIA
column. To exit press the back arrow button at the top
left of the screen.
NOTE:
• To view a DVD on the radio push the RADIO/MEDIA
button on the radio faceplate, then press the DISC tab
button on the touchscreen and then the VIEW VIDEO
button on the touchscreen.
• Viewing a DVD on the Touchscreen radio screen is not
available in all states/provinces. If available, the vehicle
must be stopped and the gear selector must be in the
PARK position for vehicles with an automatic transmis-
sion. In vehicles with a manual transmission the parking
brake must be engaged.
• Pressing the screen on a Touchscreen radio while a DVD
is playing brings up basic remote control functions for
DVD play such as scene selection, Play, Pause, FF, RW,
and Stop. Pressing the X in the upper corner will turn off
the remote control screen functions.
Play A DVD Using The VES Player — If Equipped
Insert the DVD with the label facing up. The VES player
automatically selects the appropriate mode after the disc is
recognized and starts playing the DVD.
NOTE: The VES player has basic DVD control function
such as Menu, Play, Pause, FF, RW and Stop.
Rear VES Button On The Touchscreen
10
MULTIMEDIA 425
Using The Remote Control
1. Push the SOURCE button on the Remote Control.
2. Highlight VES DISC by either pushing Up/Down/Left/
Right buttons or by repeatedly pushing the SOURCE
button, then push ENTER/OK on the Remote Control.
NOTE: The VES will retain the last setting when turned off.
Using The Touchscreen Radio Controls
1. Push the MENU button on the radio faceplate.
2. Press the Rear VES button on the touchscreen to display
the Rear VES Controls. If a channel list is displayed,
press the HIDE LIST button on the touchscreen to
display the Rear VES Controls screen.
3. Press the DISC button on the touchscreen in the VES
column. To exit press the back arrow button on the
touchscreen at the top left of the screen.
Rear VES Button On The Touchscreen
426 MULTIMEDIA
NOTE:
• To view a DVD on the radio push the RADIO/MEDIA
button on the radio faceplate, then press the DISC tab
button on the touchscreen and then the VIEW VIDEO
button on the touchscreen.
• Viewing a DVD on the Touchscreen radio screen is not
available in all states/provinces. If available, the vehicle
must be stopped and the gear selector must be in the
PARK position for vehicles with an automatic transmis-
sion. In vehicles with a manual transmission the parking
brake must be engaged.
VES Remote Control — If Equipped
Controls And Indicators
1. Power – Turns the screen and wireless headphone
transmitter for the selected Channel on or off. To hear
audio while the screen is closed, push the Power button
to turn the headphone transmitter on.
2. Channel Selector Indicators – When a button is pushed,
the currently affected channel or channel button is
illuminated momentarily.
Select Channel/Screen 1 And DISC In The VES Column
VES Remote Control
10
MULTIMEDIA 427
3. Light – Turns the remote control backlighting on or off.
The remote backlighting turns off automatically after
five seconds.
4. Channel/Screen Selector Switch - Indicates which chan-
nel is being controlled by the remote control. When the
selector switch is in the Channel 1 position, the remote
controls the functionality of headphone Channel 1 (left
side of the screen). When the selector switch is in the
Channel 2, position the remote controls the functionality
of headphone Channel 2 (right side of the screen).
5. 䉴䉴 – In radio modes, push to seek the next tunable
station. In disc modes, push and hold to fast forward
through the current audio track or video chapter. In
menu modes use to navigate in the menu.
6. 䉲 / PREV – In radio modes, push to select to the
previous station. In disc modes, push to advance to the
start of the current or previous audio track or video
chapter. In menu modes, use to navigate in the menu.
7. MENU – push to return to the main menu of a DVD
disc, or select playback modes (SCAN/RANDOM for a
CD).
8. 䉴 / 㥋 (Play/Pause) – Begin/resume or pause disc play.
9.
(Stop) – Stops disc play.
10. PROG Up/Down / Rewind/skip back and fast fwd/
skip forward – When listening to a radio mode, push-
ing PROG Up selects the next preset and pushing
PROG Down selects the previous preset stored in the
radio. When listening to compressed audio on a data
disc, PROG Up selects the next directory and PROG
Down selects the previous directory. When listening to
a disc in a radio with a multiple-disc changer, PROG
Up selects the next disc and PROG Down selects the
previous disc.
11. Mute – Push to mute the headphone audio output for
the selected channel.
12. SLOW – If Equipped – Push to slow playback of a DVD
disc. Push play (䉴) to resume normal play.
13. STATUS – If Equipped – Push to display the current
status.
14. MODE – Push to change the mode of the selected
channel. See the Mode Selection section of this manual
for details on changing modes.
428 MULTIMEDIA
15. SETUP – When in a video mode, push the SETUP
button to access the display settings (see the display
settings section) to access the DVD setup menu, select
the menu button on the radio. When a disc is loaded in
the DVD player (if equipped) and the VES mode is
selected and the disc is stopped, push the SETUP
button to access the DVD Setup menu. (see the DVD
Setup Menu of this manual.)
16. BACK – When navigating in menu mode, push to
return to the previous screen. When navigating a DVDs
disc menu, the operation depends on the disc’s con-
tents.
17. 䉳䉳 – In radio modes, push to seek to the previous
tunable station. In disc modes, push and hold to fast
rewind through the current audio track or video chap-
ter. In menu modes use to navigate in the menu.
18. ENTER/OK – Push to select the highlighted option in
a menu.
19. 䉱 / NEXT – In radio modes, push to select to the next
station. In disc modes, push to advance to the next
audio track or video chapter. In menu modes, use to
navigate in the menu.
Remote Control Storage
The video screen comes with a built in storage compart-
ment for the remote control which is accessible when the
screen is opened. To remove the remote, use your index
finger to pull and rotate the remote towards you. Do not try
to pull the remote straight down as it will be very difficult
to remove. To return the remote back into its storage area,
insert one long edge of the remote into the two retaining
clips first, and then rotate the remote back up into the other
two retaining clips until it snaps back into position.
VES Remote Control Storage
10
MULTIMEDIA 429
Locking The Remote Control
All remote control functionality can be disabled as a
parental control feature.
• To disable the Remote Control from making any
changes, push the Video Lock button on the DVD player
(if equipped). If the vehicle is not equipped with a DVD
player, follow the radio’s instructions to turn Video Lock
on. The radio and the video screen(s) indicate when
Video Lock is active.
• Pushing the Video Lock again or turning the ignition
OFF turns Video Lock OFF and allows remote control
operation of the VES.
Replacing The Remote Control Batteries
The remote control requires two AAA batteries for opera-
tion. To replace the batteries:
1. Locate the battery compartment on the back of the
remote, then slide the battery cover downward.
2. Replace the batteries, making sure to orient them ac-
cording to the polarity diagram shown.
3. Replace the battery compartment cover.
Headphones Operation
Front seat occupants receive some headphone audio cov-
erage to allow them to adjust the headphone volume for
the young rear seat occupants that may not be able to do so
for themselves.
If no audio is heard after increasing the volume control,
verify that the screen is turned on and in the down position
and that the channel is not muted. If audio is still not heard,
check that fully charged batteries are installed in the
headphones.
430 MULTIMEDIA
Controls
The headphone power indicator and controls are located
on the right ear cup.
NOTE: The rear video system must be turned on before
sound can be heard from the headphones. To conserve
battery life, the headphones will automatically turn off
approximately three minutes after the rear video system is
turned off.
Replacing The Headphone Batteries
Each set of headphones requires two AAA batteries for
operation. To replace the batteries:
1. Locate the battery compartment on the left ear cup of
the headphones, and then slide the battery cover down-
ward.
2. Replace the batteries, making sure to orient them ac-
cording to the polarity diagram shown.
3. Replace the battery compartment cover.
Accessibility — If Equipped
The accessibility feature announces DVD functions prior to
performing them. For example, when activated, the acces-
sibility feature will announce that the “Play” button was
pressed the first time the “Play” button is pressed, and the
second time the “Play” button is pressed it will perform the
“Play” function. The accessibility feature can be turned on
and off in the settings of the radio.
VES Headphones
1 — Volume Control 3 — Channel Selection Switch
2 — Power Button 4 — Power Indicator
10
MULTIMEDIA 431
NOTE: When the Accessibility feature is enabled, and the
remote control is used in the rear seats to control the Video
Entertainment System (VES), the DVD functions will be
announced in the headsets only. The DVD functions will be
announced through the vehicle’s sound system when the
Uconnect system is being used to control the VES system.
These announcements will be in English only.
Stereo Headphone Lifetime Limited Warranty
Who Does This Warranty Cover? This warranty covers the
initial user or purchaser (⬙you⬙ or ⬙your⬙) of this particular
Aptiv PLC (“Aptiv”) wireless headphone (⬙Product⬙). The
warranty is not transferable.
How Long Does the Coverage Last? This warranty lasts as
long as you own the Product.
What Does This Warranty Cover? Except as specified
below, this warranty covers any Product that in normal use
is defective in workmanship or materials.
What Does This Warranty Not Cover? This warranty does
not cover any damage or defect that results from misuse,
abuse or modification of the Product other than by Aptiv.
Foam earpieces, which will wear over time through normal
use, are specifically not covered (replacement foam is
available for a nominal charge). APTIV IS NOT LIABLE
FOR ANY INJURIES OR DAMAGES TO PERSONS OR
PROPERTY RESULTING FROM THE USE OF, OR ANY
FAILURE OR DEFECT IN, THE PRODUCT, NOR IS AP-
TIV LIABLE FOR ANY GENERAL, SPECIAL, DIRECT,
INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, CONSEQUENTIAL, EXEM-
PLARY, PUNITIVE OR OTHER DAMAGES OF ANY
KIND OR NATURE WHATSOEVER. Some states and
jurisdictions may not allow the exclusion or limitation of
incidental or consequential damages, so the above limita-
tion may not apply to you. This warranty gives you specific
legal rights. You may also have other rights, which vary
from jurisdiction to jurisdiction.
What Will Aptiv Do? Aptiv, at its option, will repair or
replace any defective Product. Aptiv reserves the right to
replace any discontinued Product with a comparable
model. THIS WARRANTY IS THE SOLE WARRANTY
FOR THIS PRODUCT, SETS FORTH YOUR EXCLUSIVE
REMEDY REGARDING DEFECTIVE PRODUCTS, AND IS
IN LIEU OF ALL OTHER WARRANTIES (EXPRESS OR
IMPLIED), INCLUDING ANY WARRANTY FOR MER-
CHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PUR-
POSE.
432 MULTIMEDIA
If you have any questions or comments regarding your
Aptiv wireless headphones, or to register your wireless
headphones, please phone:
1-248-724-5900
System Information
Shared Modes
This allows the VES to output radio sources to the head-
phones and the radio to output VES sources to the vehicle
speakers.
If the radio functions (FM, AM, or SAT) are in the shared
mode with the VES, only the radio is able to control the
radio functions. In this case, VES can share the radio mode,
but not change stations until the radio mode is changed to
a mode that is different from the VES selected radio mode.
When shared, the radio has priority over the VES or all
radio modes (FM, AM, and SAT). The VES has the ability to
switch tuner (AM/FM), SEEK, SCAN, TUNE, and recall
presets in radio modes as long as it is not in shared mode.
When in shared disc mode both the radio and the VES have
control of the video functions. The VES has the ability to
control the following video modes:
1. CD: Ability to Fast Forward, Rewind, Scan, and Track
Up/Down.
2. CD Changer (in radio): Ability to Disk Up/Down and
program all listed CD controls (Fast Forward, Rewind,
Scan, and Track Up/Down).
The VES can even control radio modes or video modes
while the radio is turned off. The VES can access the radio
modes or disc modes by navigating to those modes on the
VES and activating a radio mode or disc mode.
Station List Menu
When listening to Satellite audio, pushing the remote
control’s POP UP/MENU button displays a list of all
available channels. Navigate this list using the remote
control’s navigation buttons (䉱, 䉲) to find the desired
station, push the remote control’s ENTER/OK button to
tune to that station. To jump through the list more quickly,
navigate to the Page Up and Page Down icons on the
screen.
10
MULTIMEDIA 433
Disc Menu
When listening to a CD Audio or CD Data disc, pushing
the remote control’s POP UP/MENU button displays a list
of all commands which control playback of the disc. Using
the options you can activate or cancel Scan play and
Random play.
Display Settings
When watching a video source (DVD Video with the disc
in Play mode, Aux Video, etc.), pushing the remote con-
trol’s SETUP button activates the Display Settings menu.
These settings control the appearance of the video on the
screen. The factory default settings are already set for
optimum viewing, so there is no need to change these
settings under normal circumstances.
To change the settings, push the remote control’s naviga-
tion buttons (䉱, 䉲) to select an item, then push the remote
control’s navigation buttons (䉴, 䉳) to change the value for
the currently selected item. To reset all values back to the
original settings, select the Default Settings menu option
and press the remote control’s ENTER/OK button.
Disc Features control the remote DVD settings of DVD
being watched in the remote player.
Listening To Audio With The Screen Closed
To listen to only audio portion of the channel with the
screen closed:
1. Set the audio to the desired source and channel.
2. Close the video screen.
3. To change the current audio mode, push the remote
control’s MODE button. This will automatically select
the next available audio mode without using the
MODE/SOURCE Select menu.
If the screen is closed and there is no audio heard, verify
that the headphones are turned on (the ON indicator is
illuminated) and the headphone selector switch is on the
desired channel. If the headphones are turned on, push the
remote control’s power button to turn audio on. If audio is
still not heard, check that fully charged batteries are
installed in the headphones.
Disc Formats
The DVD player is capable of playing the following types
of discs (12 cm or 8 cm diameter):
• DVD-Video discs (MPEG-2 video compression) (see
notes about DVD Region Codes)
434 MULTIMEDIA
• DVD-Audio discs (2 channel audio output only)
• Audio Compact Discs (CDs)
• CD Data discs with MP3 and WMA compressed audio
format files
• Video CDs (MPEG-1 video compression)
DVD Region Codes
The DVD player and many DVD Discs are coded by
geographic region. These region codes must match in order
for the disc to play. If the region code for the DVD does not
match the region code for the player, the disc will stop
playing and a warning will be displayed.
DVD Audio Support
When a DVD-Audio disc is inserted in the DVD player, the
DVD-Audio title on the disc is played by default (most
DVD-Audio discs also have a Video title, but the Video title
is ignored). All multi-channel program material is auto-
matically mixed down to two channels, which may result
in a lowered apparent volume level. If you increase the
volume level to account for this change in level, remember
to lower the volume before changing the disc or to another
mode.
Recorded Discs
The DVD player will play CD-R and CD-RW discs re-
corded in CD-Audio or Video-CD format, or as a CD-ROM
containing MP3, WMA. The player will also play DVD-
Video content recorded to a DVD-R or DVD-RW disc.
DVD-ROM discs (either pressed or recorded) are not
supported.
If you record a disc using a personal computer, there may
be cases where the DVD player may not be able to play
some or the entire disc, even if it is recorded in a compat-
ible format and is playable on other players. To help avoid
playback problems, use the following guidelines when
recording discs.
• Open sessions are ignored. Only sessions that are closed
are playable.
• For multi-session CDs that contain only multiple CD-
Audio sessions, the player will renumber the tracks so
each track number is unique.
• For CD Data (or CD-ROM) discs, always use the ISO-
9660 (Level 1 or Level 2), Joliet, or Romeo format. Other
formats (such as HFS, or others) are not supported.
• The player recognizes a maximum of 512 files and 99
folders per CD-R and CD-RW disc.
10
MULTIMEDIA 435
• Mixed media recordable DVD formats will only play the
Video_TS portion of the disc.
If you are still having trouble writing a disc that is playable
in the DVD player, check with the disc recording software
publisher for more information about burning playable
discs.
The recommended method for labeling recordable discs
(CD-R, CD-RW, and DVD-R) is with a permanent marker.
Do not use adhesive labels as they may separate from the
disc, become stuck, and cause permanent damage to the
DVD player.
Compressed Audio Files (MP3 / WMA and ACC)
The DVD is capable of playing MP3 (MPEG-1 Audio Layer
3) and WMA (Windows Media Audio) files from a CD Data
disc (usually a CD-R or CD-RW).
• The DVD player always uses the file extension to
determine the audio format, so MP3 files must always
end with the extension ⬙.mp3⬙ or ⬙.MP3⬙ and WMA files
must always end with the extension ⬙.wma⬙ or ⬙.WMA.⬙
AAC files must always end with the extension ⬙aac⬙ or
⬙AAC.⬙ To prevent incorrect playback, do not use these
extensions for any other types of files.
• For MP3 files, only version 1 ID3 tag data (such as artist
name, track title, album, etc.) are supported.
• Any file that is copy protected (such as those down-
loaded from many online music stores) will not play. The
DVD player will automatically skip the file and begin
playing the next available file.
• Other compression formats such as AAC, MP3 Pro, Ogg
Vorbis, and ATRAC3 will not play. The DVD player will
automatically skip the file and begin playing the next
available file.
• If you are creating your own files, the recommended
fixed bit rate for MP3 files is between 96 and 192 Kbps
and the recommended fixed bit rate for WMA files is
between 64 and 192 Kbps. Variable bit rates are also
supported. For both formats, the recommended sample
rate is either 44.1 kHz or 48 kHz.
• To change the current file, use the DVD player’s 䉱
button to advance to the next file, or the 䉲 button to
return to the start of the current or previous file.
• To change the current directory, use the remote control’s
PROG UP and Down buttons or Rewind/skip back and
fast fwd/skip forward.
436 MULTIMEDIA
Disc Errors
If the DVD player is unable to read the disc, a ⬙Disc Error⬙
message is displayed on the Radio display and the disc is
automatically ejected. A dirty, damaged, or incompatible
disc format are all potential causes for a ⬙Disc Error⬙
message.
If a disc has a damaged track which results in audible or
visible errors that persists for 2.0 seconds, the DVD player
will attempt to continue playing the disc by skipping
forward 1.0 to 3.0 seconds at a time. If the end of the disc
is reached, the DVD player will return to the beginning of
the disc and attempt to play the start of the first track.
The DVD player may shut down during extremely hot
conditions, such as when the vehicle’s interior temperature
is above 120° F (49° C). When this occurs, the DVD Player
will display ⬙High Temp⬙ and will shut off the display until
a safe temperature is reached. This shutdown is necessary
to protect the optics of the DVD.
Display
Other Language Setup
All of the Language settings have a special ⬙Other⬙ setting
to accommodate languages other than Japanese or English.
These languages are selected using a special four-digit
code.
DVD Player Language Menu
10
MULTIMEDIA 437
To enter a new language code, activate the DVD Setup
Menu. To enter DVD Setup Menu stop the DVD, enter
radio disc mode, then DVD setup and follow these addi-
tional instructions:
• Using the remote control Up and Down cursor buttons,
highlight the Language item you want to edit, and then
push the remote control ENTER/OK button.
• Using the remote control Down cursor button, select the
⬙Other⬙ setting, then push the remote control’s Right
cursor button to begin editing the setting.
• Using the remote control Up and Down cursor buttons,
select a digit for the current position. After selecting the
digit, push the remote control’s Right cursor button to
select the next digit. Repeat this digit selection sequence
for all four digits.
• When the entire four-digit code is entered, push the
remote control’s ENTER/OK button. If the language
code is not valid, the numbers all change back to ⬙夡⬙.If
the digits are visible after this step, then the language
code is valid.
Here is an abbreviated list of language codes. For more
language codes, please contact the dealer where the vehicle
was purchased.
Language Code Language Code
Dutch 2311 French 1517
German 1304 Italian 1819
Portuguese 2519 Spanish 1418
Rating And Password Setup
The Rating and Password settings work together to control
the types of DVDs that your family watches. Most DVD-
Video discs have a rating (from 1 to 8) assigned to them
where lower numbers are designated for all audiences and
higher numbers are designated for more adult audiences.
When a DVD-Video disc is loaded, its rating is compared to
the setting in the DVD player. If the rating of the disc is
higher than the setting in the player, a Password screen is
displayed. In order to watch the disc, the rear passenger
must enter the correct password using the password entry
method described below.
To play all discs without requiring a password, set the
DVD player’s rating to Level 8. Setting the rating to Level
1 always requires the password to play any DVD disc. Not
all DVD discs encode a Rating, so it is still possible that
discs designed for adult audiences can still play without
requiring a password.
438 MULTIMEDIA
The default rating is Level 8 (play all discs without a
password) and the default password is 0000.
To set the password, activate the DVD Setup Menu and
follow these additional instructions:
• Using the remote control Left and Right cursor buttons,
select the Rating tab.
• Highlight ⬙Change Password⬙, and then push the remote
control’s ENTER/OK button.
• Enter the current password. Select a digit, use the remote
control Up and Down cursor buttons to set the value for
the current digit, and then push the remote control’s
Right cursor button to select the next digit. Repeat this
digit selection sequence for all four digits.
• After the four-digit password is entered, push the re-
mote control’s ENTER/OK button. If the password is
correct, the set password screen is displayed.
• Using the remote control’s Up and Down cursor buttons
to set the value for the current digit and the remote
control’s Right cursor button to select digits, enter the
new password.
DVD Password Entry
10
MULTIMEDIA 439
• After the four-digit password is entered, push the re-
mote control’s ENTER/OK button to accept the change.
To set the rating, activate the DVD Setup Menu and follow
these additional instructions:
• Using the remote control’s Left and Right cursor but-
tons, select the Rating tab.
• Highlight ⬙Change Rating⬙, and then push the remote
control’s ENTER/OK button.
• Enter the current password. Select a digit, use the remote
control’s Up and Down cursor buttons to set the value
for the current digit, and then push the remote control’s
Right cursor button to select the next digit. Repeat this
digit selection sequence for all four digits.
• After the four-digit password is entered, push the re-
mote control’s ENTER/OK button. If the password is
correct, the Rating Level menu is displayed.
• Using the remote control’s Up and Down cursor buttons,
select the new rating level, and then push the remote
control’s ENTER/OK button to accept the change.
Product Agreement
Software
This product contains software licensed under GNU Gen-
eral Public License (GPL) or GNU Lesser General Public
License (LGPL), etc. You have the right of acquisition,
modification, and distribution of the source code of the
GPL/LGPL software. You may download Source Code
from the following website at no charge.
DVD Player Level Menu
440 MULTIMEDIA
http://www.embedded-carmultimedia.jp/linux/oss/
download/MP_632_34W821
The website provides the Source Code ⬙As Is⬙ and without
warranty of any kind. By downloading Source Code, you
expressly assume all risk and liability associated with
downloading and using the Source Code and complying
with the user agreements that accompany each Source
Code. Please note that we cannot respond to any inquiries
regarding the source code.
• THIS PRODUCT IS LICENSED UNDER THE AVC PAT-
ENT PORTFOLIO LICENSE FOR THE PERSONAL
AND NON-COMMERCIAL USE OF A CONSUMER TO
(i) ENCODE VIDEO IN COMPLIANCE WITH THE
AVC STANDARD (⬙AVC VIDEO⬙) AND/OR (ii) DE-
CODE AVC VIDEO THAT WAS ENCODED BY A CON-
SUMER ENGAGED IN A PERSONAL AND NON-
COMMERCIAL ACTIVITY AND/OR WAS OBTAINED
FROM A VIDEO PROVIDER LICENSED TO PROVIDE
AVC VIDEO. NO LICENSE IS GRANTED OR SHALL
BE IMPLIED FOR ANY OTHER USE. ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION MAY BE OBTAINED FROM MPEG
LA, L.L.C. SEE HTTP://WWW.MPEGLA.COM.
• THIS PRODUCT IS LICENSED UNDER THE VC-1
PATENT PORTFOLIO LICENSE FOR THE PERSONAL
AND NON-COMMERCIAL USE OF A CONSUMER TO
(i) ENCODE VIDEO IN COMPLIANCE WITH THE
VC-1 STANDARD (⬙VC-1 VIDEO⬙) AND/OR (ii) DE-
CODE VC-1 VIDEO THAT WAS ENCODED BY A
CONSUMER ENGAGED IN A PERSONAL AND NON-
COMMERCIAL ACTIVITY AND/OR WAS OBTAINED
FROM A VIDEO PROVIDER LICENSED TO PROVIDE
VC-1 VIDEO. NO LICENSE IS GRANTED OR SHALL
BE IMPLIED FOR ANY OTHER USE. ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION MAY BE OBTAINED FROM MPEG
LA, L.L.C. SEE HTTP://WWW.MPEGLA.COM.
Patents
Cinavia Notice
This product uses Cinavia technology to limit the use of
unauthorized copies of some commercially-produced film
and videos and their soundtracks. When a prohibited use
of an unauthorized copy is detected, a message will be
displayed and playback or copying will be interrupted.
More information about Cinavia technology is provided at
the Cinavia Online Consumer Information Center at
http://www.cinavia.com. To request additional informa-
tion about Cinavia by mail, send a postcard with your
mailing address to: Cinavia Consumer Information Center,
P.O. Box 86851, San Diego, CA, 92138, USA.
10
MULTIMEDIA 441
This product incorporates proprietary technology under
license from Verance Corporation and is protected by U.S.
Patent 7,369,677 and other U.S. and worldwide patents
issued and pending as well as copyright and trade secret
protection for certain aspects of such technology. Cinavia is
a trademark of Verance Corporation. Copyright 2004-2010
Verance Corporation. All rights reserved by Verance. Re-
verse engineering or disassembly is prohibited.
• This product incorporates copyright protection technol-
ogy that is protected by U.S. patents and other intellec-
tual property rights. Use of this copyright protection
technology must be authorized by Macrovision, and is
intended for home and other limited viewing uses only
unless otherwise authorized by Macrovision. Reverse
engineering or disassembly is prohibited.
• Manufactured under license under U.S. Patent #’s:
5,451,942; 5,956,674; 5,974,380; 5,978,762; 6,487,535 &
other U.S. and worldwide patents issued & pending.
DTS is a registered trademark and the DTS logos,
Symbol and DTS 2.0 Channel are trademarks of DTS,
Inc. © 1996-2007 DTS, Inc. All Rights Reserved.
• Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories.
Dolby and the double-D symbol are trademarks of
Dolby Laboratories.
ABOUT DIVX VIDEO: DivX is a digital video format
created by DivX, LLC, a subsidiary of Rovi Corporation.
This is an official DivX Certified device that plays DivX
video. Visit divx.com for more information and software
tools to convert your files into DivX videos.
ABOUT DIVX VIDEO-ON-DEMAND: This DivX Certified
device must be registered in order to play purchased DivX
Video-on-Demand (VOD) movies. To obtain your registra-
tion code, locate the DivX VOD section in your device
setup menu. Go to vod.divx.com for more information on
how to complete your registration.
DivX, DivX Certified and associated logos are trademarks
of Rovi Corporation or its subsidiaries and are used under
license.
Trademark
• Java is a registered trademark of Oracle and/or its
affiliates.
CAUTION!
Use of controls or adjustments or performance of
procedures other than those specified herein may re-
sult in hazardous radiation exposure.
442 MULTIMEDIA
UCONNECT PHONE — IF EQUIPPED
Uconnect Phone is a voice-activated, hands-free, in-vehicle
communications system. Uconnect Phone allows you to
dial a phone number with your mobile phone* using
simple voice commands (e.g., “Call” ѧ “Mike” ѧ “Work” or
“Dial” ѧ “248-555-1212”). Your mobile phone’s audio is
transmitted through your vehicle’s audio system; the sys-
tem automatically mutes your radio when using the
Uconnect Phone.
NOTE: The Uconnect Phone requires a mobile phone
equipped with the Bluetooth “Hands-Free Profile,” Version
0.96 or higher. See the Uconnect website for supported
phones. For Uconnect customer support:
• U.S. residents - visit UconnectPhone.com or call 1-877-
855-8400 (24 hours a day 7 days a week).
• Canadian Residents - visit UconnectPhone.com or call
1-800-465-2001 (English) or 1-800-387-9983 (French).
• Mon. – Fri., 8:00 am – 8:00 pm, ET
• Sat., 9:00 am – 5:00 pm, ET
• Sun., Closed
Uconnect Phone allows you to transfer calls between the
system and your mobile phone as you enter or exit your
vehicle and enables you to mute the system’s microphone
for private conversation.
The Uconnect Phone is driven through your Bluetooth
“Hands-Free Profile” mobile phone. Uconnect features
Bluetooth technology - the global standard that enables
different electronic devices to connect to each other with-
out wires or a docking station, so Uconnect Phone works
no matter where you stow your mobile phone (be it your
purse, pocket, or briefcase), as long as your phone is turned
on and has been paired to the vehicle’s Uconnect Phone.
The Uconnect Phone allows up to seven mobile phones to
be linked to the system. Only one linked (or paired) mobile
phone can be used with the system at a time. The system is
available in English, Spanish, or French languages.
WARNING!
ALWAYS drive safely with your hands on the wheel.
You have full responsibility and assume all risks
related to the use of the Uconnect features and appli-
cations in this vehicle. Only use Uconnect when it is
safe to do so. Failure to do so may result in an accident
involving serious injury or death.
10
MULTIMEDIA 443
Uconnect Phone Button
The radio or steering wheel controls (if
equipped) contain the two control buttons
(Uconnect Phone
button and Voice Com-
mand button) that enables you to access the
system. When you push the button you hear the word
Uconnect followed by a BEEP. The beep is your signal to
give a command.
NOTE: The driver side upper windshield trim contains the
microphone for the Uconnect Phone.
Voice Command Button
WARNING!
Any voice commanded system should be used only in
safe driving conditions following all applicable laws.
Your attention should be focused on safely operating
the vehicle. Failure to do so may result in a collision
causing serious injury or death.
Actual button location may vary with the radio.
The individual buttons are described in the “Op-
eration” section.
The Uconnect Phone can be used with any Hands-Free
Profile certified Bluetooth mobile phone. See the Uconnect
website for supported phones. Refer to your mobile service
provider or the phone manufacturer for details.
The Uconnect Phone is fully integrated with the vehicle’s
audio system. The volume of the Uconnect Phone can be
adjusted either from the radio volume control knob or from
the steering wheel radio control (right switch), if so
equipped.
The Uconnect display will be used for visual prompts from
the Uconnect Phone such as “CELL” or caller ID on certain
radios.
Operation
Voice commands can be used to operate the Uconnect
Phone and to navigate through the Uconnect Phone menu
structure. Voice commands are required after most
Uconnect Phone prompts. You will be prompted for a
specific command and then guided through the available
options.
• Prior to giving a voice command, one must wait for the
beep, which follows the “Ready” prompt or another
prompt.
444 MULTIMEDIA
• For certain operations, compound commands can be
used. For example, instead of saying “Setup” and then
“Phone Pairing,” the following compound command
can be said: “Setup Phone Pairing.”
• For each feature explanation in this section, only the
compound form of the voice command is given. You can
also break the commands into parts and say each part of
the command when you are asked for it. For example,
you can use the compound form voice command
“Phonebook New Entry,” or you can break the com-
pound form command into two voice commands:
“Phonebook” and “New Entry.” Please remember, the
Uconnect Phone works best when you talk in a normal
conversational tone, as if speaking to someone sitting a
few feet/meters away from you.
Voice Command Tree
Refer to “Voice Tree” in this section.
Help Command
If you need assistance at any prompt, or if you want to
know your options at any prompt, say “Help” following
the beep. The Uconnect Phone will play all the options at
any prompt if you ask for help.
To activate the Uconnect Phone from idle, simply push the
Phone
button and follow the audible prompts for
directions. All Uconnect Phone sessions begin with a
push of the Phone
button on the faceplate.
Cancel Command
At any prompt, after the beep, you can say “Cancel” and
you will be returned to the main menu. However, in a few
instances the system will take you back to the previous
menu.
Pair (Link) Uconnect Phone To A Mobile Phone
To begin using your Uconnect Phone, you must pair your
compatible Bluetooth enabled mobile phone.
To complete the pairing process, you will need to reference
your mobile phone Owner’s Manual. The Uconnect web-
site may also provide detailed instructions for pairing.
The following are general phone to Uconnect Phone pair-
ing instructions:
• Push the Phone
button to begin.
• After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
“Setup Phone Pairing.”
• When prompted, after the beep, say “Pair a Phone” and
follow the audible prompts.
10
MULTIMEDIA 445
• You will be asked to say a four-digit Personal Identifi-
cation Number (PIN), which you will later need to enter
into your mobile phone. You can enter any four-digit
PIN. You will not need to remember this PIN after the
initial pairing process.
• For identification purposes, you will be prompted to
give the Uconnect Phone a name for your mobile phone.
Each mobile phone that is paired should be given a
unique phone name.
• You will then be asked to give your mobile phone a
priority level between one and seven, with one being the
highest priority. You can pair up to seven mobile phones
to your Uconnect Phone. However, at any given time,
only one mobile phone can be in use, connected to your
Uconnect System. The priority allows the Uconnect
Phone to know which mobile phone to use if multiple
mobile phones are in the vehicle at the same time. For
example, if priority three and priority five phones are
present in the vehicle, the Uconnect Phone will use the
priority three mobile phone when you make a call. You
can select to use a lower priority mobile phone at any
time (refer to “Advanced Phone Connectivity” in this
section).
NOTE: Software updates on your phone or the Uconnect
system may interfere with the Bluetooth connection. If this
happens, simply repeat the pairing process. However, first,
make sure to delete the device from the list of phones on
your Uconnect system. Next, be sure to remove Uconnect
from the list of devices in your phone’s Bluetooth settings.
Dial By Saying A Number
• Push the Phone
button to begin.
• After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
“Dial.”
• The system will prompt you to say the number you want
to call.
• For example, you can say “234-567-8901.”
• The Uconnect Phone will confirm the phone number
and then dial. The number will appear in the display of
certain radios.
Call By Saying A Name
• Push the Phone
button to begin.
• After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
“Call.”
446 MULTIMEDIA
• The system will prompt you to say the name of the
person you want to call.
• After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
the name of the person you want to call. For example,
you can say “John Doe,” where John Doe is a previously
stored name entry in the Uconnect phonebook or down-
loaded phonebook. To learn how to store a name in the
phonebook, refer to “Add Names To Your Uconnect
Phonebook,” in this section.
• The Uconnect system will confirm the name and then
dial the corresponding phone number, which may ap-
pear in the display of certain radios.
Phonebook Download – Automatic Phonebook
Transfer From Mobile Phone
If equipped and specifically supported by your phone,
Uconnect Phone automatically downloads names (text
names) and number entries from your mobile phone’s
phonebook. Specific Bluetooth Phones with Phone Book
Access Profile may support this feature. See Uconnect
website for supported phones.
• To call a name from downloaded (or Uconnect) Phone-
book, follow the procedure in “Call by Saying a Name”
section.
• Automatic download and update, if supported, begins
as soon as the Bluetooth wireless phone connection is
made to the Uconnect Phone, for example, after you start
the vehicle.
• A maximum of 1,000 entries per phone will be down-
loaded and updated every time a phone is connected to
the Uconnect Phone.
• Depending on the maximum number of entries down-
loaded, there may be a short delay before the latest
downloaded names can be used. Until then, if available,
the previous downloaded phonebook is available for
use.
• Only the phonebook of the currently connected mobile
phone is accessible.
• Only the mobile phone’s phonebook is downloaded.
SIM card phonebook is not part of the Mobile phone-
book.
• This downloaded phonebook cannot be edited or de-
leted on the Uconnect Phone. These can only be edited
on the mobile phone. The changes are transferred and
updated to Uconnect Phone on the next phone connec-
tion.
10
MULTIMEDIA 447
Add Names To Your Uconnect Phonebook
NOTE: Adding names to the Uconnect Phonebook is
recommended when the vehicle is not in motion.
• Push the Phone
button to begin.
• After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
“Phonebook New Entry.”
• When prompted, say the name of the new entry. Use of
long names helps the Voice Command and it is recom-
mended. For example, say “Robert Smith” or “Robert”
instead of “Bob.”
• When prompted, enter the number designation (e.g.,
“Home,” “Work,” “Mobile,” or “Other”). This will allow
you to store multiple numbers for each phonebook entry,
if desired.
• When prompted, recite the phone number for the phone-
book entry that you are adding.
After you are finished adding an entry into the phonebook,
you will be given the opportunity to add more phone
numbers to the current entry or to return to the main menu.
The Uconnect Phone will allow you to enter up to 32 names
in the phonebook with each name having up to four
associated phone numbers and designations. Each lan-
guage has a separate 32-name phonebook accessible only
in that language. In addition, if equipped and supported
by your phone, Uconnect Phone automatically downloads
your mobile phone’s phonebook.
Edit Uconnect Phonebook Entries
• Push the Phone
button to begin.
• After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
“Phonebook Edit.”
• You will then be asked for the name of the phonebook
entry that you wish to edit.
• Next, choose the number designation (home, work,
mobile, or other) that you wish to edit.
• When prompted, recite the new phone number for the
phonebook entry that you are editing.
After you are finished editing an entry in the phonebook,
you will be given the opportunity to edit another entry in
the phonebook, call the number you just edited, or return
to the main menu.
448 MULTIMEDIA
NOTE:
• Editing names in the phonebook is recommended when
the vehicle is not in motion.
• Automatic downloaded phonebook entries cannot be
deleted or edited.
“Phonebook Edit” can be used to add another phone
number to a name entry that already exists in the phone-
book. For example, the entry John Doe may have a mobile
and a home number, but you can add “John Doe’s” work
number later using the “Phonebook Edit” feature.
Delete Uconnect Phonebook Entry
NOTE: Editing phonebook entries is recommended when
the vehicle is not in motion.
To delete a Uconnect phonebook entry using Voice Com-
mands:
1. Push the Phone
button to begin.
2. After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
“Phonebook Delete.”
3. After you enter the Phonebook Delete menu, you will
then be asked for the name of the entry that you wish to
delete. You can either say the name of a phonebook
entry that you wish to delete, or you can say “List
Names” to hear a list of the entries in the phonebook
from which you choose. To select one of the entries from
the list, push the Voice Command
button while the
Uconnect Phone is playing the desired entry and say
“Delete.”
4. After you enter the name, the Uconnect Phone will ask
you which designation you wish to delete: home, work,
mobile, other, or all. Say the designation you wish to
delete.
• Note that only the phonebook entry in the current
language is deleted.
NOTE: Automatic downloaded phonebook entries cannot
be deleted or edited.
Delete/Erase “All” Uconnect Phonebook Entries
NOTE:
• ONLY the phonebook in the current language is deleted.
• Automatic downloaded phonebook entries cannot be
deleted or edited.
To delete or erase all Uconnect phonebook entries using
Voice Command:
1. Push the Phone
button to begin.
10
MULTIMEDIA 449
2. After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
“Phonebook Erase All.”
• The Uconnect Phone will ask you to verify that you
wish to delete all the entries from the phonebook.
3. After confirmation, the phonebook entries will be de-
leted.
List All Names In The Uconnect Phonebook
• Push the Phone
button to begin.
• After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
“Phonebook List Names.”
• The Uconnect Phone will play the names of all the
phonebook entries, including the downloaded phone-
book entries, if available.
• To call one of the names in the list, push the Voice
Command
button during the playing of the desired
name, and say “Call.”
NOTE: The user can also exercise “Edit” or “Delete”
operations at this point.
• The Uconnect Phone will then prompt you as to the
number designation you wish to call.
• The selected number will be dialed.
Phone Call Features
The following features can be accessed through the
Uconnect Phone if the feature(s) are available on your
mobile service plan. For example, if your mobile service
plan provides three-way calling, this feature can be ac-
cessed through the Uconnect Phone. Check with your
mobile service provider for the features that you have.
Answer Or Reject An Incoming Call — No Call
Currently In Progress
When you receive a call on your mobile phone, the
Uconnect Phone will interrupt the vehicle audio system, if
on, and will ask if you would like to answer the call. Push
the Phone
button to accept the call. To reject the call,
push and hold the Phone
button until you hear a
single beep, indicating that the incoming call was re-
jected.
Answer Or Reject An Incoming Call — Call
Currently In Progress
If a call is currently in progress and you have another
incoming call, you will hear the same network tones for
call waiting that you normally hear when using your
mobile phone. Push the Phone
button to place the
current call on hold and answer the incoming call.
450 MULTIMEDIA
NOTE: The Uconnect Phone compatible phones in the
market today do not support rejecting an incoming call
when another call is in progress. Therefore, the user can
only answer an incoming call or ignore it.
Making A Second Call While Current Call Is In
Progress
To make a second call while you are currently on a call,
push the Voice Command
button and say “Dial” or
“Call” followed by the phone number or phonebook
entry you wish to call. The first call will be on hold
while the second call is in progress. To go back to the
first call, refer to “Toggling Between Calls” in this
section. To combine two calls, refer to “Conference Call”
in this section.
Place/Retrieve A Call From Hold
To put a call on hold, push the Phone
button until you
hear a single beep. This indicates that the call is on hold.
To bring the call back from hold, push and hold the
Phone
button until you hear a single beep.
Toggling Between Calls
If two calls are in progress (one active and one on hold),
push the Phone
button until you hear a single beep,
indicating that the active and hold status of the two calls
have switched. Only one call can be placed on hold at a
time.
Conference Call
When two calls are in progress (one active and one on
hold):
1. Push and hold the Phone
button until you hear a
double beep, indicating that the two calls have been
joined into one conference call.
Three-Way Calling
To initiate three-way calling, push the Voice Command
button while a call is in progress, and make a second
phone call, as described under “Making a Second Call
While Current Call is in Progress.” After the second call
has established, push and hold the Phone
button
until you hear a double beep, indicating that the two
calls have been joined into one conference call.
10
MULTIMEDIA 451
Call Termination
To end a call in progress:
1. Momentarily push the Phone
button.
• Only the active call(s) will be terminated and if there is
a call on hold, it will become the new active call. If the
active call is terminated by the phone far end, a call on
hold may not become active automatically. This is cell
phone-dependent.
2. To bring the call back from hold, push and hold the
Phone
button until you hear a single beep.
Redial
To redial the last number called from your mobile phone
using Voice Command:
1. Push the Phone
button to begin.
2. After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
“Redial.”
• The Uconnect Phone will call the last number that was
dialed from your mobile phone.
NOTE: This may not be the last number dialed from the
Uconnect Phone.
Call Continuation
Call continuation is the progression of a phone call on the
Uconnect Phone after the vehicle ignition has been
switched to OFF. Call continuation functionality available
on the vehicle can be any one of three types:
1. After the ignition is switched to OFF, a call can continue
on the Uconnect Phone either until the call ends, or until
the vehicle battery condition dictates cessation of the
call on the Uconnect Phone and transfer of the call to the
mobile phone.
2. After the ignition is cycled to OFF, a call can continue on
the Uconnect Phone for a certain duration, after which
the call is automatically transferred from the Uconnect
Phone to the mobile phone.
3. An active call is automatically transferred to the mobile
phone after the ignition is cycled to OFF.
Uconnect Phone Features
Language Selection
To change the language that the Uconnect Phone is using:
• Push the Phone
button to begin.
452 MULTIMEDIA
• After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
the name of the language you wish to switch to English,
Espanol, or Francais.
• Continue to follow the system prompts to complete the
language selection.
After selecting one of the languages, all prompts and voice
commands will be in that language.
NOTE: After every Uconnect Phone language change
operation, only the language-specific 32-name phonebook
is usable. The paired phone name is not language-specific
and usable across all languages.
Emergency Assistance
If you are in an emergency and the mobile phone is
reachable:
• Pick up the phone and manually dial the emergency
number for your area.
If the phone is not reachable and the Uconnect Phone is
operational, you may reach the emergency number as
follows:
• Push the Phone
button to begin.
• After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
“Emergency” and the Uconnect Phone will instruct the
paired mobile phone to call the emergency number.
NOTE:
• The emergency number dialed is based on the country
where the vehicle is purchased (911 for the U.S. and
Canada and 060 for Mexico). The number dialed may
not be applicable with the available mobile service and
area.
• If supported, this number may be programmable on
some systems. To do this, push the Phone
button and
say “Setup,” followed by “Emergency.”
• The Uconnect Phone does slightly lower your chances of
successfully making a phone call as to that for the
mobile phone directly.
WARNING!
To use your Uconnect Phone System in an emergency,
your mobile phone must be:
• Turned on.
• Paired to the Uconnect System.
• Have network coverage.
10
MULTIMEDIA 453
Roadside Assistance/Towing Assistance
If you need roadside assistance:
• Push the Phone
button to begin.
• After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
“Towing Assistance.”
NOTE: You should program the desired Towing Assistance
phone number using the Voice Command system. To do
this, push the Phone
button and say “Setup,” fol-
lowed by “Towing Assistance.” When prompted say
1-800-521-2779 for U.S., 1-800-363-4869 for Canada, 55-
14-3454 for Mexico City and 1-800-712-3040 for outside
Mexico City in Mexico.
Paging
To learn how to page, refer to “Working With Automated
Systems.” Paging works properly except for pagers of
certain companies, which time out a little too soon to work
properly with the Uconnect Phone.
Voice Mail Calling
To learn how to access your voice mail, refer to “Working
With Automated Systems.”
Working With Automated Systems
This method is used in instances where one generally has
to press numbers on the mobile phone keypad while
navigating through an automated telephone system.
You can use your Uconnect Phone to access a voice mail
system or an automated service, such as a paging service or
automated customer service line. Some services require
immediate response selection. In some instances, that may
be too quick for use of the Uconnect Phone.
When calling a number with your Uconnect Phone that
normally requires you to enter in a touch-tone sequence on
your mobile phone keypad, you can push the Voice Com-
mand
button and say the sequence you wish to enter,
followed by the word “Send.” For example, if required
to enter your PIN followed with a pound, (3746#),you
can push the Voice Command
button and say, “3 7 4
6 # Send.” Saying a number, or sequence of numbers,
followed by “Send,” is also to be used for navigating
through an automated customer service center menu
structure, and to leave a number on a pager.
You can also send stored Uconnect Phonebook entries as
tones for fast and easy access to voice mail and pager
entries. To use this feature, dial the number you wish to call
and then push the Voice Command
button and say,
454 MULTIMEDIA
“Send.” The system will prompt you to enter the name
or number and say the name of the phonebook entry
you wish to send. The Uconnect Phone will then send
the corresponding phone number associated with the
phonebook entry, as tones over the phone.
NOTE:
• You may not hear all of the tones due to mobile phone
network configurations. This is normal.
• Some paging and voice mail systems have system time
out settings that are too short and may not allow the use
of this feature.
Barge In – Overriding Prompts
The “Voice Command” button can be used when you wish
to skip part of a prompt and issue your voice command
immediately. For example, if a prompt is asking “Would
you like to pair a phone, clear a...,” you could push the
Voice Command
button and say, “Pair a Phone” to
select that option without having to listen to the rest of
the voice prompt.
Turning Confirmation Prompts On/Off
Turning confirmation prompts off will stop the system
from confirming your choices (e.g., the Uconnect Phone
will not repeat a phone number before you dial it).
To turn confirmation prompts on or off using Voice Com-
mand:
1. Push the Phone
button to begin.
2. After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say:
• “Setup Confirmations Prompts On”
• “Setup Confirmations Prompts Off”
Phone And Network Status Indicators
If available on the radio and/or on a premium display such
as the instrument panel cluster, and supported by your
mobile phone, the Uconnect Phone will provide notifica-
tion to inform you of your phone and network status when
you are attempting to make a phone call using Uconnect
Phone. The status is given for roaming, network signal
strength, phone battery strength, etc.
10
MULTIMEDIA 455
Dialing Using The Mobile Phone Keypad
You can dial a phone number with your mobile phone
keypad and still use the Uconnect Phone (while dialing via
the mobile phone keypad, the user must exercise caution
and take precautionary safety measures). By dialing a
number with your paired Bluetooth mobile phone, the
audio will be played through your vehicles audio system.
The Uconnect Phone will work the same as if you dial the
number using Voice Command.
NOTE: Certain brands of mobile phones do not send the
dial ring to the Uconnect Phone to play it on the vehicle
audio system, so you will not hear it. Under this situation,
after successfully dialing a number the user may feel that
the call did not go through even though the call is in
progress. Once your call is answered, you will hear the
audio.
Mute/Un-Mute (Mute ON/OFF)
When you mute the Uconnect Phone, you will still be able
to hear the conversation coming from the other party, but
the other party will not be able to hear you. To mute the
Uconnect Phone:
• Push the Voice Command
button.
• Following the beep, say “Mute.”
To un-mute the Uconnect Phone:
• Push the Voice Command
button.
• Following the beep, say “Mute off.”
Advanced Phone Connectivity
Transfer Call To And From Mobile Phone
The Uconnect Phone allows ongoing calls to be transferred
from your mobile phone to the Uconnect Phone without
terminating the call. To transfer an ongoing call from your
Uconnect Phone paired mobile phone to the Uconnect
Phone or vice versa, push the Voice Command
button
and say “Transfer Call.”
Connect Or Disconnect Link Between The Uconnect
Phone And Mobile Phone
Your mobile phone can be paired with many different
electronic devices, but can only be actively ⬙connected⬙
with one electronic device at a time.
If you would like to connect or disconnect the Bluetooth
connection between a Uconnect Phone paired mobile
phone and the Uconnect Phone, follow the instructions
described in your mobile phone user manual.
456 MULTIMEDIA
List Paired Mobile Phone Names
• Push the Phone
button to begin.
• After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
“Setup Phone Pairing.”
• When prompted, say “List Phones.”
• The Uconnect Phone will play the phone names of all
paired mobile phones in order from the highest to the
lowest priority. To “Select” or “Delete” a paired phone
being announced, push the Voice Command
button
and say “Select” or “Delete.” Also, see the next two
sections for an alternate way to “Select” or “Delete” a
paired phone.
Select Another Mobile Phone
This feature allows you to select and start using another
phone paired with the Uconnect Phone.
• Push the Phone
button to begin.
• After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
“Setup Select Phone” and follow the prompts.
• You can also push the Voice Command
button at any
time while the list is being played, and then choose
the phone that you wish to select.
• The selected phone will be used for the next phone call.
If the selected phone is not available, the Uconnect
Phone will return to using the highest priority phone
present in or near (approximately within 30 ft (9 m) of
the vehicle.
Delete Uconnect Phone Paired Mobile Phones
• Push the Phone
button to begin.
• After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
“Setup Phone Pairing.”
• At the next prompt, say “Delete” and follow the
prompts.
• You can also push the Voice Command
button at any
time while the list is being played, and then choose
the phone you wish to delete.
Things You Should Know About Your Uconnect
Phone
Uconnect Phone Tutorial
To hear a brief tutorial of the system features, push the
Phone
button and say “Uconnect Tutorial.”
10
MULTIMEDIA 457
Voice Training
For users experiencing difficulty with the system recogniz-
ing their voice commands or numbers, the Uconnect Phone
Voice Training feature may be used. To enter this training
mode, follow one of the two following procedures:
• From outside the Uconnect Phone mode (e.g., from radio
mode), push and hold the Voice Command
button
for five seconds until the session begins, or,
• Push the Voice Command
button and say the “Voice
Training,” “System Training,” or “Start Voice Train-
ing” command.
You can either push the Uconnect Phone button to restore
the factory setting or repeat the words and phrases when
prompted by the Uconnect Phone. For best results, the
Voice Training session should be completed when the
vehicle is parked with the engine running, all windows
closed, and the blower fan switched off.
This procedure may be repeated with a new user. The
system will adapt to the last trained voice only.
Reset
To Reset all settings using Voice Command:
1. Push the Phone
button.
2. After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
“Setup,” then “Reset.”
• This will delete all phone pairing, phone book entries,
and other settings in all language modes. The System
will prompt you before resetting to factory settings.
Voice Command
For best performance:
• Adjust the rearview mirror to provide at least ½ inch (1
cm) gap between the overhead console (if equipped) and
the mirror.
• Always wait for the beep before speaking.
• Speak normally without pausing, just as you would
speak to a person sitting a few feet/meters away from
you.
• Make sure that no one other than you is speaking during
a Voice Command period.
Performance is maximized under:
• Low-to-medium blower setting
• Low-to-medium vehicle speed
• Low road noise
• Smooth road surface
458 MULTIMEDIA
• Fully closed windows
• Dry weather condition
NOTE:
• Even though the system is designed for users speaking
in North American English, French, and Spanish accents,
the system may not always work for some.
• When navigating through an automated system such as
voice mail, or when sending a page, at the end of
speaking the digit string, make sure to say “Send.”
• Storing names in the phonebook when the vehicle is not
in motion is recommended.
• It is not recommended to store similar sounding names
in the Uconnect Phonebook.
• Phonebook (Downloaded and Uconnect Phone Local)
name recognition rate is optimized when the entries are
not similar.
• Numbers must be spoken in single digits. “800” must be
spoken “eight-zero-zero” not “eight hundred.”
• You can say “O” (letter “O”) for “0” (zero).
• Even though international dialing for most number
combinations is supported, some shortcut dialing num-
ber combinations may not be supported.
Far End Audio Performance
Audio quality is maximized under:
• Low-to-medium blower setting
• Low-to-medium vehicle speed
• Low road noise
• Smooth road surface
• Fully closed windows
• Dry weather conditions
• Operation from the driver’s seat
• Performance, such as audio clarity, echo, and loudness
to a large degree rely on the phone and network, and not
the Uconnect Phone
• Echo at the phone far end can sometimes be reduced by
lowering the in-vehicle audio volume
10
MULTIMEDIA 459
Recent Calls
If your phone supports “Automatic Phonebook Down-
load,” Uconnect Phone can list your Outgoing, Incoming
and Missed Calls.
SMS
Uconnect Phone can read or send new messages on your
phone.
Read Messages:
If you receive a new text message while your phone is
connected to Uconnect Phone, an announcement will be
made to notify you that you have a new text message. If
you wish to hear the new message:
1. Push the Phone
button.
2. After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
“SMS Read” or “Read Messages.”
• Uconnect Phone will play the new text message for
you.
After reading a message, you can “Reply” or “Forward”
the message using Uconnect Phone.
Send Messages:
You can send messages using Uconnect Phone. To send a
new message:
1. Push the Phone
button.
2. After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
“SMS Send” or “Send Message.”
3. You can either say the message you wish to send or say
“List Messages.” There are 20 preset messages.
To send a message, push the Voice Command
button
while the system is listing the message and say “Send.”
Uconnect Phone will prompt you to say the name or
number of the person you wish to send the message to.
460 MULTIMEDIA
List of Preset Messages:
1. Yes
2. No
3. Where are you?
4. I need more direction
5. L O L
6. Why
7. I love you
8. Call me
9. Call me later
10. Thanks
11. See You in 15 minutes
12. I am on my way
13. I’ll be late
14. Are you there yet?
15. Where are we meeting?
16. Can this wait?
17. Bye for now
18. When can we meet?
19. Send number to call
20. Start without me
Turn SMS Incoming Announcement ON/OFF
Turning the SMS Incoming Announcement OFF will stop
the system from announcing the new incoming messages.
1. Push the Phone
button.
2. After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
“Setup, SMS Incoming Message Announcement,” you
will then be given a choice to change it.
Bluetooth Communication Link
Mobile phones have been found to lose connection to the
Uconnect Phone. When this happens, the connection can
generally be reestablished by switching the phone off/on.
Your mobile phone is recommended to remain in Bluetooth
ON mode.
Power-Up
After switching the ignition key from OFF to either the ON
or ACC position, or after a language change, you must wait
at least 15 seconds prior to using the system.
10
MULTIMEDIA 461
Voice Tree Main Menu
462 MULTIMEDIA
Voice Tree Phonebook
10
MULTIMEDIA 463
Voice Tree Setup
464 MULTIMEDIA
Voice Commands
Primary Alternate (s)
zero
one
two
three
four
five
six
seven
eight
nine
star (*)
plus (+)
pound (#)
add location
all
call
cancel
confirmation prompts
continue
Primary Alternate (s)
delete
dial
download
edit
emergency
English
erase all
Espanol
Francais
help
home
language
list names
list phones
mobile
mute
mute off
new entry
no
other
10
MULTIMEDIA 465
Primary Alternate (s)
pair a phone
phone pairing pairing
phonebook phone book
previous
record again
redial
return to main menu return or main menu
select phone select
send
set up phone settings or phone
set up
towing assistance
transfer call
Uconnect Tutorial
voice training
work
yes
General Information
The following regulatory statement applies to all Radio
Frequency (RF) devices equipped in this vehicle:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and
with Industry Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s).
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference received, in-
cluding interference that may cause undesired opera-
tion.
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved
by the party responsible for compliance could void the
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE PHONES
Under certain conditions, the mobile phone being on in
your vehicle can cause erratic or noisy performance from
your radio. This condition may be lessened or eliminated
by relocating the mobile phone antenna. This condition is
not harmful to the radio. If your radio performance does
466 MULTIMEDIA
not satisfactorily “clear” by the repositioning of the an-
tenna, it is recommended that the radio volume be turned
down or off during mobile phone operation when not
using Uconnect (if equipped).
Regulatory And Safety Information
USA/CANADA
Exposure to Radio Frequency Radiation
The radiated output power of the internal wireless radio is
far below the FCC and IC radio frequency exposure limits.
Nevertheless, the wireless radio will be used in such a
manner that the radio is 8 in (20 cm) or further from the
human body.
The internal wireless radio operates within guidelines
found in radio frequency safety standards and recommen-
dations, which reflect the consensus of the scientific com-
munity.
The radio manufacturer believes the internal wireless radio
is safe for use by consumers. The level of energy emitted is
far less than the electromagnetic energy emitted by wire-
less devices such as mobile phones. However, the use of
wireless radios may be restricted in some situations or
environments, such as aboard airplanes. If you are unsure
of restrictions, you are encouraged to ask for authorization
before turning on the wireless radio.
The following regulatory statement applies to all Radio
Frequency (RF) devices equipped in this vehicle:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and
with Industry Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s).
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference received, in-
cluding interference that may cause undesired opera-
tion.
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved
by the party responsible for compliance could void the
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
10
MULTIMEDIA 467
NOTE:
• This equipment has been tested and found to comply
with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to
Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to
provide reasonable protection against harmful interfer-
ence in a residential installation. This equipment gener-
ates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if
not installed and used in accordance with the instruc-
tions, may cause harmful interference to radio commu-
nications. However, there is no guarantee that interfer-
ence will not occur in a particular installation.
• If this equipment does cause harmful interference to
radio or television reception, which can be determined
by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encour-
aged to try to correct the interference by one or more of
the following measures:
1. Increase the separation between the equipment and
receiver.
2. Consult an authorized dealer or an experienced radio
technician for help.
VOICE COMMAND — IF EQUIPPED
Voice Command System Operation
The Uconnect Voice Command system allows
you to control your AM, FM radio, disk player,
USB mass storage class device, iPod family of
devices, Bluetooth Streaming Audio Device, sat-
ellite radio, and a memo recorder.
NOTE: Take care to speak into the Voice Interface System
as calmly and normally as possible. The ability of the Voice
Interface System to recognize user voice commands may be
negatively affected by rapid speaking or a raised voice
level.
WARNING!
Any voice commanded system should be used only in
safe driving conditions following all applicable laws.
Your attention should be focused on safely operating
the vehicle. Failure to do so may result in a collision
causing serious injury or death.
When you push the Voice Command
button, you will
hear a beep. The beep is your signal to give a command.
468 MULTIMEDIA
NOTE: If you do not say a command within a few seconds,
the system will present you with a list of options.
If you would like to interrupt the system while it lists
options, push the Voice Command
button, listen for
the beep, and say your command.
Pushing the Voice Command
button while the system
is speaking is known as “barging in.” The system will be
interrupted, and after the beep, you can add or change
commands. This will become helpful once you start to
learn the options.
NOTE: At any time, you can say the words “Cancel,”
“Help” or “Main Menu.”
These commands are universal and can be used from any
menu. All other commands can be used depending upon
the active application.
When using this system, you should speak clearly and at a
normal speaking volume.
The system will best recognize your speech if the windows
are closed, and the heater/air conditioning blower is set to
low.
At any point, if the system does not recognize one of your
commands, you will be prompted to repeat it.
To hear the first available Menu, push the Voice Command
button and say “Help” or “Main Menu.”
Commands
The Voice Command system understands two types of
commands, Universal commands and Local commands.
Universal commands are available at all times. Local
commands are available if the supported radio mode is
active.
Changing The Volume
1. Start a dialogue by pushing the Voice Command
but-
ton.
2. Say a command (e.g., “Help”).
3. Use the ON/OFF VOLUME rotary knob to adjust the
volume to a comfortable level while the Voice Com-
mand system is speaking. Please note the volume set-
ting for Voice Command is different than the audio
system.
10
MULTIMEDIA 469
Main Menu
Start a dialogue by pushing the Voice Command
but-
ton. You may say “Main Menu” to switch to the main
menu.
In this mode, you can say the following commands:
• “Radio AM” (to switch to the radio AM mode)
• “Radio FM” (to switch to radio FM mode)
• “Sat” (to switch to Satellite radio mode)
• “Disc” (to switch to the disc mode)
• “USB” (to switch to USB mode)
• “Bluetooth Streaming” (to switch to Bluetooth Stream-
ing mode)
• “Memo” (to switch to the memo recorder)
• “System Setup” (to switch to system setup)
Radio AM
To switch to the AM band, say “AM” or “Radio AM.” In
this mode, you may say the following commands:
• “Frequency #” (to change the frequency)
• “Next Station” (to select the next station)
• “Previous Station” (to select the previous station)
• “Radio Menu” (to switch to the radio menu)
• “Main Menu” (to switch to the main menu)
Radio FM
To switch to the FM band, say “FM” or “Radio FM.” In this
mode, you may say the following commands:
• “Frequency #” (to change the frequency)
• “Next Station” (to select the next station)
• “Previous Station” (to select the previous station)
• “Menu Radio” (to switch to the radio menu)
• “Main Menu” (to switch to the main menu)
Satellite Radio
To switch to satellite radio mode, say “Sat” or “Satellite
Radio.” In this mode, you may say the following com-
mands:
• “Channel Number” (to change the channel by its spoken
number)
• “Next Channel” (to select the next channel)
• “Previous Channel” (to select the previous channel)
470 MULTIMEDIA
• “List Channel” (to hear a list of available channels)
• “Select Name” (to say the name of a channel)
• “Menu Radio” (to switch to the radio menu)
• “Main Menu” (to switch to the main menu)
Disc Mode
To switch to the disc mode, say “Disc.” In this mode, you
may say the following commands:
• “Track” (#) (to change the track)
• “Next Track” (to play the next track)
• “Previous Track” (to play the previous track)
• “Main Menu” (to switch to the main menu)
USB Mode
To switch to USB mode, say “USB.” In this mode, you may
say the following commands:
• “Next Track” (to play the next track)
• “Previous Track” (to play the previous track)
• “Play” (to play an Artist Name, Playlist Name, Album
Name, Track Name, etc.)
Bluetooth Streaming (BT) Mode
To switch to Bluetooth Streaming (BT) mode, say
“Bluetooth Streaming.” In this mode, you may say the
following commands:
• “Play” (to play the current track)
• “Pause” (to pause the current track)
• “Next Track” (to play the next track)
• “Previous Track” (to play the previous track)
Memo Mode
To switch to the voice recorder mode, say “Memo.” In this
mode, you may say the following commands:
• “New Memo” (to record a new memo) — During the
recording, you may push the Voice Command
but-
ton to stop recording. You proceed by saying one of
the following commands:
– “Save” (to save the memo)
– “Continue” (to continue recording)
– “Delete” (to delete the recording)
10
MULTIMEDIA 471
• “Play Memos” (to play previously recorded memos) —
During the playback you may push the Voice Command
button to stop playing memos. You proceed by
saying one of the following commands:
– “Repeat” (to repeat a memo)
– “Next” (to play the next memo)
– “Previous” (to play the previous memo)
– “Delete” (to delete a memo)
– “Delete All” (to delete all memos)
Setup
To switch to system setup, you may say one of the
following:
• “Change to setup”
• “Switch to system setup”
• “Main menu setup”
• “Switch to setup”
In this mode, you may say the following commands:
• “Language English”
• “Language French”
• “Language Spanish”
• “Tutorial”
• “Voice Training”
NOTE: Keep in mind that you have to push the Voice
Command
button first and wait for the beep before
speaking the “Barge In” commands.
Voice Training
For users experiencing difficulty with the system recogniz-
ing their voice commands or numbers the Uconnect Voice
“Voice Training” feature may be used.
1. Push the Voice Command
button, say “System
Setup” and once you are in that menu then say “Voice
Training.” This will train your own voice to the
system and will improve recognition.
2. Repeat the words and phrases when prompted by
Uconnect Voice. For best results, the “Voice Training”
session should be completed when the vehicle is parked,
engine running, all windows closed, and the blower fan
switched off. This procedure may be repeated with a
new user. The system will adapt to the last trained voice
only.
472 MULTIMEDIA
CD/DVD DISC MAINTENANCE
To keep a CD/DVD in good condition, take the following
precautions:
• Handle the disc by its edge; avoid touching the surface.
• If the disc is stained, clean the surface with a soft cloth,
wiping from center to edge.
• Do not apply paper or tape to the disc; avoid scratching
the disc.
• Do not use solvents such as benzene, thinner, cleaners,
or anti-static sprays.
• Store the disc in its case after playing.
• Do not expose the disc to direct sunlight.
• Do not store the disc where temperatures may become
too high.
NOTE: If you experience difficulty in playing a particular
disc, it may be damaged (e.g., scratched, reflective coating
removed, a hair, moisture or dew on the disc), oversized, or
have protection encoding. Try a known good disc before
considering disc player service.
10
MULTIMEDIA 473
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE
CONTENTS
䡵 SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR
YOUR VEHICLE ........................476
▫ Prepare For The Appointment ..............476
▫ Prepare A List .........................476
▫ Be Reasonable With Requests ..............476
䡵 IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE ................476
▫ FCA US LLC Customer Center .............477
▫ FCA Canada Inc. Customer Center...........477
▫ In Mexico Contact ......................477
▫ Puerto Rico And U.S. Virgin Islands..........477
▫ Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Speech
Impaired (TDD/TTY) ....................477
▫ Service Contract .......................478
䡵 WARRANTY INFORMATION ...............479
䡵 MOPARPARTS .........................479
䡵 REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS .............479
▫ In The 50 United States And Washington, D.C. . .479
▫ In Canada ............................479
䡵 PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS .............479
11
SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR
YOUR VEHICLE
Prepare For The Appointment
If you are having warranty work done, be sure to have the
right papers with you. Take your warranty folder. All work
to be performed may not be covered by the warranty.
Discuss additional charges with the service manager. Keep
a maintenance log of your vehicle’s service history. This
can often provide a clue to the current problem.
Prepare A List
Make a written list of your vehicle’s problems or the
specific work you want done. If you’ve had an accident or
work done that is not on your maintenance log, let the
service advisor know.
Be Reasonable With Requests
If you list a number of items and you must have your
vehicle by the end of the day, discuss the situation with the
service advisor and list the items in order of priority. At
many authorized dealers, you may obtain a rental vehicle
at a minimal daily charge. If you need a rental, it is
advisable to make these arrangements when you call for an
appointment.
IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE
The manufacturer and its authorized dealer are vitally
interested in your satisfaction. We want you to be happy
with our products and services.
Warranty service must be done by an authorized dealer. We
strongly recommend that you take the vehicle to an autho-
rized dealer. They know your vehicle the best, and are most
concerned that you get prompt and high quality service.
The manufacturer’s authorized dealer have the facilities,
factory-trained technicians, special tools, and the latest
information to ensure the vehicle is fixed correctly and in a
timely manner.
This is why you should always talk to an authorized dealer
service manager first. Most matters can be resolved with
this process.
• If for some reason you are still not satisfied, talk to the
general manager or owner of the authorized dealer.
They want to know if you need assistance.
• If an authorized dealer is unable to resolve the concern,
you may contact the manufacturer’s customer center.
476 CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE
Any communication to the manufacturer’s customer center
should include the following information:
• Owner’s name and address
• Owner’s telephone number (home and office)
• Authorized dealer name
• Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
• Vehicle delivery date and mileage
FCA US LLC Customer Center
P.O. Box 21–8004
Auburn Hills, MI 48321–8004
Phone: (800) 423-6343
FCA Canada Inc. Customer Center
P.O. Box 1621
Windsor, Ontario N9A 4H6
Phone: (800) 465-2001 English / (800) 387-9983 French
In Mexico Contact
Av. Prolongacion Paseo de la Reforma, 1240
Sante Fe C.P. 05109
Mexico, D. F.
In Mexico City: 800-505-1300
Outside Mexico City: +(52)55 50817568
Puerto Rico And U.S. Virgin Islands
FCA Caribbean LLC
P.O. Box 191857
San Juan 00919-1857
Phone: (800) 423-6343
Fax: (787) 782-3345
Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Speech
Impaired (TDD/TTY)
To assist customers who have hearing difficulties, the
manufacturer has installed special TDD (Telecommunica-
tion Devices for the Deaf) equipment at its customer center.
Any hearing or speech impaired customer, who has access
to a TDD or a conventional teletypewriter (TTY) in the
United States, can communicate with the manufacturer by
dialing 1-800-380-CHRY.
11
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE 477
Canadian residents with hearing difficulties that require
assistance can use the special needs relay service offered by
Bell Canada. For TTY teletypewriter users, dial 711 and for
Voice callers, dial 1-800-855-0511 to connect with a Bell
Relay Service operator.
Service Contract
You may have purchased a service contract for a vehicle to
help protect you from the high cost of unexpected repairs
after the manufacturer’s New Vehicle Limited Warranty
expires. The manufacturer stands behind only the manu-
facturer’s service contracts. If you purchased a manufac-
turer’s service contract, you will receive Plan Provisions
and an Owner Identification Card in the mail within three
weeks of the vehicle delivery date. If you have any
questions about the service contract, call the manufactur-
er’s Service Contract National Customer Hotline at 1-800-
521-9922 (Canadian residents, call (800) 465-2001 English /
(800) 387-9983 French).
The manufacturer will not stand behind any service con-
tract that is not the manufacturer’s service contract. It is not
responsible for any service contract other than the manu-
facturer’s service contract. If you purchased a service
contract that is not a manufacturer’s service contract, and
you require service after the manufacturer’s New Vehicle
Limited Warranty expires, please refer to the contract
documents, and contact the person listed in those docu-
ments.
We appreciate that you have made a major investment
when you purchased the vehicle. An authorized dealer has
also made a major investment in facilities, tools, and
training to assure that you are absolutely delighted with
the ownership experience. You will be pleased with their
sincere efforts to resolve any warranty issues or related
concerns.
WARNING!
Engine exhaust (internal combustion engines only),
some of its constituents, and certain vehicle compo-
nents contain, or emit, chemicals known to the State of
California to cause cancer and birth defects, or other
reproductive harm. In addition, certain fluids con-
tained in vehicles and certain products of component
wear contain, or emit, chemicals known to the State of
California to cause cancer and birth defects, or other
reproductive harm.
478 CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE
WARRANTY INFORMATION
See the Warranty Information Booklet for the terms and
provisions of FCA US LLC warranties applicable to this
vehicle and market.
MOPAR PARTS
Mopar fluids, lubricants, parts, and accessories are avail-
able from an authorized dealer. They are recommended for
your vehicle in order to help keep the vehicle operating at
its best.
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS
In The 50 United States And Washington, D.C.
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect that could
cause a crash or cause injury or death, you should
immediately inform the National Highway Traffic
Safety Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying
FCA US LLC.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an
investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in
a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy
campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved
in individual problems between you, an authorized
dealer or FCA US LLC.
To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle Safety
Hotline toll free at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-9153);
or go to http://www.safercar.gov; or write to: Admin-
istrator, NHTSA, 1200 New Jersey Avenue, SE., West
Building, Washington, D.C. 20590. You can also obtain
other information about motor vehicle safety from
http://www.safercar.gov.
In Canada
If you believe that your vehicle has a safety defect, you
should contact the Customer Service Department imme-
diately. Canadian customers who wish to report a safety
defect to the Canadian government should contact
Transport Canada, Motor Vehicle Defect Investigations
and Recalls at 1-800-333-0510 or go to http://
www.tc.gc.ca/roadsafety/.
PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS
To order the following manuals, you may use either the
website or the phone numbers listed below. Visa, Master-
card, American Express, and Discover orders are accepted.
11
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE 479
Service Manuals
These comprehensive Service Manuals provide the infor-
mation that students and professional technicians need in
diagnosing/troubleshooting, problem solving, maintain-
ing, servicing, and repairing FCA US LLC vehicles. A
complete working knowledge of the vehicle, system,
and/or components is written in straightforward language
with illustrations, diagrams, and charts.
Diagnostic Procedure Manuals
Diagnostic Procedure Manuals are filled with diagrams,
charts and detailed illustrations. These practical manuals
make it easy for students and technicians to find and fix
problems on computer-controlled vehicle systems and fea-
tures. They show exactly how to find and correct problems
the first time, using step-by-step troubleshooting and driv-
ability procedures, proven diagnostic tests and a complete
list of all tools and equipment.
Owner’s Manuals
These Owner’s Manuals have been prepared with the
assistance of service and engineering specialists to acquaint
you with specific FCA US LLC vehicles. Included are
starting, operating, emergency and maintenance proce-
dures as well as specifications, capabilities and safety tips.
Call toll free at:
• 1-800-890-4038 (U.S.)
• 1-800-387-1143 (Canada)
Or
Visit us on the Worldwide Web at:
• www.techauthority.com (U.S.)
480 CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE
INDEX
12
About Your Brakes .........................380
Adding Engine Coolant (Antifreeze) .............345
Adding Fuel ..............................263
Adding Washing Fluid .......................334
Additives, Fuel ............................385
Adjust
Down .................................35
Forward ................................35
Rearward ...............................35
Up....................................35
AirBag .................................196
Air Bag Operation ........................198
Air Bag Warning Light .....................195
Driver Knee Air Bag ......................199
Enhanced Accident Response .............204, 326
Event Data Recorder (EDR) .................326
If Deployment Occurs .....................203
Knee Impact Bolsters ......................198
Maintaining Your Air Bag System .............206
Maintenance ............................206
Side Air Bags ...........................199
Transporting Pets ........................230
Air Bag Light.......................143, 195, 232
Air Cleaner, Engine (Engine Air Cleaner Filter)......337
Air Conditioner Maintenance ..................338
Air Conditioner Refrigerant ................338, 339
Air Conditioner System ......................338
Air Conditioning
Automatic Rear ...........................79
Rear ..................................72
Air Conditioning Filter ....................86, 339
Air Conditioning, Operating Tips ................85
Air Filter ................................337
Air Pressure
Tires..................................361
Alarm
Arm The System ..........................25
Disarm The System ........................25
Security Alarm ..........................147
Alterations/Modifications, Vehicle ................5
Antenna, Satellite Radio ......................412
Antifreeze
(Engine Coolant) ................344, 388
Disposal ...............................347
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) .................156
Anti-Lock Warning Light .....................147
Ashtray .................................119
Assistance Towing ..........................454
Assist, Hill Start ...........................158
Automatic Dimming Mirror ....................56
Automatic Door Locks........................28
482 INDEX
Automatic Headlights ........................61
Automatic Transmission ..................241, 350
Adding Fluid ........................350, 390
Fluid And Filter Change ...................350
Fluid Change ...........................350
Fluid Level Check .....................349, 350
Fluid Type ..........................349, 390
Gear Ranges ............................244
Special Additives .........................349
Torque Converter ........................249
Axle Fluid ...............................390
Axle Lubrication ...........................390
Battery...............................144, 334
Charging System Light ....................144
Jump Starting ...........................319
Keyless Key Fob Replacement ................18
Battery Saver Feature.........................63
Belts, Seat ................................232
Body Mechanism Lubrication ..................341
B-Pillar Location ...........................356
Brake Assist System .........................158
Brake Control System, Electronic................157
Brake Fluid ...............................390
Brake System ..........................348, 380
Anti-Lock (ABS) .........................380
Fluid Check .........................348, 390
Parking ...............................239
Warning Light ...........................143
Brake/Transmission Interlock ..................242
Bulb Replacement ..........................282
Bulbs, Light ...........................234, 282
Calibration
Compass ..............................136
Camera, Rear .............................261
Capacities, Fluid ...........................388
Caps, Filler
Oil (Engine) ............................333
Power Steering ..........................250
Radiator
(Coolant Pressure) .................346
Carbon Monoxide Warning ................231, 387
Cargo
Vehicle Loading ..........................95
Cargo Area Cover ...........................95
Cargo Compartment .........................95
Luggage Carrier .........................121
Car Washes...............................374
Cellular Phone .........................443, 466
Center High Mounted Stop Light ...............285
12
INDEX 483
Certification Label ..........................264
Chains, Tire ..............................370
Change Oil Indicator ........................134
Changing A Flat Tire .....................292, 350
Chart, Tire Sizing...........................352
Check Engine Light (Malfunction Indicator Light). . . .153
Checking Your Vehicle For Safety ...............231
Checks, Safety.............................231
Child Restraint ............................207
Child Restraints
Booster Seats ............................211
Child Seat Installation ..................223, 226
How To Stow An unused ALR Seat Belt ........221
Infant And Child Restraints .................209
Locating The LATCH Anchorages .............217
Lower Anchors And Tethers For Children .......213
Older Children And Child Restraints ...........210
Seating Positions .........................212
Using The Top Tether Anchorage .............228
Clean Air Gasoline .........................385
Cleaning
Wheels ................................369
Climate Control ............................68
Automatic ..............................75
Manual ................................68
Clock................................396, 403
Coat Hook ...............................112
Cold Weather Operation......................237
Compact Disc (CD) Maintenance................473
Compact Spare Tire .........................367
Compass.................................136
Calibration .............................136
Variance ...............................137
Computer, Trip/Travel....................135, 142
Console .................................104
Floor .................................104
Console, Overhead .........................107
Contract, Service ...........................478
Cooling Pr
essure Cap (Radiator Cap) ............346
Cooling System ............................344
Adding Coolant (Antifreeze) .................345
Cooling Capacity .........................388
Disposal Of Used Coolant ..................347
Drain, Flush, And Refill ....................344
Inspection ..............................344
Points To Remember ......................347
Pressure Cap ............................346
Radiator Cap ...........................346
Selection Of Coolant (Antifreeze) .......344, 388, 389
Corrosion Protection ........................374
484 INDEX
Cruise Light ...........................150, 151
Cupholders ...........................112,377
Customer Assistance ........................476
Cybersecurity .............................394
Daytime Brightness, Interior Lights...............66
Daytime Running Lights....................60, 61
Dealer Service .............................335
Defroster, Windshield........................232
Delay (Intermittent) Wipers ....................67
Diagnostic System, Onboard...................151
Dimmer Switch
Headlight ............................60, 61
Dipsticks
Automatic Transmission ....................350
Oil (Engine) ............................334
Power Steering ..........................250
Disable Vehicle Towing ......................325
Disposal
Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) .................347
Door Ajar ................................145
Door Ajar Light............................145
Door Locks
Automatic ..............................28
Doors....................................26
Driver’s Seat Back Tilt ........................32
Driving
Through Flowing, Rising, Or Shallow Standing
Water .................................278
DVD Player (Video Entertainment System).........422
E-85 Fuel ................................382
Economy (Fuel) Mode .......................243
Electrical Power Outlets ......................114
Electric Brake Control System ..................157
Anti-Lock Brake System ....................156
Electric Remote Mirrors .......................58
Electronic Brake Control System
Traction Control System ....................160
Electronic Speed Control (Cruise Control) .........251
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) ...............161
Electronic Throttle Control Warning Light .........145
Emergency, In Case Of
Freeing Vehicle When Stuck .................323
Hazard Warning Flasher ...................282
Jacking .........................292, 298,
350
Jump Starting ...........................319
Emission Control System Maintenance............153
Engine ..................................333
Air Cleaner .............................337
12
INDEX 485
Block Heater ............................238
Break-In Recommendations .................238
Checking Oil Level .......................334
Compartment ...........................333
Compartment Identification .................333
Coolant (Antifreeze) ......................389
Cooling ...............................344
Exhaust Gas Caution ...................231, 387
Fails To Start ............................238
Flooded, Starting .........................238
Oil ............................336, 388, 389
Oil Filler Cap ...........................333
Oil Filter ...............................337
Oil Selection .........................336, 388
Oil Synthetic ............................337
Overheating ............................323
Starting ...............................237
Engine Oil Viscosity.........................336
Engine Oil Viscosity Chart ....................336
Enhanced Accident Response Feature .........204, 326
Ethanol ..............................382, 385
Exhaust Gas Cautions ....................231, 387
Exhaust System ........................231, 342
Exterior Lighting............................60
Exterior Lights.......................60, 234, 282
Filters
Air Cleaner .............................337
Air Conditioning ......................86, 339
Engine Oil ..........................337, 389
Engine Oil Disposal .......................337
Flashers
Hazard Warning .........................282
Turn Signals ...................60, 151, 234, 284
Flash-To-Pass ............................60, 61
Flexible Fuel Vehicles
Cruising Range ..........................384
Engine Oil .............................383
Fuel Requir
ements ....................382, 383
Maintenance ............................384
Replacement Parts ........................384
Starting ...............................384
Flooded Engine Starting ......................238
Floor Console .............................104
Fluid, Brake ..............................390
Fluid Capacities............................388
Fluid Leaks...............................234
Fluid Level Checks
Automatic Transmission ....................350
486 INDEX
Brake .................................348
Power Steering ..........................250
Fluids And Lubricants .......................389
Fog Lights ..........................60, 62, 284
Fog Lights, Service .........................284
Fold-Flat Seats .............................32
Fold In Floor (Stow ‘n Go) Seating ...............39
Freeing A Stuck Vehicle ......................323
Fuel ....................................384
Adding ...............................263
Additives ..............................385
Clean Air ..............................385
Economy Mode ..........................243
Ethanol ............................382, 385
Flexible ...............................382
Gasoline ...............................384
Materials Added .........................385
Methanol ..............................385
Octane Rating ........................384, 389
Specifications ...........................389
Tank Capacity ...........................388
Fueling..................................263
Fuses ................................286, 287
Garage Door Opener (HomeLink)................96
Gasoline, Clean Air .........................385
Gasoline, (Fuel) ............................384
Gasoline, Reformulated ......................385
Gear Ranges ..............................244
Gear Selector Override.......................322
General Information.........................466
Glass Cleaning ............................377
Gross Axle Weight Rating.....................267
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating ...................266
GVWR ..................................264
Hands-Free Phone
Uconnect ..............................443
Hazard
Driving
Through Flowing, Rising, Or Shallow Standing
Water .................................278
Hazard Warning Flashers .....................282
Headlights ................................60
Automatic ..............................61
Bulb Replacement ........................283
Cleaning ...............................374
High Beam/Low Beam Select Switch .........60, 61
Lights On Reminder .....................60, 62
Passing ..............................60, 61
Replacing ..............................283
12
INDEX 487
Switch .................................60
Time Delay ...........................60, 62
Head Restraints ............................49
Heated Mirrors ..........................56, 59
Heated Seats...............................36
Heater, Engine Block ........................238
High Beam/Low Beam Select (Dimmer) Switch ......61
Hill Start Assist ............................158
Hitches
Trailer Towing ...........................268
HomeLink (Garage Door Opener)................96
Hood Prop ................................91
Hood Release ..............................91
Hook, Coat ...............................112
Ignition ..................................20
Switch .................................20
Inside Rearview Mirror .......................56
Instrument Cluster..........................128
Descriptions .........................129, 151
Display ...............................131
Display Controls .........................132
Menu Items ............................134
Instrument Panel Lens Cleaning ................377
Integrated Power Module (Fuses) ...............287
Interior And Instrument Lights..................63
Interior Appearance Care .....................376
Interior Lights..............................63
Intermittent Wipers (Delay Wipers)...............67
Introduction ................................4
Inverter
Power ................................118
iPod/USB/MP3 Control......................416
Bluetooth Streaming Audio ..............421, 471
Jack Location .............................293
Jack Operation .........................292, 350
Jump Starting .............................319
Key Fob
Arm The Alarm ..........................25
Disarm The Alarm ........................25
Programming Additional Key Fobs ..........20, 24
Key Fob Battery Service (Remote Keyless Entry) .....18
Key Fob Programming (Remote Keyless Entry) ......20
Keys ....................................17
Replacement .............................2
4
Lane Change And Turn Signals .................60
Lane Change Assist .......................60, 63
488 INDEX
Lap/Shoulder Belts .........................180
Latches..................................234
Hood ..................................91
Leaks, Fluid ..............................234
Life Of Tires ..............................364
Liftgate ..................................92
Closing ................................93
Opening ................................92
Light Bulbs ...............................234
Lights...................................234
AirBag.........................143, 195, 232
Automatic Headlights ......................61
Back-Up ...............................284
Battery Saver ............................63
Brake Assist Warning ......................163
Brake Warning ..........................143
Bulb Replacement ........................282
Center Mounted Stop ......................285
Cruise .............................150, 151
Daytime Running .......................60, 61
Dimmer Switch, Headlight ................60, 61
Engine Temperature Warning ................145
Exterior ...............................234
Fog................................62, 284
Hazard Warning Flasher ...................282
Headlights ...........................60, 283
Headlights On Reminder ....................62
High Beam ..............................61
High Beam/Low Beam Select ..............60, 61
Instrument Cluster ........................60
Interior ................................63
License ................................285
Lights On Reminder .....................60, 62
Malfunction Indicator (Check Engine) ..........148
Parade Mode (Daytime Brightness) .............66
Park ..............................151, 284
Passing ..............................60, 61
Reading ................................63
Rear Servicing ...........................284
Rear T
ail Lamps .........................284
Seat Belt Reminder .......................146
Security Alarm ..........................147
Service ................................282
Side Marker ............................284
Traction Control .........................163
Turn Signals ...................60, 151, 234, 284
Warning Instrument Cluster Descriptions . . . .145, 151
Loading Vehicle .........................95, 264
Tires..................................356
Load Leveling System ........................96
12
INDEX 489
Locks
Automatic Door ..........................28
Low Tire Pressure System.....................172
Lubrication, Body ..........................341
Luggage Carrier ...........................121
Lug Nuts ................................381
Maintenance Free Battery .....................334
Maintenance Schedule .......................329
Malfunction Indicator Light (Check Engine) . . . .148, 153
Manual, Service............................479
Map/Reading Lights .........................63
Media Hub ...............................416
Memory Feature (Memory Seats) ................32
Memory Seat ..............................32
Memory Seats And Radio .....................32
Methanol ................................385
Mini-Trip Computer .....................135, 142
Mirrors ................................56, 57
Automatic Dimming .......................56
Electric Remote ...........................58
Exterior Folding ..........................59
Heated ..............................56, 59
Outside ..............................56, 57
Rearview ...............................56
Vanity .................................59
Modifications/Alterations, Vehicle ................5
Monitor, Tire Pressure System..................172
Mopar Parts ..............................479
MP3 Control ..............................416
Multi-Function Control Lever ...................60
New Vehicle Break-In Period ..................238
Occupant Restraints.........................177
Octane Rating, Gasoline (Fuel) ..............384, 389
Oil Change Indicator
Reset .................................134
Oil, Engine............................336, 389
Capacity ...............................388
Change Interval .........................336
Checking ..............................334
Disposal ...............................337
Filter ..............................337, 389
Filter
Disposal ...........................337
Identification Logo .......................336
Materials Added To .......................337
Pressure Warning Light ....................146
Recommendation .....................336, 388
Synthetic ..............................337
490 INDEX
Viscosity ...........................336, 388
Oil Filter, Change ..........................337
Oil Filter, Selection..........................337
Oil Pressure Light ..........................146
Onboard Diagnostic System ...................151
Operating Precautions .......................151
Operator Manual (Owner’s Manual) ...............5
Outside Rearview Mirrors...................56, 57
Overhead Console ..........................107
Overhead Travel Information Center .............107
Overheating, Engine ........................323
Owner’s Manual (Operator Manual) ...........5,479
Paint Care................................374
Parking Brake .............................239
ParkSense System, Rear ......................254
Personal Settings ...........................138
Pets ....................................230
Phone, Hands-Free (Uconnect) .................443
Placard, Tire And Loading Information ...........356
Power
Brakes ................................380
Door Locks ..............................28
Inverter ...............................118
Mirrors ................................58
Outlet (Auxiliary Electrical Outlet) ............114
Seats ..................................34
Steering ...............................250
Vent Windows ...........................87
Power Seats
Down .................................35
Forward ................................35
Rearward ...............................35
Up....................................35
Pregnant Women And Seat Belts ................189
Preparation For Jacking ......................298
Pretensioners
Seat Belts ..............................190
Programmable Electronic Features...............138
Radial Ply Tires ............................362
Radiator Cap (Coolant Pressure Cap).............346
Radio 130
Operating Instr
uctions Auxiliary Mode .........401
Operating Instructions Radio Mode ............395
Radio 130 With Satellite Radio
Multimedia Satellite Radio ..................411
Operating Instructions Radio Mode ............402
Radio Frequency
General Information ..................20, 23, 24
12
INDEX 491
Radio Operation ........................414, 466
Radio Remote Controls ......................415
Rear Air Conditioning ........................72
Rear Camera ..............................261
Rear Cross Path............................170
Rear ParkSense System ......................254
Reclining Rear Seats .........................33
Recreational Towing.........................276
Reformulated Gasoline.......................385
Refrigerant ...............................339
Release, Hood..............................91
Reminder, Lights On .........................60
Reminder, Seat Belt .........................179
Remote Keyless Entry
Arm The Alarm ..........................25
Disarm The Alarm ........................25
Programming Additional Key Fobs ..........20, 24
Remote Starting
Exit Remote Start Mode .....................22
Replacement Bulbs .........................282
Replacement Keys ...........................24
Replacement Tires ..........................364
Reporting Safety Defects .....................479
Restraints, Child ...........................207
Restraints, Head ............................49
Rocking Vehicle When Stuck...................323
Roof Luggage Rack .........................121
Rotation, Tires.............................371
Safety Checks Inside Vehicle...................232
Safety Checks Outside Vehicle .................234
Safety Defects, Reporting .....................479
Safety, Exhaust Gas .........................231
Safety Information, Tire ......................350
Safety Tips ...............................231
Satellite Radio Antenna ......................412
Satellite Radio (Uconnect Studios) ...............402
Schedule, Maintenance.......................329
Seat Belt Maintenance .......................376
Seat Belt Reminder .........................146
Seat Belts .............................178,
232
Adjustable Shoulder Belt ...................184
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Anchorage .........184
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage ......184
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) ...........190
Child Restraints .........................207
Energy Management Feature ................190
Extender ...............................189
Front Seat .......................178, 180, 182
Inspection ..............................232
492 INDEX
Lap/Shoulder Belt Operation ................182
Lap/Shoulder Belts .......................180
Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting ...............184
Operating Instructions .....................182
Pregnant Women .........................189
Pretensioners ...........................190
Rear Seat ..............................180
Reminder ..............................179
Seat Belt Extender ........................189
Seat Belt Pretensioner .....................190
Untwisting Procedure .....................184
Seats ...............................32, 35, 37
Adjustment ...........................32, 35
Heated ..............................36, 37
Power .................................34
Rear Folding .............................32
Reclining ...............................33
Seatback Release ..........................32
Stow ‘n Go (Fold in Floor) ...................39
Tilting .................................32
Security Alarm ............................147
Arm The System ..........................25
Disarm The System ........................25
Selection Of Coolant (Antifreeze) ...............389
Sentry Key
Key Programming .........................24
Sentry Key (Immobilizer) ......................23
Sentry Key Replacement ......................24
Service Assistance ..........................476
Service Contract ...........................478
Service Manuals ...........................479
Settings
Personal ...............................138
Setting The Clock .......................396, 403
Shift Lever Override ........................322
Shoulder Belts.............................180
Side View Mirror Adjustment...................56
Signals, Turn.....................60, 151, 234, 284
Snow Chains (Tire Chains) ....................370
Snow Tires ...............................366
Spare
Tires .....................296, 367, 368, 369
Spark Plugs ..............................389
Specifications
Fuel (Gasoline) ..........................389
Oil...................................389
Speed Control
Accel/Decel ............................253
Cancel ................................254
Resume ...............................254
12
INDEX 493
Speed Control (Cruise Control) .................251
Starting .................................237
Button .................................20
Cold Weather ...........................237
Engine Fails To Start ......................238
Starting And Operating ......................237
Starting Procedures .........................237
Steering
Power ................................250
Tilt Column .............................54
Wheel, Heated .........................54, 55
Wheel, Tilt ..............................54
Steering Wheel Audio Controls .................415
Steering Wheel Mounted Sound System Controls . . . .415
Storage ..................................103
Storage Bin ...............................103
Storage, Vehicle .........................86, 373
Storing Your Vehicle ........................373
Stow ‘n Go (Fold In Floor) Seats .................39
Stuck, Freeing .............................323
Sunglasses Storage..........................119
Supplemental Restraint System – Air Bag..........196
Sway Control, Trailer ........................164
Synthetic Engine Oil ........................337
Telescoping Steering Column ...................54
Tilt Steering Column .........................54
Time Delay
Headlight ...............................60
Tire And Loading Information Placard............356
Tire Markings .............................351
Tires..........................234, 359, 367, 372
Aging (Life Of Tires) ......................364
Air Pressure ............................359
Chains ................................370
Changing ...........................292, 350
Compact Spare ..........................367
General Information ...................359, 367
High Speed .............................361
Inflation Pressure ........................361
Jacking .........................292, 298,
350
Life Of Tires ............................364
Load Capacity .......................356, 357
Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) ........149, 172
Quality Grading .........................372
Radial ................................362
Replacement ............................364
Rotation ...............................371
Safety .............................350, 359
Sizes .................................352
494 INDEX
Snow Tires .............................366
Spare Tires ...................296, 367, 368, 369
Spinning ...............................363
Trailer Towing ...........................272
Tread Wear Indicators .....................363
Wheel Nut Torque ........................381
Tire Safety Information.......................350
Tire Service Kit ............................308
Tongue Weight/Trailer Weight .................270
To Open Hood .............................91
Torque Converter Clutch .....................249
Towing ..................................266
24-Hour Towing Assistance .................454
Disabled Vehicle .........................325
Guide .................................269
Recreational ............................276
Weight ................................269
Towing Assistance ..........................454
Towing Vehicle Behind A Motorhome ............276
Traction .................................277
Traction Control ...........................160
Trailer Sway Control (TSC) ....................164
Trailer Towing.............................266
Cooling System Tips ......................275
Hitches ................................268
Minimum Requirements ....................270
Tips ..................................274
Trailer And Tongue Weight ..................270
Wiring ................................273
Trailer Towing Guide ........................269
Trailer Weight .............................269
Transfer Case
Fluid .................................390
Transmission
Automatic ..........................241, 349
Fluid ..............................349, 390
Maintenance ............................349
Transporting
Pets ..........................230
Tread Wear Indicators .......................363
Turn Signals ........................60, 151, 284
Uconnect
Advanced Phone Connectivity ...............456
Phone Call Features .......................450
Uconnect (Hands-Free Phone)..................443
Uconnect Phone ...........................452
Umbrella Holder ...........................109
Uniform Tire Quality Grades ..................372
Universal Garage Door Opener (HomeLink) ........96
Universal Transmitter ........................96
12
INDEX 495
Untwisting Procedure, Seat Belt ................184
USB....................................416
Vanity Mirrors .............................59
Variance
Compass ..............................137
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) .............380
Vehicle Loading ........................264, 357
Vehicle Modifications/Alterations.................5
Vehicle Storage..........................86, 373
Viscosity, Engine Oil ........................336
Voice Command
Commands .............................469
System Operation ........................468
Voice Training ...........................472
Voice Recognition System (VR) .................468
Warning Flashers, Hazard ....................282
Warning Lights (Instrument Cluster Descriptions). . . .147
Warnings And Cautions .......................5
Warranty Information .......................479
Washer
Adding Fluid ...........................334
Washers, Windshield .........................66
Washing Vehicle ...........................374
Water
Driving Through .........................278
Wheel And Wheel Tire Care ...................369
Wheel And Wheel Tire Trim ...................369
Window Fogging ...........................86
Windows .................................87
Rear Vent ...............................87
Windshield Defroster ........................232
Windshield Washers ......................66, 334
Windshield Wiper Blades .....................342
Wipers Blade Replacement ....................342
Wipers, Intermittent .........................67
496 INDEX
VEHICLES SOLD IN CANADA
With respect to any Vehicles Sold in Canada, the name
FCA US LLC shall be deemed to be deleted and the name
FCA Canada Inc. used in substitution therefore.
DRIVING AND ALCOHOL
Drunken driving is one of the most frequent causes of
accidents.
Your driving ability can be seriously impaired with blood
alcohol levels far below the legal minimum. If you are
drinking, don’t drive. Ride with a designated non-
drinking driver, call a cab, a friend, or use public trans-
portation.
WARNING!
Driving after drinking can lead to an accident.
Your perceptions are less sharp, your reflexes are
slower, and your judgment is impaired when you
have been drinking. Never drink and then drive.
This manual illustrates and describes the operation of
features and equipment that are either standard or op-
tional on this vehicle. This manual may also include a
description of features and equipment that are no longer
available or were not ordered on this vehicle. Please
disregard any features and equipment described in this
manual that are not on this vehicle.
FCA US LLC reserves the right to make changes in design
and specifications, and/or make additions to or improve-
ments to its products without imposing any obligation
upon itself to install them on products previously manu-
factured.
Copyright © 2018 FCA US LLC
INSTALLATION OF RADIO TRANSMITTING
EQUIPMENT
Special design considerations are incorporated into this
vehicle’s electronic system to provide immunity to radio
frequency signals. Mobile two-way radios and telephone
equipment must be installed properly by trained person-
nel. The following must be observed during installation.
The positive power connection should be made directly
to the battery and fused as close to the battery as possible.
The negative power connection should be made to body
sheet metal adjacent to the negative battery connection.
This connection should not be fused.
Antennas for two-way radios should be mounted on the
roof or the rear area of the vehicle. Care should be used
in mounting antennas with magnet bases. Magnets may
affect the accuracy or operation of the compass on
vehicles so equipped.
The antenna cable should be as short as practical and
routed away from the vehicle wiring when possible. Use
only fully shielded coaxial cable.
Carefully match the antenna and cable to the radio to
ensure a low Standing Wave Ratio (SWR).
Mobile radio equipment with output power greater than
normal may require special precautions.
All installations should be checked for possible interfer-
ence between the communications equipment and the
vehicle’s electronic systems.
WARNING:
Operating, servicing and maintaining a
passenger vehicle or off-road highway
motor vehicle can expose you to chemicals
including engine exhaust, carbon monoxide,
phthalates, and lead, which are known to
the State of California to cause cancer and
birth defects or other reproductive harm.
To minimize exposure, avoid breathing
exhaust, do not idle the engine except as
necessary, service your vehicle in a
well-ventilated area and wear gloves or
wash your hands frequently when servicing
your vehicle. For more information go to
www.P65Warnings.ca.gov/passenger-vehicle.
DID_3635964_18d_Dodge_Grand_Caravan_EN_070318.indd 2 7/3/2018 10:02:07 AM
Grand Caravan
OWNER’S MANUAL
Fourth Edition
Printed in the U.S.A.
18RT-126-AD
©2017 FCA US LLC. All Rights Reserved.
Dodge is a registered trademark of FCA US LLC.
2018
Grand Caravan
2018
DID_3635964_18d_Dodge_Grand_Caravan_EN_070318.indd 1 7/3/2018 10:02:07 AM
